Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Specifications (3)
s � Submittal #11115-1 .4 CleanWater Services 11115 - HORIZONTAL END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS i Clean Water Services I " ' i l Project:6757- DM Secondary Train 5 Expansion 16060 SW 85th Ave WO `_ t \ T . 16060 SW 85th Ave Tigard,Oregon 97224 WORM d Tigard,Oregon 97224 Phone:(503)547-8150 ION ^v . -7 01 8-000 S-) Phone:5035478150 VIS Distribution Summary Distributed on 07/3/2019 by Rebecca Reilly-Lott(Black&Veatch) To: Dan Garbely(CWS-Durham AWWTF),Kyle Hansen (McClure and Sons Inc) ,Rob Bechtloff(McClure and Sons Inc),Sean Coris(Black&Veatch), Dave Clements (Black& Veatch),Theresa Jones (Black&Veatch), Rebecca Reilly-Lott(Black&Veatch) ,Isidro DeAllende (Black&Veatch),Patrick Renfrew(McClure and Sons Inc),Stan Orr(McClure and Sons Inc),Jason Jarmin (McClure and Sons Inc) Message: None Additional Attachments: NAME RESPONSE ATTACHMENTS COMMENT Dave Clements(Black&Veatch) Make Corrections Contractor shall edit the submitted motor data Noted sheets as follows: a)Add the equipment tag part number as indicated in section 11115.1-1 and drawings E602 and E603. b)Add the specification number of the driven equipment. Horizontal End Centrifugal Pumps REVISION: 4 SUBMITTAL MANAGER: Dave Clements(Black&Veatch) STATUS: Closed DATE CREATED: 06/18/2019 ISSUE DATE: 06/18/2019 SPEC SECTION: 11115-HORIZONTAL END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS RESPONSIBLE McClure and Sons Inc RECEIVED FROM: Patrick Renfrew CONTRACTOR: RECEIVED DATE: SUBMIT BY: FINAL DUE DATE: 07/9/2019 LOCATION: RAS/WAS PS COST CODE: TYPE: Product Information APPROVERS: Dave Clements(Black&Veatch),Moe Khorsandian (Clean Water Services), Pat Orr(CWS-Rock Creek AWWTF),Kurt Reichert(CWS-Durham AWWTF),Randy Robbins(CWS-Durham AWWTF),Tonya Zinzer(CWS-Durham AWWTF),Dave Clements(Black&Veatch), Dan Garbely(CWS-Durham AWWTF) BALL IN COURT: DISTRIBUTION: Rob Bechtloff(McClure and Sons Inc),Dave Clements(Black&Veatch),Isidro DeAllende(Black&Veatch), Dan Garbely(CWS-Durham AWWTF),Sean Goris(Black&Veatch),Kyle Hansen(McClure and Sons Inc),Theresa Jones(Black&Veatch),Rebecca Reilly-Lott(Black& Veatch),Patrick Renfrew(McClure and Sons Inc) DESCRIPTION: Clean Water Services Page 1 of 2 Printed On: 10/29/2020 10:28 AM Submittal #11115-1 .4 CleanWater Services 11115 - HORIZONTAL END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS SUBMITTAL WORKFLOW NAME SENT DATE DUE DATE RETURNED RESPONSE ATTACHMENTS COMMENTS DATE 11115.1 -0605223SR3 Side Stream RAS Pumps 465P1903& 465P1904.pdf Please see the attached 11115.1 -0605224SR3 Drainage revised submittal for your Jason Jarmin 06/18/2019 06/18/2019 Submitted Pump 470P8101.pdf review and approval. 11115.1 -0605222SR3 RAS Pumps 465P1901,465P1902.pdf 11115.1 -0605225SR3 Drainage Pump 470P8102.pdf Dave Clements 06/18/2019 06/20/2019 06/20/2019 In Review For Record Moe Khorsandian 06/20/2019 07/02/2019 07/03/2019 Only No Pat Orr 06/20/2019 07/02/2019 07/02/2019 Exceptions Taken No Kurt Reichert 06/20/2019 07/02/2019 06/27/2019 Exceptions Taken No Randy Robbins 06/20/2019 07/02/2019 07/02/2019 Exceptions Taken No 11115-1.4 Centrifugal End Suction MZ—No Exceptions Tonya Zinzer 06/20/2019 07/02/2019 06/27/2019 Exceptions Taken 6/25/2019 Taken Pumps Comments.docx (Current) KR—No comments Contractor shall edit the submitted motor data sheets as follows: Make a)Add the equipment tag Dave Clements 07/03/2019 07/09/2019 07/03/2019 Corrections part number as indicated in section 11115.1-1 and Noted drawings E602 and E603. b)Add the specification number of the driven equipment. Dan Garbely 07/03/2019 07/09/2019 Pending BY DATE COPIES TO Clean Water Services Page 2 of 2 Printed On: 10/29/2020 10:28 AM + PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS' June 12, 2019 McClure and Sons, Inc. 15714 County Club Drive Mill Creek, WA 98012 Attn: Jon Varriano Subject: Purchase Order Number: 3305-112 Sales Order Number: 51830512 Project: CWS Durham WWTP 0605223 Jon: The revised submittal data for the above order is attached. This revised submittal is for your review and approval prior to release for manufacturing. We require submittal return with your review comments and/or approval to release within 35 days for production scheduling purposes. At time of release, please advise firm "on-site" requirement dates for this equipment. Very Truly Yours, Specifications Department Pentair Flow Technologies Return Submittal to: Harley Alt Project Manager cc: Enclosures: (1) pdf submittal 3601 Fairbanks Ave. • P.O. Box 6999 • Kansas City,Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • Fax: 913-748-4025 Pentair Flow Technologies General Clarifications 1. The supply and installation of the following items are by others unless otherwise identified in this submittal. • Anchor bolts, nuts and washers • Gauges, valves and miscellaneous fittings and adapters. • Connecting piping and/or supports • Maintenance lubrication piping and related equipment. • System control apparatus • Maintenance tools and/or storage boxes. • Equipment tags • Installation or field performance testing. 2. The following information is required by Pentair Flow Technologies prior to or at release of the pumps to production. • Verification of rotation and discharge position. Fairbanks Nijhuis Submittal Data For CWS Durham WWTP Tigard, OR Supplier: McClure and Sons, Inc. 15714 County Club Drive Mill Creek, WA 98012 Manufacturer: Pump: Fairbanks Nijhuis 3601 Fairbanks Ave. Kansas City, Kansas 66106-0906 (913) 371-5000 Fax: (913) 748-4025 Project Number: 0605223 Sales Order Number: 51830512 Service: Side Stream RAS Tag: 465P1903 &465P1904 Quantity: 2 Pump Size & Model: 6" B5423 Coupling: Rexnord Corp. 1217 Corporate Dr. Arlington, TX. 76006 (817)640-3332 Motor: U S Electrical Motors P. O. Box 3946 St. Louis, MO 63136 (314)553-2000 0605223SR3.doc Fairbanks Nijhuis Table of Contents Pump: Response to Comments Dated January 21, 2019 1 Page Response to Comments Dated December 05, 2018 1 Page Response to Comments Dated November 14, 2018 1 Page Response to Comments Dated September 6, 2018 3 Pages Included Features IF-5420 Technical Clarifications C&E-5000 Test Procedure 3 Pages Test Set Up Drawing 0605223TS Performance Curve 0605223CR2 Setting Plan 0605223SP Material Specifications ML-5420 Assembly Drawings 0605223APR1 Full Data Nameplate 0605223NP Pump Technical Data TD-5420 Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 4 Pages Rotor Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 5 Pages Seismic Analysis of Anchor Bolts 10 Pages Shaft Deflection Calculations 1 Page Typical Lubricants GR-1000 Bearing Life Calculations 1 Page Chesterton S10 Mechanical Seal 6 Pages Spiral Trac Bushing 2 Pages Inpro Seal 4 Pages Paint Specifications PC-1000 Coupling Rexnord Omega 2 Pages Driver Data Sheet 1 Page Performance Data FM013 Certification &Accessory Data FM015 Dimensions 08-1014-01 Outlet Boxes 80-275 Bearing Life Calculation 1 Page Curves 1 Page Nameplate 2 Pages Lubrication 2 Pages Silicone Rubber Space Heaters 2 Pages Connection Diagram 970798 Klixon Miniature Protector 2 Pages Connection Diagram 834066 AEGIS Bearing Protection Ring 2 Pages Paint Specifications 3 Pages Wiring Diagram 499495 0605223SR3.doc 0605223 Response to Submittal Comments Dated January 21, 2019 1. Comment: Contractor shall submit completed motor data sheets that conform to the data sheet in the appendix of section 16222. Blank data sheets are not acceptable. Response: This is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor to respond. 2. Comment: Change impeller fasteners to stainless steel in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide stainless steel impeller fasteners. Please see the revised material page. 3. Comment: Change seal to Chesterton S10 mechanical seal with Spiraltrac bushing in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide the Chesterton S10 mechanical seal with a Spiral Trac bushing. Please see the revised submittal. 4. Comment: Change to grease-lubricated Inpro seals for pump frame in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide Inpro seals. Please see the revised submittal 5. Comment: Change couplings to Rexnord Omega couplings in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide the Rexnord Omega couplings. Please see the revised submittal. 0605223 Response to Submittal Comments Dated December 05, 2018 1. Comment: Submit Aegis bearing protection rings for the following motors:465P1903, 465P1904 & 470P8102 for consistency on the manufacture for all bearing protection rings. Response: Aegis bearing protection ring data has been added to the motor submittal. Please see the revised motor submittal. 2. Comment: Contractor shall submit motor data sheets that conform to the data sheet in the appendix of section 16222. Response: Motor Data Sheet has been added to the revised motor submittal. 3. Comment: Motor nameplates shall indicate compliance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31 for inverter duty motors per section 16222.2.02.9.a.1. Response: Motor nameplate will be marked NEMA MG-1, Part 31 compliant. This has been noted on the accessory data page of the revised motor submittal. 4. Comment: 470P8101 - Confirm shaft deflection does not exceed 2 mils at any point in the operating range. Revise H to 90 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 126) Response: Confirmation on shaft deflection not exceeding 2 mils throughout the operating range. H cannot be revised to 90 ft at the rated flow due to insignificant impeller diameter. 90 ft is shown within the AOR but at a different flow rate. 5. Comment: 470P8102-Confirm shaft deflection does not exceed 2 mils at any point in the operating range. Revise H to 38 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 296) Response: Confirmation on shaft deflection not exceeding 2 mils throughout the operating range. H cannot be revised to 38 ft at the rated flow due to insignificant impeller diameter. 38 ft is shown within the AOR but at a different flow rate. 0605223 Response to Submittal Comments Dated November 14, 2018 1. Comment: Motor nameplate data, Page 61 -Verify in writing if motor is Inverter Duty and labeled per 16222 2.02 C 2. -A&R Response: This was included in the original submittal and was overlooked. Project Engineer was reviewed the information with Granich. 2. Comment: Motor nameplate data, Page 61, 125, 254 - Motor power factor shall be 80% or better at full rated load. -A&R Response: A power factor of 80, on this size/speed of motor is not available from any motor brand. GE's version has a lower power factor than US Motors. Project Engineer has reviewed the information with Granich and has accepted the motor as-is. 3. Comment: All motors on VFD shall have shaft-grounding rings, and shall be inverter duty. -A&R Response: The project Engineer has reviewed the information with and has accepted the motor as- is. 4. Comment: 465P1901, 1902- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. No clarifications or questions were responded to during the bid phase that modified these requirements. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. This requirement has been waived. 5. Comment: 465P1901, 1902, 1903, 1904 - It is not acceptable to overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. Project Engineer is in agreement that the motor should never see an overload condition. This issue has been resolved. 6. Comment: 465P8101 - Using the service factor of the motor is not acceptable for reaching the low point in the head range at full speed. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. This issue has been resolved 7. Comment: 465P1901, 1902 - Does not meet the specified operating head range of 11 to 17ft at full speed. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. -A&R Response: FN has revised the curves. Please see revised curve in the revised submittal. 0100 PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS- 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City, KS 66106 PH: 913-371-5000 September 20, 2018 McClure & Sons, Inc. Attn: Jason Jarmin Ref: CWS Durham Phase 5 Expansion - End Suction Pumps Submittal Review Dated 9/6/18 FN Project Number(s): 0605222-25 Mr. Jarmin: Please see our responses to the comments we received via email on 9/6/18. 1. Motors shall be seismic rated as specified in 16222-1 .07-A. FN Response: The motors provided are not seismic; there aren't any seismic rated motors commercially available to provide for the motor/pump assembly. 2. Nameplate shall be stainless steel per NEMA standard motor data. FN Response: Stainless steel nameplates will be provided. 3. Confirm that the vibration of the pumping units will meet the requirements specified under Section 1 1 1 1 5-1-5.01. FN Response: Confirmed, the vibration will meet the Hydraulic Institute standard. 4. Is Fairbanks/Pentair including a witness test in the scope? FN Response: A witness performance test is included with our scope. 5. 465P 1901, 1902- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The shutoff head will be as plotted. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 6. 465P1902, 1902- Does not meet the specified operating head range of 11 to 17 ft at full speed. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605222CR1). A reduced speed has been plotted to show performance at the low head range. At full speed, the low head condition point is outside of the AOR and/or would overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. 7. 465P1902, 1902-Minimum efficiency is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The efficiency is as guaranteed on the submittal curve. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 8. 465P8101 - Pump at full speed does not appear to hit 56 ft TDH. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605224CR1). The service factor of the motor will be used to reach the low point in the head range at full speed. 9. 465P8101 - Maximum shaft deflection exceeds specified 2 mils by a significant margin. Not acceptable. FN Response: Please see the attached revised deflection calculations (0605224SDR1). A value of deflection at the seal box has been added and meets the specification. 10. 465P8101 - Revise H to 90 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 83) FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605224CR1). 90 feet is achievable at full speed and is within the AOR. 11. 465P1903, 1904- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The shut off head will be as plotted. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 12. 465P1903, 1904- Operating head range of 11 to 17 ft at full speed is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet lift at run out. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605223CR1). A reduced speed has been plotted to show performance at the low head range. At full speed, the low head condition point is outside of the AOR and/or would overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. 13. 465P8102-Maximum shaft deflection exceeds specified 2 mils. Not acceptable. FN Response: Please see the attached revised deflection calculations (0605225SDR1). A value of deflection at the seal box has been added and meets the specification. 14. 465P81012- Revise H to 38 ft-upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 211) FN Response: Please see the attached curve 0605225CR0. 38 feet is achievable at full speed and is within the AOR. 2 If you have any further questions, please do not hesitate to contact me at (913) 748- 4108 or via email at harley.alt@pentair.com. Sincerely, Harley Alt Project Manager Pentair Flow Technologies cc: J. Eaves, Pentair K. Hogan, Granich J. Hayes, Granich Attach: 0605223CR1, 0605222CR1, 0605224CR1, 0605225CR0, 0605224SDR1, 0605225SDR 1 3 Fairbanks Nijhuis Included Features • Variable Speed Operation • Rotation: Counter Clockwise • Discharge Position: #9 • Dynamically Balanced Impeller to G6.3 • High Chrome Cast Iron on Casing, Casing Cover and Impeller • Stainless Steel Impeller Fasteners • Stainless Steel Impeller Wear Ring • Stainless Steel Casing Wear Ring • Stainless Steel Shaft Sleeve • Structural Steel Base • Rexnord Omega Coupling • Chesterton S10 Mechanical Seal • Spiral Trac Bushing • Inpro Seals • Lifting Eyes • Lateral Critical Speed Analysis • Torsional Critical Speed Analysis • Seismic Analysis of Anchor Bolts • Shaft Deflection Calculations • Bearing Life Calculations • Certified Witness Performance Test • Certified Non-Witness Hydraulic Test at 1.5 x Shutoff Head Plus Maximum Suction Pressure (7psi) • Curve Approval Required Prior to Shipment • 15 Day Notice Prior to Performance Test • Holiday Testing on Coating • Film Thickness, Spark&Adhesion Testing on Coating • SHP, 900RPM, 3/60/460V, Inverter Duty Motor 0605223SR3.doc IF-5420 Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Clarifications & Exceptions 1. (01610#11)Anchor bolts are not in FN's Scope of Supply and shall be provided by others. 2. (01610#12) In lieu of a drip tray, the pump is supplied with a back head, which includes an integral cast reservoir to collect leakage. This reservoir is tapped to allow connection of customer supplied drain piping. FN requests approval of the exception. 3. (11115, 2-2) Minimum shutoff head will be 25' in lieu of 29'. Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Clarifications& Exceptions 1. (16222 1.05 D.5; 107 A) Motors are not seismic rated. 2. (16222 2.02 A 9.a.1) Nameplate shall be stainless steel per Nidec standard offering with laser etched letters. 0605223SR3.doc C&E-5000 ►►► PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS' TEST PROCEDURE FOR CENTRIFUGAL TYPE PUMPS Model: 6" B5423 Project Number: 0605223 Quantity of Pumps to Test: Two (2) GENERAL INFORMATION: Tests will be conducted to assure pump performance meets the requirements of sold conditions, as shown on the previously proposed submittal curve. Tests will be conducted at the original manufacturer's factory, located in Kansas City, Kansas. Data points (at least eight) will be taken to assure that a performance curve has been sufficiently established. For each pump being test, a certified curve will be plotted on an 8-1/2" x 11" sheet of paper and submit to the customer soon thereafter. Measurements will be taken using calibrated equipment and the values of each measurement will be determined as follows: PRESSURE HEAD (FEET) The total head will be the summation of the discharge pressure transducer reading, plus or minus the suction pressure transducer (or suction manometer), plus or minus the vertical distance between the gauge zero reference points and any velocity head correction when gauge taps are located on different pipe inside diameters. FLOW RATE (GPM) The flow rate will be measured with a differential pressure transducer used in conjunction with a venturi meter. Differential head will then be used to derive the flow in terms of GPM by using the constant established from the venturi's calibration data. HORSEPOWER(BHP) The power input to the motor will be measured with a digital power analyzer. Drive motor efficiencies will then be used to convert this measurement to horsepower. SPEED (RPM) The rotational speed will be determined by means of a calibrated, electronic tachometer. EFFICIENCY(%) From the previously obtained values for horsepower, total head, and flow rate, efficiency will be calculated for each individually run test. 3601 Fairbanks Avenue • PO Box 6999 • Kansas City, Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • FAX:913-371-2272 SPECIFIC REMARKS: • Customer witnessed certified factory performance test utilizing Acceptance Grade 1 U per ANSI/HI 14.6. • 0%to 10% flow rate at rated head • 0%to 6%head at rated flow • Pump(s)will be tested with job motor. • 15 day notification given prior to factory tests. • Curve approval is required prior to shipment. • A copy of a sample pump test log is attached. • A copy of the test set-up is attached PUMP TEST STANDARDS: Pump tests meet the following standards: Hydraulic Institute Test Standards—latest edition American Water Works Association—latest edition -4 Certified by: L.AJk Billy Faltas Product Engineer Date: August 3, 2018 3601 Fairbanks Avenue • PO Box 6999 • Kansas City,Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • FAX:913-371-2272 Test Location of Test Customer: '► P E N TA I R FA I R BA N KS N I J H U I S WI Kansas City Water Temperature End User: Model: Impeller Information Guaranteed Performance Series: Impeller: Flow Head Power Efficiency Barometric Pressure Sales No. Proj. No. Serial No. Retest No. Application: Diameter Quantity Underfile Material (GPM) (ft) (HP) (/) Stages: Guaranteed Head Tested By Witnessed By Rotation: Running Pos: Guaranteed Efficiency Date: Date: Bowl Coat: Design: Surface: Measured Values Calculated Performance (at RPM) Pressure at Suction Venturi Power Head Velocity Flow Discharge Lift Apressure Volts Amps Power Factor Speed Loss Head Rate Head Power Efficiency Comments (ft) (ft) (ft) (V) (A) (kW) (%) (RPM) (ft) (ft) ll (GPM) (ft) (HP) (c/o)! (1) (2) J (3) 1 [ (4) [ (7) J ._ (5) 1 [ (6) [ (8) J (16) J ( (9) [ (10) (11) (12) [ (13) J Explanation I(1)Discharge gauge head reading (2)Suction gauge head reading;(Distance between water level and CL of discharge gauge for Column type,Negative sign used when there is positive suction head) (3) Feet of water across the venturi meter (4)Volt reading from the power meter \\* (5)K.W.reading from the power meter . 0 (6)Power factor reading from the power meter (7)Amp reading from the power meter (8)RPM Tachometer from the pump shaft (9)V2/2g at the discharge tap-V2/2g at the suction tap(0 for submerge impeller type/no suction gauge) 14 (10) Flow:Square root of the Venturi Delta P*The Venturi Constant K((/(3)*(14)) (11)Total Head((1)+(2)+(9) +(16)) 0 VIO (12)Horsepower,calculated from motor efficiencies(15)and KW reading. (13)Pump Efficiency: (GPM x TDH)/(39.60 X BHP) (14)Venturi Constant (15)Motor efficiencies (16)Head losses due to column,lineshafting,and discharge head (Used for calculating bowl performance) 1.140 Suction Inner Diameter Discharge Inner Diameter Suction Transducer Discharge Transducer Venturi Venturi K Venturi Transducer Submerg. Dist. Btwn Gauges 0 (14) Details of O Motor Used for Test Motor Efficiency Full Load Speed: Power Analyzer Horsepower Nom.Speed Shaft Config. Serial Number 1/4 Load 1/2 Load 3/4 Load Full Load 5/4 Load Max Allowable HP: Serial Number (15) (15) 1 (15) ] Service Factor: 1.15 j POWER METER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER 6" SUCTION n - I 4- '.--1 r _ 1 . ._ -j L I I I PRESSURE TRANSDUCER ��� JOB MOTOR SC300 I SIGNAL • CONDITIONER DIFFERENTIAL 6" DISCHARGE TRANSDUCER I -1 I 1 I 0 _ iF---)-) 6" x 3.344" 6" PIPE 6" GATE VALVE VENTURI METER NOTES: •:›PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 1. DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE. 2. GAUGE LOCATIONS AND PIPE DISTANCES BEFORE THE VENTURI METER 0605223 ARE PER HYDRAULIC INSTITUDE STANDARDS LATEST EDITION. TEST SET— UP roc. 0605223TS INo o 6" B5423 Submittal Curve ►.:› PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS" CURVE NUMBER: 0605223C SPEED DRIVER DIAMETER SPHERE GUARANTEED VALUES REV. 2 885 RPM 5 HP 9.75" 3.00" FLOW HEAD PUMP EFF HP STAGES IMPELLER DATE BY 764 17 72 THIS CURVE IS BASED ON THE ACTUAL TEST 1 T6C1C 11/29/2018 WSF 764 11 PERFORMANCE OF A SIMILAR PUMP. ONLY THE INDICATED POINT(S)IS GUARANTEED. 326 7 30 Pum. Head 25 885 RPM 20 780 RP �psi ��-_ ___- POR 750 RPM _ , v 15 �� _ ®► ® : (0 660 RPM IIIMInummoi 10 MI AIIIIIIIIM110111 :-__ - 530 RPM Tifi.AIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIPrdll —' piw , 5 .... AOR 0./r 0 - 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 100 50 Pump Efficiency 90 45 80 40 70 35 60 30$ c 50 a. it—z_a a. - 25M Gs - 0 - 0 0 0 �n :: I 40 —� -�—� 20co a w 30 — — z - 15 20 10 10 5 0 NPSH3 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 6 Power a x -.----- 3 3 a° 2 0 I I 885 RPM ONLY 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 Flowrate - (GPM) WAR N I \ G DISCHARGE POSITIONS MOTOR DIMENSIONS COUNTER CLOCKWISE DO NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE WITHOUT PROTECTIVE GUARD C T IN PLACE. ANY OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE WITHOUT 25.63 6.66 16 PROTECTIVE GUARD CAN RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY. 9 -A- SUPPLIED BY FN -B- SUPPLIED BY OTHERS 15 Ô1O 14 WHEN VIEWED FROM DRIVER END C __ CP - Q. SUCTION . DISCHARGE 1/4-- 1--Y— VENT TAP [—Z--I I I I Al 1 T ' I , ..--14�`—_ X O O �'I GAUGE TAP — - _� - -omo. — a• C)to VOLUTE 1 _-__� iE O �� i CLEANOUT HD ® ® { ^' DD O O I . II 0 II i i 1 li iI O L I HG 7 I Y HF I HF lI 31/4 I BOX DRAIN HE--`—HE DRAIN TAP HR---I HA HB I 11/16" DIA. 6 HOLES PUMP FRAME SUCT DISCH X Y Z CP DD HA HB HD HE HF HG HO HR PUMP MOTOR 6" B5423 T30 254T 6 6 12 9 9 37N 121/2 221/4 421/2 141/2 101/2 18 1/4 261/2 127/8 NOTES: (1) ALL FLANGES ARE 125# ANSI DRILLING. (5) DIMENSIONS SHOWN MAY VARY DUE TO NORMAL (2) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES UNLESS NOTED. MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES. (3) BASES ARE DESIGNED TO BE COMPLETELY FILLED WITH GROUT. (4) SUCTION GAUGE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE AND SHOULD BE LOCATED ON ADJACENT SUCTION PIPING. CUSTOMER P.O. NO. MCCLURE AND SONS, INC. 3305-112 / PENTAIR FAIRBANKSNUMUIS' JOB NAME TAG NAME CWS DURHAM WWTP 465P1903, 465P1904 SETTING PLAN PUMP SIZE AND MODEL GPM TDH NOMINAL RPM ROTATION DISCH POS 6" B5423 764 17 900 CCW 9 6" B5423 MOTOR HP FRAME PHASE HERTZ VOLTS ENCLOSURE WITH NIDEC 5 254T 3 60 460 TEFC STRUCTURAL BASE CERTIFIED FOR CERTIFIED BY DATE PROJECT # 0605223 SMF 07/2018 NoDyrG 0605223SP INnREV 0 Fairbanks Nijhuis Material Specifications Item Description Material Specification'- 1 Impeller Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 4 Shaft Steel AISI 1144 9 Bolt, Impeller Stainless Steel A193 CL2 B8 9A Washer, Impeller Stainless Steel AISI 316 14 Sleeve, Shaft Stainless Steel AISI 316 16 Wear Ring, Fronthead Stainless Steel A743 Gr. CA40 410-484 BHN 17 Wear Ring, Impeller Stainless Steel A743 Gr. CA15 300-350 BHN A28 Foot, Mounting Steel A36 B28 Pedestal, Mounting Steel A36 30 Volute Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 31 Solid Gland Cast Iron A48 Class 30 33 Fronthead Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 34 Backhead Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 90 Frame Cast Iron A48 Class 30 102 Impeller Key Stainless Steel AISI 316 A126 Deflector, Inner Rubber Commercial B126 Deflector, Outer Rubber Commercial 156 Gasket, Volute Tag Board D1170-G3111 158 Housing, Thrust Bearing Cast Iron A48 Class 30 161 Locknut, Bearing Steel SAE Bolt Steel 162 Lockwasher, Bearing Steel AISI 1215 163 Bearing, Radial Steel Commercial 168 Bearing, Thrust Steel Commercial 168A Snap Ring, Bearing Steel Commercial 202 Cover, Volute Cleanout Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 203 Gasket, Cleanout Rubber Commercial 272 Key, Coupling Steel A108 Grade 1018 456 Mechanical Seal Commercial Commercial Base Fabricated Steel A36 Coupling Guard Steel Commercial 1 All material specifications are ASTM unless otherwise noted and are or description of chemistry only. 0605223SR3.doc ML-5420 456 m `/'` CHESTERTON S10 MECHANICAL SEAL WITH SPIRALTRAC VERSION D, TYPE A BUSHING 33 16 17 1 WEAR RING CONSTRUCTION INPRO INPRO 202 272 SEAL 158 4 90 SEAL A126 14 102 1 203 30 Aot\INE , ` „,,a A ultille _I��'riWA1IM/////I .' I :411 OM• V10111..L_ th, 41 A 4j4rA Os \II • 1 i_or/41'.g Wes . W* W a WJ E IV [0] Mo. V .\.����fC•(E' i /B126 I ■lullu,l,E �Iill�llf \. \ , ✓ \\,,A* rIMPELLER ADJUSTMENT I J I I CAPSCREWS (QTY3) I I '�*♦—v 161 A28 162 168 168A B28 163 34 156 9A 9 156 33 ASSEMBLY $PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NUHUIS B5423 T30 FRAME °WG 0605223AP INEn" 1 MANUF. YEAR 2019 MAX. CASING PSI 85 SIZE 6 INCH MODEL B5423 STAGE 1 GPM 764 TOTAL HD. 17 FT. RPM 885 FRAME T30 LUBE GREASE IMP.DIA. 9.75 ED SERIAL 10560844,10560845 DD O AC OMAPROIA .D PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NUHUIS- MS21A136M KANSAS CITY, KANSAS FULL DATA NAMEPLATE *PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NUHUIS' Nr 0605223NP INEOV 1 Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Data Pump' Frame Size T30 Pump Size 6 Suction Size, Standard 6 Nominal Wear Ring Clearance 0.015-0.025 Impeller Fastener Size 5/8-11 Tightening Torque, lb.-ft 120 Impeller Weight, lb 73.8 Inlet Area, sq. In 52.88 WK2 Lb.-Ft.2 7.0 Sphere Size, Maximum 3 Shaft Diameter: at Impeller 1 3/4 at Sleeve 2 1/8 at Thrust Bearing 2.756 at Radial Bearing 2.559 Between Bearings 3 1/4 at Coupling 1 7/8 Keyway at Coupling 1/2 X 1/4 Torsional Shaft Stiffness, lbs./rad. 1.23X10 6 Center to Center of Bearings 11 Thrust Bearing Number 6314 Radial Bearing Number 6313 Sealing Box: Mechanical Seal Type Chesterton S10 Recommended Flush Water Pressure, PSI (above operating pressure) 1-10 Flow, GPM 1/2-1 Sleeve OD 2 1/2 Box ID 3 1/2 Box Depth 3 1/2 Box Inlet Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Box Outlet Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Backhead Drain Tap Size, NPT 3/4 Volute Cleanout Diameter 4 7/8 Vent/Priming Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Gauge Tap Size Discharge, NPT 1/2 Hydrostatic Test Pressure, Maximum, PSI 125 Casing Working Pressure, Maximum, PSI 85 Nominal Casing Thickness 1/2 Operating Temperature,°F 150 Shipping Weight, lb. Basic Pump 550 Structural Steel Base &Coupling 940 All dimensions are in inches unless otherwise noted. 0605223SR3.doc TD-5420 Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Project Name: CWS Durham WWTP Sales Order Number: - Project Number: 0605223 Pump Model: 6" B5423 Revision: 0 Prepared By: Matt Black Project Engineer Date Prepared: 8/6/2018 Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605223 LN PG1 Revision: 0 Summary of Analysis Method Analysis is performed in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.8-2014 level 1.The first lateral natural frequency, w,, was calculated using the equation for the natural frequency of a cantilever beam.The equation can be expressed as 187.7 cJ 1 = ,/D where D is the deflection at the end of the beam. Summary of Results No natural frequency problem was found. = 22897 RPM Minimum Speed = 530 RPM Maximum Speed = 885 RPM w, Percentage of Minimum Speed = 4320% w, Percentage of Maximum Speed = 2587% Required Margin = 30% Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605223 LN PG2 Revision: 0 Inputs Pump Pump Model = 6" B5423 Motor Frame = 254T-324TS Pump Weight, F = 490 lbs Pump Center of Gravity, L= 14.5 in Moment of Inertia, I = 247.00 in4 Material Properties Modulus of Elasticity, E = 30000000 psi Operating Conditions Minimum Operating Speed = 530 RPM Maximum Operating Speed = 885 RPM Required Separation Margin = 30% Calculations Deflection FL3 Pump Deflection= 0.000067 in D = 3 E/ Natural Frequency _ 187.7 = 22897 RPM _ Minimum Speed = 530 RPM wl v Maximum Speed = 885 RPM w, Percentage of Minimum Speed = 4320% w, Percentage of Maximum Speed = 2587% Required Margin = 30% Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605223 LN PG3 Revision: 0 A Campbell diagram provides a visual method to verify no resonance conditions will occur when operating a pump over its operating speed range.The diagram is constructed by plotting frequency in Hz versus frequency in RPM. Common excitation frequencies are shown as diagonal lines.The natural frequency of the pump is shown as a horizontal line. A resonance condition is likely to occur when a horizontal line crosses a diagonal line within the operating speed range. Campbell Diagram 450 400 - ___ towMargln Mtn Speed _ Max-Speed tigh-NTargln Natural Frequency 350 300 . i 1 250 O. vt 200 co M O cc 150 f I 100 _ 50 t Vane Pass 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 Rotation Speed(RPM) Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Project Name: CWS Durham WWTP Sales Order Number: - Project Number: 0605223 Pump Model: 6" B5423 Revision: 0 Prepared By: Matt Black Project Engineer Date Prepared: 8/6/2018 Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605223 RN PG1 Revision: 0 Summary of Analysis Method Analysis is performed in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.8-2014 level 1. The rotor's first lateral natural frequency, w,,was calculated using Rayleigh's method.The equation can be expressed as w ig F`Y` rad/s 1 E FiYi2 where g is the gravitational constant, F, is the force at the ith location, and y, is the deflection at the ith location. The model of the shaft used is shown below. F1 is the weight of the impeller, B1 and B2 are the bearing reaction forces, and F2 through F7 are the lumped weights of the shaft sections. L2 through L7 are the lengths to the lumped weights, LB1 and LB2 are the lengths to the bearing reaction forces, and LS is the length of the shaft. F3 fFl F4 /FS F2 / ? !F6 -F7 X u-,1 ES NI 0I 0 0 I r L2 _ L3 a B l B2 -4-, I L4.L61 -i LS LB2 - L6 _j L7 LS In order to account for the stepped geometry of the shaft, a numerical method to calculate the deflection of the shaft was used. Summary of Results No natural frequency problem was found. w, = 6447 RPM Min Speed = 530 RPM Max Speed= 885 RPM w, Percentage of Min Speed= 1216% w, Percentage of Max Speed = 728% Required Margin= 30% Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605223 RN PG2 Revision: 0 Inputs Forces F1= 73.8 lbs F2 = 1.28 lbs F3= 7.07 lbs F4= 1.82 lbs F5= 22.89 lbs F6= 3.38 lbs F7= 4.20 lbs Section Diameters D1 = 1.750 in D2 = 2.125 in D3 = 2.559 in D4= 3.250 in D5= 2.756 in D6= 1.875 in Lengths L2 = 0.940 in L3= 5.400 in L4,LB1 = 9.545 in L5= 15.045 in LB2 = 20.545 in L6 = 20.920 in L7= 24.610 in L5= 27.300 in Material Properties Shaft Modulus of Elasticity= 29500000 psi Operating Conditions Minimum Operating Speed = 530 RPM Maximum Operating Speed = 885 RPM Required Separation Margin = 30% Calculations Section Moment of Inertias I1 = 0.460 In" 12 = 1.001In" 13 = 2.105 In" _ IrD4 14 = 5.477 In" 1 64 Is= 2.832 In" 16= 0.607 In" Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605223 RN PG3 Revision: 0 Calculations Continued Bearing Reaction Forces B2 = -47.01 lb Moments = 0 ta, B1 = 161.44 lb Forces = 0 A plot of the deflection of the shaft obtained from the numerical results is shown below. i._ Deflection 1.00E-04 -- - 0.00E+00 I -1.00E-04 a 3 —43 — 20-- — — --- —__zTTT1 --- Length(in) Deflection Deflections Squared y1= 0.000876 in y12 7.68E-07 in2 y2= 0.000750 in y22 5.63E-07 in2 y3= 0.000236 in y32 5.58E-08 in2 y4= 0.000000 in y42 0 in2 y5= 0.000031 in y52 9.43E-10 in2 y6= 0.000007 in y62 4.53E-11 in2 y,= 0.000040 in y72 1.6E-09 in2 Natural Frequency w, = 6447 RPM w ig E Fiyi rad s 1 FiYi2 / w, Percentage of Min Speed = 1216% w, Percent of Max Speed = 728% Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605223 RN PG4 Revision: 0 A Campbell diagram provides a visual method to verify no resonance conditions will occur when operating a pump over its operating speed range. The diagram is constructed by plotting frequency in Hz versus frequency in RPM. Common excitation frequencies are shown as diagonal lines.The natural frequency of the rotor is shown as a horizontal line. A resonance condition is likely to occur when a horizontal line crosses a diagonal line within the operating speed range. Campbell Diagram 120 Low Margin Min Speed Max Speed High Margin Natural Frequency 100 i 80 , N N a. in 60 c O 40 { Vane Pass I I I I i 1 � i I 20 1x 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 Rotation Speed(RPM) STRUCTURAL CALCULATION S FO R FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 3601 FAIRBANKS AVENUE KANSAS CITY, KANSAS 66110 Seismic Anchorage for a 6" B5423 Pump Fairbanks Nijhuis Project #0605223 CWS Durham WWTP Phase 5 Secondary Treatment Tigard, OR BROOKS-RANSOM ASSOCIATES STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS CIVIL ENGINEERS WWW.BROOKSRANSOM.COM , UCTUR A� - 1 ] t[ e PROFF� S 7415 NORTH PALM, SUITE 100cr 17013 (0, )15 FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 9371 1 OFFICE: (559)449-8444 OREFAX (559) 449-8404en �v r A r+ tr �� r 7 • )xrrw►k% Kan..om J o B# 1 8522 0 R Kati""'`elc^• 20 1 8- 1 0-08 dig '440 If., . L W' ` I N C MOTOR DIMENSIONS DISCHARGE POSITIONS COUNTER CLOCKWISE DO NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE WITHOUT PROTECTIVE WARD C T IN PLACE ANY OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE WITHOUT 25.63 6.66 16 PROTECTIVE GUARD CAN RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY 1 -A- SuPPUED 61 f14 -1- SUPPLIED Si OThERS 1rA--....-.....6-;w T 70 14 WHEN VIEWED FROM DRIVER END C CP (1_ SUCTION DISCHARGE Ili Y-- VENT TAP A11:2-2-;:111 1 I /' l-.� i GAUGE TAP / f—,--IX . 1 1 / T _ _- �I -_� 1 TrI„ I 1- 0 0 Fi - ' N" .— 0r HO I ° o VOLUTE I p ° CLEANOUT '�'�ip o 0 HD �`` '' �: I I DO r IT L 1 'h I n `I/ I i i , " ° d _ J HG I HF I HF 3 -�31/4 -BOX DRAIN —HE I HE ---DRAIN TAP I HR---- HA HB - 11h6" DIA. 6 HOLES PUMP FRAME SUCT DISCH X Y Z CP DO HA HB HD HE HF HG HO HR PUMP MOTOR 6' 65423 T30 254T 6 6 12 9 9 37 T'4 121/2 221/4 421/2 1 4 V2 101/2 16 1/4 26 U2 12 7/s * REQUIRED ANCHOR NOTE: (6) 1/2"0 ASTM F593, (AISI 316) STAINLESS STEEL HEX HEADED BOLTS WITH POLYETHELYNE SLEEVE. SEE INSTALLATION DETAILS ON SHEET 2 & INSPECTION NOTES ON SHEET 3. NOTES: (1) ALL FLANGES ARE 125# ANSI DRILLING. (5) DIMENSIONS SHOWN MAY VARY DUE TO NORMAL (2) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES UNLESS NOTED_ MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES. (3) BASES ARE DESIGNED TO BE COMPLETELY FILLED WITH GROUT. (4) SUCTION GAUGE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE AND SHOULD BE LOCATED ON ADJACENT SUCTION PIPING. CUSTOMER P 0 NO. MCCLURE AND SONS, INC. 3305-112 1110N1I75RIR FAI DAIMESNUNUIF JOB NAME TAG NAME CWS DURHAM WWTP 465P1903, 465P1904 PUMP SIZE AND MOOEL GPM TON NOMINAL RPM ROTATION DITCH POT SETTING PLAN 6" B5423 764 17 900 CCW 9 6" B/5423 {�MOTOR HP FRAME PHASE HERTZ VOLTS ENCLOSURE T yITH NIDEC 5 254T 3 60 460 TEFC STRUCTURAL BASE CERTIFIED FOR CERTE1ED GY DATE PROJECT # 0605223 SMF 07/2016 NO 0605223SP NO' 0 BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS S BY: DD STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 6' B5423 Horizontal Pump CIVIL ENGINEERS Date: 10_08_181 7415 N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 SecondaryTreatment FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: 18522 /�/� ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ 1 SEE DETAILS ON THE ENGINEER 5 E OF RECORD'S APPROVED ( BOLT TO BOLT ) CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR D i CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD LOCK-NUT CONSTRUCTION DETAILS I EQUIPMENT BASE CUT d REMOVE FORM ABOVE PAD AFTER ( - THREE LAYERS CONCRETE 15 CAST d PRIOR TO GROUTING OF DUCT TAPE 11 // // // // ► MIN. I" NON-SHRINK GROUT, IN _ N SEE NOTES 3 TRHU 6 BELOW. -^/4 0 D + I" MIN. CO WILSON HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC , ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE OR APPROVED EQUAL t I < J k FILL SLEEVE SOLID WITH SILICONE- ' N RUBBER OR WAX. SEE NOTE2. / In II ANCHOR BOLT 4' u Y SIZE AS NOTED -11 5/8" PLATE WASHER--.--k-- C A 4" NOTE SQ. MIN. , SEE O r EXISTING 3" CLR FOR SLABS BASE SLAB ON GRADE DBL-NUTS I I/2" CLR FOR ALL OTHER SLABS '�" PREPARE AND CONSTRUCT NEW HOUSEKEEPING PAD, 1 IN COMPLIANCE WITH X THE APPROVED CON. DOC'S <? / 1 NOTES: �`. I. FOR CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD DETAILS AND NOTES NOT SHOWN SEE DETAILS ON THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 2. FILL SLEEVE WITH SILICONE RUBBER OR WAX. PROTECT THREADS ABOVE SLEEVE FROM DAMAGE AND CONCRETE SPLATTER. DO NOT FILL PIPE SLEEVE WITH GROUT. 3. NON-SHRINK EPDXY GROUT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROJECT SPECIFICATION AFTER LEVELING OF BASE PLATE, SOLE PLATE, OR MOUNTING BLOCK AND ALL SHIMS HAVE BEEN REMOVED. 4. REMOVE SHIMS d BLOCKS PRIOR TO TORQUEING BOLTS. 5. APPLY ANCHOR PRE-LOAD TORQUE OF 50 FT-LB5 WITH A CALIBRATED WRENCH ONLY AFTER GROUT HAS BEEN ALLOWED TO CURE AND SHIMS ARE REMOVED. 2 ANCHORAGE NOTES AND DETAILS BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS By: DD shy, STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 6" B5423 Horizontal Pump 2 eti CIVIL ENGINEERS Date: t0-08—t8 7415 N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 Secondary Treatment FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-6404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: 18522 NOTES: I. COMPLIANCE WITH THE ANCHOR BOLT DESIGN AND THE INSTALLATION OF THE ANCHOR BOLTS IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 2. THE PUMP FOUNDATION MUST HAVE ADEQUATE STRENGTH AND MASS TO HOLD THE PUMP FIRMLY IN PLACE. DESIGN OF THE FOUNDATION SYSTEM 15 BY OTHERS. 3. ALL VALUES ARE BASED ON MIN. F'c= 4,000 P.5.I. CONCRETE STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS d Fy= 60,000 P.S.I. REBAR STRENGTH. 4. CODE REFERENCE: 2012 IBC, SECTION 1q02, STRENGTH DESIGN, ASCE 1-10, ACI 318-11 APPENDIX D AND LOCAL AMENDMENTS: CITY OF COMMERCE. SEE STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS. HEX HEADED BOLTS SHALL BE ASTM ASTM F5g3, GROUP 2, CONDITION CWI (AI5I 316) AS FOLLOWS: NUTS: ASTM F5g4 (AI5I TYPE 316) STAINLESS STEEL BOLT SIZE Anom (IN2) EMBEDMENT (MIN.) EDGE DISTANCE (MIN.) HEX HD. A316 55 TYPE BOLT 1/2" 0.I4:163 8 6.. D=BOLT DIAMETER - INCHES L=BOLT EMBEDDED LENGTH - IN. E=DISTANCE TO EDGE - INCHES L = Ls + Le Ls = LENGTH OF SLEEVE Le = LENGTH OF BOLT BEYOND THE SLEEVE * ANCHORS CENTERED NO CLOSER THAN 6" FROM EDGE OF CONCRETE OR COLD JOINT. MINIMUM CONCRETE BASE THICKNESS = 12" SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: I. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE INSPECTED BY AN APPROVED TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2012 IBC, SECTION 1105.1.1, TABLE 1105.5, BUILDING DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS, AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 2. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD AND POSSESS PROPER QUALIFICATION/CERTIFICATION. 3. SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS AND PROCEDURES NOTED: HEX HEADED ANCHOR BOLTS: A. CONTINUOUS INSPECTION OF THIS INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED. B. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY TYPE AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CONFORMS WITH DESIGN. CONCRETE BASE SHALL EXTEND ANY MINIMUM DISTANCE BEYOND THE CENTER OF ANCHORS AS INDICATED ABOVE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. C. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY SIZE AND GRADE OF ANCHOR BOLT MATERIAL, NUTS, AND WASHERS. D. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT BOLTS ARE CLEAN AND FREE FROM RUST, DIRT, LUBRICANT, OR ANY OTHER CONTAMINANTS. 3 SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS BY: DD shy et: STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 6" B5423 Horizontal Pump ittiCIVIL ENGINEERS 7415 N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 SecondaryTreatment Doty 10-08-18 FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: 18522 PROJECT: CWS Durham WWTP Phase 5 Secondary Treatment BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES LOCATION: Tigard,OR 4715 N.PALM AVE,SUITE 100 Fairbanks Nijhuis Project No.: 0605223 FRESNO,CA 93711 JOB NO.: 18522 DATE: 10/8/2018 EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE Fairbanks Nijhuis Model 6" B5423 Horizontal Pump DESIGN OF ANCHORAGE PER Channel Base To Concrete Pedestal 2014 Orgeon Bldg Code,Based on 2012 International Building Code Section 1613 Section 13.3&13.6 of ASCE 7-10 With IBC Amendments,Al 318-11,Appendix D, &AISC 314-10 Pph/No.Anchore }1 4- GAP. Fphx Gb. )Pphx �1=ph/NO.MGhera + V Mat ...,_4_ANCHOR P A A n G C` PAll Y.MIS C->-) - f.ONGR2TE' r fi_itT.cI f1- i.- .._WIDTH r ___-WIDTH OR PLATFORM DEPTH �W �VIEW Anchor In TMsionEND viEw PJrGHOR ANCHORAGE CALCULATIONS Fp=0.4apSDSWp/(Rp/Ip)*(1+2*z/h) (Eq 13.3-1) 40Fp= 858.00 Lbs. Fp=0.3S0s1pWp(Minimum) (Eq 13.3-3) (Not less than) ("Up(min.)= 1,608.75 Lbs. <GOVERNS Fp=1.6SosIpWp(Maximum) (Eq 13.3-2) (Not more than) OoFp(max.)= 8,580.00 Lbs. ap= 1.00 (Per Table 13.5-1 or 13.6-1) (For Vibration Isolators ap=2.5,Rp=2.5) Sos= 0.715 (Per Section 11.4.4) z= 0.00 (Height in structure at point of attachment of component.Base or below z=0. Roof or above z=h.) h= 0.00 (Average roof height of structure relative to the base elevation in feet.) Rp= 2.50 (Per Section 13.4.2) Ip= 1.50 Importance Factor (Per Section 13.1.3) C o= 2.5 (Per Section 13.3.1) Unit Operating Wt. Misc. Wet Weight WEIGHT= 1,790.00 Lbs. + 210.00 = 2,000.00 Lbs. Y-cc X-cc Z-bar Anchor Spacings 21.000 Inches X 2 @ 18.00 Inches 14.510 Inches Number of Anchors Effective in Shear= 6 Total Y-bar= 0.200 Inches Number of Anchors Effective in Tension= 6 Total X-bar= 12.930 Inches Unit Only Fp Horiz.= OoFp= 1,608.75 Lbs. (Per ASCE 7-10 Section 13.4.2 Anchors in Concrete or Masonry) Fp Vert= 0.2SosWP= 286.00 Lbs. (Per ASCE 7-10 Section 13.3.1&Section 13.4.2a) Anchor Forces(at base of unit) LRFD Load Combination(Eq 16-7): 0.9D-Fpv+Q,Fp Tension due to Pretensioninq 0.500"Dia.Bolts 30 Ft-Lbs Clamping Torque= 22,680 Lbs. Pu= 0.9Total Weight-1.0Fpv= 1,514.00 Lbs. Mux=Vux(Z)+Wp(eX)= 49,202.96 In-Lbs./12= 4,100 Ft-Lbs Muy=Fph(Z)+Wp(eY)= 23,742.96 In-Lbs./12= 1,979 Ft-Lbs Muz=Fph(eX)+Fph(eY)= 21,122.89 In-Lbs./12= 1,760 Ft-Lbs Orthogonal Effects Vux=1.0Fph= 1,608.75 Lbs. Vuy= 0.30Fph= 1,608.75 Lbs. Vur=SRSS = 1/Vux2+Vuy2= 2,275.12 Lbs. Use(6)1/2"Diameter ASTM F593.(AISI 316)Stainless Steel Heavy Hex Hd Bolts w/Void Plastic Sleeve Cast in Place Min.12"Thick Normal Weight Concrete Slab,F'c=4,000 psi,8"Min.Embedment,6"Min.Edge Distance Min.1 1/2"Non-Shrink Leveling Grout Per SIMPSON ANCHOR DESIGN SOFTWARE Nua= 22,680.00 LBS. ONn= 37,294 LBS. To verify steel bolt's strength only! Vua= 599.00 LBS. OVn= 5,112 LBS. See shear transfer due to friction below. Nua/ONn= 0.608 Vua/OVn= 0.117 Section D.7.1.permits full strength in tension to be permitted Nua/0Nn+Vua/OVn= 0.608 <1.00 OK 4 Friction between base and concrete=0.57 x Pu= 12,927.60 LBS.Total >Vur(SRSS)= 2,275.12 Lbs. OK SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Software Strong-Tie Project: Page: 1/5 Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: 1.Proiect information Customer company:Pentair FN 0605223 Project description:6"B5423 Horizontal Pump Customer contact name: 18552 Location: Customer e-mail: Fastening description: Comment: 2.Input Data&Anchor Parameters General Base Material Design method:ACl 318-11 Concrete: Normal-weight Units: Imperial units Concrete thickness,h(inch): 12.00 State:Cracked Anchor Information: Compressive strength,fn(psi):4000 Anchor type:Cast-in-place 4W.,v: 1.0 Material: F593 304/316SS Reinforcement condition: B tension,B shear Diameter(inch):0.500 Supplemental reinforcement:Not applicable Effective Embedment depth,hot(inch):8.000 Reinforcement provided at corners:No Anchor category:- Ignore concrete breakout in tension:No Anchor ductility:Yes Ignore concrete breakout in shear:Yes hmin(inch):9.25 Ignore 6do requirement:No Cmin(inch):3.00 Build-up grout pad:Yes Smin(inch):3.00 Base Plate Length x Width x Thickness(inch):22.25 x 42.50 x 0.38 Recommended Anchor Anchor Name: Heavy Hex Bolt-1/2"0 Heavy Hex Bolt,F593 304/316SS ..,, aaf,111 0111 fslgl ta1llltiilliti11,14 It ,I I1',i5iily 11�wt+�l,<<r+:t 11�lI ".ad.. w.a Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 5 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com Company: Date: 10/5/2018 SIMPSON Anchor DesignerT"" Engineer: Page: 2/5 StrongTie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: Load and Geometry Load factor source:ACI 318 Appendix C Load combination: not set Seismic design:Yes Anchors subjected to sustained tension:Not applicable Ductility section for tension:D.3.3.4.3(d)is satisfied Ductility section for shear:D.3.3.5.3(c)is satisfied no factor:not set Apply entire shear load at front row: No Anchors only resisting wind and/or seismic loads:Yes Strength level loads: Nua[lb]:22680 Vuax[lb]: 1609 Vuax[lb]: 1609 M.[ft-lb]:-4100 Muy[ft-lb]: 1979 M.[ft-lb]: 1760 <Figure 1> 22680 lb 1 1609 Ib UN* 1979 ft-lb 4100" O' Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 6 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com "' Company: Date: 10/5/2018 SIMPSON Anchor DesignerT Software Engineer: Page: 3/5 strong-Tie Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: <Figure 2> 0 0 0 o', 6.00 6.00 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 7 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 4/5 Strong-Tie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: 3.Resulting Anchor Forces Anchor Tension load, Shear load x, Shear load y, Shear load combined, N.(lb) V.(Ib) V.(Ib) )1(Vuax)2+(Vuay)2(lb) 1 4840.3 462.4 154.9 487.6 2 4156.9 268.2 154.9 309.7 3 3473.6 74.0 154.9 171.6 4 2719.7 74.0 381.5 388.6 5 3403.1 268.2 381.5 466.3 6 4086.4 462.4 381.5 599.4 Sum 22680.0 1609.0 1609.0 2423.2 Maximum concrete compression strain(%o): 0.00 <Figure 3> Maximum concrete compression stress(psi):0 Resultant tension force(Ib):22680 o I -L 03 Resultant compression force(Ib):0 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in x-axis,e'Nx(inch): 1.05 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in y-axis,e'Ny(inch):2.17 Y Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in x-axis,e'vx(inch):6.56 Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in y-axis,e'vy(inch):6.56 ag X 5 a4 4.Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.11 Nsa(Ib) 0 ONsa(Ib) 14200 0.80 11360 5.Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.21 Nb=kc2aJfchef'5(Eq.D-6) kc rya Pc(psi) he(in) Nb(Ib) 24.0 1.00 4000 6.995 28080 0.750Ncbg=0.750(ANc/ANco)Yec,N`-ed,N'Yc,N_cp,NNb(Sec. D.4.1 &Eq.D-4) ANc(in2) ANco(in2) ca,man(in) Vec,N ¶ed,N YfgN Vicp,N Nb(Ib) 0 0.750Ncbg(Ib) 1583.24 440.34 6.00 0.753 0.872 1.00 1.000 28080 0.75 37294 6.Pullout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.3) 0.750Npn=0.750�YcPNp=0.750'YcPBAbrgfc(Sec.D.4.1, Eq.D-13&D-14) Vc,p Abrg(in2) Pc(psi) 0 0.75¢Npn(Ib) 1.0 0.47 4000 0.75 8406 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 8 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 5/5 Strong-Tie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: e Phone: E-mail: 8.Steel Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.1) Vsa(Ib) Ogrout 0 OgroutOVsa(Ib) 8520 0.8 0.75 5112 10.Concrete Pryout Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.3) (Vcpg=QkcpNcbg=Okcp(ANc/ANco)Wec,N Wed,N Wc,N Wcp,NNb(Sec. D.4.1 &Eq. D-41) kcp ANc(in2) ANco(in2) Wec,N Wed,N Wc,N Vcp,N Nb(Ib) 0 0Vcpg(Ib) 2.0 1583.24 440.34 0.378 0.872 1.000 1.000 28080 0.75 49954 11.Results Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces(Sec.D.7.) Tension Factored Load, N.(lb) Design Strength,eNn(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 4840 11360 0.43 Pass Concrete breakout 22680 37294 0.61 Pass(Governs) Pullout 4840 8406 0.58 Pass Shear Factored Load,V.(Ib) Design Strength,aVn(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 599 5112 0.12 Pass(Governs) Pryout 2275 49954 0.05 Pass Interaction check Nua/ONn Vua/QVn Combined Ratio Permissible Status Sec. D.7..1 0.61 0.00 60.8% 1.0 Pass 1/2"0 Heavy Hex Bolt,F593 304/316SS with hef=8.000 inch meets the selected design criteria. 12.Warnings -Concrete breakout strength in shear has not been evaluated against applied shear load(s)per designer option. Refer to ACI 318 Section D.4.2.1 for conditions where calculations of the concrete breakout strength may not be required. -Per designer input,ductility requirements for tension have been determined to be satisfied—designer to verify. -Per designer input,ductility requirements for shear have been determined to be satisfied—designer to verify. -Designer must exercise own judgement to determine if this design is suitable. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 9 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com ►;k► PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS" FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS �' DYNAMIC SHAFT DEFLECTION C- I IA IB 71 _„_ _ _.,,/ 1 MODEL 6"B5423 ORDER 0605223 IMPELLER SYMBOL T6C1C SHAFT SYMBOL T30C4A I`{—"— E DEFLECTION AT OPERATING CONDITION Head = 17 feet Flow= 764 GPM YMAX= 0.00031 inches VARIABLE DESCRIPTION VALUE A Shaft length between bearings,inches 11.00 B Shaft,length,inches,radial brg to sleeve 1.38 C Shaft length,inches,from impeller discharge to sleeve 5.38 IA Moment of Inertia of the shaft section between bearings,inches4 5.476 IB Moment of Inertia of the shaft section under the radial bearing,inches4 2.832 lc Moment of Inertia of the shaft section under the sleeve inches4 0.607 E Modulus of elasticity,psi 30000000 B2 Width between impeller shrouds including shroud thickness,inches 3.56 D Impeller diameter,inches 10.20 R Radial thrust,pounds,at operating condition 21.38 H Total head at operating condition,feet 17 Kr Thrust factor at operating condition 0.08 X Distance from impeller discharge centerline to face of packing box 7.19 Z Distance from the radial bearing CL to impeller discharge 6.76 EQUATIONS d' P=KrXDXB2XHxS.G./2.31 I 64 P rZA(Z—X) 3i 1 1 Z3 X3 3Xi 2( 1 1 Z2 \\ +t" Ybox— --- +—+ — C -- +— 3E IA \Ic Is Is 2Ic 2 vIc IB ) Is )) WSF (Signed) 08-06-18 (Date) Fairbanks Nijhuis Typical Pump Bearing Lubricants Fairbanks Nijhuis recommends a superior quality, NLGI No. 2, multipurpose, lithium complex grease for all pump rolling element bearing applications that require grease lubrication. The grease characteristics should include good high temperature performance, extreme pressure properties, water resistance, excellent oxidation stability, good rust protection and resistance to chemical breakdown. Fairbanks Nijhuis does not recommend grease with molybdenum disulfide (moly)additives. In addition to the characteristics listed above, the grease should meet the following specification. Specifications Consistency: NLGI No. 2 Dropping Point ASTM D2265 >450° F Base fluid viscosity SUS @ 100° F 700 to 1200 SUS@212° F 70to100 Rust Prevention ASTM 1743 Pass Water Washout ASTM 1264 <4% @ 175° F Four Ball EP Test ASTM D2596>40kg load wear >250kg weld point Fairbanks Nijhuis has compiled a general list of products that meet the grease requirements above. This list is not an endorsement of any particular manufacture and should not be construed as exclusive recommendations. When choosing an alternate manufacture, customers should discuss this typical lubricant recommendation with their vendor to ensure that an equivalent grease is supplied. Typical Products Manufacturer Lubricant Brand Name NLGI No. BP BP Energreas? LC EP 2 2 Castrol Pyroplex Red 2 Chevron Delo Greases EP 2 Exxon Ronee MP 2 Mobil AW2 2 Shell Retinax`''LC 2 Texaco Starplex`''2 2 76 76 Multiplex EP 2 0605223SR3.doc GR-1000 + PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS' HORIZ. BEARING LIFE CALCULATIONS 96%OF BEP PUMP MODEL: 6" B5423 DONE BY: Kolton Stimpert DATE SPEED = 885 RPM ORDER NO.: 0605223 8/7/2018 CAPACITY DESIGN = 764 GPM — LIMP L, HEAD DESIGN = 17 Ft - — f---B, IMPELLER SYMBOL I' h y L RHFT 7 T6C1C IMPELLER WEIGHT 61 Lbs D / T f T / ` 1----F D SHAFT SYMBOL = T30C4A l I _, I 1. DH WSHFT SHAFT WEIGHT = 41.5 Lbs \I it R, 'R, TH CAP DESIGN BEP = 800 GPM WIMP CAPACITY BEP = 1950 GPM LIMP = 22.09 in IN-BOARD BEARINGS-->BALL BRG HEAD BEP = 100 Ft L, = 11.09 in OUT-BOARD BEARINGS-->BALL BRG DR = 7 in BEARING INFORMATION SPEED BEP = 1750 RPM D2 = 10.2 in RADIAL BRG NUMBER 313KD DH = 2.5 in RADIAL DYN.CAPACITY 23200 Lbs B2 = 3.56 in THRUST BRNG NUMBER 314KD CERTIFIED BY: WSF LSHFT = 6 in THRUST DYN.CAPACITY 26000 Lbs DATE: 08-06-18 1 SPECIFIC SPEED N -_ NQREPZ = 2444 IMPELLER RADIAL QD = 0.96 lc = 0.08 3 (BEP@FULL DIA.) HeCP4 THRUST FACTOR QD-BEP FROM CHART D2 IMPELLER RADIAL _(KR• HD• D2• B2• SG) = 21 Lbs _ THRUST TR 2.31 IMPLELLER AXIAL DR = 0.69 XR = 0.61 DH = 0.25 XH = 0.52 THRUST CONST. D2 FROM CHART D5 DZ FROM CHART D5 _(XR + XH = 0.57) AR =(DR)2• (.7854) = 38.5 IMPELLER AXIAL _ THRUST FACTOR KA 2 AH=(DH)2• (.7854) = 4.9 IMPELLER AXIAL H • SG THRUST TA = 2.31 (AR-AH)(KA) = 141 Lbs RI - {(TR+ WIMP x (Limp) + ( SHF)x (LSHFT)}ALL = 186 Lbs RESULTANT BEARING FORCES R2= R1 - TR- WIMP- WSHFT = 63 Lbs T1=0 X= 1 Y= 0 a RADIAL BEARING LIFE C \ H PURE RADIAL LOAD P=Xi?,+ni = 186 Lbs L 10 LIFE = =I 3.65E+07 hours I NO THRUST Pl ) • N D THRUST BEARING LIFE T2= TA =141 Lbs X=0.56 Y=1.62 COMBINED AXIAL c C R A AND RADIAL LOAD L10 LIFE _ P2= XR2+} =264 Lbs \P2 / N D = 1.80E+07 hours EXPONENTS&COEFF RADIAL BRG a= 3 H= 16667 THRUST BRG 13 = 3 A= 16667 � "HSTERTO — Global Solutions,Local Service, 1blCCM/1111/Cw -i S10 Single & 520 Dual Seals (Prit'A4iti Streamlines inventory,installation,maintenance and workflow , .' Optimized seal design for plantwide use S-Series full featured common gland Two-step"bolt&go"installation Delivers greater performance and value 4th Generation Sealing combines technology with workflow efficiency ter , it:(:' p */, g µ � # r tit 1- I ( I. ( f t ,f, ( 1 t ,„,, f ' 4' '' ''' ' ' ' i t I ( 1 I (.-" t (t f ' Chesterton has a unique position in the sealing industry,with over a century of continuous innovation under one ownership and brand name.The result of this continuity of effort is a record of patents and / innovations unmatched in the world.Chesterton is proud to continue this winning tradition with the ' -'_+ introduction of the Streamline S-Series Seals. . 1st Generation:Component Seals Chesterton introduced non-fretting seals to lead the way towards seals that won't damage shafts.Other ` innovations in this period included patented Self- . - : f, , ? Aligning Stationaries and universal slotted glands. ' 1 'p 2nd Generation:Cartridge Seals - ' `t' The Chesterton innovation of off-the-shelf cartridge .., . ! °,.„.1 1,1, seals is an enduring contribution to worldwide sealing technology.Cartridge sealing has become the $" ' — - .::1:',: 'ik,,-\N.) 14„.,‘',., dominant sealing form since that time.It offers increased sealing reliability due to factory presets, a and faster,easier installation. � t iS` 3rd Generation:Advanced Technology a . Chesterton jumped fully into the computer revolution rr ,,`, with the introduction of seal lines engineered and ' ' designed with the aid of sophisticated software. ., This included Finite Element Analysis(FEA)to predict seal face flatness using monolithic faces.This third generation also featured patented innovations ' */ such as the Self-Centering Lock Ring,to make seal ', ��'� concentricity easily achievable for greater reliability. ' ,t, r 4th Generation:Streamline S-Series .�. .14 The new Streamline S-Series is the culmination of � . our engineering efforts with with the business of :o--, � � sealing.This is the seal generation that goes beyond sealing to deal with seal process workflow.The result , is greater total economies from inventory reduction, ,. less administration,increased reliability,and flexible, cost-saving rebuild options.This 4th Generation of Chesterton sealing brings greater value than ever before possible. I r. 5L I CiLfI/////IC, @CHESTERTON. Global Solution;Local Servrce 1 y, Ll i faitit S1 0 Single & S20 Dual Seals Simply superior for standardization, w � workflow efficiency and value New Chesterton Streamline S-Series is engineered to = meet the vast majority of plantwide applications with great reliability in service.But the S-Series goes beyond the basics of fluid sealing,to address the economies of total sealing workflow.S-Series will streamline f inventory,simplify seal selection,reduce installation y. complexity and minimize total maintenance costs. - Optimized design for plantwide use 510 Single and 520 Dual Tandem are a matched pair of high performance,robust seals that make standardization easy.These benchmark seals deliver the reliability expected from Chesterton. Common design with interchangeable parts The S-Series is a complete system with common parts for predictable performance and simplified inventory. No other seal family uses parts commonality better than the S-Series.Unique"cassette within a cartridge" design lets users swap out the S10 for an S20 in a minute.Face materials swap out to match service " needs while keeping spares to a minimum. S-Series face geometry is designed with the aid of Finite Element Outstanding performance and value Analysis(FEA)and computer fluid flow modeling.S Series faces generate low heat to minimize face distortion for stable,reliable S-Series Seals can offer better performance because performance. the weaknesses found in other common platform seal designs have been eliminated.Superior value comes from long-term reliability coupled with inventory savings and workflow efficiencies. . t. Two-step"bolt&go"installation With the S-Series,just bolt on the gland,tighten the set screws and go.Captive fastened centering pads move out of the way at start up,and won't get lost when it's time to re-set impellers or re-seal. Rebuilding options smooth workflow +� � Standard options of factory or field rebuilds are easy = t~:foo to execute and economical.But with complete sealing cassettes available at attractive prices,it becomes possible to perform rapid re-sealing with no additional administration relating to rebuilding. Both S 10 and S20 Sealing Cassettes use the common 5-Series Gland This unique"cassette-within-a-cartridge"design makes for easy handling and streamlined resealing.Get rapid,reliable When you see CH ESTE RTON, avoid rebuild administrative co tsle with all new parts and you see the future of sealing. The new benchmark for sealing excellence and value .. ,: S-Series 510 Cassette fr- D S-Series Common Parts reduce inventory ' Multi-Port Flush cleans better and prevents while increasing options.The same gland is localized thermal seal face distortion Ir-a used for both the single and dual seals to common with single port systems. i; -_ maximize flexibility.Interchangeable Floating Throttle Bushing for maximum cassettes streamline repair administration. safety is standard.Fluids are diverted to Q , Ei Optimized Seal Faces balance low heat quench and drain ports. i ' generation and distortion to handle a plant's 2 toughest applications.FEA design and robust body withstand high pressures and torques 1, compared to general duty designs. • 20 Cassette Q Self Centering Lock Ring" is a patented 9 Fully Vented Gland ensures that li• id mechanism that ensures sleeve concentricity s rrounds the seal.Eliminates air •.ces that •, and squares the rotary face to the shaft pr- ent barrier fluid flow and in eased seal ♦- during installation.This prevents seal face oper.ting temperatures. wobble,increasing reliability in tough emissions and slurry services. VC High F ",w Pumping Rin• ools inboard a • outboard se. faces in Q High Torque,Cushioned Drives eliminate high tempe .ture servi -s.Aggressive metal to seal face contact on all S-Series faces. "'` bi-directional anes c•mbine with Cushioned drives minimize shock and vibration, cutwaters to de- er igh flow. tile IF High strength drive pads resist shear load in tough applications. Tandem Config tion seals on the OD of both set of se: faces.Proven ® Captive Centering Pads set precise design forth: ighest -liability under positioning automatically,then move out of varying co :itions. the way at start-up.Non-sparking for safety, and never misplaced for future use. iElBalanc• •iston'"enables tr.e hydraulic doubt: •alance with no movi : 0-rings to .k. 0 Micropolished Faces reduce drag for han• up and fail under pressure eversals. maximum face responsiveness.Highly Pa nt pending,it eliminates the n •for polished surfaces ensure face tracking. de seal faces,which generate exc sive . Seal face hang-up is minimized. eat and contribute to 0-ring failure. -, OPERATING LIMITS STANDARD MATERIALS S10&S20 Process Pressure: Rotary Face: ■ To 450 psig(to 31 bar g) ■ Carbon,Silicon Carbide,Tungsten Carbide crier Pressure: Stationary Face: ■ To 450 psi r g) ■ Silicon Carbide,Tungsten Carbide 50 psig(to 17 bar g)Inb ' rential Elastomers: Temperature Limits: I Viton FLAS",EP,ChemLast,PTFE Encapsulated ■ To 300°F(150°C)Ethylene Propylene,PTFE Metal Parts: ■ To 400°F(205°C)Fluorocarbon,AFLAS° ■ 316SS all metal parts ■ To 500°F(250°C)ChemLast ■ Hastelloy C"springs Speed: I 5,000 FPM(25 m/sec) Other materials available on request. For higher pressure and temperature • Asahi Glass Company Ltd.Registered Trademark applications,please consult Chesterton. —Haynes International,Inc.Registered Trademark ::-,14.:.:''''',:':;:',',:,:',1,4z;r'' .......„,n,„:-,,,,,' t , tl -,,:,-.4-..--.• i:,....,.„,,,,!i.•- . , ., • , dojo- S i Aix ,. . I „... - --,- a— , r s i Alli, loolhii.,,-, --, , 43/4 , -"et - .- . ' - 3 1 lik,,,,, 1111mmwo......„111 - .:; 131 '' II 2._, , 6 --k.t„<, , '. \ frr t' -. 2 , i - -,- 4 ' ' —54' \,,, •_.. ... . 12 9 11 .r,.,,,t..',-f,' , ,-. . ,:-''' ,`...,,,,,` I. . ., ,. fel;'i}4ti, . , .:-. , ,,, , - ,. , N •'''..,. 4 `... . .,_sk,ZPC Zs:, . 44444" 1 i . , . . . ,. At** ... aft. .........,...„.....„....„...,-,....,-,:-. kr'i' 4 e & A --.- ,t.• ......- - • _,...-, "1... t -11''; ift; Stif i 7,1, .11:‘1,1177,. ,, ...... . „ . . ...„..,,....„.• ,... , , • t f , „, t . .,„ ,,.., .,,, 1 i (. .t_ ,.. • it..t..t t _ , . . „,..,. i " - C C 4-4 t f't'. tilit " '' , • • - ',-• ,,,, ,i2,:';' - Section li -- Mechanical Seal Installation Data Mechanical Seal Catalog Si 0 SMALL SINGLE CASSETTE SEAL- Dimensional Data/Inch B 4*ro S10 Flush I~E I- F . . .,Alia ilk i •.w4,..4,, , ,,. R Q/D all-\A Q/D sag ' 0 l D A ,..,. a. r *I 4,- , MiffiN1•112 // '-J- X W Y W Y Z S10 KEY A -Shaft Size E -Minimum Seal Chamber Depth J -Seal Chamber to Bolt Surface Z -Quench 0-ring B -Maximum Gland Diameter F -Outboard Seal Length W-Rotary and Stationary 0-rings C -Seal Chamber Bore G - Minimum Bolt Circle by Bolt Size X -Shaft 0-ring D -Seal Outside Diameter H -Slot Width Y - IB&OB Cassette 0-rings A 8 C C D E F GMIN H J X W Y Z MAX MIN MAX MIN 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" t 1.500 4.50 2.25 2.44 2.19 0.53 2.11 3.31** 3.55** - 0.57 1.20 128 135 143* 142* 1.625 5.00 2.38 2.70 2.31 0.53 2.11 3.49** 3.68** - 0.57 1.20 130 137 145" 144* 1.750 5.50 2.50 2.81 2.44 0.53 2.11 3.61** 3.80** - 0.57 1.20 132 139 147" 146* 1.750 0S 6.64 3.50 3.75 2.44 0.53 2.11 5.38 5.50 - 0.57 1.20 132 139 147* 146* 1.875 5.50 2.63 2.94 2.56 0.53 2.11 3.74** 3.93"" - 0.57 1.20 134 141 149* 148* 1.875 OS 5.99 3.56 3.81 2.56 0.53 2.11 - 5.00 - 0.57 1.20 134 141 149* 148" 2.000 5.50 2.75 3.19 2.69 0.53 2.11 3.99 4.12** - 0.57 1.20 136 143 150* 149" 2.125 6.00 2.88 3.44 2.81 0.53 2.11 4.24 4.37 4.49** 0.69 1.20 138 145 152 151 2.125 OS 6.99 3.88 4.25 2.81 0.22 2.42 - 4.49 5.25 0.69 1.51 138 145 152 151 2.250 6.00 3.00 3.56 2.94 0.53 2.11 4.36 4.49 4.61** 0.69 1.20 140 147 152 151 2.375 6.00 3.13 3.G2 3.0G 0.53 2.11 4.42 4.56 4.60" 0.0 1.20 142 149 153 152 2.500 6.50 3.25 3.81 3.19 0.53 2.11 4.61 4.74 4.86** 0.69 1.20 144 151 153 152 2.500 OS 7.77 4.56- 475 3:1-9 - . 1.20 144 151 153 152 2.625 6.50 3.38 3.94 3.31 0.53 2.11 4.86 4.99 5.11 0.69 1.20 146 5-557 154 153 2.625 OS 6.99 4.55 4.88 3.31 0.53 2.11 - 5.88 6.00 0.69 1.20 146 5-557 154 153 * Use next size larger for Style 76 0-rings **Minimum Bolt Circle requires D Washers. t The S10 uses a quantity of 2 0-rings and the 520 uses a quantity of 4 0-rings. 78 t*CHESrTERTON.. W that enhances the ,::',1,:z.;,:;,.;,,---,,i1.;,-;,,,op e r a t i n g err for ail mechanical seals - and packing \''s,-,.. i ''''''''' , _, 4110 ILA , ' I ' C Product Ordering Information z .. /Easy Installation g- F Options . if Total , mental � C x4 . .. Control sir � � : ��. -..--a ��� � E Reducesvl Flush _ dos -100% ''- - Improves Extendsmechanical seal and packing life S iralTracM Part Number Code p Example:The following part number identifies a device operating with greatly reduced flush(F),measured in inches(I),to fit over a 3.000"shaft(3000)in a pump with right fluid rotation(R). This is a split(S)SpiralTrac"'for in-place installation with split seals in a pump with a 4.000"seal cavity bore diameter(4000).The device is made of Carbon Graphite Filled PTFE(ESC). This part number code applies to typical SpiralTrac configurations.For special configurations please forward a drawing to EnviroSeal for review. Shaft Size(4) Outside Diameter(1) Material Actual diameter of rotating Actual diameter of the seal 316 316 Stainless Steel component under SpiralTracTM cavity bore. >416 416 Stainless Steel GLF Glass Filled PTFE(7) ESC Carbon Graphite Filled PTFE Measurement Units Fluid Rotation(3) BRZ Bronze I Inches As Viewed From Bearing End Ti Titanium M Metric R Right L Left \ \ -----\ 3000 F I R S 4000 (ESC \ \ Operating Conditions(SpiralTrac Versions) Easy Installation Options(SpiralTrac Types) Greatly reduced flush. TypeA Counterbore Fit In with split seals while the equipme ' i in place , Press into Place using reduced or no Flushlel: Recommended Upgrades (see Type ✓ Drives Circulation for face cooling. 0 Drill 5/32"vent hole: or / Forces fluid Exchange for heat removal. ✓ Releases Air when flooding. Reduced ush(5)in n ' rous applications. ✓ Removes Particulate. gressive single spiral groove, air vent and exit groove,available in Types A,B,I and . Reduced or no flush(6)in fibrous applications. —1 Type B Bore Fit DDouble spiral grooves,deeper air vent and exit groove, 1 Press into Place using reduced Flush: Recommended Upgrades available in Types A,I and E(5) �� / Drives Circulation for face cooling. 0 Dril15/32"vent hol• ,�, ✓ Enhances fluid Exchange for heat removal. ✓ Releases Air wh= flooding. witlLpacking only(2) , ....01 ©Extend exit•oove: ✓ Positions Particulate so a small flush A combined al separator,axially ✓ Forces fl xchange and re- ,_ 2 (5-7 GPH/23-32 LPH)can force it under s and manufactured with a single spiral growe. move •articulate without flush(6) the throat restriction and out of the cavity. wr-eliminating shaft erosion. Reduced SpiralTrac'Packing Version Flush Installed in Stuffing Box Type© ' ially Split Device (Typical for Sp!' eals) �I- Press 1 •Place using reduced Flush: No Upgrades Use half or less the normal flush rate. ✓ Drives ulation for face cooling. Not practical due to installation ✓ Enhances .'.Exchange for heat re : al. while the pump is assembled. Greatly extends sleeve and ✓ Positions Parti ate for removal b mall packing life. 2 flush(5-7 GPH/2 LPH). Notes: Type© Impeller Side s nation (Typical for Open Bore Cavities) 1.For Type A or Type E SpiralTrac,'dimensions for the counterbore or external key l Press into Place -ng reduced or •Flush(e): (Horizontal Split Case Pumps)must be provided in addition to the part number. / Superior Air •nting. Please contact EnviroSeal for sizing information sheets. ✓ Drives C' ulation for face cooling. 2.For Packing Version SpiralTrac,''the width of the lantern ring as well as the size of ✓ Force- uid Exchange for heat removal. packing and number of packing rings being replaced by SpiralTrac'must be provided \ / R: oyes Particulate. in addition to the part number.Please contact EnviroSeal for sizing information sheets. 3.For Double Ended Pumps both right and left rotation devices are required. Type E Externally Keyed (Typical for Horizontal Spli ase Pumps) 4.Depending on the pump,this may be a shaft,sleeve,or impeller hub diameter. 5.When air is a problem from process or dry running,the use of flush,quench or double / Installed using reduced or no Flush(6): / Superior Air release when vent specified. seals is necessary to provide face cooling. d, l / Drives Circulation for face cooling. 6.Elimination of flush is dependent on the type of application.Please contact EnviroSeal ,- ✓ Forces fluid Exchange for heat removal. to determine your application's suitability for total flush elimination, ✓ Removes Particulate. 7.Version P radial cross-section must be greater than.500"when using glass filled PTFE. AVAILABLE WORLDWIDE US PATENTS#5,553,868 Env roSeal THROUGH #5,167,418 Engineering Products Limited A.W.CHESTERTON CO. Euro.Pat.App.0 912 848 P.O.Box 538,Waverley Nova Scotia,Canada BON 2S0 Tel(902)861-3464 Fax(902)861-3522 ST01272 280100 Website http://www.enviroseal.ca :.iiii , t N PERMANENT BEARING '' . -, PROTECTION ► t • } ' :`4 - Bearing Isolator 1 A. "NI lees 1 N P RO/SEAL A Waukesha Bearings Business _______________,..............m. INCREASE THE RELIABILITY OF YOUR ROTATING EQUIPMENT The Importance of The High Cost of Contact Seals Bearing Protection A common method of bearing protection is the contact seal. A contact seal Bearing failure is the leading cause is a bearing seal that uses contact on the shaft to retain lubrication and/or of rotating equipment failure across exclude contamination by creating a barrier to the bearing housing. Examples multiple industries and applications. of contact seals are lip seals, mechanical seals and magnetic seals. It leads to expensive unscheduled downtime and lost production. All contact seals have a finite life expectancy, eventually wearing at the point While there are many factors that of contact or grooving the shaft. As a result, they no longer effectively seal the contribute to failed bearings, over bearing enclosure. This short and unpredictable service life makes contact half of bearing failures are caused seals inadequate. Rotating equipment becomes unreliable, and catastrophic by contamination ingress into the failure due to bearing degradation is common. bearing housing and lubrication loss. To eliminate seal failure and increase equipment reliability, finite-life contact Manufacturers and users of rotating seals need to be replaced with a permanent solution. equipment are placing increased emphasis on bearing protection as a means of improving the overall reliability of their rotating equipment. � r ,} Stop LEADING CAUSES OF MOTOR FAILURE VBXX® Interface BEARINGS 51% Stator . ,,., ilk £ ,s VBX® Ring STATOR WINDINGS 16% D Groove I EXTERNAL 16% ,,, Static Dynamic UNKNOWN 10% ROTOR BEARINGS 5% SHAFT COUPLING 2% Rotor EASA:IEEE DATA 1 t -7, Rotor Drive Ring ,. t Lube Return it ^ y. SAME - DAY Expulsion Port SHIPPING AVAILABLE Stator Gasket MOTORS ® --• ", The Inpro/Seal® Solution - As the inventor of the original Bearing Isolator, ‘, ` Inpro/Seal has delivered proven permanent bearing `" protection for rotating equipment applications for more j , :. r than 30 years. • The Inpro/Seal Bearing Isolator is a non-contacting, permanent bearing -;; protection device. Inpro/Seal's patented design consists of a unitized stator and rotor that form a compound labyrinth seal with no wearing parts— ensuring permanent protection. The stator is typically pressed into the bearing PUMPS housing, while the rotor turns with the shaft. The Inpro/Seal Bearing Isolator protects in multiple ways. Lubricant is captured in the inner portion of the labyrinth and flows back to the bearing housing. Outside contamination attempting to enter the bearing housing is captured in the outer +w labyrinth paths and expelled through a port in the stator by centrifugal force and gravity. ;. '+ Inpro/Seal's patented VBX®vapor blocking ring inhibits the free transfer of vapor contamination when the rotating equipment is cycled off. Benefits: • Non-wearing, non-contacting, permanent bearing protection • Patented VBX® ring blocks the transfer of vapor contamination created by heating/cooling of the bearing enclosure PILLOW BLOCKS • Split designs available for easy installation • Can be installed by OEMs or retrofitted on site • Maintenance free •Zero energy consumption • Can accommodate shaft sizes of 0.625—48.0 in. (1.59— 121.92 cm)® `, • Standard temperature tolerances range from -35[F(-37 C)—400 F(204 C)* 400,' 11:4-\'' • Manufactured in bronze, stainless steel, aluminum or other materials for more extreme conditions *Utilizing special design and material provisions,produc ts can be manufactured to exceed these ranges. '" 1 s* N\ GEARBOXES L ,e ---'-' _ The Inpro/Seal®Bearing Isolator is I a non-contacting, non-wearing, \441446444miumnimerissoo, permanent bearing protection device. GUARANTEED PERFORMANCEp. The Inpro/Seal®Bearing isolator is backed r A Universal Solution by an unconditional performance guarantee. 1 The Inpro/Seal® Bearing Isolator is a unique barrier for contamination ingress See our website for complete details and lubrication retention for bearings installed in pumps, motors, gearboxes, --- _ _ -- ., —.."f pillow blocks, steam turbines, sleeve-bearing motors, paper machine rolls, machine tool spindles and many other types of rotating equipment. This technology has been applied across a variety of industries including chemical processing, food and beverage, mining, oil and gas, power generation, Unmatched primary metals, processing, and pulp and paper. Customer Service Inpro/Seal's responsive global sales No matter the size or complexity of your application, Inpro/Seal can design network is committed to making an isolator to fit your exact specifications. sure you have the right technology for your application, right when Experience You Can Trust you need it. We know that time Permanent bearing protection requires a custom engineered solution that means money for you. That's why takes into account all these factors: we offer same-day shipping on most • Lubrication type • Operating equipment products, even new designs. No • Bearing type • Shaft movement matter what your application, we • Flooded applications • RPM can deliver a custom engineered • Size restrictions • SFPM solution designed to meet your specific needs. You don't need to be an expert; our knowledgeable team will help. You can count on Inpro/Seal, the leader in bearing and system protection, to Technology you can rely on, maximize the uptime of your rotating equipment. We've been the trusted supported by customer service source for bearing isolator technology for more than 30 years and have you'll appreciate. installed millions of bearing isolators on multiple applications worldwide. The Inpro/Seal Advantage 7---imismion Inpro/Seal is committed to delivering innovative technology and superior customer support...standard with every solution. When you work with lnpro/Seal, you can expect: • Same-day shipments available on most products, including new designs • Custom engineered solutions for your application and operating environment • Knowledgeable sales network providing localized support • Unconditional performance guarantee—see website for complete details READY TO GET STARTED? f , Visit www.inpro-seal.com to contact your local Inpro/Seal representative or request a quote. All designs are custom engineered to fit exact requirements. The Inpro/Seal''Bearing Isolator is a custom engineered solution and some designs may be protected by one,more than one or none of the following US and/or foreign patents and/or pending patent applications including US Pat.7,052,014;6,419,233,6,311,984;6,234,489;6,182,972;6,062,568,5,951,020;5,865,441;5,498,006,5,378,000 and 5,335,921. INPRO/SEAL www.inpro-seal.com I info@inpro-seal.com I +1309-787-4971 A Waukesha Bearings Business d11.002.1-0C13 Fairbanks Nijhuis Paint Specifications • Coating Manufacturer Tnemec • Surface Preparation SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. • Prime Coat Series 27 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color 1211 Red Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor • Intermediate Coat Series N69 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color 1211 Red Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor • Finish Coat Series 1075 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color Pentair Blue Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor 0605223SR3.doc PC-1000 , FMt F.C. TYPDXY® SERIES 27 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Polyamide Epoxy COMMON USAGE Versatile low-temperature coating ideally suited for steel fabrication and OEM applications.Also widely used as a field tie- coat.Provides fast curing and rapid handling capabilities.Note:Series 27 conforms with air pollution regulations limiting Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC)to a maximum of 340 grams/litre(2.8 lbs/gal). COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide.Note:Epoxies chalk with extended exposure to sunlight.Lack of ventilation,incomplete mixing,miscatalyzation or the use of heaters that emit carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide during application and initial stages of curing may cause yellowing to occur. FINISH Flat PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available.Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. COATING SYSTEM PRIMERS Steel:Self-priming or Series 1,37H,66,L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F,90,94-H20, 135,394, 530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal:Self-priming,Series 66 or L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F. TOPCOATS Series 2H,30,66,73, 113, 114, 115,175,700,701,1028,1029,1070,1071, 1072,1074,1075,1077,1078.Note:Series 27 exterior exposed for 3 weeks or longer requires an epoxy intermediate coat or scarification prior to topcoating with Series 2H.Refer to appropriate topcoat data sheet for additional information. SURFACE PREPARATION STEEL SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning GALVANIZED STEEL&NON- Surface preparation recommendations will vary depending on substrate and exposure conditions.Contact your Tnemec FERROUS METAL representative or Tnemec Technical Services. OVERCOATING For overcoat applications,reference Tnemec Technical Bulletin No.98-10 and contact your Tnemec representative. ALL SURFACES Must be clean,dry and free of oil,grease and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 58.0±2.0%(mixed)t RECOMMENDED DFT 2.0 to 6.0 mils(50 to 150 microns)per coat.Note:Number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate, application method and exposure.Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME Temperature To Touch To Handle To Recoat 75°F(24°C) 1/2 hour 2 hours 3 hours 65°F(18°C) 3/4 hour 4 hours 5-6 hours 55°F(11°C) 1 hour 4-5 hours 6-8 hours 45°F(7°C) 1-2 hours 6-8 hours 9-12 hours 35°F(2°C) 2-3 hours 9-12 hours 12-15 hours Curing time varies with surface temperature,air movement,humidity and film thickness. VOLIIILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS Unthinned:2.36 lbs/gallon(282 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.83 lbs/gallon(339 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):2.83 lbs/gallon(339 grams/litre)t HAPS Unthinned:2.59 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.59 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):3.54 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 930 mil sq ft/gal(22.8 m°/L at 25 microns).See APPLICATION for coverage rates.t NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two:Part A and Part B PACKAGING 5 gallon(18.9L)pails and 1 gallon(3.79L)cans—Order in multiples of 2. NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 14.22±0.25 lbs(6.45±.11 kg)(mixed)t STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F(-7°C) Maximum 110°F(43°C) TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry)Continuous 250°F(121°C) Intermittent 275°F(135°C) SHELF LIFE 24 months at recommended storage temperature. FLASH POINT-SETA Part A:82°F(28°C) Part B:80°F(27°C) HEALTH&SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous.Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. ©September 29,2008 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. P°I'li'hed technical edata dined insnvctions are suh;ect cla ngie wid,out notice.The online catalog at www.tnemecont Page 1 of 2 should be referenced for the most cuaent technical data and instivctiuns or yuu may contact your'Cnemec representative for current technical data and insnvetlons. PRODUCT DATA SHEET F.C. TYPDXY° I SERIES 27 APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES Dry Mils(Microns) Wet Mils(Microns) Sq Ft/Gal(m2/Gai) Suggested(1) 4.0(100) 7.0(180) 233(21.6) Minimum 2.0(50) 3.5(90) 465(43.2) Maximum 6.0(150) 10.5(265) 155(14.4) (1)Note:Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness.Allow for overspray and surface irregularities.Wet film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns.Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance.t MIXING Power mix contents of each container,making sure no pigment remains on the bottom.Pour a measured amount of Part B into a clean container large enough to hold both components.Add an equal volume of Part A to Part B while under agitation.Continue agitation until the two components are thoroughly mixed.Do not use mixed material beyond pot life limits.Note:Both components should be above 50°F(10°C)prior to mixing.For applications to surfaces between 35°F to 50°F(2°C to 10°C),allow mixed material to stand thirty(30)minutes and restir before using.For optimum application properties,the material temperature should be above 60°F(16°C). THINNING Use No.60 or No.4 Thinner.For air spray,thin up to 10%or 3/4 pint(380 mL)per gallon.For airless spray,brush or roller,thin up to 5%or 1/4 pint(190 mL)per gallon. POT LIFE 16 hours at 35°F(2°C) 2 hours at 77°F(25°C) 1/2 hour at 100°F(38°C) APPUCATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID Mat'l Hose ID Atomizing Pot Pressure Pressure 5/16"or 3/8" 3/8"or 1/2" 75-100 psi 25-35 psi DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704 (7 9 or 9.5 mm) (9'mm)2'7 (5.2-6.9 bar) (1.7-2.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'!Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.015"-0.019" 4000-4800 psi 1/4"or 3/8" 60 mesh (380-485 microns) (276-331 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (250 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment,applicator technique and weather conditions. Note:Application over inorganic zinc-rich primers:Apply a wet mist coat and allow tiny bubbles to form.When bubbles disappear in 1 to 2 minutes,apply a full wet coat at specified mil thickness. Roller:Roller application optional when environmental restrictions do not allow spraying.Use 3/8"or 1/2"(9.5 mm to 12.7 mm)synthetic woven nap covers. Brush:Recommended for small areas only.Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 35°F(2°C) Maximum 135°F(57°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F(3°C)above the dew point.Coating won't cure below minimum surface temperature. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. tValues may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc.TIIE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE.ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF.The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As ap.lication,environmental and design factors can va significantly,due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coatin•. 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City,Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMEC1 Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com ©September 29,2008 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. PDS27 Page 2 of 2 TVEMEC HI-BUILD EPDXOUNE® II SERIES N69 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Polyamidoamine Epoxy COMMON USAGE An advanced generation epoxy for protection and finishing of steel and concrete.It has excellent resistance to abrasion and is suitable for immersion as well as chemical contact exposure.Contact your local Tnemec representative for a list of chemicals.This product can also be used for lining storage tanks that contain demineralized,deionized or distilled water. COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide.Note:Epoxies chalk with extended exposure to sunlight.Lack of ventilation,incomplete mixing,miscatalyzation or the use of heaters that emit carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide during application and initial stages of curing may cause yellowing to occur. FINISH Satin SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS A two-coat system at 4.0-6.0 dry mills(100-150 dry microns)per coat passes the performance requirements of MIL-PRF- 4556F for fuel storage. PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available.Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. COATING SYSTEM SURFACER/FILLER/PATCHER 215 PRIMERS Steel:Self-priming or Series 1,27,37H,66,L69,L69F,N69F,V69F,90E-92,90-97,H90-97,90G-1K97,90-98,91-H20,94- H20, 135, 161,394,530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal:Self-priming or Series 66,L69,L69F,N69F,V69F, 161 Concrete:Self-priming or Series 130,215,218 CMU:Self-priming or 130,215,218, 1254 TOPCOATS 22,46H-413,66,L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F,72,73,84, 104, 113, 114, 141,156, 157, 161, 175,180, 181,287,446, 740,750, 1028, 1029,1070, 1070V, 1071, 1071V, 1072, 1072V, 1074, 1074U, 1075, 1075U,1077,1078, 1080, 1081.Refer to COLORS on applicable topcoat data sheets for additional information.Note:The following recoat times apply for Series N69:Immersion Service-Surface must be scarified after 60 days.Atmospheric Service-After 60 days,scarification or an epoxy tie-coat is required.When topcoating with Series 740 or 750,recoat time for N69 is 21 clays for atmospheric service. Contact your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations. SURFACE PREPARATION PRIMED STEEL Immersion Service:Scarify the epoxy prime coat surface by abrasive blasting with fine abrasive before topcoating if it has been exterior exposed for 60 days or longer and N69 is the specified topcoat. STEEl Immersion Service:SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Near-White Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. Non-Immersion Service:SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. GALVANIZED STEEL&NON- Surface preparation recommendations will vary depending on substrate and exposure conditions.Contact your Tnemec FERROUS METAL representative or Tnemec Technical Services. CAST/DUCTILE IRON Contact your Tnemec representative or Tnemec Technical Services. CONCRETE Allow new concrete to cure 28 days.For optimum results and/or immersion service,abrasive blast referencing SSPC- SP13/NACE 6,ICRI CSP 2-4 Surface Preparation of Concrete and Tnemec's Surface Preparation and Application Guide. CMU Allow mortar to cure for 28 days.Level protrusions and mortar spatter. PAINTED SURFACES Non-Immersion Service:Ask your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations. ALL SURFACES Must be clean,dry and free of oil,grease,chalk and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 67.o±2.0%(mixed)t RECOMMENDED DFT 2.0 to 10.0 mils(50 to 255 microns)per coat.Note:MIL-PRF-4556F applications require two coats at 4.0-6.0 mils(100-150 microns)per coat.Otherwise,the number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate,application method and exposure.Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME AT 5 MILS DR Without 44-700 Accelerator Temperature To Handle To Recoat Immersion 90°F(32°C) 5 hours 7 hours 7 days 80°F(27°C) 7 hours 9 hours 7 days 70°F(21°C) 9 hours 12 hours 7 days 60°F(16°C) 16 hours 22 hours 9 to 12 days 50°F(10°C) 24 hours 32 hours 12 to 14 days Curing time varies with surface temperature,air movement,humidity and film thickness.Note:For faster curing and low- temperature applications,acid No.44-700 Epoxy Accelerator;see separate product data sheet for cure information. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS Unthinned:2.40 lbs/gallon(285 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):2.80 lbs/gallon(334 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.80 lbs/gallon(335 grams/litre) HAPS Unthinned:2.40 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):3.25 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.40 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 1,074 mil sq ft/gal(26.4 m2/L at 25 microns).See APPLICATION for coverage rates.t ©July 29 2013 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.com Page 1 of 2 should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. PRODUCT DATA SHEET HI-BUILD EPDXOLINE® II I SERIES N69 NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two:Part A(amine)and Part B(epoxy)-One(Part A)to one(Part B)by volume. PACKAGING 5 gallon(18.9L)pails and 1 gallon(3.79L)cans-Order in multiples of 2. NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 13.67±0.25 lbs(6.10±.11 kg)(mixed)1- STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F(-7°C) Maximum 110°F(43°C) TEMPERATURERBISTANCE (Dry)Continuous 250°F(121°C) Intermittent 275°F(135°C) SHELF LIFE Part A:24 months;Part B: 12 months at recommended storage temperature. FLASH POINT-SETA Part A:82°F(28°C) Part B:93°F(34°C) HEALTH&SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous.Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES Dry Mils(Microns) Wet Mils(Microns) Sq Ft/Gal(m2/Gal) Suggested(1) 6.0(150) 9.0(230) 179(16.6) Minimum 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75) 537(49.9) Maximum 10.0(250) 15.0(375) 107(10.0) Dense Concrete&Masonry:From 100 to 150 sq ft(9.3 to 13.9 m2)per gallon. CMU:From 75 to 100 sq ft(7.0 to 9.3 ma)per gallon. (1)Note for Steel:Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness.Also, Series N69 can be spray applied to an optional high-build film thickness range of 8.0 to 10.0 dry mils(205 to 255 dry microns)or 11.5 to 14.5 wet mils(209 to 370 wet microns).Allow for overspray and surface irregularities.Film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns.Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance.t MIXING 1.Start with equal amounts of both Parts A&B. 2.Using a power mixer,separately stir Parts A&B. 3.(For accelerated version.If not using 44-700,skip to No.4.) Add four(4)fluid ounces of 44-700 per gallon of Part A while Part A is under agitation. 4.Add Part A to Pars B under agitation,stir until thoroughly mixed. 5.Both components must be above 50°F(10°C)prior to mixing.For application of the unacceleratecl version to surfaces between 50°F to 60°F(10°C to 16°C)or the accelerated version to surfaces between 35°F to 50°F(2°C to 10°C),allow mixed material to stand 30 minutes and restir before using. 6.For optimum application properties,the material temperature should be above 60°F(16°C). Note:The use of more than the recommended amount of 44-700 will adversely affect performance. THINNING Use No.4 or No.60 Thinner.For air spray,thin up to 10%or 3/4 pint(380 mL)per gallon.For airless spray,roller or brush,thin up to 5%or 1/4 pint(190 mL)per gallon. POT LIFE Without 44-700:6 hours at 50°F(10°C) 4 hours at 75°F(24°C) 1 hour at 100°F(38°C) With 44-700:2 hours at 50°F(10°C) 1 hour at 75°F(24°C) 30 minutes at 100°F(38°C) SPRAY LIFE Without 44-700: 1 hour at 75°F(24°C) With 44-700:30 minutes at 75°F(24°C) Note:Spray application after listed times will adversely affect ability to achieve recommended dry film thickness. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID Mat'l Hose ID AtomizinPressureg Pot Pressure 5/16"or 3/8" 3/8"or 1/2" 75-100 psi 10-20 psi DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704 (7.9 or 9.5 mm) (9.5 or 2.7 (5.2-6.9 bar) (0.7-1.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray$ Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.015"-0.019" 3000-4800 psi 1/4"or 3/8" 60 mesh (380-485 microns) (207-330 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (250 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment,applicator technique and weather conditions. $Spray application of first coat on CMU should be followed by backrolling.Note:Application over inorganic zinc-rich primers:Apply a wet mist coat and allow tiny bubbles to form.When bubbles disappear in 1 to 2 minutes,apply a full wet coat at specified mil thickness. Roller:Use 3/8"or 1/2"(9.5 mm or 12.7 mm)synthetic woven nap roller cover.Use longer nap to obtain penetration on rough or porous surfaces. Brush:Recommended for small areas only.Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. SURFACETEMPERAIURE Minimum 50°F(10°C) Maximum 135°F(57°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F(3°C)above the dew point.Coating will not cure below minimum surface temperature. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. 4 Values may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc.THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF.The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As a.plication,environmental and desi:n factors can vary significantly,clue care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating. 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City,Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMECI Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com ©July 29,2013 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. PDSN69 Page 2 of 2 Endura-Shield ® II SERIES1075 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane CONMONUSAGE A coating highly resistant to abrasion, wet conditions, corrosive fumes and exterior weather- ing. High build quality combines with project specific primers for two-coat, labor saving systems. Fast curing options are available; see Curing Time below. Product has some applications as a direct to metal finish. Contact your Tnemec representative for more details. NOT FOR IMMERSION SERVICE. ® COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide. Note: Certain colors may require multiple coats depending on method of application and finish coat color. When feasible, the preceding coat should be in the same color family, but noticeably different. . FINISH Semi-gloss SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS Series 1075 meets the requirements of SSPC-36 Paint Standard. PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. TNEMF.0 COATING SYSTEM PRIMERS Steel: Series 20, FC20, 27,66, N68, N69, 91-H2O, 90-97, 104, 135, N140, 161, 530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal: Series 66, N69, 161 Concrete: Series 66, N69, 84, 104, 161 CMU: 54-660, 130. Intermediate coat required. Note: Before topcoating with Series 1075, Series 530 exterior exposed more than 24 hours must first be scarified or receive an intermediate coat of Tnemec polyamide epoxy. Also, Series N68 exterior exposed for 21 days or Series N69, 104, N140 or 161 exterior exposed more than two months must first be scarified or reprimed with themselves. Blasting with fine abrasive is the preferred method of scarification. TOPCOATS Series 76, optional when extended weatherability is desired. SURFACE PREPARATION ALL SURFACES Must be clean, dry and free of oil, grease and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS* 75 ± 2.0% (mixed) RECONMENDEDOFT 2.0 to 5.0 mils (50 to 125 microns) per coat. Note: Number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate, application method and exposure. Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME Temperature To Touch To Handle To Recoat 75°F (24°C) 1 hour 6 hours 8 hours To resist moisture condensation: 6 hours. Curing time varies with surface temperature, air movement, humidity and film thickness. Note: For faster curing and low-temperature applications, add No. 44-710 Urethane Accelerator; see separate product data sheet. Contact Tnemec Technical Services for force curing times and temperatures. VOLATILE ORGANIC Unthinned No. 39 Thinner No. 42 Thinner No. 48 Thinner COMPOUNDS* (Maximum 15%) (Maximum 15%) (Maximun 15%) 1.84 lbs/gallon 2.42 lbs/gallon 2.48 lbs/gallon 2.55 lbs/gallon (220 grams/litre) (290 grams/litre) (297 grams/litre) (305 grams/litre) THEORETICAL COVERAGE* 1,203 mil sq ft/gal (29.5 m2/L at 25 microns). See APPLICATION for coverage rates. NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two: Part A and Part B MIXING RATIO By volume: Eight (Part A) to one (Part B) PACKAGING Three Gallon Kit: Consists of a partially-filled five-gallon can of Part A and a partially-filled half-gallon can of Part B. When mixed, yields three gallons (11.4L). One Gallon Kit: Consists of a partially-filled one-gallon can labeled Part A and a partially- filled pint can labeled Part B. When mixed, yields one gallon (3.79L). NET WEIGHTPERGALLON* 12.75 ± 0.25 lbs (5.80 ± .11 kg) STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F (-7°C) Maximum 110°F (43°C) TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry) Continuous 250°F (121°C) Intermittent 275°F (135°C) Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. ©December 2002, by Tnemec Company, Inc. 1075 SERIES1075 Endura-Shield ® II TECHNICAL DATA continued FLASH POINT-SETA Part A: 95°F (35°C) Part B: 135°F (57°C) SHELF LIFE 12 months at recommended storage temperature. HEALTH&SAFETY This product contains chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous. Read container label warning and material safety data sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES* Conventional Build (Spray, Brush or Roller) High-Build (Spray Only) Dry Mils Wet Mils Sq Ft/Gal Dry Mils Wet Mils Sq Ft/Gal (Microns) (Microns) (mz/Gal) (Microns) (Microns) (m2/Gal) Suggested 2.5 (65) 3.5 (90) 481 (44.7) 4.0 (100) 5.5 (140) 301 (28.0) Minimum 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75) 602 (55.9) 3.0 (75) 4.0 (100) 401 (37.3) Maximum 3.0 (75) 4.0 (100) 401 (37.3) 5.0 (125) 6.5 (165) 241 (22.4) Note: Can be spray applied at 3.0 to 5.0 mils (75 to 125 microns) DFT per coat when extra protection or the elimination of a coat is desired. Allow for overspray and surface irregularities. Film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns. Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance. MIXING Stir contents of the container marked Part A, making sure no pigment remains on the bottom. Add the contents of the can marked Part B to Part A while under agitation. Continue agitation until the two components are thoroughly mixed. When used with 44-710 Urethane Accelerator, first blend 44-710 into Part A under agitation; continue as above. Do not use mixed material beyond pot life limits. Caution: Part B is moisture-sensitive and will react with atmospheric moisture. Unused material must be kept tightly closed at all times. POTLIFE 11/2 hours at 77°F (25°C) unthinned 2 hours at 77°F (25°C) thinned THINNING For air or airless spray, thin up to 15% or 11/4 pints (570 mL) per gallon with No. 42 Thinner if temperatures are below 80°F (27°C), use No. 48 Thinner for temperatures above 80°F (27°C). For brush and roller, thin 15% or 1% pints (570 mL) per gallon with No. 39 Thinner. Note: Thinning is required for proper application. Caution: Do not add thinner if more than 30 minutes have elapsed after mixing. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 35°F (2°C) Maximum 120°F (49°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F (3°C) above the dew point. If coating is exposed to moisture before the applicable cure parameters are met, dull, flat or spotty appearing areas may develop. Actual cure time will vary with air movement, film thick- ness and humidity. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Air Cap Air Hose Mat'l Hose Atomizing Pot Tip ID ID Pressure Pressure DeVilbiss E 78 5/16" or 3/8" 3/8" or 1/2" 75-90 psi 10-20 psi MBC (7.9 or 9.5 mm) (9.5 or 12.7 mm) (5.2-6.2 bar) (0.7-1.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.009"-0.013" 3000-3500 psi 1/4" or 3/8" 100 mesh (230-330 microns) (207-241 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (150 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment, applicator technique and weather conditions. Roller: Use 1/4" (6.4 mm) synthetic nap cover. Do not use medium or long nap roller covers. Two coats are required to obtain dry film thickness above 3.0 mils (75 microns). Brush: Recommended for small areas only. Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. Two coats are required to obtain recommended film thickness above 3.0 mils (75 microns). CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. * Values may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY.Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc. THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As application,environmental and design factors can vary significantly,due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating.FOR INDUSTRIAL USE ONLY. TNEMEC COMPANY INCORPORATED PRINTED IN USA 6800 CORPORATE DRIVE,KANSAS CITY,MISSOURI 64120-1372 TEL 1 800 TNEMEC 1 WUJW.tnemec.com (Y DAT305)1075 Omega Close-Coupled Design with Straight Bore Hubs NOTE:Hub/shoulder design B C - B B c B varies per coupling size.Consult Rexnord \ for specific size assembly drawings. 1 x. UJ1 --"?.----) I. 1 I i,____ • .._! o, • o (OUT)_ _ (OUT) (IN) (IN) A 0 0 \,...... - - F (HUBS OUTBOARD) (HUBS INBOARD) Dimensions(in) Recom. Continuous Continuous Coupling Max. HP/100 Torque Max. C F Weight OO Size Bore RPM (lb-in) RPM A B D (lb) (in)OO (In) (Out) (In) (Out) E2 1.13 0.30 190 7500 3.50 0.94 1.34 1.90 1.85 3.22 3.78 1.2 E3 1.38 0.58 365 7500 4.00 1.50 0.81 1.31 2.32 3.81 4.31 2.4 E4 1.Gu 6.88 fSt 7568 4.56 1.69 0.44 1.31 2.60 9.q1 4.60 3.0 E5 1.88 1.48 925 7500 5.38 1.75 0.81 1.81 3.13 4.31 5.31 5.4 E 10 2.13 2.30 1450 Th00 6.38 1.88 0.58 1.84 3.65 4.31 5.56 8.2 E20 2.38 3.65 2300 6600 7.25 2.06 0.50 2.38 4.48 4.62 6.50 13.0 E30 2.88 5.79 3650 5800 8.25 2.31 0.56 2.44 5.42 5.19 7.06 21 E40 3.38 8.85 5500 5000 9.50 2.50 0.56 2.68 6.63 5.56 7.68 35 E50 3.63 12.14 7650 4200 11.00 2.75 0.63 3.38 8.13 6.13 8.88 54 E60 4 19.84 12,500 3800 12.50 3.25 0.69 3.44 8.75 7.19 9.94 72 E70 4.5 35.12 22,125 3600 14.00 3.62 0.75 3.75 9.25 8.00 11.00 86 E80 6 62.7 39,500 2000 16.00 4.87 0.75 5.00 11.25 10.50 14.75 170 E100 6.75 135 85,050 1900 21.00 5.50 1.75 3.75 14.13 12.75 14.75 244 E120 7.5 270 170,100 1800 25.00 6.00 2.25 4.88 17.63 14.24 16.88 425 E140 9.00 540 340,200 1500 30.00 7.00 3.00 5.00 20.88 17.00 19.00 746 0 See page 17 for larger bore capacities with shallow keyways. OO With maximum bore hubs. Split-in-Half Flex Element Reversible Hubs Allows disassembly and replacement without disturbing hubs Accommodates different shaft spacing requirements,and allows compression bushings to or connected equipment. be installed from either side of the hub. s ,r At .> lip7r .` 4. 4. t • � • t" ' f b .,.. Straight Bore Hubs QD Hubs and Bushings Taper-Lock Hubs and Bushings 8 NOTE:Dimensions subject to change.Certified dimensions of ordered material furnished on request. Installation '\ y k e -, iEa Jl�".i. e — At Mount one hub to shaft,leave other hub loose for Place half of the Rexnord Omega element around hubs and Mount other half of the Omega element.Tighten all cap adjustment of spacing. secure with self-locking cap screws.Omega element will screws to recommended torques below and installation is space the other hub.Now secure the other hub. done.Refer to the installation instruction for further details. Tested Tough ; ., Rigorous testing demonstrates that the Rexnord Omega a coupling protects connected equipment from the damaging effects of misalignment,vibration and gross overload. Where other coupling designs might allow equipment 1,.e+.1 to, damage,the super flexible element of Rexnord Omega couplings minimizes the reactionary forces on equipment + bearings under severe misalignment conditions and ; reduces the effects of excessive shock overloads. ' r Severe static testing(5 x rating)shows element flexibility, Demonstrates coupling's ability to accept severe rugged design and positive adhesive bond to the metal misalignment. shoes. Omega Coupling IMPORTANT Allowable Misalignment Recommended Cap Screw Torque for Proper Installation 4° Parallel + Coupling Size Torque-Dry (lb-in) (lb-ft) Size 2-10 t 2 OMEGA ~ ~ 3 3° HUB OMEGAHUB 4 5 204 17 10 20 co Angular 30 ar Size 20-50 — 40 360 30 a 2° 50 60 OMEGA Size 60-80 °Nag HUB 80 900 75 100 3240 270 1° \ 140 140 7080 590 Size 100-140 /`/ NOTE:Cap screws have self-locking patches which should not be reused more than twice.Cap screws can O° be further used if a thread locking adhesive is applied. 1/32 1/16 3/32 1/8 3/16 Do NOT Lubricate Cap Screw Threads. Parallel IMPORTANT NOTE: Coupling alignment is directly related to NOTE:Any combination of parallel and angular misalignment which falls under the triangle will not cause a premature smooth,efficient equipment operation.Care fatigue failure of the flexible element in normal use. should be taken for best possible alignment. 7 MOTOR DATA SHEET MOTOR/EQUIPMENT TAG FMB0605223A01 MOTOR NUMBER 18701927 SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA MANUFACTURER US Motors MODEL/SERIES CTI MODEL NO. 18701927 FRAME 254T ENCLOSURE TEFC NEMA DESIGN B HP 5 SERVICE FACTOR 1.15 RPM 885 INSULATION CLASS F VOLTS 460 FULL LOAD AMPS 7.9 AMBIENT TEMP 40 Deg C. PHASE 3 NO LOAD AMPS 4.3 DESIGN TEMP RISE B HERTZ 60 LOCK ROTOR AMPS 43.8 INRUSH CODE LETTER F 100%LOAD 75%LOAD 50%LOAD GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES: 85.5 87.7 86.6 GUARANTEED MINIMUM POWER FACTOR: 71.3 64.5 52.4 MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: 2.9 KVAR ACCESSORIES MOTOR WINDING HEATER 115 VOLTS 48 WATTS WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION WINDING TEMP SWITCHES(YES/NO) YES RTD: Not Applicable TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE #OF WIRES NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP COEFFICIENT RECOMMENDED DEGREES RECOMMENDED DEGREES ALARM CELSIUS TRIP CELSIUS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS INVERTER DUTY*(YES/NO) YES PART WINDING(YES/NO) NO WYE-DELTA(YES/NO) NO 2 SPEED, 1 WINDING(YES/NO) NO 2 SPEED,2 WINDING(YES/NO) NO AREA CLASSIFICATION: Not Applicable CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE *Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31. Clean Water Services 16222-Data Sheet Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 CONFORMED SPECIFICATIONS Pentair Pump Group 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City,KS 66110 913-371-5000 FAX 913-748-4025 CERTIFIED MOTOR PERFORMANCE DATA MOTOR MANUFACTURER: U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS DATE: 17-Jan-19 FM PURCHASE ORDER #: 11868704 FM TAG#: 0605223A01 PERFORMANCE DATA BASED ON STANDARD RULES OF: X IEEE X ASA X NEMA HP SYNCHRONOUS FULL LOAD* FRAME TYPE ENCLOSURE SPEED(RPM) SPEED(RPM) NUMBER 5 900 885 254T CTI TEFC `Full Load Speed Tolerance Per NEMA MG1-12.46 is+/-20%of slip(Slip=Synchronous RPM-Full Load RPM) AMPERES MAX.TEMP. RISE NEMA PHASE HERTZ VOLTS FULL LOCKED INSULATION X RTD SERVICE KVA/HP NEMA LOAD ROTOR CLASS THERM. FACTOR CODE DESIGN 3 60 460 7.9 34.2 F 80 DEG C 1.15 F B AT1.0SF TORQUE AT FULL VOLTAGE MINIMUM GUARANTEED POWER FACTOR FULL LOAD LOCKED PULLOUT EFFICIENCY TORQUE AT STARTING BREAKDOWN FULL 3/4 1/2 FULL 3/4 1/2 FULL LOAD PERCENT OF FULL LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD SPEED(LB.FT) 85.5 87.7 86.6 71.3 64.5 52.4 29.7 155 233 VSS n VHS n NRR n SRC IT HORIZ XQ BEARINGS: PAINT: (Attach Technical Data Sheets) Drive End Lubrication: LOWER XQ Factory Standard Oil X❑Grease El Other O'D osite End Lubrication: UPPER Oil XQ Grease MOTOR NO.: 18701927 MOTOR WEIGHT: 300 LBS. ROTATION: EBI-DIRECTIONAL Elm oCCW Certified by: gamed Selayiteet Date: 17-Jan-19 Revision # 1 FM013/0194 Pentair Pump Group 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City,KS 66110 913-371-5000 FAX 913-748-4025 Accessory Data Motor Manufacturer: U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS Date: 17-Jan-19 FM Purchase Order#: 11868704 FM Tag#: 0605223A01 Required Not Required Description Space Heaters: X ❑ Watts: 48 Voltage: 115 Thermostats: X❑ ❑ Type: EIN.O. XDN.C. Thermistors: ❑ X❑ Make&Model: Trip Range: Quantity _relay not Supplied Per Motor: _relay supplied:Type: Ofactory set Ofield adjustable wiring diagram/ Winding RTD's: X❑ Make&Model: Construction/OHM Rating: Quantity _relay not Supplied Per Motor _relay supplied:Type: Ofactory set field adjustable wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Bearing RTD's: ❑ X❑ Make&Model: Construction/OHM Rating: Quantity _relay not Supplied relay supplied:Type: Elfactory set Ofield adjustable —wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Vibration Sensor: ElX❑ Make&Model: _relay not Supplied relay supplied:Type: Ofactory set Dfield adjustable —wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Tests: XO � X Complete Initial Test,unwitnessed -Sound Test,unwitnessed Vibration Test,unwitnessed _-Polarization Idex,witnessed _Complete Initial Test,witnessed _Reed Critical Frequency Test, unwitnessed X Short Commercial Test(Routine), witnessed IEEE841+Enhanced No Load Test,unwitnessed Other Features: TEFC, HORIZONTAL, PREMIUM EFFICIENT, INVERTER DUTY/PART 31, HOSTILE DUTY DESIGN 1.15 SERVICE FACTOR(1.0 ON VFD POWER), CLASS F INSULATION, 40 DEGREE C AMBIENT, INSULIFE 2000 TRTMT NEMA DESIGN B, BI-DIRECTIONAL ROTATION, F-1 ASSEMBLY, 115V SPACE HEATERS, Q3 N.C.THERMOSTATS CLASS B TEMP RISE @ 1.0 SF, 60,000 HR L-10 BEARING LIFE, BRASS DRAINS, GROUND LUG IN CONDUIT BOX AEGIS SHAFT GROUND RING, SPECIAL BALANCE, STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE, DIRECT CONNECTED TO LOAD SHAFT DEFLECTION DOES NOT EXCEED .002 MILS THROUGHOUT THE OPERATING RANGE, 87.5% NNE, 71.3% PF MOTOR NAMEPLATES ARE STAMPED'MEETS NEMA MG-1, PART 31', CUSTOMER MOTOR DATA SHEET INCLUDED EXCEPTIONS/CLARIFICATIONS/COMMENTS: REVISION#1, 1/17/2019:ADDED SHAFT DEFLECTION OF .002 MILS MAX, COMPLETED CUSTOMER MOTOR DATA SHEET CONFIRMATION THAT MOTOR NAMEPLATE IS MARKED NEMA MG-1 PART 31 COMPLIANT, ADDED AEGIS SHAFT GRD Certified by: Zzmee.Seetayket Date: 17-Jan-19 Revision#: 1 FM015/0198 EFFECTIVE: DIMENSION PRINT PRINT: 05-JUL-18 WORLD MOTOR INVERTER DUTY&OVERSIZED 0/B 08-1014-01 SUPERSEDES: FRAME: 250T SHEET: NEW BASIC TYPE: CTI 1 OF 1 - C P - -N-- - AB w - BS- -AC - i C) II T '0111717-l6slimil°I fl() IL ► ,oToaS "ID f t AF /'rut..„_iati",„ ___s_ D,..._..._�...._..�.,, i T.N..- • : 1 smuley • II ill AA SIZE EV CONDUIT J E-_^ H � �G �- 2E 4 HOLES _2F BA -A 1 B ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND MILLIMETERS UNITS A B C D E 20 3 E G +0H 5 J K N V IN 12.50 12.00 24.94 6.25 5.00 10.00 .75 .53 2.44 4.25 4.38 MM 318 305 633 159 127 254 19 13 62 108 111 UNITS 0 P 2 T o01 MIN w AA AB AC AF BA -.IN 12.63 13.47 2.03 1.625 3.75 .38 11.45 8.73 3.25 4.25 MM 320 342 52 41.28 95 10 1.25 NPT 291 222 83 108 UNITS BS EV MIN KEY V SQ IN 5.00 1.00 2.91 .375 MM 127 25 74 9.53 V FRAME UNITS t2F - 254T .03 IN 8.25 MM 210 - 256T IN 10.00 MM 254 1.DIMENSIONS MAY VARY.25 DUE TO CASTING AND/OR w FABRICATION VARIATIONS p w 2.LARGEST MOTOR WIDTH 0 3.STANDARD ASSEMBLY POSITION F-1 IS SHOWN. F-2 IS Q PROVIDED WHEN SPECIFIED. CONDUIT OPENING MAY co BE LOCATED IN STEPS OF 90°REGARDLESS OF THE LOCATION 0 4.TOLERANCES ARE SHOWN IN INCHES ONLY w Q 2 08-1014/- ISSUED BY 2 INFORMATION DISCLOSED ON THIS DOCUMENT R. LOPEZ z Nidec Motor Corporation IS CONSIDERED PROPRIETARY AND SHALL NOT BE APPROVED BY o REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT WRITTEN M�QTORS E. LIZANA = St. Louis, Missouri CONSENT OF NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION EFFECTIVE: NEMA FRAME SIZE PRINT: 08-MAR-18 WORLD MOTOR OUTLET BOXES 80-275 SUPERSEDES: CAST IRON CONSTRUCTION SHEET: NEW OVERSIZE REQUIREMENTS 1 OF 1 - XY - -� XX NOVONS1 AF MOUNTING FACE OF -1"-1 XW AA FRAME QTY 1 XZ PART NUMBERS OUTLET BOX DIMENSIONS FRAME VOLUME SIZE BASE PN COVER PN (CU IN.) AA AF XW XX XY XZ 140/180 2067320-000 2046171-000 65 3/4 NPT 2.63 1.44 6.84 6.94 3.63 210 2062434-000 2044277-000 100 1 NPT 3.00 1.81 8.00 7.44 4.28 250 2062415-000 2039106-000 150 1-1/4 NPT 3.25 1.88 8.75 8.31 4.63 280 2062407-000 2046837-000 360 1-1/2 NPT 3.84 2.25 10.00 10.06 5.44 320 2062471-000 2048919-000 470 2 NPT 4.75 3.00 11.81 11.56 6.34 360/400 2065474-000 2049997-000 860 3 NPT 5.75 3.69 14.00 14.44 7.56 1. DIMENSIONS INCLUDE GASKET MATERIAL THICKNESS BETWEEN BASE AND FRAME AND o BETWEEN BASE AND COVER. 0 2. FOR 440 FRAME SIZE REFER TO OTHER DIMENSION PRINTS U ISSUED BY Z 80 275/- TIMMERMANN INFORMATION DISCLOSED ON THIS DOCUMENT APPROVED BY BY 0 Nidec Motor Corporation IS CONSIDERED PROPRIETARY AND SHALL NOT BE MOTORS T. MIDDLETON St. LOUTS Missouri REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT OF NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATIONMai MOTORS CUSTOMER: Pentair Flow Technologies ORDER NO.: 18701927-100 BEARING LIFE CALCULATION FOR HORIZONTAL MOTOR Bearing life can be calculated with various degrees of sophistication, depending on the accuracy with which the operating conditions can be defined. Basic rating life equation The most simple method of life calculation is to use the ISO or ABMA equation for basic rating life which is: 16667 (C Basic rating life equation: — Llo — N ' P Where: L,o = Basic rating life in hours C = Basic dynamic load rating P= Equivalent dynamic bearing load (rotor wt. + magnetic force) P= Exponent of the life equation 3 for ball bearings N= Revolutions per minute SIZE: 6309 Bearing Life (hrs) = Exceeds 100,000 RADIAL LOAD: 75 AXIAL THRUST: 0 N= 884 C= 12400 P= 75 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION BY: ELG ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI DATE: 07/05/18 air-- Y` 1 MOTORS 900 10 25 C EFFICIENCY p K R p \ C W T POWER FACTOR E E D N \ T —895 —8 —20 —100 AMPS I E I N I F • _ - - _ _ _ _ INPUT POWER N U N F T ■ RPM —890 —6 —15 —75 / A ________ _ R M A p p / IIN M S D • ' __ . ■ \ 7 \< '—885 —4 —10 —50 DISCLAIMER \ p I . - - / - THE GRAPH DATA IS i 1 / F i i / ■ ',-----' NOTED OTHERWISE. i i ...- - - . - J \ 880 2 5 25 _ - _ _ _ _ / / 5.00 Hp 460 Volts 60 Hz / / ■■- 40°C MPI=249902 ' —875 —0 —0 —0 7.00 14.00 21.00 28.00 35.00 TORQUE IN LB-FT 07-09-2018 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION NAMEPLATE DATA CATALOG NUMBER I I-D5V4C-P II NAMEPLATE PART#: l 422699-007 I MODEL "' 1 FR 254T I TYPE CTI ENCL TEFC SHAFT — OPP END BRG '" 45BC03JPP3-QTY 1 :,) END BRG 45BCO2JPP3-QTY 1 MAX PH 3 40 C ID# I (ref:Order#:18701927,Type:SO,Line#:100) 11 AMB INSUL _. Asn _._ ____ �_ _._ CLASS F it Pos F1 DUTY cow HP 5 1 RPM I 885 --- _ � � FP `` ----=_ 7,=_._ -_ __=1 RPM ;,_._.. -7;= _ _._.--rl VOLTS 460 1 :_...xx w 1 ==:_. _.___ T VOLTS I :: __ ._7 _ -_-_.__ FL FL 7.5 1 _ _:: _.(•�... _=.. w_-::( __. AMPS AMPS 1>• __ ,7 _,__._ _ t 8.4 SF SF - __ 7 1:. I AMPS AMPS SF 1,15 DESIGN B ... -_] CODE F l SF '-rv-'I DESIGN a CODE 1 NEMA NOM NOM EFFICIENCY875 t 71.3 I Kilowatt 37 1 EFFICIENCY I PF PF GUARANTEED MAX HZ E TNt 85.5 I -:::I HZ 60 11 EFFICIENCY "7 KVAR HAZARDOUS LOCATION DATA(IF APPUCABLE): DIVISION _ _ .. : :-q CLASS I I GROUP I TEMP CODE I CLASS II ;w.::= _:.__.._ . = =-1 GROUP II -__..._ =1 VFD DATA(IF APPLICABLE): VOLTS 460 - =::I . AMPS 1 7.9 - -___ •I TORQUE 1 29.7LB-FT TORQUE 2 --: _ __._. ---w .1 VFD LOAD TYPE 1 VT/PVMA VFD LOAD TYPE 2 VFD I-ERTZ RANGE 1 6-60 11 VFD HERTZ RANGE 2 z_ _.__--. _--.-..______.. ,I VFD SPEED RANGE 1 90-900 1 VFD SPEED RANGE 2 (E== =-= n===—_---=--=-,:_ _--:==::w:-'=-'`I SERVICE FACTOR 1.00 J FL SLIP u__._ --__ --_._ _. NO.POLES fc::.------:.... ---:_---::_-- .._==:I MAGNETIZJNGAMPS c -_____ .:_:_:: ____.......... --- 1 VECTOR MAX RPM - 1 Encoder PPR -_---- _ 1 Radians/Seconds fi========..__= ________==1 ___. _ ..._...-- TEAO DATA(IF APPUCABLE): FP(AIR OVER) t� _---_-- _- :: � I-P(AIR OVER M/S) ; --:___--__ _1 RPM(AIR OVER) _---,---=------ .,7 RPM(M/SAIROVER ) FPM AIR VELOCITY c= ---_ 1 FPM AIR VELOCITY=c-_: u_--- --_w J FPM AIR VELOCITY _._1 M/S SEC - -_.. ADDI11ONAL NAMEPLATE DATA: Decal/Plate t 1l499495 Customer PN I FMB0605223A01 Notes , Non Rev Ratchet 3 Max Temp Rim 80CRISE/RES@1.00SF OPP/UpperOi1 Cap GREASE i Thermal(WOG) OVER TEMP PROT 2 SHAFT/Lower 01 Cap I Mm GREASE LL a Altitude Regulatory Notes I 1 Regulatory Compliance CC 030A COS Marine Duty Balance 0.06 IN/SEC-__ .__ Arctic Duty 3/4 Load Eff. I 88 6 Inrugl Limit I MO-tor\Mi ht(LBS) 300 Dmdion of Rotation Sound Level _ - Special Note 1_._ Vertical Thru3(LBS) Special Note 2 Thrust Percentage Special Nbte 3 Bearing Life I Special Note 4 Starting Method Special Note 5 I Nrmberof Starts Special Note 6 200/208V 60Hz Max Amps SH Max.Temp. 190V 50 hz Max Amps SH Voltage SH VOLTS 115V 380V 50 Hz Max Amps SH Watts SH WATTS=48W NEMA Inertia Load Inertia Sumpheater Voltage Sumpheater Wattage Special Accessory Note 1 Special Accessory Nbte 16 Special Accessory Note 2 1; Special Accessory Nbte 17 Special Accessory Note 3 Special Accessory Note 18 Sped al Accessory Note 4 GREASE LUBRICATED Special Accessory Note 19 Special Accessory Note 5 RECOMMENDED GREASE 1 Special Accessory Note 20 Special Accessory Note 6 EXXON POLYREX-EM Special Accessory Note 21 Special Accessory Note 7 Special Accessory Note 22 Sped al Accessory Nbte 8 Special Accessory Note 23 Special Accessory Note 9 Special Accessory Nbte 24 Special Accessory Nbte 10 Special Accessory Note 25 Special Accessory Note 11 Special Accessory Note 26 Special Accessory Note 12 1 Special Accessory Note 27 Special Accessory Note 13 Special Accessary Note 28 Special Accessory Note 14 Special Accessory Note 29 Special Accessory Nbte 15 Special Accessory Note 30 Heater i n-GB Voltage 3 Heater in GB Watts Zone 2 Group 1 Davison 2 Service Factor Note 1 Note 2 ..__, - _. 1..- -- __ - s Note3 ..__ !t _ ....._--.- _._. -..___. .__ !� ______. ___ __ ___ NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION t ST.LOUTS,MO TYPICAL NAMEPLATE DATA ACTUAL MOTOR NAMEPLATE LAYOUT MAY VARY SOME FIELDS MAY BE OMITTED Ndectrademarlsfollowed by the®symbol are registered with the U.S.Patent and Trademark Office. GREASE LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS Units are prelubricated at the factory and do not require initial lubrication. Relubricating interval depends upon speed,type of bearing and service. Refer to Table 1 for suggested regreasing inter- vals.Operating conditions may dictate more frequent lubrication.Motor must be at rest and electri- E cal controls should be locked open to prevent energizing while motor is being serviced(refer to sec- N tion on Safety). If motor is being taken out of storage,refer to storage procedures. G To relubricate bearings,remove the drain plug.Inspect grease drain and remove any blockage with a mechanical probe taking care not to damage bearing. $ A CAUTION Under no circumstances should a mechanical probe be used while H the motor is in operation.Add new grease at the grease inlet,refer to Table l for replenishment quantities. New grease must be compatible with grease in the motor(See Caution Note).Run the motor for 15 to 30 minutes with the drain plug removed to allow purging of any excess grease.Shut off unit and replace the drain plug.Return motor to service.Some motors have sealed bearings and are not regreasable. Over greasing can cause excessive bearing temperatures,premature lubricant breakdown and bearing failure.Care should be exercised against over greasing. Table 1 Recommended Grease Replenishment Quantities & Intervals (For lubrication of units in service) Bearing Number Bearing Grease Common AFBMA Typo FL Oi Lubrication IMervd 82XX 63XX XXBCO2 XXBC03 • 1801.3600 RPM 1211.1880 RPM 0.1200 RPM 62'J3 2ry 63r,:,-eK3 1;-35 17-30 3.2 2 Years 3 Yctus 3 YivrS 6295-6212 :'3-tr3 35-45 2 4 1 Y ar 2 Year, 2'lees E213-3215 6310.611' 65-75 5E45; ball 0.6 1 vc:rr 2 Ycan 2 YcaS 6216-6219 6312-61'5 3-D-9s 6L-15 6i 6 M Y:: 2 Yea- r`.22,3 229 6 55-632G a•14n 6-1G-1 6 1 M^5 t YAa' ?Yell NJ2G7 25R!J33 :3 F%J 1.)9 4 R;33 .14 tiU311 55RU 3 9 6 N A 6 y s Year N1215 7f.U22 2 6 1:J315 i3R.h2. !0 NJ221 'COR;J52 1 NJ212 s+1 7i+]2 14 •63377t •33i{UC? Rat_. ;F, N.; ,1,6r; 61::, A;1 79 11333-17 1,9 C7711 CARR N'A 4 4221.3 CAR11 N A 1 6 N3A 6 A,1Cg !YA1• C2316 C ARO t{-A 16 C222CS CARS N_A ! C2222 CARS 1 A 6 N A 3 M:•. E •z 5 C2226 GARS N:A 2 4 For motors mounted vertically or in hostile environments, reduce intervals shown by 50 percent. Refer to motor nameplate for bearings provided on a specific motor. For bearings not listed in table above,the amount of grease required may be calculated by the formula: G=0.11xDxB Where: G=Quantity of grease in fluid ounces. D=Outside diameter of bearing in inches. B=Width of bearing in inches. 5-En Table 2 RECOMMENDED GREASES THE FOLLOWING GREASES ARE INTERCHANGEABLE WITH THE GREASE AS PROVIDED IN UNITS SUPPLIED FROM FACTORY (UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE ON A LUBRICATION N NAMEPLATE PROVIDED ON MOTOR). G MANUFACTURER GREASE(NLGI No.2) 1 MOBIL CORP. POLYREX•EM CHEVRON U.S.A.INC. SRI NO.2 A CAUTION Greases of different bases(lithium,polyurea,clay,etc.)may not be compatible when mixed.Mixing such greases can result in reduced lubricant life and premature bearing failure. When necessary, prevent such intermixing by disassembling the motor,removing all old grease from bearings and housings(including all grease fill and drain holes).inspect and replace damaged bearings.Fill bearing housings and bearing approximately 30%full of new grease.Remove any excess grease extending beyond the edges of the bearing races and retainers. Refer to Table 2 for recommended greases. 6-En M ,I� OITORS CENTER OF GRAVITY CUSTOMER: Pentair Flow Technologies LLC ORDER NO: 18701927-100 rJ . VA di A 1-4- FRAME /TYPE A B C 254T-CTI 4.17 5.90 0.54 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI Silicone Rubber Heaters Improve Heat Transfer, .., ` , Speed Warm Ups and ,,, lor Decrease Wattage r' r Requirements '�' J�vk+ 4 yu Rugged,yet thin, lightweight and flexible—the use of Watlow®silicone rubber heaters is limited only by the '' ��� """ =�t imagination. With these heaters, heat can be placed where 0.055 in.(1.4 mm) it is needed. In the application process these heaters Thick Heater with improve heat transfer, speed warm ups and decrease Wire-Wound Element wattage requirements. p p LTeadsAvailon®or ilalblene Fiberglass-reinforced silicone rubber gives the heater dimensional stability without sacrificing flexibility. Because ° ° very little material separates the element from the part, heat \����.;s-- ���transfer is rapid and efficient.The heaters are constructed with a wire-wound element or an etched foil element. � - �i/ The heater construction creates a very thin heater allowing 0.022 in.(0.6 mm)Thick Heater it to fit applications where space is limited. with Etched Foil Element Performance Capabilities Element Vulcanized p Between Two Layers of • Operating temperatures up to 500°F(260°C) Silicone Rubber/Fiberglass • Watt densities up to 80 WAn2(12.5 W/cm2), dependent upon application temperature Typical Applications • Wire-wound element thickness — 0.055 in. (1.4 mm) • Freeze protection and condensation prevention for many • Etched foil element — 0.022 in. (0.56 mm) types of instrumentation and equipment • UR®, cUR®,VDE and CE recognitions are available on • Medical equipment such as blood analyzers and test many designs up to 428°F(220°C) tube heaters • Computer peripherals such as laser printers Features and Benefits • Curing of plastic laminates Designed to the exact shape and size needed • • Conforms to your component and/or equipment Photo processing equipment • More than 80 designs available immediately from stock Semiconductor processing equipment • Reduces downtime Mounting Methods Constructed with wire-wound or etched foil elements • Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Surface(PSAS) • Delivers a thin, lightweight heater • Silicone contact cement kit • Provides the desired flexibility for many dynamic Field applied adhes• ive applications • Delivers low mass and easily repeatable distributed Mechanical fasteners • watt densities • Factory bonding Moisture-and chemical-resistant silicone rubber material • Provides longer heater life Vulcanizing adhesives or fasteners • Allows heaters to be easily bonded to the part W WAT LOW® Better Thermal Solutions...Faster COL-SRH-0311 ©2001,2011 Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company,all rights reserved. Termination Styles Extended Capability Termination Style Watlow offers many types of leads and terminations. HPN Cord and Plug Set Leads can project from any position along the perimeter of the unit. They will be centered on the short side width of rectangular heaters unless otherwise specified. Teflon®UL®1180 CSA Leads Shown Exiting End of Molded Leads are Shown Exiting Edge of Heater. Heater,Centered on Short Side Capped Leads are also Available Watlow's leads are 12 in. (305 mm) long, white,Teflon® insulated, flexible, plated copper UL® 1180 CSA wire.They For removable heaters, a 6 ft(1.8 m) HPN cord and plug set are rated for 392°F(200°C)/300V.The lead connections provides convenience. It is rated for 194°F(90°C)/300V. HPN on or at the heater are insulated with a cap of sheath cord without a plug is also available in any length. material, vulcanized to the heater body. — Teflon®Leads Extended Capability Options Formed Heaters r Leads Shown Exiting Middle 0 I of Heater Teflon®Type E(MIL-W-16878)and Teflon®UL® 1199 rated for 392°F(200°C)/600V are also available. l� � � �L ✓Silicone Insulated Leads Many three-dimensional shapes, such as cylinders, cones and boxes, can be factory formed. Semi-rigid shapes can be self-gripping to the part. Special Leads Shown Exiting tooling may be required for some designs. Corner of Heater Holes, Cutouts and Notches For a better moisture seal, specify UL®silicone insulated lead wires.This lead type is rated for 302°F(150°C)/600V.Any lead length is available. Note: Silicone rubber heaters are not designed to be waterproof. Excess exposure to moisture may facilitate premature heater failure. Option Thermal Insulation To increase the heating efficiency of Watlow can provide flexible heaters with special holes, your application, silicone rubber cutouts and notches in nearly any position required for heaters can be thermally insulated your design.The resistance element can be brought to with silicone sponge rubber, bonded to within 'A in. (3.2 mm)of all edges. Standard spacing is one side in the following thicknesses: /in. (6 mm)from all edges. /6, '1, '/, 36 or'h in. (1.6, 3.2, 6, 9.5 or ik 13 mm) J �An aluminized surface can be added / to the back of the heater to reduce --� radiated heat losses.This aluminized surface, called "low loss treatment," Watlow®is a registered trademark of Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company. adds very little to the unit thickness Teflon'is a registered trademark of E.I.duPont de Nemours&Company. and maintains a very clean appearance. UR'and cUR®are registered trademarks of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. To be automatically connected to the nearest North American Technical Sales Office: 1 -800-WATLOW2 • www.watlow.com • inquiry@watlow.com International Technical Sales Offices:Australia,+61 3 9335 6449•China, +86 21 3381 0188•France,+33 1 41 32 79 70 Germany,+49(0)72 53/94 00-0• Italy,+39 024588841 •Japan, +81 3 3518 6630•Korea, +82 2 2628 5770 Malaysia,+60 3 8076 8745•Mexico,+52 442 217 6235•Singapore,+65 6773 9488•Spain,+34 91 675 12 92 Taiwan,+886 7 288 5168•United Kingdom,+44(0) 115 964 0777 970798 SPACE HEATER CONNECTION DIAGRAM SPACE HEATER LEADS MAY BE LOCATED IN EITHER THE MAIN OUTLET BOX OR IF SO EQUIPPED,AN AUXILIARY BOX MOTOR STARTER MIX.CONTACT 111 MOTOR ENCLCRE I 1 PHASE ! t I t THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUPPLIED WITH ANTI- CONDENSATION HEATERS.HEATERS SHOULD BE ENERGIZED WHEN EQUIPMENT IS NOT OPERATING TO PROTECT UNIT BY PREVENTING INTERNAL CONDENSATION. CONNECT THE"Fr OR HEATER LEADS TO 115V VOLTS 48W WATTS RATING SPACE HEATER NAMEPLATE (ON MOTOR) Revision:7/30/2008 Mike Cullen Thermal Protector for Motor/Fluorescent ballasts and Temperature Sensing Controls The Klixon®9700 protector is a field proven miniature protector developed to protect shaded pole and permanent split capacitor motors, fluorescent ballasts, solenoids, transformers and other electrical equipment against overheating. KEY BENEFITS In addition to being small and lightweight, the unit is both temperature and cur- rent sensitive. Since the 9700 is sealed to withstand varnish dipping, it can be mounted directly in windings where it can best sense the true temperature of the electrical equipment.As a result, over-temperature protection is assured. Miniature size-compact design assures ease of installation Since the case is not electrically insulated, the protector is furnished with a Precision Calibration-temperature call- durable Mylar insulating sleeve. Shrinkable and non-shrinkable sleeves are brated and inspected in controlled available. ambients for dependable consistent performace Technical Characteristics Snapaction-positive make and break assured with proven Klixon®strip Purpose of control: thermal motor protector(TMP) disc...contact pressure at open temper- thermal ballastprotector TBP ature eliminates nuisance trips due to (TBP) vibration thermal cut-out (TCO) Contact capacity: 250VAC 13A for TCO Sealed steel case-withstands impreg- 250VAC 2A for TBP nation and baking...maybe varnish Temperature range: 60°C to 150°C for TCO and TMP dipped...prevents changes in calibra- 60°C to 135°C for TBP tion during installation Tolerance on Open temp: +/- 5K or+/-8K Automatic action: Type 3C for TMP Type 2C for TBP and TCO Operating time: Continuous Pollution situation: Normal Extent of sensing element: Whole control PTI of the insulation: 175 Enclosure protection degree: IP00 I 245 665 10 I 11 I — 14 r+-_.. fir —ter -a. 7 0 r- 418 < za �+--- Ultimate trip current „ ambient 9700 X X YY -ZZZZ temperature 2::Wire Lead and sleeve Serial number is assigned for each lead and sleeve configuration, i.e.wire type,length,AWG#,stripped length,sleeve type,and length. Y:Operating temperature and actuation disc material 1 Serial number is assigned for each desired temperature and resistance rating. Nominal Resistance of actuation disc 1 operating _. Lohms/cmf) t temperature 30 I 250 j_ 850 100 1T 475 { 1 + 1 1 _ 60 561 I _ 92 P 58 59 fi0 y Temperature code 80 91 t 92 93 94 95 1 ✓ 90 • 21 22 23 24 25 ! I � - - 100 26 — 27 28 29 30 j 110 36 _ 37 38 39 40 --, t 120 3 I 4 5 , 130 11 12 13 14 15 140 [ 66 67 68 69 70 150 46 L 47 48 i 49 50 • This is a typical temperature code. There is a temperature code at each 5'C in a step from 60 to 150'C. { i r ., X:Open Temperature tolerance Example 3 wow t,‘ tt 1,`,, ts.:;C MOM til +/-5K 9700K01-215 i 2:+/-8K t Bimetal of 30ohms/cmf, ' 120°C operating temperature, i X:Contact material combination -,/-5K tolerance with I AN crage first cycle tripping time Code I Stational contact Movable contact i AWG#18(UL3343 125"C-600V) i ,L Steel+Fine silvert v'. current C. ambient Steel+copper+ Silver Cadmium oxide E 66.7mm length leads. ql,l,,.,„-.,,,I„„.,l,,,,1, �,,, p.,,,,,:..,,,,�,!,•t,,, Ag-Ni+Silver Steel+copper+fl thick 0 15mm,dia 6 9mm, "`t''"''°"" Cadmium oxide ' Silver Cadmium oxide -- Brass+Fine silver Steel+copper+ length 34mm,Mylar sleeve Silver Cadmium oxide A.-Ni+Fine silver Steel+Fine silver Brass+Fine silver Steel+Copper+ i i � Ag-Ni i Type"S"is set up for Cadmium-free contact 9700:Device Identification Certifications Agency File number Standard Note UL E 15962 UL2111 Motor protector ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-9 Thermal cut-out ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-2 Thermal motor protector ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-3 Thermal ballast protector CQC CQCO200 2001344 r t h' WPM F 10,`> ti:-x'i•...IiF TECHNICAL I SALES SUPPORT • •• • • • • • • • •• Holland Internet: www_sensafa.com • • • • Phone +31 546 879560 Fax +31 546 879204 1t.1 ' Email: info-cpe..list,snrtsata.COI nt Phone +39 039 65683'10 Fax+39 039 6568316` Technologies Important Notice:The products and services of Sensata Technologies and its subsidiaries described herein are sold subject to Sensata's standard terms and conditions of sale.Customers are advised to obtain the most current and complete information about Sensata products and services before placing orders.Sensata assumes no liability for applications assistance, customer's applications or product designs,software performance,or infringement of patents.The publication of information reoerdinn any other comnenv's nroducts or services does not cnnstiti,te Sensate's annrovel warranty or endorsement thereof. THERMOSTATS 1. MOTOR IS EQUIPPED WITH QTY-3(1 PER PHASE)NORMALLY CLOSED THERMOSTATS. THERMOSTATS ARE SET TO OPEN AT HIGH TEMPERATURE. 2. CONTACT RATINGS FOR THERMOSTATS: 120-600 VAC, 720 VA N. C. THERMOSTATS P1 P2 NOTE:THERMOSTATS LEADS MAY BE LOCATED IN EITHER THE MAIN OUTLET BOX OR IF SO EQUIPPED,AN AUXILIARY BOX. ACCESSORY LISTING QTY-3 N.C.THERMOSTATS REVISION DESCRIPTION FOR: MISC SCALEN NE UNITSIN TITLE STL0211 -UPDATED FORMAT. TOLERAONCES ON DIMENSIONS CUSTOMER NIDEC MOTOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) CONNECTION DIAGRAM CORPORATION MATERIAL: INCHES mm ISSUED BY APPROVED BY REVISION DATE R. KING C. CADE 24-FEB-11 NIDEC CONFIDENTIALSCODE DWG NO. REV NUMBER SIZE MUSTEG ANTTOR2006(REACH) CH)AS 2002/95/IECENDE 0834066 G 1 OF 1 A NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 24-Feb-11 AND REGULATION EC 1907/2006(REACH)AS AMENDED ANGLES X°=+1° NMCA(JAN-2011) SOLIDEDGE f \ I' IC° . Protecting VFD-Driven Motors: kO A/ i � �r■ .r Bearing Protection .- BEARING PROTECTION RINGS Best Practices VFD-Driven Motors Can Fail From Destructive Bearing °`� Currents-Costing Downtime and Lost Production Motors operated by variable frequency drives (VFD) are vulnerable to -1 „- .. premature bearing failure from VFD induced shaft voltages and bearing - . :.o currents - sometimes within only weeks or months - and the result is ` '` ,, costly down time and production interruptions. 4 VFDs induce destructive shaft voltages highfrequency es and fre uenc currents ,. . 46 yi:► i which will cause electrical discharge machining (EDM) pitting, fusion ,.,,, craters,and fluting damage to the motor's bearings and deteriorate the �' "' bearing lubrication by allowing electrical arcing to burn the grease. EDM Pitting and Fluting •ice► Cost Avoidance- Follow Best Practices to Ensure ` .. , M__ Uptime and Reliability . Motor repair best practices will provide bearing protection from these ` destructive bearing currents by adding AEGIS® Shaft Grounding Ring : ,, ;: "� Technology and when needed insulating a bearing to prevent high frequency circulating currents. ' ' " ��� 41110 s� •Motors up to 100 HP-Add AEGIS®Shaft Grounding Ring to discharge Mr shaft voltages to ground. IN ,, - •Motors over 100 HP-Add AEGIS°Rings by one bearing and insulate AEGIS°Shaft Voltage Testing the opposite bearing. Detailed recommendations are contained in the --- . , . AEGIS®Shaft Grounding Ring Motor Repair . 4 ff ° Handbook-an essential reference available upon ai�, t : • 4 request at www.est-aegis.com/bearing -a _. ' _ ' Motor Bearings are the Most Vulnerable Parts- � `� `�+r . 'z Cost of a Failed Motor Adds Up Quickly .. `�"' . , 6% 1% 0.5% Solution:AEGIS°Bearing Protection Rings t ' , # r •Downtime cost t TA •Motor Repair Cost 93% a Rigging and _ Transportation �r ;, lMl ■Overhead s a The return on investment in repairing motors and following the , ;, AEGIS® Shaft Grounding Ring Motor Repair Handbook's best practices ' ' " t'' recommendations will pay dividends day after day and ensure the most , 't reliable repair to the motor. AEGIS°uKIT r• e^ /• ru Mounting `ter -i,- . �'`� i��N /re IC® Options _-- -- --4--' " BEARING PROTECTION RINGS Patented Technology 0 uKIT - SGR with Universal Mounting Brackets Motors up to and including 100 HP(75 kW) • /`i , Sized for NEMA and IEC Frame motors Low Voltage . ;, . • Solid and Split Ring Install with screws or conductive epoxy AEGIS.SGR Ank .4 ,c5015 4 different bracket sizes I ' /,�6„,�*� Conductive Epoxy Mounting(-OAW,-0A4W) �� • •SM1aft , , • Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02" 1 f� • , _ • 41 Solid and Split Ring f. ; , -� Conductive Epoxy Included •Install one AEGIS®SGR Bearing Protection Ring on either • the drive end or the non-drive end of the motor. T . 4 Standard Mounting Brackets(-1) •AEGIS®SGR may be installed either internally or externally. r y • Shaft diameters:0.311'to 6.02" •Use AEGIS°Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating(PN#CS015)on ` 1,: , Mounting clips,6-32 x 1/4"cap screws and motor shaft where fibers touch. washers Product recommendation:AEGIS®SGR I. t Li"t, o- ► ' Motors Greater than 100 HP(75 kW) J y° _ I. sleeve as CS015 �''nes�N� • AEGIS.Ring , , •41, a ,� Insulated Bearing I- Bolt Through Mounting(-3FH) Stator = f ( ,.,,,,,____}411 _, Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02" • + ti til • 6-32 x 1/2"flat head screws gtift • • l ,. ~ „ j• 1.41 2 mounting holes up to shaft size 3.395" ,'. 4 mounting holes for larger sizes Install AEGIS'Ring on opposite end of insulation Fit Mounting •Non-Drive end: Bearing housing must be isolated with " PressShaft diameters:Mounting tin. 6.02" insulated sleeve or coating or use insulated ceramic or r�+^' I • Clean drya ete4"press0.311 fit hybrid bearing to disrupt circulating currents. Press into motor end bracket or bearing cap •Drive end: Install one AEGIS®Bearing Protection Ring. •AEGIS®Ring can be installed internally on the back of the bearing cap or externally on the motor end bracket. •Use AEGIS®Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating(PN#CS015)on Large SGR,iPRO,WTG motor shaft where fibers touch. • Large Rings over 6.02" C., Product recommendation: iPRO for Medium Voltage Motors •Low Voltage Motors up •Medium Voltage Motors: WTG for Wind Turbine Generators to 500HP:AEGIS®SGR AEGIS®iPRO •Low Voltage Motors over 500HP:AEGIS®iPRO A. Accessories • SVP-AEGIS®Shaft Voltage Probe tt C5015-AEGIS®Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating For more recommendations,download the gill ., EP2400 AEGIS®Conductive Epoxy AEGIS®Handbook from our website. • .p www.est-aegis.com/bearinq 4, ©2015 Form 105-7 Electro Static Technology I 1 -866-738- 1857 I www.est-aegis.com ief% MOTORS ‘1127 Standard Paint Specification For EM Gray NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION Industrial Motors & Systems Division Monterrey, Mexico MOTORS 1. Air dry topcoat enamels for use on cast iron (primed), steel (primed), aluminum, and plastic (primed or unprimed) surfaces. 2. Spray application, total dry film thickness of the topcoat shall be a minimum of 2_0 Mils and a Max. of 4.0 Mils. 3. Reduction: All materials shall be supplied suitable for application at the specific facility in conjunction with the application equipment employed, without reduction. 4. Basic Physical Requirements: A. Salt Spray(fog) testing A.S.T.M. B-117-90 Minimum 250 hours D. Adhesion by tape test A.S.T.M. D3359-90. Coating removal shall pass classification 4 or 5 E. Film hardness by pencil test A.S.T.M. D3363-74 shall pass B to HB. F. Elongation of attached organic coating with cylindrical mandrel. A.S.T.M. D522-88. Pass 1/4 inch-no cracking or flaking G. Resistance of organic coatings to the effects of rapid deformation (impact). Direct Impact: Pass 28 inch pounds, A.S.T.M. D2794-90 Reverse Impact: Pass 28 inch pounds K. Chemical Resistance: A.S.T.M. D1308-87 Spot Test, Open per paragraph 7.3 - 1 Hour Duration: Sulfuric Acid 10% Nitric Acid 10% Hydrochloric Acid 10% Acetic Acid 10% Sodium Hydroxide 10% Sodium Chloride 10% All (3) USEM standard Gear Oils 100% M. The topcoat enamels will dry to package in cardboard boxes without chafing at the following schedules: 1. Force Dry: 1-2 minute flash, 3-5 minute @ 150-200°F and 3-5 minute cool down. 2. Air Dry: A minimum of 5 minutes at a relative humidity of 50% @ 70-80°F. N. Label Test: Apply a USEM performance specification label (nameplate) to a test panel cured for seven days and immerse in distilled water for 48 hours. Upon removal allow a 5 minute recovery period and remove label. No paint shall be removed with the label. O. Shelf Stability: The unreduced enamel after three months storage in a closed, filled container at room temperature (20°C) shall show no permanent separation and readily mix to homogeneous state. The unreduced viscosity shall not have risen more than 30 Saybolt seconds. MOTORS 5. Vendor Formulation Approval: A. To approve a vendor's formulation, the listed tests shall be certified by the vendor in writing (to the plant and copied to engineering for approval)that the paint has met the above requirements, listing results in appropriate terms (Pass/Fail, Hrs., days, etc.). Engineering may at its discretion perform these tests using in-house capabilities or an outside lab. B. After Engineering and plant approval, the vendor's formulation will be added to this specification as an approved vendor formulation for that duty. C. Changes in formulation other than color will require recertification and approval. D. USEM part numbers will define the of duty, color and specification. The vendor will supply only USEM approved formulation meeting these requirements, matched to the color required per this specification. E. The USEM plants to meet EPA standards want to adhere to a limit of 3.0 lbs/gal. VOCs. Any deviation above this must be acceptable to the plant before order entry. 6. Approved Vendors: Vendor Formulation Other OSEL EM Gray Osel Oro Modified alkyd Color: According to Sample Enamel Code: 4588 provided by Nidec NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 8050 W. Florissant Avenue 1St Louis, MO 63136 www.nidec-motor.com I www.usmotors.com MOTORS 499495 vi Motor Wiring Diagram T1 T3/ DELTA N T2 Connection LEAD CONNECTION T I I Line Each lead may consist of one or more cables having the same lead number. 499495 To reverse direction of rotation interchange connections L1 and L2. Each lead may be comprised of one or more cables. Each cable will be marked with the appropriate lead number. EFFECTIVE:2/27/96 SUPERCEDES:X736618,96441,179879,284138 Connection Plate: 499495 Connection Decal: 912113 ►► PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS' June 12, 2019 McClure and Sons, Inc. 15714 County Club Drive Mill Creek, WA 98012 Attn: Jon Varriano Subject: Purchase Order Number: 3305-112 Sales Order Number: 51830513 Project: CWS Durham WWTP 0605224 Jon: The revised submittal data for the above order is attached. This revised submittal is for your review and approval prior to release for manufacturing. We require submittal return with your review comments and/or approval to release within 35 days for production scheduling purposes. At time of release, please advise firm "on-site" requirement dates for this equipment. Very Truly Yours, Specifications Department Pentair Flow Technologies Return Submittal to: Harley Alt Project Manager cc: Enclosures: (1) pdf submittal 3601 Fairbanks Ave. • P.O. Box 6999 • Kansas City,Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • Fax: 913-748-4025 Pentair Flow Technologies General Clarifications 1. The supply and installation of the following items are by others unless otherwise identified in this submittal. • Anchor bolts, nuts and washers • Gauges, valves and miscellaneous fittings and adapters. • Connecting piping and/or supports • Maintenance lubrication piping and related equipment. • System control apparatus • Maintenance tools and/or storage boxes. • Equipment tags • Installation or field performance testing. 2. The following information is required by Pentair Flow Technologies prior to or at release of the pumps to production. • Verification of rotation and discharge position. Fairbanks Nijhuis Submittal Data For CWS Durham WWTP Tigard, OR Supplier: McClure and Sons, Inc. 15714 County Club Drive Mill Creek, WA 98012 Manufacturer: Pump: Fairbanks Nijhuis 3601 Fairbanks Ave. Kansas City, Kansas 66106-0906 (913)371-5000 Fax: (913) 748-4025 Project Number: 0605224 Sales Order Number: 51830513 Service: Drainage Tag: 470P8101 Quantity: 1 Pump Size & Model: 8" B5424L Coupling: Rexnord Corp. 1217 Corporation Dr. Arlington, TX. 76006 (817)640-3332 Motor: U S Electrical Motors P. O. Box 3946 St. Louis, MO 63136 (314)553-2000 0605224SR3.doc Fairbanks Nijhuis Table of Contents Pump: Response to Comments Dated January 21, 2019 1 Page Response to Comments Dated December 05, 2018 1 Page Response to Comments Dated November 14, 2018 1 Page Response to Comments Dated September 6, 2018 3 Pages Included Features IF-5420 Technical Clarifications C&E-5000 Test Procedure 3 Pages Test Set Up Drawing 0605224TS Performance Curve 0605224CR2 Setting Plan 0605224SP Material Specifications ML-5420 Assembly Drawings 0605224APR1 Full Data Nameplate 0605224NP Pump Technical Data TD-5420 Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 4 Pages Rotor Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 5 Pages Seismic Analysis of Anchor Bolts 10 Pages Shaft Deflection Calculations (Rev1) 1 Page Typical Lubricants GR-1000 Bearing Life Calculations 1 Page Chesterton S10 Mechanical Seal 6 Pages Spiral Trac Bushing 2 Pages Inpro Seal 4 Pages Paint Specifications PC-1000 Coupling Rexnord Omega 2 Pages Driver Data Sheet 1 Page Performance Data FM013 Certification &Accessory Data FM015 Dimensions 07-2832 Outlet Boxes 80-249 Bearing Life Calculation 1 Page Curves 1 Page Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 1 Page Torsional Critical Data 1 Page Nameplate 2 Pages Lubrication 2 Pages Silicone Rubber Space Heaters 2 Pages Connection Diagram 970798 Klixon Miniature Protector 2 Pages Connection Diagram 834066 AEGIS Shaft Ground Ring 2 Pages Paint Specifications 5 Pages Wiring Diagram 499495 0605224SR3.doc 0605224 Response to Submittal Comments Dated January 21, 2019 1. Comment: Contractor shall submit completed motor data sheets that conform to the data sheet in the appendix of section 16222. Blank data sheets are not acceptable. Response: This is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor to respond. 2. Comment: Change impeller fasteners to stainless steel in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide stainless steel impeller fasteners. Please see the revised material page. 3. Comment: Change seal to Chesterton S10 mechanical seal with Spiraltrac bushing in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide the Chesterton S10 mechanical seal with a Spiral Trac bushing. Please see the revised submittal. 4. Comment: Change to grease-lubricated Inpro seals for pump frame in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide Inpro seals. Please see the revised submittal 5. Comment: Change couplings to Rexnord Omega couplings in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide the Rexnord Omega couplings. Please see the revised submittal. 0605224 Response to Submittal Comments Dated December 05, 2018 1. Comment: Submit Aegis bearing protection rings for the following motors:465P1903, 465P1904 & 470P8102 for consistency on the manufacture for all bearing protection rings. Response: Aegis bearing protection ring data has been added to the motor submittal. Please see the revised motor submittal. 2. Comment: Contractor shall submit motor data sheets that conform to the data sheet in the appendix of section 16222. Response: Motor Data Sheet has been added to the revised motor submittal. 3. Comment: Motor nameplates shall indicate compliance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31 for inverter duty motors per section 16222.2.02.9.a.1. Response: Motor nameplate will be marked NEMA MG-1, Part 31 compliant. This has been noted on the accessory data page of the revised motor submittal. 4. Comment: 470P8101 -Confirm shaft deflection does not exceed 2 mils at any point in the operating range. Revise H to 90 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 126) Response: Confirmation on shaft deflection not exceeding 2 mils throughout the operating range. H cannot be revised to 90 ft at the rated flow due to insignificant impeller diameter. 90 ft is shown within the AOR but at a different flow rate. 5. Comment: 470P8102- Confirm shaft deflection does not exceed 2 mils at any point in the operating range. Revise H to 38 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 296) Response: Confirmation on shaft deflection not exceeding 2 mils throughout the operating range. H cannot be revised to 38 ft at the rated flow due to insignificant impeller diameter. 38 ft is shown within the AOR but at a different flow rate. 0605224 Response to Submittal Comments Dated November 14, 2018 1. Comment: Motor nameplate data, Page 61 -Verify in writing if motor is Inverter Duty and labeled per 16222 2.02 C 2. -A&R Response: This was included in the original submittal and was overlooked. Project Engineer was reviewed the information with Granich. 2. Comment: Motor nameplate data, Page 61, 125, 254- Motor power factor shall be 80% or better at full rated load. -A&R Response: A power factor of 80, on this size/speed of motor is not available from any motor brand. GE's version has a lower power factor than US Motors. Project Engineer has reviewed the information with Granich and has accepted the motor as-is. 3. Comment: All motors on VFD shall have shaft-grounding rings, and shall be inverter duty. -A&R Response: The project Engineer has reviewed the information with and has accepted the motor as- is. 4. Comment: 465P1901, 1902- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. No clarifications or questions were responded to during the bid phase that modified these requirements. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. This requirement has been waived. 5. Comment: 465P1901, 1902, 1903, 1904 - It is not acceptable to overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. Project Engineer is in agreement that the motor should never see an overload condition. This issue has been resolved. 6. Comment: 465P8101 - Using the service factor of the motor is not acceptable for reaching the low point in the head range at full speed. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. This issue has been resolved 7. Comment: 465P1901, 1902 - Does not meet the specified operating head range of 11 to 17ft at full speed. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. -A&R Response: FN has revised the curves. Please see revised curve in the revised submittal. ► PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City, KS 66106 PH: 913-371-5000 September 20, 2018 McClure & Sons, Inc. Attn: Jason Jarmin Ref: CWS Durham Phase 5 Expansion - End Suction Pumps Submittal Review Dated 9/6/18 FN Project Number(s): 0605222-25 Mr. Jarmin: Please see our responses to the comments we received via email on 9/6/18. 1. Motors shall be seismic rated as specified in 16222-1.07-A. FN Response: The motors provided are not seismic; there aren't any seismic rated motors commercially available to provide for the motor/pump assembly. 2. Nameplate shall be stainless steel per NEMA standard motor data. FN Response: Stainless steel nameplates will be provided. 3. Confirm that the vibration of the pumping units will meet the requirements specified under Section 1 1 1 1 5-1-5.01. FN Response: Confirmed, the vibration will meet the Hydraulic Institute standard. 4. Is Fairbanks/Pentair including a witness test in the scope? FN Response: A witness performance test is included with our scope. 5. 465P1901, 1902- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The shutoff head will be as plotted. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 6. 465P1902, 1902- Does not meet the specified operating head range of 11 to 17 ft at full speed. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605222CR1). A reduced speed has been plotted to show performance at the low head range. At full speed, the low head condition point is outside of the AOR and/or would overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. 7. 465P1902, 1902- Minimum efficiency is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The efficiency is as guaranteed on the submittal curve. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 8. 465P8101 - Pump at full speed does not appear to hit 56 ft TDH. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605224CR1). The service factor of the motor will be used to reach the low point in the head range at full speed. 9. 465P8101 - Maximum shaft deflection exceeds specified 2 mils by a significant margin. Not acceptable. EN Response: Please see the attached revised deflection calculations (0605224SDR1). A value of deflection at the seal box has been added and meets the specification. 10. 465P8101 - Revise H to 90 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 83) FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605224CR1). 90 feet is achievable at full speed and is within the AOR. 11. 465P1903, 1904- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The shut off head will be as plotted. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 12. 465P1903, 1904-Operating head range of 11 to 17 ft at full speed is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet lift at run out. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605223CR1). A reduced speed has been plotted to show performance at the low head range. At full speed, the low head condition point is outside of the AOR and/or would overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. 13. 465P8102- Maximum shaft deflection exceeds specified 2 mils. Not acceptable. EN Response: Please see the attached revised deflection calculations (0605225SDR1). A value of deflection at the seal box has been added and meets the specification. 14. 465P81012- Revise H to 38 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 211) FN Response: Please see the attached curve 0605225CR0. 38 feet is achievable at full speed and is within the AOR. 2 If you have any further questions, please do not hesitate to contact me at (913) 748- 4108 or via email at harley.alt@pentair.com. Sincerely, 0.;f0Jtieff WA' Harley Alt Project Manager Pentair Flow Technologies cc: J. Eaves, Pentair K. Hogan, Granich J. Hayes, Granich Attach: 0605223CR1, 0605222CR1, 0605224CR1, 0605225CR0, 06052245DR 1, 0605225S D R 1 3 Fairbanks Nijhuis Included Features • Variable Speed Operation • Rotation: Clockwise • Discharge Position:#1 • Dynamically Balanced Impeller to G6.3 • High Chrome Cast Iron on Casing, Casing Cover and Impeller • Stainless Steel Impeller Fasteners • Stainless Steel Impeller Wear Ring • Stainless Steel Casing Wear Ring • Stainless Steel Shaft Sleeve • Structural Steel Base • Rexnord Omega Coupling • Chesterton S10 Mechanical Seal • Spiral Trac Bushing • Inpro Seals • Lifting Eyes • Lateral Critical Speed Analysis • Torsional Critical Speed Analysis • Seismic Analysis of Anchor Bolts • Shaft Deflection Calculations • Bearing Life Calculations • Certified Witness Performance Test • Certified Non-Witness Hydraulic Test at 1.5 x Shutoff Head Plus Maximum Suction Pressure (7psi) • Curve Approval Required Prior to Shipment • 15 Day Notice Prior to Performance Test • Holiday Testing on Coating • Film Thickness, Spark&Adhesion Testing on Coating • 60HP, 1200RPM, 3/60/460V, Inverter Duty Motor 0605224SR3.doc I F-5420 Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Clarifications & Exceptions 1. (01610#11)Anchor bolts are not in FN's Scope of Supply and shall be provided by others. 2. (01610#12) In lieu of a drip tray, the pump is supplied with a back head, which includes an integral cast reservoir to collect leakage. This reservoir is tapped to allow connection of customer supplied drain piping. FN requests approval of the exception. 3. (11115, 2-2) Guaranteed efficiency will be 77.5% in lieu of 79%. Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Clarifications& Exceptions 1. (16222 1.05 D.5; 107 A) Motors are not seismic rated. 2. (16222 2.02 A 9.a.1) Nameplate shall be stainless steel per Nidec standard offering with laser etched letters. 0605224SR3.doc C&E-5000 ►►► PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS- TEST PROCEDURE FOR CENTRIFUGAL TYPE PUMPS Model: 8" B5424L Project Number: 0605224 Quantity of Pumps to Test: One (1) GENERAL INFORMATION: Tests will be conducted to assure pump performance meets the requirements of sold conditions, as shown on the previously proposed submittal curve. Tests will be conducted at the original manufacturer's factory, located in Kansas City, Kansas. Data points (at least eight) will be taken to assure that a performance curve has been sufficiently established. For each pump being test, a certified curve will be plotted on an 8-1/2" x 11" sheet of paper and submit to the customer soon thereafter. Measurements will be taken using calibrated equipment and the values of each measurement will be determined as follows: PRESSURE HEAD (FEET) The total head will be the summation of the discharge pressure transducer reading, plus or minus the suction pressure transducer (or suction manometer), plus or minus the vertical distance between the gauge zero reference points and any velocity head correction when gauge taps are located on different pipe inside diameters. FLOW RATE (GPM) The flow rate will be measured with a differential pressure transducer used in conjunction with a venturi meter. Differential head will then be used to derive the flow in terms of GPM by using the constant established from the venturi's calibration data. HORSEPOWER(BHP) The power input to the motor will be measured with a digital power analyzer. Drive motor efficiencies will then be used to convert this measurement to horsepower. SPEED (RPM) The rotational speed will be determined by means of a calibrated, electronic tachometer. EFFICIENCY(%) From the previously obtained values for horsepower, total head, and flow rate, efficiency will be calculated for each individually run test. 3601 Fairbanks Avenue • PO Box 6999 • Kansas City, Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • FAX:913-371-2272 SPECIFIC REMARKS: • Customer witnessed certified factory performance test utilizing Acceptance Grade 1 U per ANSI/HI 14.6. • 0%to 10% flow rate at rated head • 0%to 6%head at rated flow • Pump(s)will be tested with job motor. • 15 day notification given prior to factory tests. • Curve approval is required prior to shipment. • A copy of a sample pump test log is attached. • A copy of the test set-up is attached PUMP TEST STANDARDS: Pump tests meet the following standards: Hydraulic Institute Test Standards—latest edition American Water Works Association—latest edition '-'( -4 Certified by: ,,,,, Us., Billy Faltas Product Engineer Date: August 3, 2018 3601 Fairbanks Avenue • PO Box 6999 • Kansas City, Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • FAX:913-371-2272 Test Location of Test F' PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS`" Kansas City Customer: Water Temperature Model: Impeller Information Guaranteed Performance End User: Series: Impeller: Flow Head Power Efficiency Barometric Pressure Sales No. Proj. No. Serial No. Retest No. Application: Diameter Quantity Underfile Material (GPM) (ft) (HP) (%) Stages: Guaranteed Head Tested By Witnessed By Rotation: Running Pos: Guaranteed Efficiency Date: Date: Bowl Coat: Design: Surface: Measured Values Calculated Performance (at RPM) Pressure at Suction Venturi Power Head Velocity Flow Comments Discharge Lift Apressure Volts Amps Power Factor Speed Loss Head Rate Head Power Efficiency (ft) (ft) (ft) (V) (A) (kW) _(%) RPM (ft) (ft) (GPM) (ft) (HP) (%) (1) ] [ (2) j _ (3) j [ (4) [ [ (7) . [ (5) (6) j 1 (8) J (16) L [ (9) (10) [ [ (11 j_ , [ (12) . (13) j r/ Explanation (1)Discharge gauge head reading (2)Suction gauge head reading;(Distance between water level and CL of discharge gauge for Column type,Negative sign used when there is positive suction head) (3)Feet of water across the venturi meter (4)Volt reading from the power meter NIII* (5)K.W.reading from the power meter 016\ $ (6)Power factor reading from the power meter (7)Amp reading from the power meter (8)RPM Tachometer from the pump shaft (9)V2/2g at the discharge tap-V2/2g at the suction tap(0 for submerge impeller type/no suction gauge) (10) Flow:Square root of the Venturi Delta P*The Venturi Constant K(0(3)*(14)) (11)Total Head((1)+(2)+(9) +(16)) Vik\ (12)Horsepower,calculated from motor efficiencies(15)and KW reading. (13)Pump Efficiency: (GPM x TDH)/(39.60 X BHP) (14)Venturi Constant (15)Motor efficiencies 0 \A- . (16)Head losses due to column,lineshafting,and discharge head (Used for calculating bowl performance) Suction Inner Diameter Discharge Inner Diameter Suction Transducer Discharge Transducer Venturi Venturi K Venturi Transducer Submerg. Dist. Btwn Gauges 0 (14) Details of()Motor Used for Test Motor Efficiency Full Load Speed: Power Analyzer Horsepower Nom.Speed Shaft Config. Serial Number 1/4 Load 1/2 Load 3/4 Load Full Load 5/4 Load Max Allowable HP: _ Serial Number (15) (15) (15) Service Factor: 1.15 _D POWER METER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER 8" SUCTION - I I C I I SC300 SIGNAL CONDITIONER JOB MOTOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER PRESSURE -�--_.,-TN_ 8" DIFFERENTIAL DISCHARGE TRANSDUCER 1 { - I I I I I I _J C �� 1i_ ,r 10.02" x 6.120" _ 10" GATE VALVE VENTURI METER 10" PIPE NOTES: .;.>PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 1. DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE. 2. GAUGE LOCATIONS AND PIPE DISTANCES BEFORE THE VENTURI METER 0605224 ARE PER HYDRAULIC INSTITUDE STANDARDS LATEST EDITION. TEST SET- UP DWG. 0605224TS1 NO. 0 8" B5424L Submittal Curve ►> PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS" CURVE NUMBER: 0605224C SPEED 111D'''RIVER DIAMETER SPHERE GUARANTEED VALUES REV. 2 1190 RPM 60 HP+SF 14.90" 4.00" FLOW HEAD PUMP EFF HP STAGES IMPELLER DATE BY 2100 77 77.5 THIS CURVE IS BASED ON THE ACTUAL TEST 1 T8D1D 11/29/2018 WSF PERFORMANCE OF A SIMILAR PUMP. ONLY THE INDICATED POINT(S)IS GUARANTEED. Use of the driver's service factor may be required. 120 I Pump Head 1 1' I , 100 i POR 80 60 f i AOR_ I lo 40 • 20 1 o i . 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 100 50 Pub ffi cif 4 90 5 80 40 70 MN 35 60ION 30 E IIII c 50 =IIIIIIImmill ill! 111 1 11111 ®� 25= II g 20 et. 40 1111 .._! :111111111 II ® 15 Z w 30 20 10 10 1111 111111 III MEM 111 NPSH30 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 70 I I Power 60 50 40 , 3 30 —_ 0 a 20 10 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Flowrate - (GPM) DISCHARGE POSITIONS ,L, WARN I N G MOTOR DIMENSIONS CLOCKWISE DO NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE WITHOUT PROTECTIVE GUARD C T 0 8 IN PLACE. ANY OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE WITHOUT 37.63 10.47 7 PROTECTIVE GUARD CAN RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY. -A- SUPPLIED BY FN -B- SUPPLIED BY OTHERS 2 - 6 WHEN VIEWED FROM THE DRIVER END. C - CP - Z SUCTION Z DISCHARGE 1/4 I---Y-- VENT TAP 1---Z—I • GAUGE TAP I 1 • I _— -A- I I: } ' ! --� I `I x 0 0 t ii T I o o I I VOLUTE O— - ---I_-- — 111- i —. ---�}— -- — HO — o - CLEANOUT - - 4rD" 1 - 0 0 0 0 HD 1/4- 1: I ; DD 0 0 I HG II I'^HF I HF---I F-31/4 I 11/16" DIA. 6 HOLES I—HE--}—HE—+ DRAIN TAP 1---HR--I BOX DRAIN HA HB -I PUMP FRAME SUCT DISCH X Y Z CP DD HA HB HD HE HF HG HO HR PUMP MOTOR 8" B5424L T40 404T 8 8 18 91/8 14 434'8 17 301/2 541/2 19 141/2 24 4/16 37 14 /4 NOTES: (1) ALL FLANGES ARE 125# ANSI DRILLING. (2) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES UNLESS NOTED. (3) BASES ARE DESIGNED TO BE COMPLETELY FILLED WITH GROUT. (5) DIMENSIONS MAY VARY DUE TO NORMAL (4) SUCTION GAUGE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE AND MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES. SHOULD BE LOCATED ON ADJACENT SUCTION PIPING. CUSTOMER P.O. NO. MCCLURE AND SONS. INC. 3305-112 $PINTAIR FNMA=NIUIMS' JOB NAME TAG NAME CWS DURHAM WWTP 470P8101 PUMP SIZE AND MODEL GPM TDH NOMINAL RPM ROTATION DISCH POS SETTING PLAN 8" B5424L 2100 77 1200 CW 1 8'' B5424L MOTOR HP FRAME PHASE HERTZ VOLTS ENCLOSURE NIDEC 60 404T 3 60 460 TEFC WITH STRUCTURAL BASE CERTIFIED FOR CERTIFIED BY DATE DWG O 6 O I N�V O PR(1.IF(T 4 (1R(15774. CAA (17/7(Y1 R Mn Fairbanks Nijhuis Material Specifications Item Description Material Specification'- 1 Impeller Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 4 Shaft Steel AISI 1144 9 Bolt, Impeller Stainless Steel A193 CL2 B8 9A Washer, Impeller Stainless Steel AISI 316 14 Sleeve, Shaft Stainless Steel AISI 316 16 Wear Ring, Fronthead Stainless Steel A743 Gr. CA40 410-484 BHN 17 Wear Ring, Impeller Stainless Steel A743 Gr. CA15 300-350 BHN A28 Foot, Mounting Steel A36 B28 Pedestal, Mounting Steel A36 30 Volute Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 31 Solid Gland Cast Iron A48 Class 30 33 Fronthead Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 34 Backhead Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 90 Frame Cast Iron A48 Class 30 102 Impeller Key Stainless Steel AISI 316 A126 Deflector, Inner Rubber Commercial B126 Deflector, Outer Rubber Commercial 156 Gasket, Volute Tag Board D1170-G3111 158 Housing, Thrust Bearing Cast Iron A48 Class 30 159 Cover, Thrust Bearing Housing Cast Iron A48 Class 30 161 Locknut, Bearing Steel SAE Bolt Steel 162 Lockwasher, Bearing Steel AISI 1215 163 Bearing, Radial Steel Commercial 168 Bearing, Thrust Steel Commercial 202 Cover, Volute Cleanout Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 203 Gasket, Cleanout Rubber Commercial A206 Retainer, Inner Grease Steel Commercial 272 Key, Coupling Steel A108 Grade 1018 456 Mechanical Seal Commercial Commercial Base Fabricated Steel A36 Coupling Guard Steel Commercial 1 All material specifications are ASTM unless otherwise noted and are or description of chemistry only. 0605224SR3.doc ML-5420 456 CHESTERTON S10 MECHANICAL SEAL WITH SPIRALTRAC VERSION D, TYPE A BUSHING 1 17 16 33 WEAR RING CONSTRUCTION IMPELLER ADJUSTMENT CAPSCREWS (QTY3) INPRO SEAL 202 B126 SEAL 158 A206 4 163 INPRO A126 1 203 30 9A 9 ._� _►: IU' r I /FPI* k Air __________ : a i 4 4 IN.1 Anti 01`i 272 159 161 162 A28 168 90 B28 34 14 156 102 156 33 ASSEMBLY $PENTAIR FAIRBANKS ENNUIS' B5424 T40 FRAME °WG0605224AP INEnV 1 MANUF. YEAR 2019 MAX. CASING PSI 75 SIZE 8 INCH MODEL B5424L STAGE 1 GPM 2100 TOTAL HD. 77 FT. RPM 1190 FRAME T40 LUBE GREASE IMP.DIA. 14.90 SERIAL 10560849 MADE IN USA OF IMPORTED "° DOMESTIC MATERIALS. PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NUHUIS' S21A136M KANSAS CITY, KANSAS FULL DATA NAMEPLATE *PENraR FAIRBANKS NUHUIV rnIG 0605224NP INE: 1 Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Data Pump' Frame Size T40 Pump Size 8 Suction Size, Standard 8 Nominal Wear Ring Clearance 0.015-0.025 Impeller Fastener Size 3/4-10 Tightening Torque, lb.-ft 200 Impeller Weight, lb 102.1 Inlet Area, sq. In 72.94 WK2 Lb.-Ft.2 18.7 Sphere Size, Maximum 4 Shaft Diameter: at Impeller 2 1/4 at Sleeve 2 5/8 at Thrust Bearing 2.953 at Radial Bearing 3.740 Between Bearings 4 at Coupling 2 3/8 Keyway at Coupling 5/8 X 5/16 Torsional Shaft Stiffness, lbs./rad. 2.26X106 Center to Center of Bearings 14 1/8 Thrust Bearing Number 5315 Radial Bearing Number 6219 Sealing Box: Mechanical Seal Type Chesterton S10 Recommended Flush Water Pressure, PSI (above operating pressure) 1-10 Flow, GPM 1/2-1 Sleeve OD 3 Box ID 4 Box Depth 3 3/4 Box Inlet Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Box Outlet Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Backhead Drain Tap Size, NPT 3/4 Volute Cleanout Diameter 4 7/8 Vent/Priming Tap Size, NPT 3/4 Gauge Tap Size Discharge, NPT 1/2 Hydrostatic Test Pressure, Maximum, PSI 80 Casing Working Pressure, Maximum, PSI 75 Nominal Casing Thickness 1/2 Operating Temperature,°F 150 Shipping Weight, lb. Basic Pump 1100 Base &Coupling Weight 1612 All dimensions are in inches unless otherwise noted. 0605224SR3.doc TD-5420 Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Project Name: CWS Durham WWTP Sales Order Number: - Project Number: 0605224 Pump Model: 8" B5424L Revision: 0 Prepared By: Matt Black Project Engineer Date Prepared: 8/6/2018 Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605224 LN PG1 Revision: 0 Summary of Analysis Method Analysis is performed in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.8-2014 level 1.The first lateral natural frequency, w,, was calculated using the equation for the natural frequency of a cantilever beam.The equation can be expressed as 187.7 cut = where D is the deflection at the end of the beam. Summary of Results No natural frequency problem was found. = 15903 RPM Minimum Speed = 1185 RPM Maximum Speed= 1185 RPM w, Percentage of Minimum Speed = 1342% w, Percentage of Maximum Speed = 1342% Required Margin = 30% Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605224 LN PG2 Revision: 0 Inputs Pump Pump Model = 8" B5424L Motor Frame = 365T-404TS Pump Weight, F= 850 lbs Pump Center of Gravity, L= 19 in Moment of Inertia, I = 465.00 in4 Material Properties Modulus of Elasticity, E = 30000000 psi Operating Conditions Minimum Operating Speed = 1185 RPM Maximum Operating Speed = 1185 RPM Required Separation Margin = 30% Calculations Deflection FL3 Pump Deflection= 0.000139 in D = — 3E1 Natural Frequency 187.7 w, = 15903 RPM _ Minimum Speed = 1185 RPM wl 5 Maximum Speed = 1185 RPM w, Percentage of Minimum Speed= 1342% w, Percentage of Maximum Speed = 1342% Required Margin = 30% Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605224 LN PG3 Revision: 0 A Campbell diagram provides a visual method to verify no resonance conditions will occur when operating a pump over its operating speed range.The diagram is constructed by plotting frequency in Hz versus frequency in RPM. Common excitation frequencies are shown as diagonal lines.The natural frequency of the pump is shown as a horizontal line.A resonance condition is likely to occur when a horizontal line crosses a diagonal line within the operating speed range. Campbell Diagram 300 Low Margin Operating Speed High Margin Natural Frequency 250 _ I 200 4 C✓ a. C) v.) 150 0 100 50 _ _ _ _._.._ ---Pane-Pass lx � I 0 .� 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 Rotation Speed(RPM) Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Project Name: CWS Durham WWTP Sales Order Number: - Project Number: 0605224 Pump Model: 8" B5424L Revision: 0 Prepared By: Matt Black Project Engineer Date Prepared: 8/6/2018 Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605224 RN PG1 Revision: 0 Summary of Analysis Method Analysis is performed in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.8-2014 level 1.The rotor's first lateral natural frequency, w1, was calculated using Rayleigh's method.The equation can be expressed as c� 9 E F`Y` rad s 1 Z FtYi2 / where g is the gravitational constant, F; is the force at the ith location, and y; is the deflection at the ith location. The model of the shaft used is shown below. F1 is the weight of the impeller, B1 and B2 are the bearing reaction forces, and F2 through FI are the lumped weights of the shaft sections. L2 through L7 are the lengths to the lumped weights, LB1 and LB2 are the lengths to the bearing reaction forces, and Ls is the length of the shaft. / Fl F2 f F3 ,7F4 FS / Fb ;F7 �✓ U N/ v �I v N 0 0 p 0 L2 L3 B1 B2— L4.LB1 1 i � L5 L6 L7 LS In order to account for the stepped geometry of the shaft, a numerical method to calculate the deflection of the shaft was used. Summary of Results No natural frequency problem was found. = 6646 RPM Min Speed = 1185 RPM Max Speed = 1185 RPM w1 Percentage of Min Speed= 561% w1 Percentage of Max Speed = 561% Required Margin = 30% Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605224 RN PG2 Revision: 0 Inputs Forces F1= 102.1 lbs F2= 3.38 lbs F3= 11.72 lbs F4= 3.70 lbs F5= 42.46 lbs F6= 6.42 lbs F�= 7.28 lbs Section Diameters D1 = 2.250 in D2 = 2.625 in D3= 3.740 in D4= 4.000 in D5 = 2.953 in D6= 2.375 in Lengths L2 = 1.500 in L3= 6.825 in L4,LB1= 11.245 in L5= 17.810 in LB2= 25.370 in L6= 25.435 in L�= 29.995 in Is= 32.900 in Material Properties Shaft Modulus of Elasticity= 29500000 psi Operating Conditions Minimum Operating Speed = 1185 RPM Maximum Operating Speed = 1185 RPM Required Separation Margin = 30% Calculations Section Moment of Inertias I1= 1.258 In" 12= 2.331 In" 13= 9.604 in" irD4 _ 14= 12.566 in" 1 64 I5= 3.733 In" 16= 1.562 in" Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605224 RN PG3 Revision: 0 Calculations Continued Bearing Reaction Forces B2= -51.43 lb Moments = 0 LB, 61 = 228.48 lb Forces = 0 A plot of the deflection of the shaft obtained from the numerical results is shown below. Deflection 1.00E-04 - — - -1.00E-04 -- 10._ 15_ ?q-- 75 3 0 35 ' hLh1- - - - _-___ - -- - — --- -- -9.00E-04 Length(in) Deflection Deflections Squared yl = 0.000833 in y12 6.95E-07 in2 y2= 0.000669 in y22 4.47E-07 in2 y3= 0.000185 in y32 3.41E-08 in2 y4= 0.000000 in y42 2.94E-39 in2 ys= 0.000037 in y52 1.38E-09 in2 y6= 0.000001 in y62 4.15E-13 in2 y7= 0.000039 in y72 1.5E-09 in2 Natural Frequency w, = 6646 RPM tojgE F`Y` rad/s 1 FiYi2 w, Percentage of Min Speed = 561% w, Percent of Max Speed = 561% Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605224 RN PG4 Revision: 0 A Campbell diagram provides a visual method to verify no resonance conditions will occur when operating a pump over its operating speed range.The diagram is constructed by plotting frequency in Hz versus frequency in RPM. Common excitation frequencies are shown as diagonal lines.The natural frequency of the rotor is shown as a horizontal line. A resonance condition is likely to occur when a horizontal line crosses a diagonal line within the operating speed ranee. Campbell Diagram 120 Low Margin Operating Speed High Margin Natural Frequency 100 80 w i I in 60 O Vane Pass 40 1 10011 1x 20 �_.. 0 t r 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 Rotation Speed(RPM) STRUCTURAL CALC U LATI O N S FO R FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 3601 FAIRBANKS AVENUE KANSAS CITY, KANSAS 66110 Seismic Anchorage for a 8" B5424L Pump Fairbanks Nijhuis Project #0605224 CWS Durham WWTP Phase 5 Secondary Treatment Tigard, OR BROOKS-RANSOM ASSOCIATES STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS CIVIL ENGINEERS WWW.BROOKSRANSOM.COM / I S.vRUC T(JRq z PROFESS 19 / :' 01 £3 t 7415 NORTH PALM, SUITE 100 17013 ') FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 9371 1 OFFICE: (559)449-8444 r � A i� a: r> 1 •• FAX: (559) 449-8404 v OREC�ON Rau AIM y Brooks, Joe# 1 8523 p. 1,ko,00dk . 20 1 8- 1 0-08 * R' (t (� (� DISCHARGE POSITIONS ,�t A " A " 'I' 0 MOTOR DIMENSIONS CLOCKWISE DO NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE WITHOUT PROTECTIVE GUARD C T QA__,IN PLACE- ANY OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE WITHOUT 37,63 10.47 7 PROTECTIVE GUARD CAN RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY -A- SUPPLIED BY FN -B- SUPPLIED BY OTHERS 2, , II ..\ WHEN VIEWED FROM THE DRIVER END. C CP 4 SUCTION . ,...7_,,..._DISCHARGE 1/4 ^� -Y VENT TAP I^--Z--�I GAUGE TAP a 1 1 I 1 + / __ i1 a a 1 ,,,, t �'• I . . . VOLUTE iI— L:Ii !. I HOII am - H! � i ii. O DO IFIG-I HF HF � —31/4 I 1VAb" DIA. 6 HOLES E—HE—I—HE--I DRAIN TAP I—HR--I BOX DRAIN HA HB PUMP FRAME SUCT DISCH X Y Z CP DD HA HB HD HE HF HG HO HR PUMP MOTOR 8" 85424L T40 404T 8 8 18 9118 14 435+s 17 301/2 541/2 19 141/2 24 /16 37 1444 * REQUIRED ANCHOR NOTE: (6) 1/2"0 ASTM F593, (AISI 316) STAINLESS STEEL HEX HEADED BOLTS WITH POLYETHELYNE SLEEVE. SEE INSTALLATION DETAILS ON SHEET 2 & INSPECTION NOTES ON SHEET 3. NOTES. (1) ALL FLANGES ARE 125# ANSI DRILLING. (2) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES UNLESS NOTED- (3) BASES ARE DESIGNED TO BE COMPLETELY FILLED WITH GROUT. (5) DIMENSIONS MAY VARY DUE TO NORMAL (4) SUCTION GAUGE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE AND MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES. SHOULD BE LOCATED ON ADJACENT SUCTION PIPING. GVSTOMER P.O. NO. MCCLURE AND SONS, INC. 3305-112 , +PINTA R FAaOMICIN1NNN! Jd6 NAME TAG NAME CWS DURHAM WWTP 470P8101 PUMP SIZE AND MODEL GPM TDH NOMINAL RPM ROTATION DISCI-I POS SETTING PLAN 8' 85424L 2100 77 1200 CW 1 8" 85424-L MOTOR HP FRAME PHASE HERTZ VOLTS ENCLOSURE NILIEC 60 404T 3 60 460 TEFL WITH STRUCTURAL BASE CERTIFIED FOR CERTIFIED BY DATE PR()IFrT JI f5.115774 sKAF m/7nt Ft Dmr C605224SP NEV 4 ► BY:. BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS DD Shoot: STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 8" B5424L Horizontal Pump CIVIL ENGINEERS !: 10-08-181 7415 N. PALM, SUITI 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 SecondaryTreatment FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 (559)449-6444 FAX (559)449-B404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: 18523 • SEE DETAILS ON THE ENGINEER 5 E OF RECORDS APPROVED ( BOLT TO BOLT ) CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD LOCK-NUT CONSTRUCTION DETAILS EQUIPMENT BASE CUT 3 REMOVE FORM ABOVE PAD AFTER THREE LAYERS CONCRETE IS CAST 4 PRIOR TO GROUTING OF DUCT TAPE // // // // MIN. I" NON-SHRINK GROUT, SEE NOTES 3 TRHU S BELOW. 4 AI \ P + I" MIN. a WILSON HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC 4 ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE OR APPROVED EQUAL I • �+ L. FILL SLEEVE SOLID WITH SILICON RUBBER OR WAX. SEE NOTE in „ ANCHOR BOLT f /'SIZE AS NOTED I 3/5" PLATE WASHER 4" SQ. MIN. , SEE NOTE 2 EXISTING 3" CLR FOR SLABS BASE SLAB ON GRADES PBL-NUTS I 1/2" CLR FOR ALL OTHER SLABS PREPARE AND CONSTRUCT NEW HOUSEKEEPING PAD IN COMPLIANCE WITH' THE APPROVED CON. DOC'S fa NOTES: I. FOR CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD DETAILS AND NOTES NOT SHOWN SEE DETAILS ON THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 2. FILL SLEEVE WITH SILICONE RUBBER OR WAX. PROTECT THREADS ABOVE SLEEVE FROM DAMAGE AND CONCRETE SPLATTER. DO NOT FILL PIPE SLEEVE WITH GROUT. 3. NON-SHRINK EPDXY GROUT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROJECT SPECIFICATION AFTER LEVELING OF BASE PLATE, SOLE PLATE, OR MOUNTING BLOCK AND ALL SHIMS HAVE BEEN REMOVED. 4. REMOVE SHIMS 4 BLOCKS PRIOR TO TORQUEING BOLTS. 5. APPLY ANCHOR PRE-LOAD TORQUE OF 30 FT-LBS WITH A CALIBRATED WRENCH ONLY AFTER GROUT HAS BEEN ALLOWED TO CURE AND SHIMS ARE REMOVED. 2 ANCHORAGE NOTES AND DETAILS BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS BY: DD STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 8" B5424L Horizontal Pump CIVIL ENGINEERS 7415 Del: 10-08-18 G N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 Secondary Treatment FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 # (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: 18523 • Of. NOTES: I. COMPLIANCE WITH THE ANCHOR BOLT DESIGN AND THE INSTALLATION OF THE ANCHOR BOLTS 15 THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 2. THE PUMP FOUNDATION MUST HAVE ADEQUATE STRENGTH AND MASS TO HOLD THE PUMP FIRMLY IN PLACE. DESIGN OF THE FOUNDATION SYSTEM 15 BY OTHERS. 3. ALL VALUES ARE BASED ON MIN. F'G= 4,000 P.S.I. CONCRETE STRENGTH AT 25 DAYS 4 Fy= 60,000 P.S.I. REBAR STRENGTH. 4. CODE REFERENCE: 2012 IBC, SECTION IG102, STRENGTH DESIGN, ASCE 7-10, ACI 3I8-II APPENDIX D AND LOCAL AMENDMENTS: CITY OF COMMERCE. SEE STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS. HEX HEADED BOLTS SHALL BE ASTM ASTM F5g3, GROUP 2, CONDITION CWI (AI51 316) AS FOLLOWS: NUTS: ASTM F5414 (AI51 TYPE 316) STAINLESS STEEL BOLT SIZE Anom (IN2) EMBEDMENT (MIN.) EDGE DISTANCE (MIN) D L E* HEX HD. A316 SS TYPE BOLT 1/2" 0.1.163 5 6" D=BOLT DIAMETER - INCHES L=BOLT EMBEDDED LENGTH - IN. E=DISTANCE TO EDGE - INCHES L = Le + Le Ls = LENGTH OF SLEEVE Le = LENGTH OF BOLT BEYOND THE SLEEVE * ANCHORS CENTERED NO CLOSER THAN 6" FROM EDGE OF CONCRETE OR COLD JOINT. MINIMUM CONCRETE BASE THICKNESS = 12" SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: I. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE INSPECTED BY AN APPROVED TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2012 IBC, SECTION 1705.1.1, TABLE 1705.3, BUILDING DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS, AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 2. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD AND POSSESS PROPER QUALIFICATION/CERTIFICATION. 3. SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS AND PROCEDURES NOTED: HEX HEADED ANCHOR BOLTS: A. CONTINUOUS INSPECTION OF THIS INSTALLATION 15 REQUIRED. B. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY TYPE AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CONFORMS WITH DESIGN. CONCRETE BASE SHALL EXTEND ANY MINIMUM DISTANCE BEYOND THE CENTER OF ANCHORS AS INDICATED ABOVE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. C. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY SIZE AND GRADE OF ANCHOR BOLT MATERIAL, NUTS, AND WASHERS. D. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT BOLTS ARE CLEAN AND FREE FROM RUST, DIRT, LUBRICANT, OR ANY OTHER CONTAMINANTS. 3 SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS BY: DD sn ' STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 8" B5424L Horizontal Pump CIVIL. ENGINEERS �� 'O_�_18 `7 7415 N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 SecondaryTreatment FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 • (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: 18523 I PROJECT: CWS Durham WWTP Phase 5 Secondary Treatment BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES LOCATION: Tigard,OR 4715 N.PALM AVE,SUITE 100 Fairbanks Nijhuis Project No.: 0605224 FRESNO,CA 93711 JOB NO.: 18523 DATE: 10/8/2018 EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE Fairbanks Nijhuis Model 8" B5424L Horizontal Pump DESIGN OF ANCHORAGE PER Channel Base To Concrete Pedestal 2014 Orgeon Bldg Code,Based on 2012 International Building Code Section 1613 Section 13.3&13.6 of ASCE 7-10 With IBC Amendments,Al 318-11,Appendix D, &AISC 314-10 .rFph/No.Anchors FPV l pv + 1 Fphy G.6. Pphx 0.6. 1 G.6. )fix -Fph/No.Anchors- V Mot � a4111 ( i ANCHOR 4111111111111111.111E4' c_. .'-- RIM R i i„ !RI �_ WIDTH WIDTH OR PLATFORM DEPTHPLAN VEW 8 CC�W Anchor In Tension IrND�W AMORNG ANCHORAGE CALCULATIONS Fp=0.4apSDSWp/(Rp/Ip)*(1+2*z/h) (Eq 13.3-1) 00Fp= 1,834.83 Lbs. Fp=0.3SDsIpWp(Minimum) (Eq 13.3-3) (Not less than) CUP(min.)= 3,440.31 Lbs. <GOVERNS Fp=1.6SDsIpWp(Maximum) (Eq 13.3-2) (Not more than) 00Fp(max.)= 18,348.33 Lbs. ap= 1.00 (Per Table 13.5-1 or 13.6-1) (For Vibration Isolators ap=2.5,Rp=2.5) Sos= 0.715 (Per Section 11.4.4) z= 0.00 (Height in structure at point of attachment of component.Base or below z=0. Roof or above z=h.) h= 0.00 (Average roof height of structure relative to the base elevation in feet.) Rp= 2.50 (Per Section 13.4.2) Ip= 1.50 Importance Factor (Per Section 13.1.3) no= 2.5 (Per Section 13.3.1) Unit Operating Wt. Misc. Wet Weight WEIGHT= 3,872.00 Lbs. + 405.00 = 4,277.00 Lbs. Y-cc X-cc Z-bar Anchor Spacings 29.000 Inches X 2 @ 24.00 Inches 18.930 Inches Number of Anchors Effective in Shear= 6 Total Y-bar= 1.000 Inches Number of Anchors Effective in Tension= 6 Total X-bar= 7.670 Inches Unit Only Fp Horiz.= 00FP= 3,440.31 Lbs. (Per ASCE 7-10 Section 13.4.2 Anchors in Concrete or Masonry) Fp Vert.= 0.2SosWP= 611.61 Lbs. (Per ASCE 7-10 Section 13.3.1&Section 13.4.2a) Anchor Forces(at base of unit) LRFD Load Combination(Eq 16-7): 0.9D-Fpv+D,Fp Tension due to Pretensioninq 0.500"Dia.Bolts 30 Ft-Lbs Clamping Torque= 22,680 Lbs. Pu= 0.9Total Weight-1.0Fpv= 3,237.69 Lbs. Mux=Vux(Z)+Wp(eX)= 97,929.69 In-Lbs./12= 8,161 Ft-Lbs Muy=Fph(Z)+Wp(eY)= 69,402.10 In-Lbs./12= 5,784 Ft-Lbs Muz=Fph(eX)+Fph(eY)= 29,827.50 In-Lbs./12= 2,486 Ft-Lbs Orthogonal Effects Vux=1.0Fph= 3,440.31 Lbs. Vuy= 0.30Fph= 3,440.31 Lbs. Vur=SRSS = VVux2+Vuy2= 4,865.34 Lbs. Use(6)1/2"Diameter ASTM F593.(AISI 316)Stainless Steel Heavy Hex Hd Bolts w/Void Plastic Sleeve Cast in Place Min.12"Thick Normal Weight Concrete Slab,F'c=4,000 psi,8"Min.Embedment,6"Min.Edge Distance Min.1 1/2"Non-Shrink Leveling Grout Per SIMPSON ANCHOR DESIGN SOFTWARE Nua= 5,598.00 LBS. ONn= 8,406 LBS. To verify steel bolt's strength only! Vua= 1,040.00 LBS. OVn= 5,112 LBS. See shear transfer due to friction below. Nua/ONn= 0.666 Vua/OVn= 0.203 Section D.7.1.permits full strength in tension to be permitted (Nua/ONn)53+(Vua/OVn)s3= 0.666 <1.00 OK Friction between base and concrete=0.57 x Pu= 12,927.60 LBS.Total >Vur(SRSS)= 4,865.34 Lbs. OK SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 1/5 StrongTie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: I 1.Proiect information Customer company: Pentair FN 0605223 Project description:8"B5424 Horizontal Pump Customer contact name: 18553 Location: Customer e-mail: Fastening description: Comment: 2.Input Data&Anchor Parameters General Base Material Design method:ACI 318-11 Concrete: Normal-weight Units: Imperial units Concrete thickness,h(inch): 12.00 State:Cracked Anchor Information: Compressive strength,f c(psi):4000 Anchor type:Cast-in-place 1.0 Material: F593 304/316SS Reinforcement condition: B tension,B shear Diameter(inch):0.500 Supplemental reinforcement:Not applicable Effective Embedment depth,her(inch):8.000 Reinforcement provided at corners:No Anchor category:- Ignore concrete breakout in tension:No Anchor ductility:Yes Ignore concrete breakout in shear:Yes hmin(inch):9.25 Ignore 6do requirement:No Cmin(inch):3.00 Build-up grout pad:Yes Smin(inch):3.00 Base Plate Length x Width x Thickness(inch):30.50 x 54.50 x 0.38 Recommended Anchor Anchor Name: Heavy Hex Bolt-1/2"0 Heavy Hex Bolt,F593 304/316SS „ra)-i+ tit°�a�uylt+f►�I�fliil�tf i+�� .�„»,,, 'air sox0., .ntt,644 e#er Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 5 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor DesignerT'" Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Software Engineer: Page: 2/5 Strong Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: Load and Geometry Load factor source:ACI 318 Appendix C Load combination:not set Seismic design:Yes Anchors subjected to sustained tension:Not applicable Ductility section for tension:D.3.3.4.3((d)is satisfied Ductility section for shear:D.3.3.5.3(c)is satisfied f2o factor:not set Apply entire shear load at front row: No Anchors only resisting wind and/or seismic loads:Yes Strength level loads: Nua[Ib]:22680 Vuax[Ib]:3440 Vuay[Ib]:3440 Mux[ft lb]:-8161 Mux[ft-lb]:5784 Muz[ft-Ib]:2486 <Figure 1> 22680 lb __„___// 3440 lb .` 5784 ft-Ib 8161 ft-lb t. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 6 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor DesignerTM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 3/5 Strong-TieSoftware Strong Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: <Figure 2> o, o,. o' o'. 6.00 6.00 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 7 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 4/5 Strong-Tie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: 3.Resulting Anchor Forces Anchor Tension load, Shear load x, Shear load y, Shear load combined, N.(lb) V.(lb) Vuay(Ib) J(Vuax)2+(Vuay)2(Ib) 1 5597.9 774.1 452.0 896.4 2 4577.8 573.3 452.0 730.1 3 3557.7 372.5 452.0 585.7 4 1962.1 372.5 694.6 788.2 5 2982.2 573.3 694.6 900.7 6 4002.3 774.1 694.6 1040.1 Sum 22680.0 3440.0 3440.0 4941.3 Maximum concrete compression strain(%o):0.00 <Figure 3> Maximum concrete compression stress(psi):0 Resultant tension force(Ib):22680 ° I °L °3 Resultant compression force(Ib):0 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in x-axis,e'Nx(inch):3.06 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in y-axis,e'Ny(inch):4.32 Y Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in x-axis,e'vx(inch):4.34 Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in y-axis,e'vy(inch):4.34 NW X o6 .o .4, 4.Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.1) Nsa(Ib) 0 ONsa(Ib) 14200 0.80 11360 5.Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.2) Nb=kcila�f'cher15(Eq.D-6) kc /la fc(psi) her(in) Nb(Ib) 24.0 1.00 4000 8.000 34346 0.750Ncb9=0.750(ANc/ANco)Y'ec,N-ed,N-,tg,NYop,NNb(Sec. D.4.1 &Eq.D-4) ANc(in2) ANco(in2) Ca,mis(in) VecN Ved,N Vic,N Tcp,N Nb(lb) 0 0.750Ncbg(Ib) 2160.00 576.00 6.00 0.586 0.850 1.00 1.000 34346 0.75 36084 6.Pullout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.3) 0.750Np =0.750Vc,PNp=0.750Vc,P8Abryf'c(Sec.D.4.1,Eq.D-13&D-14) TO' Ab v(in2) fc(psi) 0 0.75ONpe(Ib) 1.0 0.47 4000 0.75 8406 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 8 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 5/5 strongTie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: 8.Steel Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.11 V.(Ib) /grout 0 OgrouttVsa(Ib) 8520 0.8 0.75 5112 10.Concrete Pryout Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.3) gVcpg=/6kcpNcbg=Okcp(ANc/ANco)'ec,NWed,NTc,NWcp,NNb(Sec. D.4.1 &Eq. D-41) kcp ANc(in2) ANco(in2) Pec,N Wed,N Wc,N ¶cp,N Nb(lb) 0 OVcpg(Ib) 2.0 2160.00 576.00 0.540 0.850 1.000 1.000 34346 0.75 88612 11.Results Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces(Sec.D.7.) Tension Factored Load, N.(Ib) Design Strength,0Nn(lb) Ratio Status Steel 5598 11360 0.49 Pass Concrete breakout 22680 36084 0.63 Pass Pullout 5598 8406 0.67 Pass(Governs) Shear Factored Load,V.(Ib) Design Strength,eV°(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 1040 5112 0.20 Pass(Governs) Pryout 4865 88612 0.05 Pass Interaction check Nua/ONn Vua/OVC Combined Ratio Permissible Status Sec.D.7..1 0.67 0.00 66.6% 1.0 Pass 1/2"0 Heavy Hex Bolt,F593 304/316SS with hef=8.000 inch meets the selected design criteria. 12.Warnings -Concrete breakout strength in shear has not been evaluated against applied shear load(s)per designer option. Refer to ACI 318 Section D.4.2.1 for conditions where calculations of the concrete breakout strength may not be required. -Per designer input,ductility requirements for tension have been determined to be satisfied—designer to verify. -Per designer input,ductility requirements for shear have been determined to be satisfied—designer to verify. -Designer must exercise own judgement to determine if this design is suitable. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 9 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com + PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS" FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS DYNAMIC SHAFT DEFLECTION I —I C- IA _ IC9 F- b - MODEL 8"B5424L (I. j ORDER 0605224 IMPELLER SYMBOL T8DID SHAFT SYMBOL T40D4A 0 61 DEFLECTION AT OPERATING CONDITION Head = 77 feet YBox= 0.00020 inches Flow= 2100 GPM MAXY = 0.00410 inches VARIABLE DESCRIPTION VALUE A Shaft length between bearings,inches 13.82 B Shaft,length,inches,radial brg to sleeve 2.03 C Shaft length,inches,from impeller discharge to sleeve 7.84 IA Moment of Inertia of the shaft section between bearings,inches4 12.566 IB Moment of Inertia of the shaft section under the radial bearing,inches4 3.733 lc Moment of Inertia of the shaft section under the sleeve inches4 1.562 E Modulus of elasticity,psi 30000000 B2 Width between impeller shrouds including shroud thickness,inches 4.42 D Impeller diameter,inches 15.30 R Radial thrust,pounds,at operating condition 315.59 H Total head at operating condition,feet 77 Kr Thrust factor at operating condition 0.14 X Distance from impeller discharge centerline to face of packing box 7.19 Z Distance from the radial bearing CL to impeller discharge 9.87 EQUATIONS 4 I 7z-64 P=Kr x D x B2 X H x S.G./2.31 Y = P rZA(Z—X)+C3r 1 _ 1 +Z3 + X3 3XiC2( 1 _ 1 +Z2 box 3E I I I I 2I 2 I I I A \, c e/ s c V c a ) s )) WSF (Signed) 9/17/2018 (Date) Rev. 1 Fairbanks Nijhuis Typical Pump Bearing Lubricants Fairbanks Nijhuis recommends a superior quality, NLGI No. 2, multipurpose, lithium complex grease for all pump rolling element bearing applications that require grease lubrication. The grease characteristics should include good high temperature performance, extreme pressure properties, water resistance, excellent oxidation stability, good rust protection and resistance to chemical breakdown. Fairbanks Nijhuis does not recommend grease with molybdenum disulfide (moly)additives. In addition to the characteristics listed above, the grease should meet the following specification. Specifications Consistency: NLGI No. 2 Dropping Point ASTM D2265 >450° F Base fluid viscosity SUS @ 100° F 700 to 1200 SUS@212° F 70to100 Rust Prevention ASTM 1743 Pass Water Washout ASTM 1264 <4% @ 175° F Four Ball EP Test ASTM D2596>40kg load wear >250kg weld point Fairbanks Nijhuis has compiled a general list of products that meet the grease requirements above. This list is not an endorsement of any particular manufacture and should not be construed as exclusive recommendations. When choosing an alternate manufacture, customers should discuss this typical lubricant recommendation with their vendor to ensure that an equivalent grease is supplied. Typical Products Manufacturer Lubricant Brand Name NLGI No. BP BP Energrease LC EP 2 2 Castrol Pyroplex Red 2 Chevron Delo Greases EP 2 Exxon Ronex`!)MP 2 Mobil Mobiltith°AW2 2 Shell Retinae LC 2 Texaco Starplexu 2 2 76 76 Multiplex EP 2 0605224SR3.doc GR-1000 + PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS" HORIZ. BEARING LIFE CALCULATIONS 84 Rio OF BEP PUMP MODEL: 8" B5424L DONE BY: Kelton Stimpert DATE SPEED = 1190 RPM 'ORDER NO.: 0605224 8/7/2018 CAPACITY DESIGN = 2100 GPM L,„,, - L, HEAD DESIGN = 77 Ft 1-•-13= IMPELLER SYMBOL = T8D1D �� 1 i T T, IMPELLER WEIGHT = 102 Lbs Oz TA DR �-- SHAFT SYMBOL = T40D4A i T , I D" Wsx� r SHAFT WEIGHT = 75.5 Lbs R, I R, CAP DESIGN BEP = 2500 GPM T. WIMP CAPACITY BEP = 3500 GPM Limp = 26.72 in IN-BOARD BEARINGS—>BALL BRG HEAD BEP = 76 Ft Li = 13.91 in OUT-BOARD BEARINGS—>BALL BRG DR = 9.25 in BEARING INFORMATION SPEED BEP = 1180 RPM D2 = 15.3 in RADIAL BRG NUMBER 219 DR = 4.125 in RADIAL DYN.CAPACITY 27000 Lbs B2 = 4.42 in THRUST BRNG NUMBER 5315 CERTIFIED BY: WSF LsHFT = 7.56 in THRUST DYN.CAPACITY 39000 Lbs DATE: 08-06-18 SPECIFIC SPEED N _ NQBEP2 = 2712 IMPELLER RADIAL QD = 0.84 = 0.14 (BEP@FULL DIA.) ,_ a THRUST FACTOR QD-BEP KR "REP FROM CHART D2 IMPELLER RADIAL _(KR• HD• D2• B2• SG) = 316 Lbs THRUST TR 2.31 IMPLELLER AXIAL DR = 0.60 XR = 0.61 DH = 0.27 xi/ = 0.52 THRUST CONST. D2 FROM CHART D5 Dz FROM CHART D5 XR ( lDRJl2• /7854 = 67.2 IMPELLER AXIAL _ ` +X H/ AR =( = 0.57 THRUST FACTOR KA 2 AH=(DH)2• (.7854) = 13.4 IMPELLER AXIAL H • SG THRUST TA = 2.31 (AR— AAKA) = 1022 Lbs R1 = (TR+ WIMP x (LIMP) + (WSHFT)x (LSHFT) }/LI = 844 Lbs RESULTANT BEARING FORCES R2= R1 - TR- WIMP- WSHFT = 351 Lbs Ti= O X= 1 Y= 0 RADIAL BEARING LIFE C \a H PURE RADIAL LOAD P=XR,+7 = 844 Lbs L10 LIFE = 458,537 hours NO THRUST P1 N D THRUST BEARING LIFE T2= TA =1022 Lbs X=0.7 Y=1.63 COMBINED AXIAL AND RADIAL LOAD C \� A P =XR2+ =1912 Lbs L10 LIFE = P N = 118,861 hours 2 i D EXPONENTS&COEFF RADIAL BRG a= 3 H= 16667 THRUST BRG 0= 3 A= 16667 J ESTERT — Global Solutions,Local Service. 111L1-- i i Citl/////I/C.� i /-ie S 1 0 Single & S20 Dual Seals Streamlines inventory,installation,maintenance and workflow �\:„:7,,,,,,, // Optimized seal design for plantwide use S-Series full featured common gland Two-step"bolt&go"installation Delivers greater performance and value 4th Generation Sealing combines technology with workflow efficiency x 4- `------ ......_ *Ai, =, , t ilk - ) ) ire fir'' i .„ , , , , 1 ,, the ,:tit (7ert ..,_ reetti.rt ,0)t-t-t)(tticit , , , ,., „ , ,. ._ , _ . ()if Cif 'stet-- • rt inn • vattott Chesterton has a unique position in the sealing industry,with over a century of continuous innovation under one ownership and brand name.The result of this continuity of effort is a record of patents and / innovations unmatched in the world.Chesterton is }` t, proud to continue this winning tradition with the introduction of the Streamline S-Series Seals. t..,,PIO: -.1,'It,,,,, \' 1 1st Generation:Component Seals Chesterton introduced non-fretting seals to lead the way towards seals that won't damage shafts.Other } k innovations in this period included patented Self- I - i ' t Aligning Stationaries and universal slotted glands. v ' 2nd Generation:Cartridge Seals ' y The Chesterton innovation of off-the-shelf cartridge seals is an enduring contribution to worldwide sealing technology.Cartridge sealing has become the °, dominant sealing form since that time.It offers increased sealing reliability due to factory presets, =�r, and faster,easier installation. L 3rd Generation:Advanced Technology Chesterton jumped fully into the computer revolution ,� 44 with the introduction of seal lines engineered and '`tom, designed with the aid of sophisticated software. i' This included Finite Element Analysis(FEA)to predict , ! seal face flatness using monolithic faces.This third $`" generation also featured patented innovations , '` *1 such as the Self Centering Lock Ring,to make seal s , -- , concentricity easily achievable for greater reliability. 4th Generation:Streamline S-Series v The new Streamline S-Series is the culmination of our engineering efforts with with the business of . .. sealing.This is the seal generation that goes beyond sealing to deal with seal process workflow.The result is greater total economies from inventory reduction, � , less administration,increased reliability,and flexible, ' cost-saving rebuild options.This 4th Generation of Chesterton sealing brings greater value than ever `----- before possible. 1��� 55u 1111111 .. -Pries @CHESTERTON. Global Solution,,Local Service. 510 Single & 520 Dual Seals Simply superior for standardization, ; ;. workflow efficiency and value New Chesterton Streamline S-Series is engineered to meet the vast majority of plantwide applications with - great reliability in service.But the S-Series goes beyond ,{ the basics of fluid sealing,to address the economies tr" of total sealing workflow.S-Series will streamline r inventory,simplify seal selection,reduce installation complexity and minimize total maintenance costs. Optimized design for plantwide use S10 Single and S20 dual Tandem area matched " pair of high performance, robust seals that make standardization easy.These benchmark seals deliver the reliability expected from Chesterton. Common design with interchangeable parts The S-Series is a complete system with common parts for predictable performance and simplified inventory. er.X.F No other seal family uses parts commonality better than the S-Series.Unique"cassette within a cartridge" 4 design lets users swap out the S10 for an S20 in a minute.Face materials swap out to match service needs while keeping spares to a minimum. S-Series face geometry is designed with the aid of Finite Element Outstanding performance and value Analysis(FEA}and computer fluid flow modeling.S-Series faces generate low heat to minimize face distortion for stable,reliable S-Series Seals can offer better performance because performance. the weaknesses found in other common platform seal designs have been eliminated.Superior value comes from long-term reliability coupled with inventory savings and workflow efficiencies. Two-step"bolt&go"installation With the S-Series,just bolt on the gland,tighten the set screws and go.Captive fastened centering pads 1 --- move out of the way at start up,and won't get lost when it's time to re-set impellers or re-seal Rebuilding options smooth workflow _ ; 0!> Standard options of factory or field rebuilds are easy ", to execute and economical.But with complete sealing cassettes available at attractive prices,it becomes possible to perform rapid re-sealing with no additional administration relating to rebuilding. Both S-10 and 520 Sealing Cassettes use the common S-Series Gland This unique"cassette-within-a-cartridge"design makes for easy handling and streamlined resealing.Get rapid,reliable re-seal by mounting a new cassette with all new parts and When you see CH ESTE RTON, avoid rebuild administrative costs. you see the future of sealing. The new benchmark for sealing excellence and value Vt- S-Series Si 0 Cassette AP a S-Series Common Parts reduce inventory 0 Multi-Port Flush cleans better and prevents while increasing options.The same gland is localized thermal seal face distortion 4-11*for both the single and dual seals to common with single port systems. maximize flexibility.Interchangeable In Floating Throttle Bushing for maximum cassettes streamline repair administration. safety is standard.Fluids are diverted to 0 Optimized Seal Faces balance low heat quench and drain ports. El generation and distortion to handle a plant's 2 toughest applications.FEA design and robust body withstand high pressures and torques compared to general duty designs. s20 Cassette Q Self-Centering Lock Ring""is a patented 9 Fully Vented Gland ensures that li id mechanism that ensures sleeve concentricity s rrounds the seal.Eliminates airs a.ces that / 1,4,�, and squares the rotary face to the shaft pr- ent barrier fluid flow and in eased seal during installation.Thisprevents seal face • wobble,increasing reliability in tough oper.ting temperatures, emissions and slurry services. M. High F w Pumping Rini ools inboard a d outboard se. faces in 0 High Torque,Cushioned Drives eliminate metal to seal face contact on all S-Series faces. high tempe .ture servi s.Aggressive bi-directional anes c• bine with Cushioned drives minimize shock and vibration, cutwaters to de er igh flow. High strength drive pads resist shear load in tough applications. Ea Tandem Config, =tion seals on the OD of both set of se. faces.Proven ® Captive Centering Pads set precise positioning automatically,then move out of design forth: ighest liability under the way at start-up.Non-sparking for safety, varying co :itions. and never misplaced for future use. al Balanc' •iston's enables t .e hydraulic doubl: .alance with no movi : 0-rings to tr, 0 Micropolished Faces reduce drag for Kan. up and fail under pressure eversals. maximum face responsiveness.Highly Pa •nt pending,it eliminates the n--Id for -- polished surfaces ensure face tracking. de seal faces,which generate exc side �R.. Seal face hang-up is minimized. eat and contribute to 0-ring failure. OPERATING LIMITS STANDARD MATERIALS 510&S20 Process Pressure: Rotary Face: ■ To 450 psig(to 31 bar g) (■ Carbon,Silicon Carbide,Tungsten Carbide crier Pressure: Stationary Face: IN To 450 psi r ) IS Silicon Carbide.Tungsten Carbide 50 psig(to 17 bar g)Inb ' rential Elastomers: Temperature Limits: ■ Viton FLAS*,EP,ChemLast,PTFE Encapsulated ■ To 300°F(150°C)Ethylene Propylene,PTFE Metal Parts: ■ To 400°F(205°C)Fluorocarbon,AFLAS° ■ 316SS all metal parts ■ To 500°F(250°C)ChemLast ■ Hastelloy C°°springs Speed: II 5,000 FPM(25 m/sec) Other materials available on request. For higher pressure and temperature ' Asahi Glass Company Ltd.Registered Trademark applications,please consult Chesterton. •'Haynes International Inc.Registered Trademark z . .. i , . k t t 7. , 1940010.0' '..,'' t.*: ' -17 • Aim, 3 1{ 446, _,.. VV - _____________ .........etim. $ 3 -„t„ ...„,„,:i itimmiu, 5 - k Atok -., , ..... o, • t ,,, , ,• , --tt:t•IttY...,-....4,„.t. IN' 1111111114**1 ".-- ' '''''' * 6 .e VVV 2 • tt i 9 t t 4 --ms- 12 ' • 3 1 11 .t,t ';*.' ''' aft. , 1 ) l'4.4441.1446 t- ...... ... ,....,--- , --;,-. ---"* ._-,t=*•:-.. , ....... -0 , - ' ,. , r.; '4,1' ,•=,.. ,.......-- , „ tar Vte: t ,• 1 .„, , . ril let-0-11 I I 1141 I. nil.J.W 4 ANW, 4„,,,, 1-4-•'-''';'''' 4. e 4- * 1112—--- ,s Hifi./ ..atlit 111111C. si. ... -- ' '' r „...4"4., ,,s , .--4- \ ,. . s ( i.ss? ifti . t 1 , t itt • • /7. - ,. ; ,cefttoc , / R. 1) 11 ( (IC ' , c ' . 411111. ' ,..' ,.. ,.... - . Section ll _.-- Mechanical Seal Installation Data Mechanical Seal Catalog Si 0 SMALL SINGLE CASSETTE SEAL- Dimensional Data/Inch B Ali+ S10 Flush E > F Ilk v. 1r l '-' / 1 Q/D -----\A O/D • m 37 )M1 - D A :- ' ,....-- s \Si/1 0 [ \w, - .iik N ....„ ,, H G / , / ' J X W Y W Y Z S10 KEY A -Shaft Size E -Minimum Seal Chamber Depth J -Seal Chamber to Bolt Surface Z -Quench 0-ring B -Maximum Gland Diameter F -Outboard Seal Length W- Rotary and Stationary 0-rings C -Seal Chamber Bore G -Minimum Bolt Circle by Bolt Size X -Shaft 0-ring D -Seal Outside Diameter H -Slot Width Y - IB&OB Cassette 0-rings A B C C D E F G MIN H J X W Y L MAX MIN MAX MIN 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 1.500 4.50 5 2.44 2.19 0.53 2.11 3.31** 3.55** - 0.57 1.20 128 1 - 143* 142* 1.625 5.00 2.38 70 2.31 0.53 2.11 3.49** 3.68** - 0.57 1.20 1 • 137 145* 144* 1.750 5.50 2.50 2.81 .44 0.53 2.11 3.61** 3.80** - 0.57 1. a 132 139 147* 146* 1.750 OS 6.64 3.50 3.75 2.44 $.53 2.11 5.38 5.50 - 0.5 1.20 132 139 147* 146* 1.875 5.50 2.63 2.94 2.56 0.53 .11 3.74** 3.93** - 0.57 1.20 134 141 149* 148* 1.875 OS 5.99 3.56 3.81 2.56 0.53 2.11 - 5.01 - 0.57 1.20 134 141 149* 148* 2,000 5.50 2.75 3.19 2.69 0.53 2.11 3.99 4.12** - 0.57 1.20 136 143 150* 149* 2.125 6.00 2.88 3.44 2.81 0.53 2.11 4.24 4.3 4.49** 0.69 1.20 138 145 152 151 2.125 OS 6.99 3.88 4.25 2.81 0.22 .42 - 4.49 5.2 0.69 1.51 138 145 152 151 2.250 6.00 3.00 3.56 2.94 $.53 2.11 4.36 4.49 4.61** 0.6• 1.20 140 147 152 151 2.375 6.00 3.13 3.62 .06 0.53 2.11 4.42 4.55 4.68** 0.69 1.21 142 149 153 152 2.500 6.50 3.25 -.:1 3.19 0.53 2.11 4.61 4.74 4.86** 0.69 1.20 1'' 151 153 152 2.500 OS 7.77 •. 0 4.75 3.19 0.53 2.11 - 6.63 6.75** 0.69 1.20 144 1 153 152 2.625 •. 0 3.38 3.94 3.31 0.53 2.11 4.86 4.99 5.11 0.69 1.20 146 5-557 - 153 •- OS 6.99 4.55 4.88 3.31 0.53 2.11 - 5.88 6.00 0.69 1.20 146 5-557 154 * Use next size larger for Style 76 0-rings **Minimum Bolt Circle requires D Washers. t The S10 uses a quantity of 2 0-rings and the S20 uses a quantity of 4 0-rings. 78 13 CHESTERTON; Global Solutions,Local Service. S10 & S20 Large- Dimensional Data/Inch 0-RINGS S20 S10 S10 AND S20 S20 S10 SHAFT GLAND STUFFING BOX SEAL SB SB OB BOLT CIRCLE SLOT SB TO BOLT IB AND OB ROTARY AND IB ROTARY SIZE OD BORE OD DEPTH DEPTH LENGTH BY BOLT SIZE WIDTH SURFACE SHAFT CASSETTE STATIONARY HOUSING HOLDER QUENCH A B C C D E E F G MIN H J 1 2 t MAX MIN MAX MIN MIN 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" each each 2.750 7.70 3.75 4.36 3.67 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.40 5.53 - 0.69 1.60 232 242 237 238 234 241 2.875 7.83 3.88 A.50 3.70 2.50 0.83 2.50 5,48 5.61 0.60 1.60 233 213 238 239 235 212 3.000 7.94 4.00 4.69 3.91 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.63 5.76 - 0.69 1.60 234 244 239 240 236 243 3 1255. 7.99 A 13 4.80 1.0^ 2.50 0.83 2 50 5.78 5.91 0.69 1.60 215 245 210 2^9 237 21^ 3.250 8.19 4.25 4.94 4.16 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.91 6.04 - 0.69 1.60 236 246 241 242 238 245 3.375 8.30 4.38 5.05 4.29 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.98 6.11 6.23 0.81 1.60 237 247 242 243 239 246 3.500 8.44 4.50 5.19 4.41 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.15 6.27 6.40 0.81 1.60 238 248 243 244 240 247 3.625 8.49 4.63 5.30 4.54 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.28 6.40 6.53 0.81 1.60 239 249 244 245 241 248 3.750 8.71 4.75 5.39 4.66 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.35 6.47 6.60 0.81 1.60 241 250 245 246 242 249 3.875 8.84 4.88 5.51 4.79 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.48 6.61 6.73 0.81 1.60 241 251 246 247 243 250 4.000 8.96 5.00 5.69 4.91 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.62 6.75 6.87 0.81 1.60 242 252 247 248 244 251 4.125 8.99 5.13 5.80 5.04 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.74 6.87 6.99 0.81 1.60 243 253 248 249 245 252 4.250 8.99 5.25 5.94 5.16 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.88 7.00 7.13 0.81 1.60 244 254 249 250 246 253 4.375 9.33 5.38 6.06 5.29 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.99 7.12 7.24 0.81 1.60 245 255 250 251 247 254 4.500 9.49 5.50 6.19 5.41 2.50 0.83 2.50 7.14 7.27 7.39 0.81 1.60 246 256 251 252 248 255 4.625 9.49 5.63 6.31 5.40 2.50 0.83 2.50 7.24 7.37 7.49 0.81 1.60 247 257 252 253 249 256 4.750 10.49 5.75 6.47 5.66 2.50 0.83 2.50 7.37 7.49 7.62 0.81 1.60 248 257 253 254 250 256 S10 & S20 Large 12 mm 16 mm 20 mm Dimensional Data/Metric 70 95 110 93 63 21 63 136.4 140.4 154.4 17 41 232 242 237 238 41 75 202 104 99 63 21 63 142.3 146.3 160.3 17 41 234 244 239 236 243 80 203 109 122 103 21 63 146.1 150.1 164.1 17 41 45 240 241 238 244 85 211 114 128 109 63 21 1.1 155.1 169.1 41 237 247 242 243 239 246 90 214 119 132 113 63 21 63 158.6 76.6 20 41 239 248 244 244 240 247 95 221 124 137 118 63 21 160.4 164.4 178.4 41 240 250 245 246 242 249 100 228 129 144 125 21 63 167.4 171.4 185.4 20 41 52 247 248 244 251 110 237 1 134 63 21 63 176.8 180.8 194.8 20 41 245 255 251 247 254 266 146 164 144 63 21 63 186.3 190.3 204.3 20 41 248 257 253 254 256 t The S10 uses a quantity of 2 0-Rings and the S20 uses a quantity of 4 0-Rags. Consult Chesterton Applications Engineering for further information. STANDARD MATERIALS* OPERATING LIMITS All Metal Parts: 316 SS/EN 1.4401 Speed: 0 to 5000 FPM (25 nips) Springs:Alloy C276/EN 2.4819 Process Pressure: 28" Hg Vacuum to 450 psig (31 bar g) Rotary Face: Carbon,Tungsten Carbide, or Silicon Carbide Barrier Pressure (S20): To 450 psig (31 bar g) Stationary Face:Tungsten Carbide or Silicon Carbide IB Seal Pressure Differential: 250 psig (17 bar g) Elastomers: Fluorocarbon, EPR, ChemLast'TM, FEPM, Temperature: PTFE Encapsulated 300°F (150°C) EPR *Other materials available upon request. 400°F (205°C) Fluorocarbon, FEPM 500°F (256°C) Perfluoroelastomer All S10 Seals come assembled with EPR Quench 0-Rings. All S10 and S20 Seals come assembled with FEPM-006 Centering Pad 0-Rings. For higher pressure and temperature applications, consult the factory. CHESTERTON.. Chesterton ISO certificates available on www.chesterton.corn/corporate/iso Global Solutions,Local Service. 860 Salem Street Groveland,Massachusetts 01834 USA Telephone:781-438-7000 Fax:978-469-6528 www.chesterton.com 0 2018 A.W.Chesterton Company. ®Registered trademark owned by the A.W.Chesterton Company in USA and other countries. FORM NO.071411 REV.5 St0/320 SEAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS-ENGLISH 2/18 t -proven technology1111111 ' t that enhances the :� : rating environment ... ....., ,_ ,€tfor y and packing , ir , Ir , cT Lk F ProductOrdering ,, r „ Easy I if is . bons f � Al_ 4 Control ' a ReducesY sh ,� ter= 7 F r �'' , %- 10 t Fr- ill I roves TBR g Extends mechanical seal and packing life S lral7rac" Part Number Code p Example:The following part number identifies a device operating with greatly reduced flush(F),measured in inches(I),to fit over a 3.000"shaft(3000)in a pump with right fluid rotation(R). This is a split(S)SpiralTrac"for in-place installation with split seals in a pump with a 4.000"seal cavity bore diameter(4000).The device is made of Carbon Graphite Filled PTFE(ESC). This part number code applies to typical SpiralTrad configurations.For special configurations please forward a drawing to EnviroSeal for review. Shaft Size(4) Outside Diameter(1) Material Actual diameter of rotating Actual diameter of the seal 316 316 Stainless Steel component under SpiralTracTM cavity bore. >416 416 Stainless Steel GLF Glass Filled PTFE(7) ESC Carbon Graphite Filled PTFE Measurement Units Fluid Rotation(3) BRZ Bronze I Inches As Viewed From Bearing End Ti Titanium M Metric R Right L Left \ \ ----\ F I 3000 R S 4000 (ESC \ \ Operating Conditions(SpiralTrac Versions) Easy Installation Options(SpiralTrac Types) Greatly reduced flush. / Type A Counterbore Fit In with split seals while the equipme 'sStif in place 0) Press into Place using reduced or no Flushl5l: Recommended Upgrades (see Type ✓ Drives Circulation for face cooling. 0 Drill 5/32"vent hole: / Forces fluid Exchange for heat removal. ✓ Releases Air when flooding. Reduced o shlsl in n • rous applications. / Removes Particulate. gressive single spiral groove, air vent and \ exit groove,available in Types A,B,I and . Reduced or no flushls)in fibrous applications. Type CI Bore Fit DDouble spiral grooves,deeper air vent and exit groove, 1 Press into Place usingreduced Flush: Recommended Upgrades available in Types A,I and E.151 �k. / Drives Circulation for face cooling. 0 Drill 5/32"venthoh ® ✓ Enhances fluid Exchange for heat removal. ✓ Releases Air wh• flooding. - •' . .acking only.(2) !, CO Extend exit.oove: 1 Positions Particulate so a small flush A -. •• .-= ••I separator,axially ✓ Forces fl'. xchange and re- • an•manufactured with a single spiral gm..-. �2 (5-7 •GPH/23 32 LPF�can force it under move .articulate without flush(6) the throat restriction and out of the cavity. w.--eliminating shaft erosion. L ,�Reduced Spiral Packing Version Type© ' rally Split Device (Typical for Spt eals) Flush Installeded in in Stuffing Box Press i •Place using reduced Flush: No Upgrades Use half or less the normal flush rate. ✓ Drives ulation for face cooling. Not practical due to installation Greatly extends sleeve and ✓ Enhances .'.Exchange for heat re : al. while the pump is assembled. packing life. ✓ Positions Parti - ate for removal b mall ° ' ._ flush(5-7 GPH/2 LPH). Notes: Type© Impeller Side s 7 nation (Typical for Open Bore Cavities) 1.For Type A or Type E SpiralTrac,"dimensions for the counterbore or external key Press into Place -ng reduced or •Flush(s): (Horizontal Split Case Pumps)must be provided in addition to the part number. ✓ Superior Air -nting. Please contact EnviroSeal for sizing information sheets. / Drives C' ulation for face cooling. 2.For Packing Version SpiralTrac,'"the width of the lantern ring as well as the size of ✓ Force- uid Exchange for heat removal. packing and number of packing rings being replaced by SpiralTrac'must be provided ✓ R. oyes Particulate. in addition to the part number.Please contact EnviroSeal for sizing information sheets. 3.For Double Ended Pumps both right and left rotation devices are required. Type E Externally Keyed (Typical for Horizontal Spli ase Pumps) 4.Depending on the pump,this may be a shaft,sleeve,or impeller hub diameter. 5.When air is a problem from process or dry running,the use of flush,quench or double Ai Installed using reduced or no Flush(s): seals is necessary to provide face cooling. / Superior Air release when vent specified. 6.Elimination of flush is dependent on the type of application.Please contact EnviroSeal ✓ Drives CirculationidExchange foraor cooling. -; ✓ Forces fluid for heat removal. to determine your application's suitability for total flush elimination. _ ✓ Removes Particulate. 7.Version P radial cross-section must be greater than.500"when using glass filled PTFE. EnviroSeal AVAILABLE WORLDWIDE THROUGH US PATENTS#5,553,868 #5,167,418 Engineering Products Limited A.W.CHESTERTON CO. Euro.Pat.App.0 912 848 P.O.Box 538,Waverley Nova Scotia,Canada BON 2S0 Tel(902)861-3464 Fax(902)861-3522 ST01272 280100 Website http://www.enviroseal.ca >: } r PERMANENT BEARING , ¢ PROTECTION :io Bearing Isolator x 404 I N PRO/SEAL A Waukesha Bearings Business __________„.... ..1 INCREASE THE RELIABILITY OF YOUR ROTATING EQUIPMENT The Importance of The High Cost of Contact Seals Bearing Protection A common method of bearing protection is the contact seal. A contact seal Bearing failure is the leading cause is a bearing seal that uses contact on the shaft to retain lubrication and/or of rotating equipment failure across exclude contamination by creating a barrier to the bearing housing. Examples multiple industries and applications. of contact seals are lip seals, mechanical seals and magnetic seals. It leads to expensive unscheduled downtime and lost production. All contact seals have a finite life expectancy, eventually wearing at the point While there are many factors that of contact or grooving the shaft. As a result, they no longer effectively seal the contribute to failed bearings, over bearing enclosure. This short and unpredictable service life makes contact half of bearing failures are caused seals inadequate. Rotating equipment becomes unreliable, and catastrophic by contamination ingress into the failure due to bearing degradation is common. bearing housing and lubrication loss. To eliminate seal failure and increase equipment reliability, finite-life contact Manufacturers and users of rotating seals need to be replaced with a permanent solution. equipment are placing increased emphasis on bearing protection as a means of improving the overall reliability of their rotating equipment. Stop LEADING CAUSES OF MOTOR FAILURE 4' VBXX® Interface s`:c BEARINGS 51% Stator t VBX® Ring Ar STATOR WINDINGS 16% D Groove i 0 � �" EXTERNAL 16% Static Dynamic UNKNOWN 10% ROTOR BEARINGS 5% ( ,, SHAFT COUPLING 2% Rotor EASA:IEEE DATA - Rotor Drive Ring Lube Return ` riii �" Expulsion Port S AME DAY , SHIPPING AVAILABLE Stator Gasket MOTORS .. 7� --- . The Inpro/Seal® Solution - As the inventor of the original Bearing Isolator, ` ., �: Inpro/Seal has delivered proven permanent bearing "= protection for rotating equipment applications for more to .... ., than 30 years. U a The Inpro/Seal Bearing Isolator is a non-contacting, permanent bearing protection device. Inpro/Seal's patented design consists of a unitized stator and rotor that form a compound labyrinth seal with no wearing parts— ensuring permanent protection. The stator is typically pressed into the bearing PUMPS housing, while the rotor turns with the shaft. The Inpro/Seal Bearing Isolator protects in multiple ways. Lubricant is captured in the inner portion of the labyrinth and flows back to the bearing housing. Outside contamination attempting to enter the bearing housing is captured in the outer ,,,,,,.t labyrinth paths and expelled through a port in the stator by centrifugal force and gravity. `` Inpro/Seal's patented VBX®vapor blocking ring inhibits the free transfer of vapor contamination when the rotating equipment is cycled off. Benefits: • Non-wearing, non-contacting, permanent bearing protection • Patented VBX® ring blocks the transfer of vapor contamination created by heating/cooling of the bearing enclosure PILLOW BLOCKS • Split designs available for easy installation • Can be installed by OEMs or retrofitted on site `-'- • Maintenance free -•r•--"` • Zero energy consumption • Can accommodate shaft sizes of 0.625—48.0 in. (1.59— 121.92 cm)* , • Standard temperature tolerances range from -35i F(-37 C)—400 F(204 C)* • Manufactured in bronze, stainless steel, aluminum or other materials for more extreme conditions .m *Utilizing special design and material provisions,products can be manufactured to exceed these ranges. r GEARBOXES 1N..., .."...-..,,„. The Inpro/Sear'Bearing Isolator is K\sii,__ ),' a non-contacting, non-wearing, permanent bearing protection device. GUARANTEED :: PERFORMANCE '' The inpro/Seal®Bearing Isolator is backed A Universal Solution by an unconditional performance guarantee. The Inpro/Seal® Bearing Isolator is a unique barrier for contamination ingress See our website for complete details. and lubrication retention for bearings installed in pumps, motors, gearboxes, pillow blocks, steam turbines, sleeve-bearing motors, paper machine rolls, machine tool spindles and many other types of rotating equipment. This technology has been applied across a variety of industries including chemical processing, food and beverage, mining, oil and gas, power generation, Unmatched primary metals, processing, and pulp and paper. Customer Service Inpro/Seal's responsive global sales No matter the size or complexity of your application, Inpro/Seal can design network is committed to making an isolator to fit your exact specifications. sure you have the right technology for your application, right when Experience You Can Trust Permanent bearing protection requires a custom engineered solution that you need it. We know that time takes into account all these factors: means money for you. That's why we offer same-day shipping on most • Lubrication type • Operating equipment products, even new designs. No • Bearing type • Shaft movement matter what your application, we • Flooded applications • RPM can deliver a custom engineered • Size restrictions • SFPM solution designed to meet your specific needs. You don't need to be an expert; our knowledgeable team will help. You can count on Inpro/Seal, the leader in bearing and system protection, to Technology you can rely on, maximize the uptime of your rotating equipment. We've been the trusted supported by customer service source for bearing isolator technology for more than 30 years and have you'll appreciate. installed millions of bearing isolators on multiple applications worldwide. The Inpro/Seal Advantage , . Inpro/Seal is committed to delivering innovative technology and superior customer support...standard with every solution. When you work with Inpro/Seal, you can expect: • Same-day shipments available on most products, including new designs • Custom engineered solutions for your application and operating environment • Knowledgeable sales network providing localized support • Unconditional performance guarantee—see website for complete details READY TO GET STARTED? , # Visit www.inpro-seal.com to contact your local Inpro/Seal representative or request a quote. All designs are custom engineered to fit exact requirements. , . _. ' The Inpro/Seal°Bearing Isolator is a custom engineered solution and some designs may be protected by one,more than one or none of the following US and/or foreign patents and/or pending patent applications including US Pat.7,052,014,6,419,233;6,311,984;6,234,489;6,182,972;6,062,568;5,951,020;5,865,441;5,498,006;5,378,000 and 5,335,921. AINPRO/SEAL www.inpro-seal.com I info@inpro-seal.com I +1309-787-4971 A Waukesha Bearings Business d11.002.1-0C13 Fairbanks Nijhuis Paint Specifications • Coating Manufacturer Tnemec • Surface Preparation SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. • Prime Coat Series 27 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color 1211 Red Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor • Intermediate Coat Series N69 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color 1211 Red Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor • Finish Coat Series 1075 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color Pentair Blue Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor 0605224SR3.doc PC-1000 TF„�� F.C. TYPDXY® SERIES 27 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Polyamide Epoxy COMMON USAGE Versatile low-temperature coating ideally suited for steel fabrication and OEM applications.Also widely used as a field tie- coat,Provides fast curing and rapid handling capabilities.Note:Series 27 conforms with air pollution regulations limiting Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC)to a maximum of 340 grams/litre(2.8 lbs/gal). COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide.Note:Epoxies chalk with extended exposure to sunlight.Lack of ventilation,incomplete mixing,miscatalyzation or the use of heaters that emit carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide during application and initial stages of curing may cause yellowing to occur. FINISH Flat PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available.Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. COATING SYSTEM PRIMERS Steel:Self-priming or Series 1,37H,66,L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F,90,94-H20,135,394,530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal:Self-priming,Series 66 or L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F. TOPCOATS Series 2H,30,66,73, 113,114,115, 175,700,701,1028,1029,1070, 1071, 1072,1074, 1075, 1077,1078.Note:Series 27 exterior exposed for 3 weeks or longer requires an epoxy intermediate coat or scarification prior to topcoating with Series 2H.Refer to appropriate topcoat data sheet for additional information. SURFACE PREPARATION STEEL SSPC-SP6/MACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning GALVANIZED STEEL&NON- Surface preparation recommendations will vary depending on substrate and exposure conditions.Contact your Tnemec FERROUS METAL representative or Tnemec Technical Services. OVERCOMING For overcoat applications,reference Tnemec Technical Bulletin No.98-10 and contact your Tnemec representative. ALL SURFACES Must be clean,dry and free of oil,grease and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 58.0±2.0%(mixed)t RECOMMENDED DET 2.0 to 6.0 mils(50 to 150 microns)per coat.Note:Number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate, application method and exposure.Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME Temperature To Touch To Handle To Recoat 75°F(24°C) 1/2 hour 2 hours 3 hours 65°F(18°C) 3/4 hour 4 hours 5-6 hours 55°F(11°C) 1 hour 4-5 hours 6-8 hours 45°F(7°C) 1-2 hours 6-8 hours 9-12 hours 35°F(2°C) 2-3 hours 9-12 hours 12-15 hours Curing time varies with surface temperature,air movement,humidity and film thickness. VOLITILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS Unthinned:2.36 lbs/gallon(282 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.83 lbs/gallon(339 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):2.83 lbs/gallon(339 grams/litre)t HAPS Unthinned:2.59 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.59 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):3.54 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 930 mil sq ft/gal(22.8 m2/L at 25 microns).See APPLICATION for coverage rates.t NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two:Part A and Part B PACKAGING 5 gallon(18.9L)pails and 1 gallon(3.79L)cans—Order in multiples of 2. NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 14.22±0.25 lbs(6.45±.11 kg)(mixed)t STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F(-7°C) Maximum 110°F(43°C) TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry)Continuous 250°F(121°C) Intermittent 275°F(135°C) SHELF LIFE 24 months at recommended storage temperature. FLASH POINT-SETA Part A:82°F(28°C) Part B:80°F(27°C) HEALTH&SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous.Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. ©September 29,2008 b Tnemec Co.,Inc. Published technical data and insvvcaons are subject to change without mace.The online catalog at www.memec.com Page 1 of 2 p Y should be referenced fur the most current technical data and insuvctions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. PRODUCT DATA SHEET F.C. TYPDXY° I SERIES 27 APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES Dry Mils(Microns) Wet Mils(Microns) Sq Ft/Gal(m2/Gal) Suggested(1) 4.0(100) 7.0(180) 233(21.6) Minimum 2.0(50) 3.5(90) 465(43.2) Maximum 6.0(150) 10.5(265) 155(14.4) (1)Note:Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness.Allow for overspray and surface irregularities.Wet film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns.Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance.t MIXING Power mix contents of each container,making sure no pigment remains on the bottom.Pour a measured amount of Part B into a clean container large enough to hold both components.Add an equal volume of Part A to Part B while under agitation.Continue agitation until the two components are thoroughly mixed.Do not use mixed material beyond pot life limits.Note:Both components should be above 50°F(10°C)prior to mixing.For applications to surfaces between 35°F to 50°F(2°C to 10°C),allow mixed material to stand thirty(30)minutes and restir before using.For optimum application properties,the material temperature should be above 60°F(16°C). THINNING Use No.60 or No.4 Thinner.For air spray,thin up to 10%or 3/4 pint(380 mL)per gallon.For airless spray,brush or roller,thin up to 5%or 1/4 pint(190 mL)per gallon. POT LIFE 16 hours at 35°F(2°C) 2 hours at 77°F(25°C) 1/2 hour at 100°F(38°C) APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID MadHose ID Atomizing Pot Pressure Pressure 5/16"or 3/8" 3/8"or 1/2" 75-100 psi 25-35 psi DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704 (7.9 or 9.5 mm) (9.5 or 2'7 (5.2-6.9 bar) (1.7-2.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.015"-0.019" 4000-4800 psi 1/4"or 3/8" 60 mesh (380-485 microns) (276-331 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (250 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment,applicator technique and weather conditions. Note:Application over inorganic zinc-rich primers:Apply a wet mist coat and allow tiny bubbles to form.When bubbles disappear in 1 to 2 minutes,apply a full wet coat at specified mil thickness. Roller:Roller application optional when environmental restrictions do not allow spraying.Use 3/8"or 1/2"(9.5 mm to 12.7 mm)synthetic woven nap covers. Brush:Recommended for small areas only.Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. SURFACETFMPERATURE Minimum 35°F(2°C) Maximum 135°F(57°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F(3°C)above the dew point.Coating won't cure below minimum surface temperature. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. tValues may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc.THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF.The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO TIIE BUYER.Technical and application infonnation herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately re.resent all environments.As a.plication,environmental and design factors can vary si•nificantly,clue care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coatin.. 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City,Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMECI Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com ©September 29,2008 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. PDS27 Page 2 of 2 TNEM EC HI-BUILD EPDXOUNE® II SERIES N69 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Polyamidoamine Epoxy COMMON USAGE An advanced generation epoxy for protection and finishing of steel and concrete.It has excellent resistance to abrasion and is suitable for immersion as well as chemical contact exposure.Contact your local Tnemec representative for a list of chemicals.This product can also be used for lining storage tanks that contain demineralized,deionized or distilled water. COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide.Note:Epoxies chalk with extended exposure to sunlight.Lack of ventilation,incomplete mixing,miscatalyzation or the use of heaters that emit carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide during application and initial stages of curing may cause yellowing to occur. FINISH Satin SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS A two-coat system at 4.0-6.0 dry mills(100-150 dry microns)per coat passes the performance requirements of MIL-PRF- 4556F for fuel storage. PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available.Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. COATING SYSTEM SURFACER/FILLER/PATCHER 215 PRIMERS Steel:Self-priming or Series 1,27,37H,66,L69,L69F,N69F,V69F,90E-92,90-97,H90-97,90G-1K97,90-98,91-H20,94- H20, 135, 161,394,530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal:Self-priming or Series 66,L69,L69F,N69F,V69F,161 Concrete:Self-priming or Series 130,215,218 CMU:Self-priming or 130,215,218, 1254 TOPCOATS 22,46H-413,66,L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F,72,73,84, 104, 113, 114,141, 156, 157, 161,175,180, 181,287,446, 740,750, 1028, 1029,1070,1070V, 1071, 1071V,1072, 1072V,1074,1074U, 1075, 1075U, 1077,1078, 1080, 1081.Refer to COLORS on applicable topcoat data sheets for additional information.Note:The following recoat times apply for Series N69:Immersion Service-Surface must be scarified after 60 days.Atmospheric Service-After 60 days,scarification or an epoxy tie-coat is required.When topcoating with Series 740 or 750,recoat time for N69 is 21 days for atmospheric service. Contact your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations. SURFACE PREPARATION PRIMED STEEL Immersion Service:Scarify the epoxy prime coat surface by abrasive blasting with fine abrasive before topcoating if it has been exterior exposed for 60 days or longer and N69 is the specified topcoat. STEEL Immersion Service:SSPC-SP1O/NACE 2 Near-White Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. Non-Immersion Service:SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. GALVANIZED STEEL&NON- Surface preparation recommendations will vary depending on substrate and exposure conditions.Contact your Tnemec FERROUS METAL representative or Tnemec Technical Services. CAST/DUCTILE IRON Contact your Tnemec representative or Tnemec Technical Services. CONCRETE Allow new concrete to cure 28 days.For optimum results and/or immersion service,abrasive blast referencing SSPC- SP13/NACE 6,ICRI CSP 2-4 Surface Preparation of Concrete and Tnemec's Surface Preparation and Application Guide. CTAU Allow mortar to cure for 28 days.Level protrusions and mortar spatter. PAINTED SURFACES Non-Immersion Service:Ask your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations. ALL SURFACES Must be clean,dry and free of oil,grease,chalk and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 67.0±2.0%(mixed)t RECOMMENDED DFT 2.0 to 10.0 mils(50 to 255 microns)per coat.Note:MIL-PRF-4556F applications require two coats at 4.0-6.0 mils(100-150 microns)per coat.Otherwise,the number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate,application method and exposure.Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME AT 5 MILS DFT Without 44-700 Accelerator Temperature To Handle To Recoat Immersion 90°F(32°C) 5 hours 7 hours 7 days 80°F(27°C) 7 hours 9 hours 7 days 70°F(21°C) 9 hours 12 hours 7 days 60°F(16°C) 16 hours 22 hours 9 to 12 days 50°F(10°C) 24 hours 32 hours 12 to 14 days Curing time varies with surface temperature,air movement,humidity and film thickness.Note:For faster curing and low- temperature applications,add No.44-700 Epoxy Accelerator;see separate product data sheet for cure information. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS Unthinned:2.40 lbs/gallon(285 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):2.80 lbs/gallon(334 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.80 lbs/gallon(335 grams/litre) HAPS Unthinned:2.40 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):3.25 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.40 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 1,074 mil sq ft/gal(26.4 m2/L at 25 microns).See APPLICATION for coverage rates.t ©July 29,2013 by Tnemec Inc. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.com Page 1 Of 2 Co., should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. PRODUCT DATA SHEET HI-BUILD EPDXOLINE® II I SERIES N69 NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two:Part A(amine)and Part B(epoxy)-One(Part A)to one(Part B)by volume. PACKAGING 5 gallon(18.9L)pails and 1 gallon(3.79L)cans-Order in multiples of 2. NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 13.67±0.25 lbs(6.10±.11 kg)(mixed)t STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F(-7°C) Maximum 110°F(43°C) TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry)Continuous 250°F(121°C) Intermittent 275°F(135°C) SHELF LIFE Part A:24 months;Part B: 12 months at recommended storage temperature. RASH POINT-SETA Part A:82°F(28°C) Part B:93°F(34°C) HEALTH&SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous.Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES Dry Mils(Microns) Wet Mils(Microns) Sq Ft/Gal(m2/Gal) Suggested(1) 6.0(150) 9.0(230) 179(16.6) Minimum 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75) 537(49.9) Maximum 10.0(250) 15.0(375) 107(10.0) Dense Concrete&Masonry:From 100 to 150 sq ft(9.3 to 13.9 m2)per gallon. CMU:From 75 to 100 sq ft(7.0 to 9.3 m2)per gallon. (1)Note for Steel:Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness.Also, Series N69 can be spray applied to an optional high-build film thickness range of 8.0 to 10.0 dry mils(205 to 255 dry microns)or 11.5 to 14.5 wet mils(209 to 370 wet microns).Allow for overspray and surface irregularities.Film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns.Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance.t MIXING 1.Start with equal amounts of both Parts A&B. 2. Using a power mixer,separately stir Parts A&B. 3.(For accelerated version.If not using 44-700,skip to No.4.) Add four(4)fluid ounces of 44-700 per gallon of Part A while Part A is under agitation. 4.Add Part A to Part B under agitation,stir until thoroughly mixed. 5.Both components must be above 50°F(10°C)prior to mixing.For application of the unaccelerated version to surfaces between 50°F to 60°F(10°C to 16°C)or the accelerated version to surfaces between 35°F to 50°F(2°C to 10°C),allow mixed material to stand 30 minutes and restir before using. 6.For optimum application properties,the material temperature should be above 60°F(16°C). Note:The use of more than the recommended amount of 44-700 will adversely affect performance. THINNING Use No.4 or No.60 Thinner.For air spray,thin up to 10%or 3/4 pint(380 mL)per gallon.For airless spray,roller or brush,thin up to 5%or 1/4 pint(190 mL)per gallon. POT UFE Without 44-700:6 hours at 50°F(10°C) 4 hours at 75°F(24°C) 1 hour at 100°F(38°C) With 44-700:2 hours at 50°F(10°C) 1 hour at 75°F(24°C) 30 minutes at 100°F(38°C) SPRAY LIFE Without 44-700: 1 hour at 75°F(24°C) With 44-700:30 minutes at 75°F(24°C) Note:Spray application after listed times will adversely affect ability to achieve recommended dry film thickness. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray# Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID Mat'l Hose ID AtomizinPressureg Pot Pressure 5/16"or 3/8" 3/8"or 1/2° 75-100 psi 10-20 psi DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704 (9.5 or 12.7 (7.9 or 9.5 mm) mm) (5.2-6.9 bar) (0.7-1.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray$ Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.015"-0.019" 3000-4800 psi 1/4"or 3/8" 60 mesh (380-485 microns) (207-330 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (250 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment,applicator technique and weather conditions. $Spray application of first coat on CMU should be followed by backrolling.Note:Application over inorganic zinc-rich primers:Apply a wet mist coat and allow tiny bubbles to form.When bubbles disappear in 1 to 2 minutes,apply a full wet coat at specified mil thickness. Roller:Use 3/8"or 1/2"(9.5 mm or 12.7 mm)synthetic woven nap roller cover.Use longer nap to obtain penetration on rough or porous surfaces. Brush:Recommended for small areas only.Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 50°F(10°C) Maximum 135°F(57°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F(3°C)above the dew point.Coating will not cure below minimum surface temperature. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. t Values may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLERS LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc.THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN TILE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF.The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As application,environmental and design factors can vary si:nificantly,due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating. 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City,Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMEC1 Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com ©July 29,2013 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. PDSN69 Page 2 of 2 Endura-Shield ® II SERIES1075 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane COMMON USAGE A coating highly resistant to abrasion, wet conditions, corrosive fumes and exterior weather- ing. High build quality combines with project specific primers for two-coat, labor saving systems. Fast curing options are available; see Curing Time below. Product has some applications as a direct to metal finish. Contact your Tnemec representative for more details. NOT FOR IMMERSION SERVICE. COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide. Note: Certain colors may require multiple coats depending on method of application and finish coat color. When feasible, the preceding coat should be in the same color family, but noticeably different. . FINISH Semi-gloss . SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS Series 1075 meets the requirements of SSPC-36 Paint Standard. PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. TNF,MRC COATING SYSTEM PRIMERS Steel: Series 20, FC20, 27, 66, N68, N69, 91-H20,90-97, 104, 135, N140, 161, 530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal: Series 66, N69, 161 Concrete: Series 66, N69, 84, 104, 161 CMU: 54-660, 130. Intermediate coat required. Note: Before topcoating with Series 1075, Series 530 exterior exposed more than 24 hours must first be scarified or receive an intermediate coat of Tnemec polyamide epoxy. Also, Series N68 exterior exposed for 21 days or Series N69, 104, N140 or 161 exterior exposed more than two months must first be scarified or reprimed with themselves. Blasting with fine abrasive is the preferred method of scarification. TOPCOATS Series 76, optional when extended weatherability is desired. SURFACE PREPARATION ALLSURFACES Must be clean, dry and free of oil, grease and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS* 75 ± 2.0% (mixed) RECOMv1ENDEDDFT 2.0 to 5.0 mils (50 to 125 microns) per coat. Note: Number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate, application method and exposure. Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME Temperature To Touch To Handle To Recoat 75°F (24°C) 1 hour 6 hours 8 hours To resist moisture condensation: 6 hours. Curing time varies with surface temperature, air movement, humidity and film thickness. Note: For faster curing and low-temperature applications, add No. 44-710 Urethane Accelerator; see separate product data sheet. Contact Tnemec Technical Services for force curing times and temperatures. VOLATILE ORGANIC Unthinned No. 39 Thinner No. 42 Thinner No. 48 Thinner COMPOUNDS* (Maximum 15%) (Maximum 15%) (Maximun 15%) 1.84 lbs/gallon 2.42 lbs/gallon 2.48 lbs/gallon 2.55 lbs/gallon (220 grams/litre) (290 grams/litre) (297 grams/litre) (305 grams/litre) THEORETICAL COVERAGE* 1,203 mil sq ft/gal (29.5 m2/L at 25 microns). See APPLICATION for coverage rates. NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two: Part A and Part B MIXING RATIO By volume: Eight (Part A) to one (Part B) PACKAGING Three Gallon Kit: Consists of a partially-filled five-gallon can of Part A and a partially-filled half-gallon can of Part B. When mixed, yields three gallons (11.4L). One Gallon Kit: Consists of a partially-filled one-gallon can labeled Part A and a partially- filled pint can labeled Part B. When mixed, yields one gallon (3.79L). NET WEIGHT PER GALLON* 12.75 ± 0.25 lbs (5.80 ± .11 kg) STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F (-7°C) Maximum 110°F (43°C) TENIPERATURERESISTANCE (Dry) Continuous 250°F (121°C) Intermittent 275°F (135°C) Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. ©December 2002, by Tnemec Company, Inc. 1075 SERIES 1075 E n d u ra-Shield ° II TECHNICAL DATA continued FLASH POINT-SETA Part A: 95°F (35°C) Part B: 135°F (57°C) SHELFLIFE 12 months at recommended storage temperature. HEALTH&SAFETY This product contains chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous. Read container label warning and material safety data sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES* Conventional Build (Spray, Brush or Roller) High-Build (Spray Only) Dry Mils Wet Mils Sq Ft/Gal Dry Mils Wet Mils Sq Ft/Gal (Microns) (Microns) (m2/Gal) (Microns) (Microns) (m2/Gal) Suggested 2.5 (65) 3.5 (90) 481 (44.7) 4.0 (100) 5.5 (140) 301 (28.0) Minimum 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75) 602 (55.9) 3.0 (75) 4.0 (100) 401 (37.3) Maximum 3.0 (75) 4.0 (100) 401 (37.3) 5.0 (125) 6.5 (165) 241 (22.4) Note: Can be spray applied at 3.0 to 5.0 mils (75 to 125 microns) DFT per coat when extra protection or the elimination of a coat is desired. Allow for overspray and surface irregularities. Film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns. Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance. MIXING Stir contents of the container marked Part A, making sure no pigment remains on the bottom. Add the contents of the can marked Part B to Part A while under agitation. Continue agitation until the two components are thoroughly mixed. When used with 44-710 Urethane Accelerator, first blend 44-710 into Part A under agitation; continue as above. Do not use mixed material beyond pot life limits. Caution: Part B is moisture-sensitive and will react with atmospheric moisture. Unused material must be kept tightly closed at all times. POT LIFE 11/2 hours at 77°F (25°C) unthinned 2 hours at 77°F (25°C) thinned THINNING For air or airless spray, thin up to 15% or 114 pints (570 mL) per gallon with No. 42 Thinner if temperatures are below 80°F (27°C), use No. 48 Thinner for temperatures above 80°F (27°C). For brush and roller, thin 15% or 11/4 pints (570 mL) per gallon with No. 39 Thinner. Note: Thinning is required for proper application. Caution: Do not add thinner if more than 30 minutes have elapsed after mixing. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 35°F (2°C) Maximum 120°F (49°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F (3°C) above the dew point. If coating is exposed to moisture before the applicable cure parameters are met, dull, flat or spotty appearing areas may develop. Actual cure time will vary with air movement, film thick- ness and humidity. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Air Cap Air Hose Mat'l Hose Atomizing Pot Tip ID ID Pressure ' Pressure DeVilbiss E 78 5/16" or 3/8" 3/8" or 1/2" 75-90 psi 10-20 psi MBC (7.9 or 9.5 mm) (9.5 or 12.7 mm) (5.2-6.2 bar) (0.7-1.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.009"-0.013" 3000-3500 psi 1/4" or 3/8" 100 mesh (230-330 microns) (207-241 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (150 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment, applicator technique and weather conditions. Roller: Use 1/4" (6.4 mm) synthetic nap cover. Do not use medium or long nap roller covers. Two coats are required to obtain dry film thickness above 3.0 mils (75 microns). Brush: Recommended for small areas only. Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. Two coats are required to obtain recommended film thickness above 3.0 mils (75 microns). CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. * Values may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc. THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As application,environmental and design factors can vary significantly,due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating.FOR INDUSTRIAL USE ONLY. TNEMEC COMPANY INCORPORATED PRIMED IN USA 6800 CORPORATE DRIVE,KANSAS CITY,MISSOURI 64120-1372 TEL:1 800 TNEMEC 1 www.tnemec.com (Y DAT3O5)1075 Omega Close-Coupled Design with Straight Bore Hubs NOTE:Hub/shoulder design B _ C B ; B; c B---0.- varies per coupling size.Consult Rexnord for specific size assembly drawings. ,i,...L. A •_. •_• , mini i (OUT) (OUT) (IN) (IN) A • - F (HUBS OUTBOARD) (HUBS INBOARD) Dimensions(in) Recom. Continuous Continuous Weight OO Coupling Max. Max. 0 F (lb) Size Bore HP/100 Torque A B D (in)O RPM (lb-in) (In) (Out) (In) (Out) E2 1.13 0.30 190 7500 3.50 0.94 1.34 1.90 1.85 3.22 3.78 1.2 E3 1.38 0.58 365 7500 4.00 1.50 0.81 1.31 2.32 3.81 4.31 2.4 [4 1.Gu 6.88 5u6 7566 4:56 1.69 0.44 1.31 2.61 i.91 4.69 3.0 E5 1.88 1.48 925 7500 5.38 1.75 0.81 1.81 3.13 4.31 5.31 5.4 E10 2.13 2.30 1450 1.88 0.56 1.84 3.65 4.31 5.56 8.2 E20 2.38 3.65 2300 6600 7.25 2.06 0.50 2.38 4.48 4.62 6.50 13.0 E30 2.88 5.79 3650 5800 8.25 2.31 0.56 2.44 5.42 5.19 7.06 21 E40 3.38 8.85 5500 5000 9.50 2.50 0.56 2.68 6.63 5.56 7.68 35 E50 3.63 12.14 7650 4200 11.00 2.75 0.63 3.38 8.13 6.13 8.88 54 E60 4 19.84 12,500 3800 12.50 3.25 0.69 3.44 8.75 7.19 9.94 72 E70 4.5 35.12 22,125 3600 14.00 3.62 0.75 3.75 9.25 8.00 11.00 86 E80 6 62.7 39,500 2000 16.00 4.87 0.75 5.00 11.25 10.50 14.75 170 E100 6.75 135 85,050 1 1900 21.00 5.50 1.75 3.75 14.13 12.75 14.75 244 E120 7.5 270 170,100 1800 25.00 6.00 2.25 4.88 17.63 14.24 16.88 425 E140 9.00 540 340,200 1500 30.00 7.00 3.00 5.00 20.88 17.00 19.00 746 © See page 17 for larger bore capacities with shallow keyways. OO With maximum bore hubs. Split-in-Half Flex Element Reversible Hubs Allows disassembly and replacement without disturbing hubs Accommodates different shaft spacing requirements,and allows compression bushings to or connected equipment. be installed from either side of the hub. X i W Straight Bore Hubs QD Hubs and Bushings Taper-Lock Hubs and Bushings 8 NOTE:Dimensions subject to change.Certified dimensions of ordered material furnished on request. Installation :a. t a. ' ern Mount one hub to shaft,leave other hub loose for Place half of the Rexnord Omega element around hubs and Mount other half of the Omega element.Tighten all cap adjustment of spacing. secure with self-locking cap screws.Omega element will screws to recommended torques below and installation is space the other hub.Now secure the other hub. done.Refer to the installation instruction for further details. Tested Tough • ,., Rigorous testing demonstrates that the Rexnord Omega `, , . coupling protects connected equipment from the damaging effects of misalignment,vibration and gross overload. INA ,,k Olo Where other coupling designs might allow equipment t•egbil 501 damage,the super flexible element of Rexnord Omega ,,, ,- -- - couplings minimizes the reactionary forces on equipment bearings under severe misalignment conditions and ii reduces the effects of excessive shock overloads. 4 Severe static testing(5 x rating)shows element flexibility, Demonstrates coupling's ability to accept severe rugged design and positive adhesive bond to the metal misalignment. shoes. Omega Coupling IMPORTANT Allowable Misalignment Recommended Cap Screw Torque for Proper Installation 4° Parallel + Coupling Size Torque-Dry (lb-in) (lb-ft) Size 2-10 r —, t 2 OMEGA r 3 30 HUB OMEGA 4 204 17 HUB5 10 20 CO Angular 30 360 30 a ---4+ Size 20-50 — 40 a 2° — 50 60 OMEGA IIIIIIIkik Size 60-80 ow"- HUB 800 900 75 100 3240 270 1° 120 140 7080 590 100-140 NOTE:Cap screws have self-locking patches which should not be reused more than twice.Cap screws can 0o )11lik''NNh-,.,.,444.44 ..,141,4.;iih._Size be further used if a thread locking adhesive is applied. 1/32 1/16 3/32 1/8 3/16 Do NOT Lubricate Cap Screw Threads. Parallel IMPORTANT NOTE: Coupling alignment is directly related to NOTE:Any combination of parallel and angular misalignment which falls under the triangle will not cause a premature smooth,efficient equipment operation.Care fatigue failure of the flexible element in normal use. should be taken for best possible alignment. 7 MOTOR DATA SHEET MOTOR/EQUIPMENT TAG FMB0605224A01 MOTOR NUMBER 18701974 SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA MANUFACTURER US Motors MODEL/SERIES CTE MODEL NO. 18701974 FRAME 404T ENCLOSURE TEFC NEMA DESIGN B HP 60 SERVICE FACTOR 1.15 RPM 1190 INSULATION CLASS F VOLTS 460 FULL LOAD AMPS 70 AMBIENT TEMP 40 Deg C PHASE 3 NO LOAD AMPS 19.3 DESIGN TEMP RISE B HERTZ 60 LOCK ROTOR AMPS 442.2 INRUSH CODE LETTER G 100%LOAD 75%LOAD 50%LOAD GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES: 93.6 94.0 94.6 GUARANTEED MINIMUM POWER FACTOR: 85.5 83.7 77.7 MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: 13.1 KVAR ACCESSORIES MOTOR WINDING HEATER 115 VOLTS 192 WATTS WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION WINDING TEMP SWITCHES(YES/NO) YES RTD: Not Applicable TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE #OF WIRES NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP COEFFICIENT RECOMMENDED DEGREES RECOMMENDED DEGREES ALARM CELSIUS TRIP CELSIUS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS INVERTER DUTY*(YES/NO) NO PART WINDING(YES/NO) NO WYE-DELTA(YES/NO) NO 2 SPEED, 1 WINDING(YES/NO) NO 2 SPEED,2 WINDING(YES/NO) NO AREA CLASSIFICATION: Not Applicable CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE *Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31. Clean Water Services 16222-Data Sheet Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 CONFORMED SPECIFICATIONS Pentair Pump Group 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City, KS 66110 913-371-5000 FAX 913-748-4025 CERTIFIED MOTOR PERFORMANCE DATA MOTOR MANUFACTURER: U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS DATE: 18-Jan-19 FM PURCHASE ORDER #: 11868705 FM TAG#: 0605224A01 PERFORMANCE DATA BASED ON STANDARD RULES OF: X IEEE X ASA X NEMA HP SYNCHRONOUS FULL LOAD* FRAME TYPE ENCLOSURE SPEED(RPM) SPEED(RPM) NUMBER 60 1200 1190 404T CTE TEFC *Full Load Speed Tolerance Per NEMA MG1-12.46 is+/-20%of slip(Slip=Synchronous RPM-Full Load RPM) AMPERES MAX.TEMP. RISE NEMA PHASE HERTZ VOLTS FULL LOCKED INSULATION X RTD SERVICE KVA/HP NEMA LOAD ROTOR CLASS THERM. FACTOR CODE DESIGN 3 60 460 70 442.2 F 80 DEG C 1.15 G B AT 1.0 SF TORQUE AT FULL VOLTAGE MINIMUM GUARANTEED POWER FACTOR FULL LOAD LOCKED PULLOUT EFFICIENCY TORQUE AT STARTING BREAKDOWN FULL 3/4 1/2 FULL 3/4 1/2 FULL LOAD PERCENT OF FULL LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD SPEED(LB.FT) 93.6 94.0 93.6 85.5 83.7 77.7 265 161 232 VSS El VHS n NRR n SRC HORIZ X❑ BEARINGS: PAINT: (Attach Technical Data Sheets) Drive End Lubrication: LOWER EFactory Standard Oil XQGrease DOther O mosite End Lubrication: UPPER Oil X❑Grease MOTOR NO.: 18701974 MOTOR WEIGHT: 1160 LBS. ROTATION: niBI-DIRECTIONAL DCW nCCW Certified by: 94mea Sea ghat Date: 18-Jan-19 Revision # 1 FM013/0194 Pentair Pump Group 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City, KS 66110 913-371-5000 FAX 913-748-4025 Accessory Data Motor Manufacturer: U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS Date: 18-Jan-19 FM Purchase Order#: 11868705 FM Tag#: 0605224A01 Required Not Required Description Space Heaters: X Watts: 192 Voltage: 115 Thermostats: X Type: ❑N.O. X❑N.C. Thermistors: X❑ Make&Model: Trip Range: Quantity _relay not Supplied Per Motor: _relay supplied:Type: a factory set afield adjustable wiring diagram/ Winding RTD's: X Make&Model: Construction/OHM Rating: Quantity _relay not Supplied Per Motor relay supplied:Type: factory set field adjustable — wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Bearing RTD's: X Make&Model: Construction/OHM Rating: Quantity _relay not Supplied relay supplied:Type: factory set field adjustable —wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Vibration Sensor: X❑ Make&Model: _relay not Supplied relay supplied:Type: factory set field adjustable —wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Tests: X 0 X Complete Initial Test,unwitnessed —Sound Test, unwitnessed -Vibration Test,unwitnessed — _Polarization ldex,witnessed _Complete Initial Test,witnessed _Reed Critical Frequency Test,unwitnessed X Short Commercial Test(Routine), witnessed IEEE841+Enhanced No Load Test,unwitnessed Other Features: TEFC, HORIZONTAL, PREMIUM EFFICIENT, CONSTANT SPEED DESIGN, HOSTILE DUTY DESIGN 1.15 SERVICE FACTOR), CLASS F INSULATION, 40 DEGREE C AMBIENT, INSULIFE 1000 TRTMT, 3300 FT ALTITUDE NEMA DESIGN B, BI-DIRECTIONAL ROTATION, F-1 ASSEMBLY, 115V SPACE HEATERS, Q3 N.C. THERMOSTATS CLASS B TEMP RISE @ 1.0 SF, 60,000 HR L-10 BEARING LIFE, BRASS DRAINS, GROUND LUG IN CONDUIT BOX AEGIS SHAFT GROUND RING, SPECIAL BALANCE, STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE, DIRECT CONNECTED TO LOAD SHAFT DEFLECTION DOES NOT EXCEED .002 MILS THROUGHOUT THE OPERATING RANGE, 94.5% NNE, 85.5% PF MOTOR NAMEPLATES ARE STAMPED'MEETS NEMA MG-1, PART 31', CUSTOMER MOTOR DATA SHEET INCLUDED EXCEPTIONS/CLARIFICATIONS/COMMENTS: REVISION#1, 1/18/2019:ADDED SHAFT DEFLECTION OF .002 MILS MAX, COMPLETED CUSTOMER MOTOR DATA SHEET CONFIRMATION THAT MOTOR NAMEPLATE IS MARKED NEMA MG-1 PART 31 COMPLIANT Certified by: flamed .Saw/4er Date: 18-Jan-19 Revision#: 1 FM015/0198 EFFECTIVE: HORIZONTAL MOTORS PRINT: 20-NOV-12 TEFC 07-2933 SUPERSEDES: FRAME: 400T SHEET: 27-OCT-11 BASIC TYPE: CT 1 OF 1 C .... P AB n N p AC T �! W ��- - V 4, -i " Ilir ral =-`4- --i ° - k •..• AF r _i )k .._, '.'.'n 1....a..a.11_,-1-7(' " ES dr... BS 0"- EV AA SIZE E CONDUIT 2E 2F 0.--.0 • BA tom- B A Zf 4 HOLES ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND MILLIMETERS UNITS A B C D E 2E H J K N -.06 06 ±.03 G +.05 IN 19.75 16.75 37.63 10.00 8.00 16.00 1.38 .81 3.75 5.00 7.63 MM 502 425 956 254 203 406 35 21 95 127 194 U UNITS 0 P2 T _ 01 MIN W AA AB AC AF BA IN 20.47 20.75 3.22 2.875 7.00 .38 3.00 18.42 14.13 4.72 6.63 MM 520 527 82 73.03 178 10 468 359 120 168 UNITS BS MIN EV K Q Y IN 6.88 5.66 1.50 .750 MM 175 144 38 19.05 FRAME UNITS 2F ±.03 - 404T IN 12.25 MM 311 - 405T IN 13.75 MM 349 w o 0 w 0 J O 1:ALL ROUGH CASTING DIMENSIONS MAY VARY BY.25" 4:STANDARD ASSEMBLY POSITION F-1 IS SHOWN F-2 IS PROVIDED o DUE TO CASTING AND/OR FABRICATION VARIATIONS. WHEN SPECIFIED.CONDUIT OPENINGS MAY BE LOCATED IN N 2:LARGEST MOTOR WIDTH. STEPS OF 90 DEGREES REGARDLESS OF LOCATION. rr 3:TOLERANCES SHOWN ARE IN INCHES ONLY. STANDARD AS SHOWN WITH CONDUIT OPENING DOWN. 2 Q 07-2933/C 0 ISSUED BY z INFORMATION DISCLOSED ON THIS DOCUMENT R. KING Nidec Motor Corporation IS CONSIDERED PROPRIETARY AND SHALL NOT BE APPROVED BY o REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT WRITTEN M�QTORS J. O'BRIEN = St. Louis, Missouri CONSENT OF NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATIONUV EFFECTIVE: DIMENSION PRINT PRINT: 04-MAR-16 OUTLET BOXES 80-249 SUPERSEDES: STEEL CONSTRUCTION SHEET: 10-JAN-14 4.00" BOLT PATTERN 1 OF 1 _ xY xz -I .ri 0 ® xx AF fXW—.- AA SIZE CONDUIT • O.B. PART NUMBERS O.B. OUTLET BOX DIMENSIONS VOLUME BASE P/N COVER P/N (CU.IN.) AA** AF XW* XX* XY XZ* X 644303 378705 563 3.00 4.72 3.50 9.69 9.38 7.88 2034999 378705 563 3.00 4.72 3.50 9.69 9.38 7.88 w *DOES NOT INCLUDE GASKET MATERIAL THICKNESS. w 0 **STANDARD CONDUIT SIZE SHOWN,CONFIRM ACTUAL VALUES ON THE DIMENSION PRINT AND SUBMITTAL COVER LETTER. 0 ***DRAIN HOLES ON BOTH SIDES. o N ce Q 2 Q 0 ISSUED BY z INFORMATION DISCLOSED ON THIS DOCUMENT APPROVED BY Nidec Motor Corporation IS CONSIDERED PROPRIETARY AND SHALL NOT BE MOTORS E. LIZANA G. MARTINEZ $ a. St. LOUTS Missouri REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT WRITTEN r CONSENT OF NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATIONWI MOTORS CUSTOMER: PENTAIR FLOW TECHNOLOGIES LLC ORDER NO.: 18701974-100 BEARING LIFE CALCULATION FOR CONRAD BALL BEARINGS Bearing life can be calculated with various degrees of sophistication, depending on the accuracy with which the operating conditions can be defined. Basic rating life equation The most simple method of life calculation is to use the ISO or AFBMA equation for basic rating life which is: 16667 ( C 1p Basic rating life equation: L10 = N P � Where: Li() = Basic rating life in hours C= Basic dynamic load rating P= Equivalent dynamic bearing load p= Exponent of the life equation 3 for ball bearings N= Revolutions per minute SIZE: 6316 Bearing Life (hrs) = Exceeds 100,000 RADIAL LOAD: 385 AXIAL THRUST: 1 N= 1200 C= 27900 P= 385 BY: JRC DATE: 7/17/2018 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI Arr- MOTORS v� W.!) Performance vs Torque 1200 75 100 \ 1 C EFFICIENCY\ P K R C E W E T \ POWER FACTOR D N \ T ' ■ ■ AMPS 1195 60 80 100 ' - - I _ _ / I N I F /------ ill - 7 INPUT POWER N U N F / ril Mal - T / . 1190 45 60 757 . ■ / RPM R M A / 7Z - M P D I / . _ / '-/ S / 1185 30 40 50 //--- DISCLAIMER P I / _ , - THE GRAPH DATA IS F t / I -- / / / _ ■ - -- NOTED OTH RWISE. I TYPICAL UNLESS--- i / -- - -- - i -1180 -15 -20 -25 ' ' - -- --- / V EL___ 60.00 Hp 460 Volts 60 Hz - / 40°C MPI=172536 -1175 -0 -0 -0 62.00 124.00 186.00 248.00 310.00 TORQUE IN LB-FT 08-17-2018 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION M(„Lye LATERAL CRITICAL SPEED ANALYSIS DATA ORDER NO: 18701974-100 FRAME SIZE 404T A s �+ B pi ROTOR CORE C -+ MUM D -11 ►� MEI= DRIVE—= E END SHAFT BEARING BEARING ROTOR DATA (dimensions in inches) A - ROTOR CORE B - ROTOR CORE C - OPPOSITE D - DRIVE END BRG. LOCATION LENGTH DRIVE END BRG. LOCATION 11.313 9.000 6.000 10.81 E - ROTOR CORE SHAFT LENGTH ROTOR CORE ROTOR ASSEMBLY DIAMETER END TO END WEIGHT (Ibs) WEIGHT (Ibs) 12.432 36.55 257 385 ROTOR INERTIA ROTOR INERTIA SHAFT/ROTOR ASM POLAR (Ib-ft2) TRANSVERSE (Ib-ft2) BALANCE 38.7 19.35 ISO 1940 G 2.5 BEARING DATA DRIVE END BEARING OPPOSITE END BEARING NUMBER STIFFNESS (lb/in) NUMBER STIFFNESS (lb/in) 80BC03J3 7.80 X 105 80B003J3 7.80 X 105 SHAFT DATA DRAWING NO. MATERIAL DENSITY YIELD 0635396 AISI 1040 —1045 HR .283 LBS/IN3 45,000 psi TENSILE YOUNG'S MODULUS SHEAR MODULUS 82,000 psi 30.0 x106 psi 12.0 x 106 psi NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI rfpoy TORSIONAL ANALYSIS DATA ORDER NO: 18701974-100 FRAME SIZE 404T ROTOR CORE E = EhVD MEM SHAFT 14 TORSIONAL STIFFNESS - SHAFT DATA DRAWING NO. MATERIAL DENSITY YIELD 0635396 AISI 1040 —1045 HR .283 LBS/IN3 45,000 psi TENSILE YOUNG'S MODULUS SHEAR MODULUS 82,000 psi 30 x106 psi 12 x 106 psi MOMENT OF INERTIA - ROTOR ASSEMBLY: WR2 = 38.7 LB-FT2 SHAFT TORSIONAL STIFFNESS: 5.77 X 106 LB-IN/RADIAN Torsional stiffness is the spring rate or constant which allows a user to determine the amount of twist or angular deflection in a shaft based on the amount of torque applied. The portion of the shaft for which the shaft stiffness has been calculated from 1/3 the length of the rotor core to the end of the drive end of the shaft (shafts with an annular keyways are measured from inboard side of the ring groove). It is the users responsibility to correct for coupling mounting effects. SHAFT EXTENSION De - EFFECTIVE DIAMETER WITH KEYWAY 2.450 INCHES ne NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI NAMEPLATE DATA CATALOG NUMBER: | V�3C�, --' -T NA�EPLATEPART�� [-- --- - --- / ----- - | 4^2»:o-0u/ MODEL | � — p- � FIR |___4O4T TYPE K_ �TE | ENCL | SHAFT --- Opp F- - -- -- --- END8RG � OOBCO3J3'QTy1 __ | END BRG | 80BC03J3'QTY1 pH F---� l MAX / -- r- |_ a | AK4B �_ 40C � |D# |_ (mtOndon#: 187O1974.Type:SO, Line#: 100) | |NGUL Aom | F U � F1 U DUTY [ ------ -- -- - CLASS /---- -�/ pos. |L______ ____ ___ ___�| | _ CONT HP RPM HP RPM VOLTS / 460 VOLTS FL FL AMPS |—/«�_l ��—�� AMP8 SF 8F AK�p8 |_--m// 1|c�������/ AK4pG n�- SF | | DESIGN r B || CODE SF IDE0GN CODE NEMANOM NOM NEMANOM r�--�� NOM -� EFFICIENCY �_e��_]| pF | 85 | Ki/oVYo� | | EFFICIENCY pF GUARANTEED MAX | ���-1 | GUARANTEED o�_-���! MAX HZ EFFICIENCY � »»o KyAR | HZ | � EFFICIENCY KyAR HAZARDOUS LOCATION DATA(IF APPuCAoLs): DIVISION CLASG | QROUP| TEMP CODE CLA8S || GROUP|| VFo DATA(IF APPucABLs): VOLTS AMPS r,- ---:---_-��n� -n TORQUE1 , ---- -- ' -| TOR{}UE2 VFD LOAD TYPE 1 /' ---- --- --- _-1 VFD LOAD TYPE 2 `` ---- --- - - �� VFD HERTZ RANGE 1 -A] VFD HERTZ RANGE 2 �-' -- - -- -- --q VFD SPEED RANGE 1 �-- ���c�---- ---- _�n VFD SPEED RANGE 2 o- ---' --- SERVICE FACTOR i' - -- -q FL SLIP NO.POLES [ -- -G - MAGNETIZING �-' ---3 -- --- ] | �»� - U VECTOR MAX RPM |' -- --�_�q EnundorPPR It Radians/Seconds Encoder Volts TEuO DATA(IF APPuCuoLs): Hp(AIR OVER) � ----- .| Hp(AIR OVER �-�--- -� RPM(AIR r__ lRP K4�IROVERc�__- - -�W1/8> OVER) M0) FpMA|R - ____.| FpMA|R /^___ | FpK�AIR VELOCITY VELOCITY r- K4/S VELOCITY ----^| ADDITIONAL NAMEPLATE DATA: 1 ' Decal/Plate WD=499495 Customer PN FMB0605224A01 Notes i Non Rev Ratchet Max Temp Rise ._il 80C RISE/RES@1.00SF i 1 OPP/Upper Oil Cap GREASE Thermal -11 ___ — — --------- (WDG) L OVER TEMP PROT 2 I_ SHAFT/Lower Oil Cap i GREASE Altitude 1 1 _ i Regulatory Notes Regulatory Compliance 1 CC 030A 1 COS Marine Duty Balance 0.08 IN/SEC 'L 1 Arctic Duty I 1 J 3/4 Load Eff. 1 94.9 1 Inrush Limit _ I__ I Motor Weight(LBS) 1 1160 Direction of Rotation Level Special Sound i Special Note 1 I _ _ Vertical Thrust(LBS) i Special Note 2 Thrust Percentage 1 i 1 i , Special Note 3 Bearing Life 1 1 Special Note 4 1 1 1 Starting Method 1 , Special Note 5 1 1 1 1 Number of Starts Special Note 6 1 1 200/208V 60Hz Max Amps 1 SH Max.Temp. 1 190V 50 hz Max Amps 1 1 i SH Voltage 1 SH VOLTS=115V 1 380V 50 Hz Max Amps 1 i SH Watts i SH WATTS=192W NEMA Inertia 1 Load Inertia Sumpheater Voltage 1 1 Sumpheater Wattage 1 1 1 1 Special Accessory Note 1 1 1 Special Accessory Note 16 I i 1 Special Accessory Note 2 Special Accessory Note 17 Special Accessory Note 3 1 I Special Accessory Note 18 1 Special Accessory Note 4 GREASE LUBRICATED IL Special Accessory Note 19 1 1 Special Accessory Note 5 1 RECOMMENDED GREASE 1 Special Accessory Note 20 1 Special AccessoryNote 6 IL EXXON POLYREX-EM l Special Accessory Note 21 1 Special Accessory Note 7 1 1 Special Accessory Note 22 1 1 ---I 1 _ Special Accessory Note 8 1 t Special Accessory Note 23 1 1 1 i Special Accessory Note 9 1 1 Special Accessory Note 24 Special Accessory Note 10 L Special Accessory Note 25 1 1 ----i • i - ' • Special Special Accessory Note 11 I Accessory Note 26 1 1 Special Accessory Note 12 L i i Special Accessory Note 27 1 Special Accessory Note 13 t i Special Accessory Note 28 1 Special Accessory Note 14 I I_ Special Accessory Note 29_1j 1 _ Special Accessory Note 15 Accessory 1 IL Special Note 30 L _i 1 1_ Heater in C/B Voltage 1 1 Heater in C/B Watts Zone 2 Group Division 2 Service Factor 1 1 1------ I Note 1 1 _ I Note 2 I I II1 "e 3Ii _IL__________ NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MO '. i • TYPICAL NAMEPLATE DATA ACTUAL MOTOR NAMEPLATE LAYOUT MAY VARY SOME FIELDS MAY BE OMITTED Nidec trademarks followed by the®symbol are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. GREASE LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS Units are prelubricated at the factory and do not require initial lubrication. Relubricating interval depends upon speed,type of bearing and service.Refer to Table 1 for suggested regreasing inter- vals.Operating conditions may dictate more frequent lubrication.Motor must be at rest and electri- cal controls should be locked open to prevent energizing while motor is being serviced(refer to sec- tion on Safety). If motor is being taken out of storage, refer to storage procedures. To relubricate bearings,remove the drain plug.Inspect grease drain and remove any blockage with a mechanical probe taking care not to damage bearing. A CAUTION Under no circumstances should a mechanical probe be used while the motor is in operation.Add new grease at the grease inlet,refer to Table 1 for replenishment quantities. New grease must be compatible with grease in the motor(See Caution Note). Run the motor for 15 to 30 minutes with the drain plug removed to allow purging of any excess grease.Shut off unit and replace the drain plug.Return motor to service.Some motors have sealed bearings and are not regreasable. Over greasing can cause excessive bearing temperatures, premature lubricant breakdown and bearing failure. Care should be exercised against over greasing. Table 1 Recommended Grease Replenishment Quantities &Intervals (For lubrication of units in service) Buren q Number Bowing Grease Cannon AFBMA Type FL Oz. Luhrkalion Interval 62XX 63XX XXBCO2 XXSCO7 1801.3600 RPM 1201.1800 RPM 0.1200 RPM 6205.6207 630,;-5305 17.35 17-20 0 2 2 AV'S 3 Ycara 3 Yea 55cI5.'.2 6307-6335' 43-5G 35-15 a 4 1 Av. 2'qv; 2 Yid'; &ail 62154215 6310-63" 65-75 50-55 0 6 1 Year 2 Yedrs 2'AV'S fi214-5210 6112.5.3'S &3-3 60-is '0 fi MA,n 'Year 2 Yearc 6223-622a 53?6-6320 101-1a0 10-155 1 5 361.s ,Year I Yea; ku:07 ?51,U13 'I'1 NJ2,16 4 Ri103 ;14 NLr311 55RU53 a 5 N A 61401 1 V©ar NJ215 75RL52 05 NJ31S It.RL51 15 NJ22. 'CORU52 ',1 1:J222 '1 G1D11 '4 NJ7� 1 5(�I1s1F; -n.'tiar 1.5 N d 2#k;:: 5 k x 133'S 144RU44 I4 C77111;A54I1 !1A 1.4 C2213CA5413 Y:A 45 N•A 5A1r.3 "Ye.1' C23'6 CARD 14,A 1 E; C2220 CARD 4'A 'A C22222 CARE iS'A 1 8 14/, 3 11x, E k'l C2225 CARS 1&A 2 5 For motors mounted vertically or in hostile environments, reduce intervals shown by 50 percent. Refer to motor nameplate for bearings provided on a specific motor. For bearings not listed in table above, the amount of grease required may be calculated by the formula: G=0.11xDxB Where; G=Quantity of grease in fluid ounces. D=Outside diameter of bearing in inches. B=Width of bearing in inches. 5-En Table 2 RECOMMENDED GREASES THE FOLLOWING GREASES ARE INTERCHANGEABLE WITH THE GREASE AS PROVIDED IN E UNITS SUPPLIED FROM FACTORY (UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE ON A LUBRICATION N NAMEPLATE PROVIDED ON MOTOR). G MANUFACTURER GREASE(NLGI No.2) ! MOBIL CORP. POLYREX•EM CHEVRON U.S.A.INC. SRi NO.2 A CAUTION Greases of different bases(lithium,polyurea,clay,etc.)may not be compatible when mixed.Mixing such greases can result in reduced lubricant life and premature bearing failure. When necessary,prevent such intermixing by disassembling the motor,removing all old grease from bearings and housings(including all grease fill and drain holes).Inspect and replace damaged bearings.Fill bearing housings and bearing approximately 30%full of new grease.Remove any excess grease extending beyond the edges of the bearing races and retainers. Refer to Table 2 for recommended greases. 6-En Silicone Rubber Heaters Improve Heat Transfer, Speed Warm Ups and „- ; Decrease Wattage J r 0r Requirements gym" Rugged, yet thin, lightweight and flexible—the use of i � , ; Watlow°silicone rubber heaters is limited only by the �� ` imagination.With these heaters, heat can be placed where 0.055 in.(1.4 mm) it is needed. In the application process these heaters Thick Heater with improve heat transfer, speed warm ups and decrease Wire-Wound Element wattage requirements. hilk Teflon®or Silicone Leads Available Fiberglass-reinforced silicone rubber gives the heater dimensional stability without sacrificing flexibility. Because \ ° ° very little material separates the element from the part, heat � ° ° i transfer is rapid and efficient.The heaters are constructed �`N--, ...- with a wire-wound element or an etched foil element. *� The heater construction creates a very thin heater allowing 0.022 in.(0.6 mm)Thick Heater it to fit applications where space is limited. with Etched Foil Element Performance Capabilities Element Vulcanized Between Two Layers of • Operating temperatures up to 500°F(260°C) Silicone Rubber/Fiberglass • Watt densities up to 80 Wfin2(12.5 W/cm2), dependent upon application temperature Typical Applications • Wire-wound element thickness — 0.055 in. (1.4 mm) • Freeze protection and condensation prevention for many • Etched foil element — 0.022 in. (0.56 mm) types of instrumentation and equipment • UR®, cUR®,VDE and CE recognitions are available on • Medical equipment such as blood analyzers and test many designs up to 428°F(220°C) tube heaters • Computer peripherals such as laser printers Features and Benefits • Curing of plastic laminates Designed to the exact shape and size needed • Conforms to your component and/or equipment • Photo processing equipment More than 80 designs available immediately from stock • Semiconductor processing equipment • Reduces downtime Mounting Methods Constructed with wire-wound or etched foil elements • Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Surface(PSAS) • Delivers a thin, lightweight heater • Silicone contact cement kit • Provides the desired flexibility for many dynamic • Field applied adhesive applications • Delivers low mass and easily repeatable distributed Mechanical fasteners • watt densities • Factory bonding Moisture-and chemical-resistant silicone rubber material • Provides longer heater life Vulcanizing adhesives or fasteners • Allows heaters to be easily bonded to the part W WATLOW® Better Thermal Solutions...faster COL-SRH-0311 ©2001,2011 Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company,all rights reserved. Termination Styles Extended Capability Termination Style Watlow offers many types of leads and terminations. HPN Cord and Plug Set Leads can project from any position along the perimeter of the unit.They will be centered on the short side width of rectangular heaters unless otherwise specified. Teflon®UL®1180 CSA Leads Shown Exiting End of Molded Leads are Shown Exiting Edge of Heater. Heater,Centered on Short Side Capped Leads are also Available Watlow's leads are 12 in. (305 mm) long, white,Teflon® insulated, flexible, plated copper UL® 1180 CSA wire.They For removable heaters, a 6 ft(1.8 m) HPN cord and plug set are rated for 392°F(200°C)/300V.The lead connections provides convenience. It is rated for 194°F(90°C)/300V. HPN on or at the heater are insulated with a cap of sheath cord without a plug is also available in any length. material, vulcanized to the heater body. Extended Capability Options Teflon®Leads Formed Heaters Leads Shown Exiting Middle of Heater 0 I Teflon®Type E (MIL-W-16878)and Teflon"UL® 1199 rated for 392°F (200°C)/600V are also available. tII Silicone Insulated Leads dS \\ Many three-dimensional shapes, such as cylinders, cones and boxes, can be factory formed. Semi-rigid shapes can be self-gripping to the part. Special tooling may be required for some designs. Leads Shown Exiting Corner of Heater Holes, Cutouts and Notches For a better moisture seal, specify UL®silicone insulated lead wires.This lead type is rated for 302°F(150°C)/600V.Any lead length is available. Note: Silicone rubber heaters are not designed to be waterproof. Excess exposure to moisture may facilitate premature heater failure. O Option Thermal Insulation To increase the heating efficiency of Watlow can provide flexible heaters with special holes, your application, silicone rubber cutouts and notches in nearly any position required for heaters can be thermally insulated your design.The resistance element can be brought to with silicone sponge rubber, bonded to within '%in. (3.2 mn)of all edges. Standard spacing is one side in the following thicknesses: Yin. (6 mm)from all edges. YI6, '/, Y, 3/i or in. (1.6, 3.2, 6, 9.5 or 13mm) l} - An aluminized surface can be added to the back of the heater to reduce radiated heat losses.This aluminized surface,called "low loss treatment," Watlow®is a registered trademark of Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company. adds very little to the unit thickness Teflon"is a registered trademark of E.I.duPont de Nemours&Company. and maintains a very clean appearance. UR°and cUR®are registered trademarks of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. To be automatically connected to the nearest North American Technical Sales Office: 1 -800-WATLOW2 • www.watlow.com • inquiry@watlow.com International Technical Sales Offices:Australia,+61 3 9335 6449•China,+86 21 3381 0188•France,+33 1 41 32 79 70 Germany,+49(0)72 53/94 00-0•Italy,+39 024588841 •Japan,+81 3 3518 6630•Korea,+82 2 2628 5770 Malaysia,+60 3 8076 8745•Mexico,+52 442 217 6235•Singapore,+65 6773 9488•Spain,+34 91 675 12 92 Taiwan,+886 7 288 5168•United Kingdom,+44(0)115 964 0777 OT4 970798 " SPACE HEATER CONNECTION DIAGRAM SPACE HEATER LEADS MAY BE LOCATED IN EITHER THE MAIN OUTLET BOX OR IF SO EQUIPPED, AN AUXILIARY BOX MOTOR STARTER AWL CONTACT {cc.) - •, ul r I I MOTOR ENCLCISURE 1 PHASE 1 f 446 1' t "4 -. ' WM -- THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUPPLIED WITH ANTI- CONDENSATION HEATERS. HEATERS SHOULD BE ENERGIZED WHEN EQUIPMENT IS NOT OPERATING TO PROTECT UNIT BY PREVENTING INTERNAL CONDENSATION. CONNECT THE"H"OR HEATER LEADS TO 1 1 5V VOLTS 192W WATTS RATING SPACE HEATER NAMEPLATE (ON MOTOR) Revision: 7/30/2008 Mike Cullen Thermal Protector for Motor/Fluorescent ballasts and Temperature Sensing Controls The Klixon®9700 protector is a field proven miniature protector developed to protect shaded pole and permanent split capacitor motors, fluorescent ballasts, solenoids, transformers and other electrical equipment against overheating. KEY BENEFITS In addition to being small and lightweight, the unit is both temperature and cur- rent sensitive. Since the 9700 is sealed to withstand varnish dipping, it can be mounted directly in windings where it can best sense the true temperature of the electrical equipment.As a result, over-temperature protection is assured. Miniature size-compact design assures ease of installation Since the case is not electrically insulated, the protector is furnished with a Precision Calibration-temperature cat- durable Mylar insulating sleeve. Shrinkable and non-shrinkable sleeves are brated and inspected in controlled available. ambients for dependable consistent performace Technical Characteristics Snapaction-positive make and break assured with proven Klixon®strip Purpose of control: thermal motor protector(TMP) disc...contact pressure at open temper- thermal ballast protector(TBP) ature eliminates nuisance trips due to vibration thermal cut-out(TCO) Contact capacity: 250VAC 13A for TCO Sealed steel case-withstands impreg- 250VAC 2A for TBP nation and baking...maybe varnish Temperature range: 60°C to 150°C for TCO and TMP dipped...prevents changes in calibre- 60°C to 135°C for TBP tion during installation Tolerance on Open temp: +/- 5K or+/-8K Automatic action: Type 3C for TMP Type 2C for TBP and TCO Operating time: Continuous Pollution situation: Normal Extent of sensing element: Whole control PTI of the insulation: 175 Enclosure protection degree: IP00 - r T- e 71-4 24.5 6 6 5 ._...�, ;�.10� -,. 0 14 46 � i 1 T 24 Ultimate trip current N'a ambient 9700 X X YY -7777 1 tentperatttre Z Wire Lead and sleeve Serial number is assigned for each lead and sleeve �rt,r..r•.ra I ,,.�d..r,l.i„r.,I„.;nE;,,,n,ri�.h•r configuration, i.e.wire type,length,AWG#,stripped length,sleeve type,and length. Y:Operating temperature and actuation disc material Serial number is assigned for each desired temperature and resistance rating. Nominal Resistance of actuation disc operating Lohms/cmf�_ temperature 30 i 250 T 850 I 100 j 475 11 1 Tem erature code 60 56 57 58 59 1 fl-- 91 92 93 94 95 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2930 36 37 38 39 40 1 68 69 40 66 { . - , 150 _ 46 _ 47 48 49 _ + 50 i '" This is a typical temperature code. There is a temperature code at each 5'C in a step from 60 to 150°C. ,, ,..._..,, tea_,...,,., _ . _„ , ,e...,,.- llc r�,n,in r:u ar,, in X.Open Temperature tolerance - Example: warm*I;.,®ti 1.20 160AWN it -' _e l Ps,c +/-5K 2:+/-8K 9700K01-215 Bimetal of 30ohms/cmf, , 120°C operating temperature. X.Contact material combination +/-5K tolerance with 1 — — AN'crac first cpele tripping time Code Stational contact , Movable contactC -- AWG#18(UL3343 125'C'-600V) L Steel+Fine silver Steel+copper+ cs current ?5 �C. ,tmhunt Silver Cadmium oxide 66 7mm length leads, K Ag-Ni+Silver Steel+copper+ Cadmium oxide Silver Cadmium oxide__Ithick 0.15mm,dia 6.9mm, H Brass+Fine silver Steel+copper+ I length 34mm,Mylar sleeve 3 Silver Cadmium oxide + P A.-Ni+Fine silver Steel+Fine silver rt � ��` ' S Brass+Fine silver Steel+Copper+ AgNi— ' Type"S"is set up for Cadmium-free contact Mm 9700:Device Identification Certifications Agency File number Standard Note UL E 15962 UL2111 Motor protector ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-9 Thermal cut-out ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-2 Thermal motor protector ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-3 Thermal ballast protector CQC CQCO200 2001344 ✓ tit, _ltl L li',t. _lit TECHNICAL.I SALES SUPPORT • •• • • • • • • • •• Hollancl Internet: www.sensr3ta corn • • • • Phone +31 546 879560 Fax +31 546 879204 Italy Email: irtfo-cpepiist.sensa#r4,corn Phone +39 039 6568310 Fax+39 039 6568316 10 Technologies Important Notice:The products and services of Sensata Technologies and its subsidiaries described herein are sold subject to Sensata's standard terms and conditions of sale.Customers are advised to obtain the most current and complete information about Sensata products and services before placing orders.Sensata assumes no liability for applications assistance, customer's applications or product designs,software performance,or infringement of patents.The publication of information renardinn any other nmmnanv's nroducts or services does not constitute Sensata's annroval-warranty or endorsement thereof. THERMOSTATS 1. MOTOR IS EQUIPPED WITH QTY-3(1 PER PHASE)NORMALLY CLOSED THERMOSTATS. THERMOSTATS ARE SET TO OPEN AT HIGH TEMPERATURE. 2. CONTACT RATINGS FOR THERMOSTATS: 120-600 VAC, 720 VA N. C. THERMOSTATS P1 \ II / P2 NOTE:THERMOSTATS LEADS MAY BE LOCATED IN EITHER THE MAIN OUTLET BOX OR IF SO EQUIPPED,AN AUXILIARY BOX. ACCESSORY LISTING QTY-3 N.C.THERMOSTATS REVISION DESCRIPTION FOR: MISC SCALE UNITS TITLE STL0211 -UPDATED FORMAT. NONE IN CUSTOMER NIDEC MOTOR TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS CORPORATION (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) CONNECTION DIAGRAM INCHES mm ISSUED BY APPROVED BY REVISION DATE MATERIAL. R. KING C. CADE 24-FEB_i l --- CODE DWG NO. REV SHEET DWG NIDEC CONFIDENTIAL NUMBER SIZE ANDTEG REGULATION ECTOR2006(REACH)CAS 2ENDE/IEC ANGLES X°-±1° 0834066 G 1 OF 1 A NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 24-Feb-11 REGULATION 1907/2006 AS AMENDED SOLIDEDGE NMCA fJAN-20111 \ / • ® Protecting VFD-Driven Motors: a. N/��1III 11%111111 ■ ✓ Bearing Protection BEARING PROTECT/ON RINGS Best Practices VFD-Driven Motors Can Fail From Destructive Bearing x Currents-Costing Downtime and Lost Production Motors operated by variable frequency drives (VFD) are vulnerable to " premature bearing failure from VFD induced shaft voltages and bearing • ` `, currents — sometimes within only weeks or months — and the result is , . costly down time and production interruptions. i VFDs induce destructive shaft voltages and high frequency currents . "`' V which will cause electrical discharge machining (EDM) pitting, fusion -4,.„ craters,and fluting damage to the motor's bearings and deteriorate the .. '°"' bearing lubrication by allowing electrical arcing to burn the grease. EDM Pitting and Fluting .l I -.I Cost Avoidance-Follow Best Practices to Ensure Uptime and Reliability Motor repair best practices will provide bearing protection from these `_ , destructive bearing currents by adding AEGIS® Shaft Grounding Ring ; - • -- ter.• ►+. ,,i Technology and when needed insulating a bearing to prevent high f` frequency circulating currents. , � �� �� �` •Motors up to 100 HP-Add AEGIS®Shaft Grounding Ring to discharge shaft voltages to ground. °" •Motors over 100 HP-Add AEGIS®Rings by one bearing and insulate AEGIS®Shaft Voltage Testing the opposite bearing. Detailed recommendations are contained in the /4 ... . ,-- - AEGIS®Shaft Grounding Ring Motor Repair -, Q�'a Handbook-an essential reference available upon , , ., ' request at www.est-aegis.com/bearing ' t ' e Motor Bearings are the Most Vulnerable Parts- " �� .• d. Cost of a Failed Motor Adds Up Quickly -'�"` _ - ` ilIC % Its% 0.5% Solution:AEGIS°Bearing Protection Rings y •Downtime cost . , i , •Motor Repair Cost , 93% Rigging and Transportation J" ■Overhead >J '"' The return on investment in re airin motors and followin the - - . ' A. .+, AEGIS® Shaft Grounding Ring Motor Repair Handbook's best practices ' '. i' '- recommendations will pay dividends day after day and ensure the most reliable repair to the motor. AEGIS®uKIT «® /4 ' Mounting --(sC :r ,—`N /fir IC® . ...... Options // ': - "r j ' BEARING PROTECT/ON RINGS Patented Technology uKIT - SGR with Universal Mounting Brackets Motors up to and including 100 HP(75 kW) __ Sized for NEMA and IEC Frame motors Low � � , " Voltage ...4.*„. . • Solid and Split Ring CS015 Install with screws or conductive epoxy AEGIS.SGR . : ' �' 4 different bracket sizes Stator o l- I' /rtas 'A Conductive Epoxy Mounting(-OAW,-0A4W) ;' • _ •, '► • � • Shaft diameters:0.311 to 6.02' �_ • ,�Solid and Split Ring ,iiiiiiir, ie -,,,,i1 Conductive Epoxy Included �rod •Install one AEGIS®SGR Bearing Protection Ring on either •, the drive end or the non-drive end of the motor. Standard Mounting Brackets(-1) •AEGIS®SGR may be installed either internally or externally. S ' Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02 •Use AEGIS®Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating(PN#CS015)on Mounting clips,6-32 x 1/4"cap screws and motor shaft where fibers touch. washers Product recommendation:AEGIS®SGR • ,S/'E6'S SGR\ • ' Motors Greater than 100 HP(75 kW) nq I. sleeve cJ4 CS015 �''9a•a• ac k . AEGIS Ring � .tea . ,.f .11'. - � Insulated Bearing -_ Bolt Through Mounting(-3FH) a Stat°` Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02" S„,„ • 6 32 x 1/2"flat head screws • I I• 2 mounting holes up to shaft size 3.395" 4 mounting holes for larger sizes Install AEGIS'Ring on opposite end of insulation 4: •Non-Drive end: Bearing housing must be isolated with Press Fit Mounting insulated sleeve or coating or use insulated ceramic or ' : s • Shaft diameters:0.311'to 6.02" hybrid bearing to disrupt circulating currents. •• Clean dry 0.004"press fit •Drive end: Install one AEGIS®Bearing Protection Ring. Press into motor end bracket or bearing cap ® of the bearing•AEGIS capRing orcan externallybeinstalled on theinternally motoron endthe bracketback . -("---� ® t Large SGR,iPRO,WTG motorUse AEGIS shaft where fibers touch.Shaf Coating(PN#CS015)on � '� • Large Rings over 6.02" Product recommendation:ColloidalSilver iPRO for Medium Voltage Motors •Low Voltage Motors up •Medium Voltage Motors: . WTG for Wind Turbine Generators to 500HP:AEGIS®SGR AEGIS®iPRO •Low Voltage Motors over 500HP:AEGIS®iPRO Accessories 'bg • SVP-AEGIS®Shaft Voltage Probe IIIIXIIIM C5015 AEGIS®Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating For more recommendations,download the *' EP2400 AEGIS®Conductive Epoxy AEGIS®Handbook from our website. ? www.est-aegis.com/bearing kits ... ....! k—g , ©2015 Form 105-7 Electro Static Technology I 1 -866-738- 1857 I www.est-aegis.com MOTORS Standard Paint Specification For EM Gray NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION Industrial Motors & Systems Division Monterrey, Mexico avr- ``,MOTORS 1. Air dry topcoat enamels for use on cast iron (primed), steel (primed), aluminum, and plastic (primed or unprimed) surfaces. 2. Spray application, total dry film thickness of the topcoat shall be a minimum of 2.0 Mils and a Max. of 4.0 Mils. 3. Reduction: All materials shall be supplied suitable for application at the specific facility in conjunction with the application equipment employed, without reduction. 4. Basic Physical Requirements: A. Salt Spray(fog) testing A.S.T.M. B-117-90 Minimum 250 hours D. Adhesion by tape test A.S.T.M. D3359-90. Coating removal shall pass classification 4 or 5 E. Film hardness by pencil test A.S.T.M. D3363-74 shall pass B to HB. F. Elongation of attached organic coating with cylindrical mandrel. A.S.T.M. D522-88. Pass 1/4 inch-no cracking or flaking G. Resistance of organic coatings to the effects of rapid deformation (impact). Direct Impact: Pass 28 inch pounds, A.S.T.M. D2794-90 Reverse Impact: Pass 28 inch pounds K. Chemical Resistance: A.S.T.M. D1308-87 Spot Test, Open per paragraph 7.3 - 1 Hour Duration: Sulfuric Acid 10% Nitric Acid 10% Hydrochloric Acid 10% Acetic Acid 10% Sodium Hydroxide 10% Sodium Chloride 10% All (3) USEM standard Gear Oils 100% M. The topcoat enamels will dry to package in cardboard boxes without chafing at the following schedules: 1. Force Dry: 1-2 minute flash, 3-5 minute @ 150-200°F and 3-5 minute cool down. 2. Air Dry: A minimum of 5 minutes at a relative humidity of 50% @ 70-80°F. N. Label Test: Apply a USEM performance specification label (nameplate) to a test panel cured for seven days and immerse in distilled water for 48 hours. Upon removal allow a 5 minute recovery period and remove label. No paint shall be removed with the label. O. Shelf Stability: The unreduced enamel after three months storage in a closed, filled container at room temperature (20°C) shall show no permanent separation and readily mix to homogeneous state. The unreduced viscosity shall not have risen more than 30 Saybolt seconds. Asrit MOTORS 5. Vendor Formulation Approval: A. To approve a vendor's formulation, the listed tests shall be certified by the vendor in writing (to the plant and copied to engineering for approval) that the paint has met the above requirements, listing results in appropriate terms (Pass/Fail, Hrs., days, etc.). Engineering may at its discretion perform these tests using in-house capabilities or an outside lab. B. After Engineering and plant approval, the vendor's formulation will be added to this specification as an approved vendor formulation for that duty. C. Changes in formulation other than color will require recertification and approval. D. USEM part numbers will define the of duty, color and specification. The vendor will supply only USEM approved formulation meeting these requirements, matched to the color required per this specification. E. The USEM plants to meet EPA standards want to adhere to a limit of 3.0 lbs/gal. VOCs. Any deviation above this must be acceptable to the plant before order entry. 6. Approved Vendors: Vendor Formulation Other OSEL EM Gray Osel Oro Modified alkyd Color: According to Sample Enamel Code: 4588 provided by Nidec NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 8050 W. Florissant Avenue 1St Louis, MO 63136 www.nidec-motor.com I www.usmotors.com 499495 Motor Wiring Diagram T1 T3/ DELTA ` T2 Connection LEAD CONNECTION I I f Line Each lead may consist of one or more cables having the same lead number. 499495 To reverse direction of rotation interchange connections Li and L2. Each lead may be comprised of one or more cables. Each cable will be marked with the appropriate lead number. EFFECTIVE:2/27/96 SUPERCEDES:X736618,96441,179879,284138 Connection Plate: 499495 Connection Decal: 912113 $ PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS June 12, 2019 McClure and Sons, Inc. 15714 County Club Drive Mill Creek, WA 98012 Attn: Jon Varriano Subject: Purchase Order Number: 3305-112 Sales Order Number: 51830277 Project: CWS Durham WWTP 0605222 Jon: The revised submittal data for the above order is attached. This revised submittal is for your review and approval prior to release for manufacturing. We require submittal return with your review comments and/or approval to release within 35 days for production scheduling purposes. At time of release, please advise firm "on-site" requirement dates for this equipment. Very Truly Yours, Specifications Department Pentair Flow Technologies Return Submittal to: Harley Alt Project Manager cc: Enclosures: (1) pdf submittal 3601 Fairbanks Ave. • P.O. Box 6999 • Kansas City,Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • Fax: 913-748-4025 Pentair Flow Technologies General Clarifications 1. The supply and installation of the following items are by others unless otherwise identified in this submittal. • Anchor bolts, nuts and washers • Gauges, valves and miscellaneous fittings and adapters. • Connecting piping and/or supports • Maintenance lubrication piping and related equipment. • System control apparatus • Maintenance tools and/or storage boxes. • Equipment tags • Installation or field performance testing. 2. The following information is required by Pentair Flow Technologies prior to or at release of the pumps to production. • Verification of rotation and discharge position. Fairbanks Nijhuis Submittal Data For CWS Durham WWTP Tigard, OR Supplier: McClure and Sons, Inc. 15714 County Club Drive Mill Creek, WA 98012 Manufacturer: Pump Fairbanks Nijhuis 3601 Fairbanks Ave. Kansas City, Kansas 66106-0906 (913) 371-5000 Fax: (913) 371-2272 Project Number: 0605222 Sales Order Number 51830277 Service: RAS Tag: 465P1901, 465P1902 Quantity: 2 Pump Size& Model: 14" B5721 Coupling: Rexnord Corp. 1217 Corporate Dr. Arlington, TX. 76006 (817)640-3332 Motor: U S Electrical Motors P. O. Box 3946 St. Louis, MO 63136 (314) 553-2000 0605222SR3.doc Fairbanks Nijhuis Table Of Contents Pump: Response to Comments Dated January 21, 2019 1 Page Response to Comments Dated December 05, 2018 1 Page Response to Comments Dated November 14, 2018 1 Page Response to Comments Dated September 6, 2018 3 Pages Features IF-5720 Technical Clarifications CE-5000 Test Procedure 3 Pages Test Set Up Drawing 0605222TS Performance Curve 0605222CR2 Setting Plan 0605222SP Material Specifications ML-5720 Assembly Drawings 0605222APR1 Full Data Nameplate 0605222NP Pump Technical Data TD-5720 Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 4 Pages Torsional Critical Speed Analysis 4 Pages Seismic Analysis of Anchor Bolts 10 Pages Shaft Deflection Calculations 1 Page Typical Lubricants GR-1000 Bearing Life Calculations 1 Page Chesterton S10 Mechanical Seal 6 Pages Spiral Trac Bushing 2 Pages Inpro Seal 4 Pages Paint Specifications PC-1000 Coupling: Rexnord Omega 2 Pages Driver: Data Sheet 1 Page Performance Data FM013 Certification &Accessory Data FM015 Dimensions 07-2933 Outlet Boxes 80-249 Bearing Life Calculation 1 Page Curves 1 Page Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 1 Page Torsional Critical Data 1 Page Nameplate 2 Pages Lubrication 2 Pages Silicone Rubber Space Heaters 2 Pages Connection Diagram 970798 Klixon Miniature Protector 2 Pages Connection Diagram 834066 AEGIS Bearing Protection Ring 2 Pages Paint Specifications 3 Pages Wiring Diagram 499495 0605222SR3.doc 0605222 Response to Submittal Comments Dated January 21, 2019 1. Comment: Contractor shall submit completed motor data sheets that conform to the data sheet in the appendix of section 16222. Blank data sheets are not acceptable. Response: This is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor to respond. 2. Comment: Change impeller fasteners to stainless steel in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide stainless steel impeller fasteners. Please see the revised material page. 3. Comment: Change seal to Chesterton S10 mechanical seal with Spiraltrac bushing in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide the Chesterton S10 mechanical seal with a Spiral Trac bushing. Please see the revised submittal. 4. Comment: Change to grease-lubricated Inpro seals for pump frame in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide Inpro seals. Please see the revised submittal 5. Comment: Change couplings to Rexnord Omega couplings in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide the Rexnord Omega couplings. Please see the revised submittal. 0605222 Response to Submittal Comments Dated December 05, 2018 1. Comment: Submit Aegis bearing protection rings for the following motors: 465P1903, 465P1904 & 470P8102 for consistency on the manufacture for all bearing protection rings. Response: Aegis bearing protection ring data has been added to the motor submittal. Please see the revised motor submittal. 2. Comment: Contractor shall submit motor data sheets that conform to the data sheet in the appendix of section 16222. Response: Motor Data Sheet has been added to the revised motor submittal. 3. Comment: Motor nameplates shall indicate compliance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31 for inverter duty motors per section 16222.2.02.9.a.1. Response: Motor nameplate will be marked NEMA MG-1, Part 31 compliant. This has been noted on the accessory data page of the revised motor submittal. 4. Comment: 470P8101 -Confirm shaft deflection does not exceed 2 mils at any point in the operating range. Revise H to 90 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 126) Response: Confirmation on shaft deflection not exceeding 2 mils throughout the operating range. H cannot be revised to 90 ft at the rated flow due to insignificant impeller diameter. 90 ft is shown within the AOR but at a different flow rate. 5. Comment: 470P8102-Confirm shaft deflection does not exceed 2 mils at any point in the operating range. Revise H to 38 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 296) Response: Confirmation on shaft deflection not exceeding 2 mils throughout the operating range. H cannot be revised to 38 ft at the rated flow due to insignificant impeller diameter. 38 ft is shown within the AOR but at a different flow rate. 0605222 Response to Submittal Comments Dated November 14, 2018 1. Comment: Motor nameplate data, Page 61 -Verify in writing if motor is Inverter Duty and labeled per 16222 2.02 C 2. -A&R Response: This was included in the original submittal and was overlooked. Project Engineer was reviewed the information with Granich. 2. Comment: Motor nameplate data, Page 61, 125, 254 - Motor power factor shall be 80% or better at full rated load. -A&R Response: A power factor of 80, on this size/speed of motor is not available from any motor brand. GE's version has a lower power factor than US Motors. Project Engineer has reviewed the information with Granich and has accepted the motor as-is. 3. Comment: All motors on VFD shall have shaft-grounding rings, and shall be inverter duty. -A&R Response: The project Engineer has reviewed the information with and has accepted the motor as- is. 4. Comment: 465P1901, 1902- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. No clarifications or questions were responded to during the bid phase that modified these requirements. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. This requirement has been waived. 5. Comment: 465P1901, 1902, 1903, 1904- It is not acceptable to overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. Project Engineer is in agreement that the motor should never see an overload condition. This issue has been resolved. 6. Comment: 465P8101 - Using the service factor of the motor is not acceptable for reaching the low point in the head range at full speed. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. This issue has been resolved 7. Comment: 465P1901, 1902 - Does not meet the specified operating head range of 11 to 17ft at full speed. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. -A&R Response: FN has revised the curves. Please see revised curve in the revised submittal. ► PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City, KS 66106 PH: 913-371-5000 September 20, 2018 McClure & Sons, Inc. Attn: Jason Jarmin Ref: CWS Durham Phase 5 Expansion - End Suction Pumps Submittal Review Dated 9/6/18 FN Project Number(s): 0605222-25 Mr. Jarmin: Please see our responses to the comments we received via email on 9/6/18. 1 . Motors shall be seismic rated as specified in 16222-1.07-A. FN Response: The motors provided are not seismic; there aren't any seismic rated motors commercially available to provide for the motor/pump assembly. 2. Nameplate shall be stainless steel per NEMA standard motor data. FN Response: Stainless steel nameplates will be provided. 3. Confirm that the vibration of the pumping units will meet the requirements specified under Section 1 1 1 1 5-1-5.01. FN Response: Confirmed, the vibration will meet the Hydraulic Institute standard. 4. Is Fairbanks/Pentair including a witness test in the scope? FN Response: A witness performance test is included with our scope. 5. 465P 1901, 1902- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The shutoff head will be as plotted. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 6. 465P 1902, 1902- Does not meet the specified operating head range of 11 to 17 ft at full speed. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605222CR1). A reduced speed has been plotted to show performance at the low head range. At full speed, the low head condition point is outside of the AOR and/or would overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. 1 7. 465P1902, 1902-Minimum efficiency is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The efficiency is as guaranteed on the submittal curve. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 8. 465P8101 - Pump at full speed does not appear to hit 56 ft TDH. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605224CR1). The service factor of the motor will be used to reach the low point in the head range at full speed. 9. 465P8101 - Maximum shaft deflection exceeds specified 2 mils by a significant margin. Not acceptable. FN Response: Please see the attached revised deflection calculations (0605224SDR1). A value of deflection at the seal box has been added and meets the specification. 10. 465P8101 - Revise H to 90 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 83) FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605224CR1). 90 feet is achievable at full speed and is within the AOR. 11. 465P1903, 1904- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The shut off head will be as plotted. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 12. 465P1903, 1904-Operating head range of 11 to 17 ft at full speed is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet 11 ft at run out. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605223CR1). A reduced speed has been plotted to show performance at the low head range. At full speed, the low head condition point is outside of the AOR and/or would overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. 13. 465P8102- Maximum shaft deflection exceeds specified 2 mils. Not acceptable. FN Response: Please see the attached revised deflection calculations (0605225SDR1). A value of deflection at the seal box has been added and meets the specification. 14. 465P81012- Revise H to 38 ft-upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 211) FN Response: Please see the attached curve 0605225CR0. 38 feet is achievable at full speed and is within the AOR. 2 If you have any further questions, please do not hesitate to contact me at (913) 748- 4108 or via email at harley.alt@pentair.com. Sincerely, Harley Alt Project Manager Pentair Flow Technologies cc: J. Eaves, Pentair K. Hogan, Granich J. Hayes, Granich Attach: 0605223CR1, 0605222CR1, 0605224CR1, 0605225CR0, 0605224SDR1, 0605225S D R 1 3 Fairbanks Nijhuis Included Features • Variable Speed Operation • Rotation: Counter Clockwise • Discharge Position: #9 • Dynamically Balanced Impeller to G6.3 • High Chrome Cast Iron on Casing, Casing Cover and Impeller • Stainless Steel Impeller Fasteners • Stainless Steel Impeller Wear Ring • Stainless Steel Casing Wear Ring • Stainless Steel Shaft Sleeve • Fronthead with Cleanout • Structural Steel Base • Rexnord Omega Coupling • Chesterton S10 Mechanical Seal • Spiral Trac Bushing • Inpro Seals • Lifting Eyes • Lateral Critical Speed Analysis • Torsional Critical Speed Analysis • Seismic Analysis of Anchor Bolts • Shaft Deflection Calculations • Bearing Life Calculations • Certified Witness Performance Test • Certified Non-Witness Hydraulic Test at 1.5 x Shutoff Head Plus Maximum Suction Pressure (7psi) • Curve Approval Required Prior to Shipment • 15 Day Notice Prior to Performance Test • Holiday Testing on Coating • Film Thickness, Spark&Adhesion Testing on Coating • 25HP, 600RPM, 3/60/460V, Inverter Duty Motor 0605222SR3.doc IF-5720 Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Clarifications & Exceptions 1. (01610#11)Anchor bolts are not in FN's Scope of Supply and shall be provided by others. 2. (01610#12) In lieu of a drip tray, the pump is supplied with a back head, which includes an integral cast reservoir to collect leakage. This reservoir is tapped to allow connection of customer supplied drain piping. FN requests approval of this exception. 3. (11115, 2-2) Minimum shutoff head will be 27' in lieu of 38'. Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Clarifications & Exceptions 1. (16222 1.05 D.5; 107 A) Motors are not seismic rated. 2. (16222 2.02 A 9.a.1) Nameplate shall be stainless steel per Nidec standard offering with laser etched letters. 0605222SR3.doc CE-5000 Ok PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS' TEST PROCEDURE FOR CENTRIFUGAL TYPE PUMPS Model: 14" B5721 Project Number: 0605222 Quantity of Pumps to Test: Two (2) GENERAL INFORMATION: Tests will be conducted to assure pump performance meets the requirements of sold conditions, as shown on the previously proposed submittal curve. Tests will be conducted at the original manufacturer's factory, located in Kansas City,Kansas. Data points (at least eight) will be taken to assure that a performance curve has been sufficiently established. For each pump being test, a certified curve will be plotted on an 8-1/2" x 11" sheet of paper and submit to the customer soon thereafter. Measurements will be taken using calibrated equipment and the values of each measurement will be determined as follows: PRESSURE HEAD (FEET) The total head will be the summation of the discharge pressure transducer reading, plus or minus the suction pressure transducer (or suction manometer), plus or minus the vertical distance between the gauge zero reference points and any velocity head correction when gauge taps are located on different pipe inside diameters. FLOW RATE(GPM) The flow rate will be measured with a differential pressure transducer used in conjunction with a venturi meter. Differential head will then be used to derive the flow in terms of GPM by using the constant established from the venturi's calibration data. HORSEPOWER(BHP) The power input to the motor will be measured with a digital power analyzer. Drive motor efficiencies will then be used to convert this measurement to horsepower. SPEED (RPM) The rotational speed will be determined by means of a calibrated, electronic tachometer. EFFICIENCY (%) From the previously obtained values for horsepower, total head, and flow rate, efficiency will be calculated for each individually run test. 3601 Fairbanks Avenue • PO Box 6999 • Kansas City,Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • FAX:913-371-2272 SPECIFIC REMARKS: • Customer witnessed certified factory performance test utilizing Acceptance Grade 1U per ANSI/HI 14.6. • 0%to 10% flow rate at rated head • 0%to 6%head at rated flow • Pump(s)will be tested with job motor. • 15 day notification given prior to factory tests. • Curve approval is required prior to shipment. • A copy of a sample pump test log is attached. • A copy of the test set-up is attached PUMP TEST STANDARDS: Pump tests meet the following standards: Hydraulic Institute Test Standards—latest edition American Water Works Association—latest edition Certified by: '-{))...d.11 Billy Faltas Product Engineer Date: August 3, 2018 3601 Fairbanks Avenue • PO Box 6999 • Kansas City, Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • FAX:913-371-2272 Test Location of Test Customer: 'b P E N TA I R FA I R BA N KS N I J H U I S" Kansas City Water Temperature End User: Model: Impeller Information Guaranteed Performance Series: Impeller: Flow Head Power Efficiency Barometric Pressure Sales No. Proj. No. Serial No. Retest No. Application: Diameter Quantity Underfile Material (GPM) (ft) (HP) (%) Stages: Guaranteed Head Tested By Witnessed By Rotation: Running Pos: Guaranteed Efficiency Date: Date: Bowl Coat: Design: Surface: Measured Values Calculated Performance (at RPM) Pressure at Suction Venturi Power Head Velocity Flow Discharge Lift Apressure Volts Amps Power Factor Speed Loss Head Rate Head Power Efficiency Comments (ft) (ft) (ft) (V) (A) (kW) (%) RPM (ft) (ft) (GPM) (ft) (HP) (%) (1) [ (2) . [ (3) [ (4)_ [ ,. (5) J [ (6) J 1(8) J [ (16)_ J [ (9) 1 [ (10) _ (11) [ (12) ) [ (13) /Explanation (1)Discharge gauge head reading (2)Suction gauge head reading;(Distance between water level and CL of discharge gauge for Column type,Negative sign used when there is positive suction head) (3)Feet of water across the venturi meter (4)Volt reading from the power meter (5)K.W.reading from the power meter (6)Power factor reading from the power meter (7)Amp reading from the power meter (8)RPM Tachometer from the pump shaft ‘4\\*I' (9)V2/2g at the discharge tap-V2/2g at the suction tap(0 for submerge impeller type/no suction gauge) 0 (1 0)Flow:Square root of the Venturi Delta P*The Venturi Constant K((')(3)*(14)) (11)Total Head((1)+(2)+(9) +(16)) (12)Horsepower,calculated from motor efficiencies(15)and KW reading. (13) Pump Efficiency: (GPM x TDH)/(39.60 X BHP) (14)Venturi Constant (15)Motor efficiencies 141‘1\°* 44‘• 1 (16)Head losses due to column,lineshafting,and discharge head (Used for calculating bowl performance) Suction Inner Diameter Discharge Inner Diameter Suction Transducer Discharge Transducer Venturi Venturi K Venturi Transducer Submerg. Dist. Btwn Gauges 0 (14) Details of O Motor Used for Test Motor Efficiency Full Load Speed: Power Analyzer Horsepower Nom.Speed Shaft Config. Serial Number 1/4 Load 1/2 Load 3/4 Load Full Load 5/4 Load Max Allowable HP: Serial Number (15) 1 (15) [ (15) Service Factor: 1.15 l 1 POWER ANALYZER JOB --,,ILii MOTOR 1 ! *// ,:_,d'i , - -- - --------- - ( , T-11 "f\0 1 I DISCHARGE VENTURI GAUGE DIFFERENTIAL j GAUGE 1 1 SUCTION i GAUGE (W.): I 16 x 10. 675 GATE VALVE VENTURI 14" PIPE - ' DISCHARGE Ir l'°'.- -- _ _ -:: j V V V V V V V V V / _V V V V V V V V V V i V A 1 14" PIPE WATER SUCTION j , L i NOTES: > Pentair Water I . GAUGE LOCATIONS AND PIPE DISTANCES BEFORE THE VENTURI METER ARE PER HYDRAULIC INSTITUDE STANDARDS LATEST EDITION. ,H� SEE ANSI /HI 14. 6 FOR DETAIL . 0605222 TEST SET UP REVISION: .w.0 0605222TS 1.E, 0 14" B5721 Submittal Curve 1 ► PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS" CURVE NUMBER: 0605222C SPEED DRIVER� DIAMETER SPHERE GUARANTEED VALUES REV. 2 592 RPM 25 HP 15.90" 3.25" FLOW HEAD PUMP EFF HP STAGES IMPELLER DATE BY 4166 17 80 THIS CURVE IS BASED ON THE ACTUAL TEST 1 L14A1 D 11/14/2018 WSF 4166 11 PERFORMANCE OF A SIMILAR PUMP. ONLY THE INDICATED POINT(S)IS GUARANTEED. 1388 6.5 35 Pump Head 30 592 RPM 25 POR— 20 515 RPM : R 15 N = 400 RPM IPV 10 ; 310 RPMAl ., 5 -411111111111111111111111111111111111111°.- --AOR 0 1 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 100 50 Pump Efficiency 90 45 80 — . - 40 70 35 60 -- 30 E u 50 it�- rc it—it -- 25 2 N C ..0 . N 'v 40 ' v ' — " — 20ca o.. w 30 15 Z 20 — 10 10 5 0 NPSH3 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 30 Power 25 20 a 15 3 o o. 10 — 5 0 592 RPM ONLY 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 Flowrate -(GPM) A WAR\INC 9 MOTOR DIMENSIONS 15 DO NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE WITHOUT PROTECTIVE GUARD C T IN PLACE. ANY OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE WITHOUT 37.63 10.47 G- PROTECTIVE GUARD CAN RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY. -A- SUPPLIED BY FN -B- SUPPLIED BY OTHERS 11 COUNTER CLOCKWISE ROTATION DISCHARGE POSITION #9 SHOWN AS VIEWED FROM DRIVER END GAUGE h-Z--I C CP - TAP I CL DISCHARGE AUGE ' TAP I I VENT TAP .38 ��- CL SUCTION ' I i — I o VOLUTE �,��Ijf - p.38 X T `r-- - I I CLEANOUT ------- — o L��-1 0 �4� i I tIL--- 1-.38 � � '—HR-.1 i DRAIN TAP I BOX DRAIN I I DRAIN TAP M HF I HF j —3.25 [--HE 1 HE---1 HB - - IIA .69 DIA. 6 HOLES PUMP FRAME SUCT DISCH M X Y Z CP HA HB HD HE HF HO HR PUMP MOTOR 14" B5721 T60 405T 14 14 1.V4 171/2 201/a 123/4 561/4 3644 96U2 30 171/2 45 471/ 121/9 NOTES: (1) ALL FLANGES ARE 125# ANSI DRILLING. (2) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. (3) BASES ARE DESIGNED TO BE COMPLETELY FILLED WITH GROUT. (4) DIMENSIONS SHOWN MAY VARY DUE TO NORMAL MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES. CUSTOMER P.O. NO. MCCLURE AND SONS, INC. 3305-112 *PENTAIR FAIRBANKSHUHU*" JOB NAME TAG NAME CWS DURHAM WWTP 465P1901, 465P1902 PUMP SIZE AND MODEL GPM TDH NOMINAL RPM ROTATION DISCH POS SETTING PLAN 14" B5721 4166 17 600 CCW 9 14" B5721 MOTOR HP FRAME PHASE HERTZ VOLTS ENCLOSURE NIDEC 25 405T 3 60 460 TEFC STRUCTURAL BASE CERTIFIED FOR CERTIFIED BY DATE DyyG O O 5222SP I REV 0 PROJECT 4/ 0605222 SMF 07/2018 Nn NE. Fairbanks Nijhuis Material Specifications Item Description Material Specification 1 Impeller Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 4 Shaft Steel AISI 1144 9 Bolt, Impeller Stainless Steel A193 CL2 B8 9A Washer, Impeller Stainless Steel AISI 316 14 Sleeve, Shaft Stainless Steel AISI 316 16 Wear Ring, Fronthead Stainless Steel A743 Gr. CA40 410-484 BHN 17 Wear Ring, Impeller Stainless Steel A743 Gr. CA15 300-350 BHN A28 Foot, Mounting Steel A36 B28 Pedestal, Mounting Steel A36 30 Volute Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 31 Solid Gland Cast Iron A48 Class 30 33 Fronthead Cast Iron A532 Class Ill Type A 34 Backhead Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 90 Frame Cast Iron A48 Class 30 102 Impeller Key Stainless Steel AISI 316 A126 Deflector, Inner Rubber Commercial B126 Deflector, Outer Rubber Commercial 156 Gasket, Volute Tag Board D1170-G3111 158 Housing, Thrust Bearing Cast Iron A48 Class 30 159 Cover, Thrust Bearing Housing Cast Iron A48 Class 30 161 Locknut, Bearing Steel SAE Bolt Steel 162 Lockwasher, Bearing Steel AISI 1215 163 Bearing, Radial Steel Commercial 168 Bearing, Thrust Steel Commercial 202 Cover, Volute Cleanout Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 203 Gasket, Cleanout Rubber Commercial A206 Grease Retainer Steel Commercial B206 Grease Retainer Steel Commercial 272 Key, Coupling Steel A108 Grade 1018 290 Fronthead Cleanout Cover Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 291 Cleanout Cover Gasket Rubber Commercial 456 Mechanical Seal Commercial Commercial Base Fabricated Steel A36 Coupling Guard Steel Commercial Notes: 1. All material specifications are ASTM unless otherwise noted and are or description of chemistry only. 0605222SR3.doc ML-5720 456 33 291 290 CHESTERTON S10 MECHANICAL SEAL WITH FRONTHEAD CLEANOUT SPIRALTRAC VERSION D, TYPE A BUSHING IMPELLER ADJUSTMENT CAPSCREWS(QTY3) INPRO 202 SEAL 168 A206 B206 163 34 156 9A 9 1 156 203 17 16 33 Il A • • Ali A , ogy IllErramri T: —±——____453,—' ---; .. __;_,,...,,,.. ,, �ji4411 ._ 71 "-%‘1,0 c A Mk \1/4. 10 I I I I I 272 B126 159 158 B28 161 162 4 90 INPRO A126 A28 30 14 102 SEL ASSEMBLY *PENTAIR FAIRBANKS N AIR ' 14" B5721 T60 FRAME °: 0605222AP IN, 1 MANUF. YEAR 2019 MAX. CASING PSI 50 SIZE 14 INCH MODEL B5721 STAGE 1 GPM 4166 TOTAL HD. 17 FT. RPM 592 ED FRAME T60 LUBE GREASE IMP.DIA. 17.00 SERIAL 10544138,10544139 MADE IN USA OF IMPORTED "° DOMESTIC MATERIA`S. PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS' S21A136M KANSAS CITY, KANSAS FULL DATA NAMEPLATE *PENTAR FAIRBANKS NUHUIS' °0 0605222NP RE 1 Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Data Pump Frame Size T60 Pump Size 14 Suction Size, Standard 14 Nominal Wear Ring Clearance 0.039 Impeller Fastener Size 1 1/4-7 Tightening Torque, lb.-ft 350 Impeller Weight, lb 180.30 Inlet Area, sq. In 114.8 WR2 Lb.-Ft.2 32.2 Sphere Size, Maximum 3 1/4 Shaft Diameter: at Impeller 3 1/4 at Sleeve 3 1/4 at Thrust Bearing 2.953 at Radial Bearing 3.740 Between Bearings 4 at Coupling 2 3/8 Keyway at Coupling 5/8 X 5/16 Torsional Shaft Stiffness, lbs./rad. 2.90X106 Center to Center of Bearings 13 5/8 Thrust Bearing Number 7315 Radial Bearing Number 5219 Sealing Box: Mechanical Seal Type Chesterton S10 Recommended Flush Water Pressure, PSI (above operating pressure) 1-10 Flow, GPM 1/2-1 Sleeve OD 3 5/8 Box ID 4 5/8 Box Depth 3 3/4 Box Inlet Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Box Outlet Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Backhead Drain Tap Size, NPT 3/4 Volute Cleanout Diameter 6 Fronthead Cleanout Diameter 4 1/2 Vent/Priming Tap Size, NPT 1 Volute Drain Tap Size, NPT 1 Gauge Tap Size Suction, NPT 1/2 Discharge, NPT 1/2 Hydrostatic Test Pressure, Maximum, PSI 75 Casing Working Pressure, Maximum, PSI 50 Nominal Casing Thickness 3/4 Operating Temperature,°F 150 Shipping Weight, lb. Basic Pump 1650 Structural Steel Base &Coupling 1139 Note 1. Values shown are in inches unless otherwise noted. 0605222SR3.doc TD-5720 Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Project Name: CWS Durham WWTP Sales Order Number: - Project Number: 0605222 Pump Model: 14" B5721 Revision: 0 Prepared By: Matt Black Project Engineer Date Prepared: 8/7/2018 Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605222 LN PG1 Revision: 0 Summary of Analysis Method Analysis is performed in accordance with ANSI/NI 9.6.8-2014 level 1.The first lateral natural frequency, w,, was calculated using the equation for the natural frequency of a cantilever beam.The equation can be expressed as 187.7 col = ,- where D is the deflection at the end of the beam. Summary of Results No natural frequency problem was found. = 7692 RPM Minimum Speed = 300 RPM Maximum Speed = 590 RPM w, Percentage of Minimum Speed = 2564% w, Percentage of Maximum Speed = 1304% Required Margin= 30% Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605222 LN PG2 Revision: 0 Inputs Pump Pump Model= 14" B5721 Motor Frame= 405T Pump Weight, F= 1810 lbs Pump Center of Gravity, L= 30 in Moment of Inertia, I = 912.00 in4 Material Properties Modulus of Elasticity, E = 30000000 psi Operating Conditions Minimum Operating Speed = 300 RPM Maximum Operating Speed = 590 RPM Required Separation Margin = 30% Calculations Deflection FL3 Pump Deflection = 0.000595 in D = — 3E1 Natural Frequency w, = 7692 RPM _ 187.7 Minimum Speed = 300 RPM (Di vD Maximum Speed= 590 RPM w, Percentage of Minimum Speed = 2564% w, Percentage of Maximum Speed = 1304% Required Margin= 30% Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605222 LN PG3 Revision: 0 A Campbell diagram provides a visual method to verify no resonance conditions will occur when operating a pump over its operating speed range.The diagram is constructed by plotting frequency in Hz versus frequency in RPM. Common excitation frequencies are shown as diagonal lines.The natural frequency of the pump is shown as a horizontal line.A resonance condition is likely to occur when a horizontal line crosses a diagonal line within the operating speed ranee. Campbell Diagram 140 Low Margirivlin Speed Max Speed High Margin Natural Frequency 120 100 N x a+ a 0. C 0 0 cc 40 Vane Pass 20 lx 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Rotation Speed (RPM) Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Project Name: CWS Durham WWTP Sales Order Number: - Project Number: 0605222 Pump Model: 14" B5721 Revision: 0 Prepared By: Matt Black Project Engineer Date Prepared: 8/7/2018 Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605222 RN PG1 Revision: 0 Summary of Analysis Method Analysis is performed in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.8-2014 level 1. The rotor's first lateral natural frequency, was calculated using Rayleigh's method.The equation can be expressed as = 9 FiYi rad/s FiYi2 / where g is the gravitational constant, F,is the force at the ith location, and y;is the deflection at the ith location. The model of the shaft used is shown below. F, is the weight of the impeller, B,and B2 are the bearing reaction forces, and F2 through F,are the lumped weights of the shaft sections. L2 through L7 are the lengths to the lumped weights, LB,and LB2 are the lengths to the bearing reaction forces, and Ls is the length of the shaft. `F3 /F1 /F2 � �F4 FS / -fb -F7 X El L2 `' L3 j B 1 B2 L4,LB 1 l5 LB2 L6 -1 L7 LS In order to account for the stepped geometry of the shaft,a numerical method to calculate the deflection of the shaft was used. Summary of Results No natural frequency problem was found. = 6514 RPM Min Speed = 300 RPM Max Speed = 590 RPM w, Percentage of Min Speed = 2171% w, Percentage of Max Speed = 1104% Required Margin = 30% Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605222 RN PG2 Revision: 0 Inputs Forces F1 = 150 lbs F2= 9.25 lbs F3= 13.83 lbs F4= 18.06 lbs F5= 38.91 lbs F6= 6.84 lbs F2= 7.01 lbs Section Diameters D1= 3.250 in D2= 3.250 in D3= 3.740 in Da= 4.000 in D5= 2.953 in D6= 2.375 in Lengths L2= 1.970 in L3= 6.885 in La,161= 12.735 in L5= 21.110 in LB2= 26.360 in L6= 28.345 in L7= 32.905 in Ls= 35.700 in Material Properties Shaft Modulus of Elasticity= 29500000 psi Operating Conditions Minimum Operating Speed= 300 RPM Maximum Operating Speed= 590 RPM Required Separation Margin= 30% Calculations Section Moment of Inertias I1 = 5.477 in" 12= 5.477 in" 13= 9.604 In" rrD4 la= 12.566 in 1 = 64 Is= 3.733 In" 16= 1.562 in" Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605222 RN PG3 Revision: 0 Calculations Continued Bearing Reaction Forces B2 = -111.32 lb Moments = 0 Let B1 = 355.22 lb 1Forces = 0 A plot of the deflection of the shaft obtained from the numerical results is shown below. Deflection 2.00E-04 — — 0.00E+00 ---- - r T 0 5 • 15 20 25 • 35 40 c -2.00E-04 —— --- c -4.00E-04 -6.00E-04 ---_---- -8.00E-04 -r r -1.00E-03 Length(in) Deflection Deflections Squared y1= 0.000871 in y12 7.58E-07 in2 Y2= 0.000688 in y22 4.74E-07 in2 y3= 0.000281 in y32 7.92E-08 in2 y4= 0.000000 in y42 2.94E-39 in2 y5= 0.000042 in y52 1.78E-09 in2 Y6= 0.000053 in y62 2.79E-09 in2 y,= 0.000125 in y72 1.56E-08 in2 Natural Frequency w,= 6514 RPM g E F`y` colrad E FtYt2 /s wi Percentage of Min Speed = 2171% w, Percent of Max Speed= 1104% Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605222 RN PG4 Revision: 0 A Campbell diagram provides a visual method to verify no resonance conditions will occur when operating a pump over its operating speed range.The diagram is constructed by plotting frequency in Hz versus frequency in RPM. Common excitation frequencies are shown as diagonal lines.The natural frequency of the rotor is shown as a horizontal line.A resonance condition is likely to occur when a horizontal line crosses a diagonal line within the operating speed ranee. Campbell Diagram Low MarguMin Speed Max Speed High Margin Natural Frequency 100 80 —-- ----____ 4 s a IA 60 0 4- m «. 0 40 Vane Pass 20 ix 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Rotation Speed(RPM) STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS FO R FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 3601 FAIRBANKS AVENUE KANSAS CITY, KANSAS 66110 Seismic Anchorage for a 14" B5721 Pump Fairbanks Nijhuis Project #0605222 CWS Durham WWTP Phase 5 Secondary Treatment Tigard, OR BROOKS-RANSOM ASSOCIATES STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS CIVIL ENGINEERS WWW.BROOKSRANSOM.COM S.cFtuCTURgz ����p P Rope INE 1 9 / ±} ;' t) 1 # 7415 NORTH PALM, SUITE 100cr W 17013 FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 9371 1 it OFFICE: (559)449-8444 OREGON V i A „ .; „ , FAX: (559) 449-8404 �% )t ti• 18 :� , c� 1�rnok., Kin om JOB# 1 B521 !I Rp. 20 1 8- 1 0-08 , AWA V I\G MOTOR DIMENSIONS 15 A Airailli DO NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE WITHOUT PROTECTIVE GUARD C T 111.1 IN PLACE. ANY OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE WITHOUT 37.63 10.47 PROTECTIVE GUARD CAN RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY. -A- SUPPLIED BY FN -B- SUPPLIED BY OTHERS 11 COUNTER CLOCKWISE ROTATION DISCHARGE POSITION #9 SHOWN AS VIEWED FROM DRIVER END GAUGE h—Z---I C CP TAP I CL DISCHARGE I—®y._-- AUGE I TAP VENT TAR 38 /--CL SUCTION I I ( j .�, I 1 -` ( � VOLUTEr X El I. I CLEANOUT 41 HQ VOLUTE VOLUTE ° CLEANOUT HD CLEANOUT 4 J O II 0 r_38 � I �; �� ! Jo I _ II. BOX DRAIN —FiR� i DRAIN TAP ;, I I DRAIN TAP --I 1- HI 1 HF 1 ---3.25 1—HE-1---HE-1 HB I IA .69 DIA. 6 HOLES * REQUIRED ANCHOR NOTE: (6) 1/2'0 ASTM F593, (AISI 316) STAINLESS STEEL HEX HEADED BOLTS WITH POLYETHELYNE SLEEVE. SEE INSTALLATION DETAILS ON SHEET 2 & INSPECTION NOTES ON SHEET 3. PUMP FRAME SUCT 615CH M X Y Z CP HA NB HD HE HF HO HR PUMP MOTOR 14' 85721 T60 405T 14 14 IN 17V2 2003 1244 561/4 3614 961/2 30 171/2 45 471/2 121/a NOTES: (1) ALL FLANGES ARE 125# ANSI DRILLING. (2) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. (3) BASES ARE DESIGNED TO BE COMPLETELY FILLED WITH GROUT. (4) DIMENSIONS SHOWN MAY VARY DUE TO NORMAL MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES. CUSTOMER P.O.NO. MCCLURE AND SONS, INC. 3305-112 +P R nA FAIR sAl11If .or JDB NAME 'TAG NAME CWS DURHAM WWTP 465E1901, 465P1902 PIMP 92E AHD!COL GPM IDH NOMINAL RPM ROTATION oiSCH Pos SETTING PLAN 14" B5721 4166 17 600 CCW 9 14" B5721 MOTOR IE MANE PHASE HERTZ VOLTS ENCLOSURE NIDEC 25 4051 3 60 460 TEFC STRUCTURAL BASE CERTIFIED FOR CERTWEO BY DATE DWG REV PROJECT # 0605222 SMF 07/2018 NO 0605222SP ND 0 BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS DD S' By: hoot: STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 14" B5721 Horizontal Pump 1 CIVIL ENGINEERS Dote: 10-08-18 7415 N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 SecondaryTreatment FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: 18521 SEE DETAILS ON THE ENGINEER S E OF RECORDS APPROVED ( BOLT TO BOLT ) CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR D i CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD LOCK-NUT CONSTRUCTION DETAILS EQUIPMENT BASE CUT 4 REMOVE FORM ABOVE PAD AFTER THREE LAYERS CONCRETE 15 CAST d PRIOR TO GROUTING OF DUCT TAPE / _ / MIN. I" NON-SHRINK GROUT, - _ R SEE NOTES 3 TRHU b BELOW. t f. D + I" MIN. -- m , n WILSON HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC � e, ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE OR APPROVED EQUAL A FILL SLEEVE SOLID WITH SILICONE I n RUBBER OR WAX. SEE NOTE 2. in in ANCHOR BOLT 1' u SIZE AS NOTED 3/6" PLATE WASHER = -1 4" SQ. MIN. , SEE NOTE 2 EXISTING 3 CLR FOR SLABS BASE SLAB ON GRADE ABL-NUTS 11/2 CLR FOR ALL • OTHER SLABS wv 1 PREPARE AND CONSTRUCT NEW HOUSEKEEPING PAD r IN COMPLIANCE WITH' z THE APPROVED CON. DOGS .< 71 Z. NOTES: I. FOR CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD DETAILS AND NOTES NOT SHOWN SEE DETAILS ON THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 2. FILL SLEEVE WITH SILICONE RUBBER OR WAX. PROTECT THREADS ABOVE SLEEVE FROM DAMAGE AND CONCRETE SPLATTER. DO NOT FILL PIPE SLEEVE WITH GROUT. 3. NON-SHRINK EPDXY GROUT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROJECT SPECIFICATION AFTER LEVELING OF BASE PLATE, SOLE PLATE, OR MOUNTING BLOCK AND ALL SHIMS HAVE BEEN REMOVED. 4. REMOVE SHIMS 4 BLOCKS PRIOR TO TORQUEING BOLTS. 5. APPLY ANCHOR PRE-LOAD TORQUE OF 30 FT-LBS WITH A CALIBRATED WRENCH ONLY AFTER GROUT HAS BEEN ALLOYED TO CURE AND SHIMS ARE REMOVED. 2 ANCHORAGE NOTES AND DETAILS BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS By: DD Shoot: , STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 14' B5721 Horizontal Pump ' CIVIL ENGINEERS fie. t�8-t8 L 7415 N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 Secondary Treatment FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 Job no: (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR18521 M. NOTES: I. COMPLIANCE WITH THE ANCHOR BOLT DESIGN AND THE INSTALLATION OF THE ANCHOR BOLTS 15 THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 2. THE PUMP FOUNDATION MUST HAVE ADEQUATE STRENGTH AND MASS TO HOLD THE PUMP FIRMLY IN PLACE. DESIGN OF THE FOUNDATION SYSTEM 15 BY OTHERS. 3. ALL VALUES ARE BASED ON MIN. F'c= 4,000 P.S.I. CONCRETE STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS * Fy= 60,000 P.5.1. REBAR STRENGTH. 4. CODE REFERENCE: 2012 IBC, SECTION I4102, STRENGTH DESIGN, ASGE 1-10, AGI 318-11 APPENDIX D, AND LOCAL AMENDMENTS: CITY OF COMMERCE. SEE STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS. HEX HEADED BOLTS SHALL BE ASTM ASTM F545, GROUP 2, CONDITION CWI (AISI 316) AS FOLLOWS: NUTS: ASTM F5g4 (AISI TYPE 316) STAINLESS STEEL BOLT SIZE Anom (IN2) EMBEDMENT (MIN.) EDGE DISTANCE (MIN.) D L E* HEX HD. A3I6 55 TYPE BOLT 1/2" 0.I4463 8 6" D=BOLT DIAMETER - INCHES L=BOLT EMBEDDED LENGTH - IN. E=DISTANCE TO EDGE - INCHES L = Ls + Le Le = LENGTH OF SLEEVE Le = LENGTH OF BOLT BEYOND THE SLEEVE * ANCHORS CENTERED NO CLOSER THAN 6" FROM EDGE OF CONCRETE OR COLD JOINT. MINIMUM CONCRETE BASE THICKNESS = 12" SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: I. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE INSPECTED BY AN APPROVED TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2012 IBC, SECTION 1105.1.1, TABLE 1105.3, BUILDING DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS, AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 2. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD AND POSSCf PROPER QUALIFICATION/CERTIFICATION. 3. SPECIAL INSPECTION 15 REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS AND PROCEDURES NOTED: HEX HEADED ANCHOR BOLTS: A. CONTINUOUS INSPECTION OF THIS INSTALLATION 15 REQUIRED. B. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY TYPE AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CONFORMS WITH DESIGN. CONCRETE BASE SHALL EXTEND ANY MINIMUM DISTANCE BEYOND THE CENTER OF ANCHORS AS INDICATED ABOVE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. C. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY SIZE AND GRADE OF ANCHOR BOLT MATERIAL, NUTS, AND WASHERS. D. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT BOLTS ARE CLEAN AND FREE FROM RUST, DIRT, LUBRICANT, OR ANY OTHER CONTAMINANTS. 3 SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS s BY: DD STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS CIVIL ENGINEERS 14 65721 Horizontal Pump : 10_08_18 3 7415 N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 SecondaryTreatment -- FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: 18521 ♦ 1 PROJECT: CWS Durham WWTP Phase 5 Secondary Treatment BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES LOCATION: Tigard,OR 4715 N.PALM AVE,SUITE 100 Fairbanks Nijhuis Project No.: 0605222 FRESNO,CA 93711 JOB NO.: 18521 DATE: 10/8/2018 EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE Fairbanks Nijhuis Model 14" B5721 Horizontal Solids DESIGN OF ANCHORAGE PER Channel Base To Concrete Pedestal 2014 Orgeon Bldg Code,Based on 2012 International Building Code Section 1613 Section 13.3&13.6 of ASCE 7-10 With IBC Amendments,ACI 318-11,Appendix D, &AISC 314-10 iFph/No.Anchors-, rPv �Fphy G.6. Fphx 1Mot G.6. rphx,-Fph/No.Anc oocchor►, V L ANCHOR 111111111111r MIME WIDTH__-- ►lJ rn4 OR PLATFORM DEPTH AN YEW SEC YEW Anchor In Tension CAD YEW ANCHOR PL ANCHORAGE CALCULATIONS Fp=0.4apSDSWp/(Rp/Ip)*(1+2*z/h) (Eq 13.3-1) QoFp= 1,887.60 Lbs. Fp=0.3SDsIpWp(Minimum) (Eq 13.3-3) (Not less than) O0Fp(min.)= 3,539.25 Lbs. <GOVERNS Fp=1.6SoslpWp(Maximum) (Eq 13.3-2) (Not more than) 00Fp(max.)= 18,876.00 Lbs. ap= 1.00 (Per Table 13.5-1 or 13.6-1) (For Vibration Isolators ap=2.5,Rp=2.5) Sps= 0.715 (Per Section 11.4.4) z= 0.00 (Height in structure at point of attachment of component.Base or below z=0. Roof or above z=h.) h= 0.00 (Average roof height of structure relative to the base elevation in feet.) Rp= 2.50 (Per Section 13.4.2) Ip= 1.50 Importance Factor (Per Section 13.1.3) no= 2.5 (Per Section 13.3.1) Unit Operating Wt. Misc. Wet Weight WEIGHT= 3,969.00 Lbs. + 431.00= 4,400.00 Lbs. Y-cc X-cc Z-bar Anchor Spacings 35.000 Inches X 2 @ 45.00 Inches 29.990 Inches Number of Anchors Effective in Shear= 6 Total Y-bar= -1.300 Inches Number of Anchors Effective in Tension= 6 Total X-bar= 7.830 Inches Unit Only Fp Horiz.= GoFp= 3,539.25 Lbs. (Per ASCE 7-10 Section 13.4.2 Anchors in Concrete or Masonry) Fp Vert.= 0.2SpsWp= 629.20 Lbs. (Per ASCE 7-10 Section 13.3.1&Section 13.4.2a) Anchor Forces(at base of unit) LRFD Load Combination(Eq 16-7): 0.9D-Fpv+fl,Fp Tension due to Pretensioninq 0.500"Dia.Bolts 30 Ft-Lbs Clamping Torque= 22,680 Lbs. Pu= 0.9Total Weight-1.0Fpv= 3,330.80 Lbs. Mux=Vux(Z)+Wp(eX)= 140,594.11 In-Lbs./12= 11,716 Ft-Lbs Muy=Fph(Z)+Wp(eY)= 100,422.11 In-Lbs./12= 8,369 Ft-Lbs Muz=Fph(eX)+Fph(eY)= 23,111.30 In-Lbs./12= 1,926 Ft-Lbs Orthogonal Effects Vux=1.0Fph= 3,539.25 Lbs. Vuy= 1.0Fph= 3,539.25 Lbs. Vur=SRSS = VVux2+Vuy2= 5,005.26 Lbs. Use(6)1/2"Diameter ASTM F593,(AISI 316)Stainless Steel Heavy Hex Hd Bolts w/Void Plastic Sleeve Cast in Place Min.12"Thick Normal Weight Concrete Slab,F'c=4,000 psi,8"Min.Embedment,8"Min.Edge Distance Min.1 1/2"Non-Shrink Leveling Grout Per SIMPSON ANCHOR DESIGN SOFTWARE Nua= 22,680.00 LBS. R Nn= 29,661 LBS. To verify steel bolt's strength only! Vua= 938.00 LBS. OVn= 5,112 LBS. See shear transfer due to friction below. Nua I ONn= 0.765 Vuax/OVnx= 0.183 Section D.7.1.permits full strength in tension to be permitted Nua/ONn+Vua/OVn= 0.765 <1.00 OK Friction between base and concrete=0.57 x Pu= 12,927.60 LBS.Total >Vur(SRSS)= 5,005.26 Lbs. OK 4 SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 1/5 Strong-Tie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: 1.Proiect information Customer company: Pentair FN 0605222 Project description: 14"B5721 Horizontal Pump Customer contact name: Location: Customer e-mail: Fastening description: Comment: 2.Input Data&Anchor Parameters General Base Material Design method:ACI 318-11 Concrete:Normal-weight Units: Imperial units Concrete thickness,h(inch): 12.00 State:Cracked Anchor Information: Compressive strength,fc(psi):4000 Anchor type:Cast-in-place 4-c,v: 1.0 Material:F593 304/316SS Reinforcement condition: B tension,B shear Diameter(inch):0.500 Supplemental reinforcement:Not applicable Effective Embedment depth,het(inch):8.000 Reinforcement provided at corners:No Anchor category:- Ignore concrete breakout in tension:No Anchor ductility:Yes Ignore concrete breakout in shear:Yes hmm(inch):9.25 Ignore 6do requirement: No Cmin(inch):3.00 Build-up grout pad:Yes Smm(inch):3.00 Base Plate Length x Width x Thickness(inch):36.75 x 96.50 x 0.38 Recommended Anchor Anchor Name: Heavy Hex Bolt-1/2"0 Heavy Hex Bolt, F593 304/316SS 1+1 JV,,t tttvt.rlViir�1l11tr� Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor DesignerT"^ Company: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page:Date: 2/5 Sti'OrigTie Version 2.6.6 Software Project: 794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: Load and Geometry Load factor source:ACI 318 Appendix C Load combination:not set Seismic design:Yes Anchors subjected to sustained tension:Not applicable Ductility section for tension: D.3.3.4.3(d)is satisfied Ductility section for shear:D.3.3.5.3(c)is satisfied Qo factor:not set Apply entire shear load at front row:No Anchors only resisting wind and/or seismic loads:Yes Strength level loads: Nua[Ib]:22680 v.[Ib]:3539 Vuay[Ib]:3539 Mux[ft-Ib]:-11716 May[ft-Ib]: 8369 MuuzY[ft-lb]: 1926 <Figure 1> 22680 lb 3539 4 3539 lb 11716 ft-lb 8369 ft-lb Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances, standards guidelines checked 6 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:the 925.560.9000and Fax:925must.847.3871be www.strongtie.comforplausibility. SIMPSON Anchor DesignerTM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 3/5 Tie Software Project: Strong Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: <Figure 2> 81 III 8 6.00 '. 6.00 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 7 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor Designer Company: Date: 10/5/2018 g Engineer: Page: 4/5 StrongTie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: 3.Resulting Anchor Forces Anchor Tension load, Shear load x, Shear load y, Shear load combined, N.(Ib) V.(Ib) Vuay(Ib) Al(Vuax)2+(Vuay)2(Ib) 1 5517.5 694.5 549.1 885.4 2 4736.5 589.8 549.1 805.9 3 3955.5 485.2 549.1 732.8 4 2042.5 485.2 630.5 795.6 5 2823.5 589.8 630.5 863.4 6 3604.5 694.5 630.5 938.0 Sum 22680.0 3539.0 3539.0 5021.0 Maximum concrete compression strain(%o):0.00 <Figure 3> Maximum concrete compression stress(psi):0 . Resultant tension force(lb):22680 Resultant compression force(Ib):0 - 1 -t Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in x-axis,e'Nx(inch):4.43 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in y-axis,e'Ny(inch):6.20 Y Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in x-axis,e'vx(inch):3.27 M, Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in y-axis,e'vy(inch):3.27 .6 X 5 -a 4.Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.11 Nsa(Ib) 0 ON.(Ib) 14200 0.80 11360 5.Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.2) Nb=kc2a'f chefl.5(Eq.D-6) kc Aa fc(psi) hef(in) Nb(Ib) 24.0 1.00 4000 8.000 34346 0.750Ncbg=0.750(ANc/ANco)`Yec,N Vied,NY%,NWcp,NNb(Sec. D.4.1 &Eq.D-4) ANC(in2) ANco(in2) Ca,min(in) rec,N Ped,N Tc,N Wcp,N Nb(Ib) 0 0.750Ncbg(Ib) 2160.00 576.00 6.00 0.482 0.850 1.00 1.000 34346 0.75 29661 6.Pullout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.3) 0.750Npn=0.750 J'c,PNp=0.750 ,PBAbrgfc(Sec.D.4.1, Eq.D-13&D-14) y/c,p Abrg(in2) f'c(psi) 0 0.750Npn(Ib) 1.0 0.47 4000 0.75 8406 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 8 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 5/5 Strong-TieSoftware Strong Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: e Phone: E-mail: 8.Steel Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.1) V.(Ib) q$$grout 0 OgroutOVsa(Ib) 8520 0.8 0.75 5112 10.Concrete Pryout Strength of Anchor in Shear fSec.D.6.3) (�1Vcpg=!k,,pNcbg=Q1/(cp(ANc/ANco).ec,N.ed,N Y�gN.cp,NNb(Sec. D.4.1 &Eq. D-41) kcp ANc(in2) ANco(in2) gec,N ¶ed,N PC,N cp,N Nb(Ib) 0 gVcpg(Ib) 2.0 2160.00 576.00 0.618 0.850 1.000 1.000 34346 0.75 101478 11.Results Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces(Sec.D.7.) Tension Factored Load,Nua(Ib) Design Strength,oNn(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 5517 11360 0.49 Pass Concrete breakout 22680 29661 0.76 Pass(Governs) Pullout 5517 8406 0.66 Pass Shear Factored Load,V.(Ib) Design Strength,OV.(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 938 5112 0.18 Pass(Governs) Pryout 5005 101478 0.05 Pass Interaction check Nua/ONn Vua/OVn Combined Ratio Permissible Status Sec.D.7..1 0.76 0.00 76.5% 1.0 Pass 1/2"O Heavy Hex Bolt,F593 304/316SS with hef=8.000 inch meets the selected design criteria. 12.Warnings -Concrete breakout strength in shear has not been evaluated against applied shear load(s)per designer option. Refer to ACI 318 Section D.4.2.1 for conditions where calculations of the concrete breakout strength may not be required. -Per designer input,ductility requirements for tension have been determined to be satisfied—designer to verify. -Per designer input,ductility requirements for shear have been determined to be satisfied—designer to verify. -Designer must exercise own judgement to determine if this design is suitable. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 9 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com Fairbanks Nijhuis Typical Pump Bearing Lubricants Fairbanks Nijhuis recommends a superior quality, NLGI No. 2, multipurpose, lithium complex grease for all pump rolling element bearing applications that require grease lubrication. The grease characteristics should include good high temperature performance, extreme pressure properties, water resistance, excellent oxidation stability, good rust protection and resistance to chemical breakdown. Fairbanks Nijhuis does not recommend grease with molybdenum disulfide (cooly)additives. In addition to the characteristics listed above, the grease should meet the following specification. Specifications Consistency: NLGI No. 2 Dropping Point ASTM D2265 >450° F Base fluid viscosity SUS @ 100° F 700 to 1200 SUS@212° F 70to100 Rust Prevention ASTM 1743 Pass Water Washout ASTM 1264 <4% @ 175° F Four Ball EP Test ASTM D2596>40kg load wear >250kg weld point Fairbanks Nijhuis has compiled a general list of products that meet the grease requirements above. This list is not an endorsement of any particular manufacture and should not be construed as exclusive recommendations. When choosing an alternate manufacture, customers should discuss this typical lubricant recommendation with their vendor to ensure that an equivalent grease is supplied. Typical Products Manufacturer Lubricant Brand Name NLGI No. BP BP Energrease''' LC EP 2 2 Castrol Pyroplex Red 2 Chevron Delo Greases EP 2 Exxon Ronee MP 2 Mobil Mobiltith'8'AW2 2 Shell Retinax`'' LC 2 Texaco Starplee 2 2 76 76 Multiplex EP 2 0605222SR3.doc GR-1000 + PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS" HORIZ. BEARING LIFE CALCULATIONS 104 Rio OF BEP PUMP MODEL: 14" B5721 DONE BY: Kolton Stimpert DATE SPEED = 592 RPM ORDER NO.: 0605222 8/7/2018 CAPACITY DESIGN = 4166 GPM LAMP HEAD DESIGN = 17 Ft --I 1 f9y)11 I- L'IMPELLER SYMBOL = L14A1A Lg.,-, I i T T, IMPELLER WEIGHT = 158 Lbs D, T. Cr SHAFT SYMBOL = 760E4E I 1 Jr' SHAFT WEIGHT = 86 Lbs 1) DH } yy R, s"FT R, CAP DESIGN BEP = 4000 GPM T W"IMP CAPACITY BEP = 6300 GPM LIMP = 28.9 in IN-BOARD BEARINGS-->BALL BRG HEAD BEP = 52 Ft Li = 13.48 in OUT-BOARD BEARINGS-->BALL BRG DR = 11.38 in BEARING INFORMATION SPEED BEP = 870 RPM D2 = 15.9 in RADIAL BRG NUMBER 5219 DH = 3.625 in RADIAL DYN.CAPACITY 54000 Lbs B2 = 7.5 in THRUST BRNG NUMBER 7315 CERTIFIED BY: WSF LsHFr = 10.3 in THRUST DYN.CAPACITY 49410 Lbs DATE: 08-06-18 1 z SPECIFIC SPEED N = NQerr = 3566 IMPELLER RADIAL ° = 1.04 = 0.12 (BEP@FULL DIA.) H a THRUST FACTOR Q°-BEP KH Rer FROM CHART D2 IMPELLER RADIAL _ KR' H°' D2 B2• SG) = 105 Lbs THRUST TR 2.31 IMPLELLER AXIAL DR = 0.72 XR = 0.68 DH = 0.23 X = 0.49 THRUST CONST. D2 D. H FROM CHART D5 FROM CHART D5 ( Z ( = 101.7 IMPELLER AXIAL =.( DRY FACTOR K'a _ ``YR +`YH� = 0.59 AR —`DR) 7g54�2 AN=(D„)z• (3854) = 10.3 IMPELLER AXIAL H°• SG THRUST TA — 2.31 (AR—AH)(KA) = 397 Lbs RI = {(TR+ WIMP x imp) + ,"SHFT)x (LSHFT) }/LI = 630 Lbs RESULTANT BEARING FORCES R2= R1 - TR- WIMP- WSHFT = 281 Lbs T,=O X= 1 Y=0 RADIAL BEARING LIFE r C Na H PURE RADIAL LOAD P=XR1+Y7; = 630 Lbs Lto LIFE = P N = 1.77E+07 hours NO THRUST 1 / D THRUST BEARING LIFE T2= TA =397 Lbs X=0.57 Y=0.98 COMBINED AXIAL I C \R A AND RADIAL LOAD P =, 2+Yr2 =549 Lbs L to LIFE = P • N = 2.05E+07 hours 2 / D EXPONENTS&COEFF RADIAL BRG a= 3 H= 16667 THRUST BRG (j= 3 A= 16667 CHESTIERTON.. -- Global Solutions,Local Service. S10 Sin le & 520 Dual Seals 0A Streamlines inventory,installation,maintenance and workflow Optimized seal design for plantwide use S-Series full featured common gland Two-step"bolt&go"installation Delivers greater performance and value 4th Generation Sealing combines technology with workflow efficiency Ys +Ei1ye. ,_,(1101(0„,„ ;-:,—* *17t::r' '''''.*:::'"N'It:I**„..,‘" , ., . .,,,:.,,„ ,,,.. .,,,,t ,.... , . , . . ,,,, . „,,,. . F' : r 1rtrodudn9 the a; 4 '-un inn ,: vtitn_ -'IL Chesterton has a unique position in the sealing industry,with over a century of continuous innovation under one ownership and brand name.The result of this continuity of effort is a record of patents and innovations unmatched in the world.Chesterton is proud to continue this winning tradition with the introduction of the Streamline S-Series Seals. 1st Generation:Component Seals ` ~ Chesterton introduced non-fretting seals to lead the way towards seals that won't damage shafts.Other innovations in this period included patented Self- ;, ' Aligning Stationaries and universal slotted glands. ,°`„ ' ..x 2nd Generation:Cartridge Seals _ '� 4 ; ` The Chesterton innovation of off-the-shelf cartridge t seals is an enduring contribution to worldwide sealing / ;' f" technology.Cartridge sealing has become the dominant sealing form since that time.It offers increased sealing reliability due to factory presets, ::::: _ and faster,easier installation. 3rd Generation:Advanced Technology = ilk � � � Chesterton jumped fully into the computer revolution " " � � with the introduction of seal lines engineered and " ..< A, its.designed with the aid of sophisticated software. `' This included Finite Element Analysis(FEA)to predict viritoa ,.« r seal face flatness using monolithic faces.This third generation also featured patented innovations * . ` • such as the Self-Centering Lock Ring,to make seal .t concentricity easily achievable for greater reliability. 4th Generation:Streamline S-Series ,, ( f The new Streamline S-Series is the culmination of �� .m -, � our engineering efforts with with the business of ---_ sealing.This is the seal generation that goes beyond { Y ' sealing to deal with seal process workflow.The result - is greater total economies from inventory reduction, ` ' less administration,increased reliability,and flexible, `' cost-saving rebuild options.This 4th Generation of Chesterton sealing brings greater value than ever before possible. U CfCa/11111 I . 5 kwSeries. CHESTERTON Global Solution;local Serviceow 11"2- �U IL-may 1111 MC_ �" Eyries- S10 Single & 520 Dual Seals Simply superior for standardization, .-- workflow efficiency and value �,,. � New Chesterton Streamline S-Series is engineered to meet the vast majority of plantwide applications with ,l' ta , great reliability in service.But the S-Series goes beyond the basics of fluid sealing,to address the economies (- .,... .:;,..,.. .,..-.„ i of total sealing workflow.S-Series will streamline inventory,simplify seal selection,reduce installation l` - - complexity and minimize total maintenance costs. f Optimized design for plantwide use l S10 Single and S20 Dual Tandem are a matched pair of high performance,robust seals that make -41 standardization easy.These benchmark seals deliver ,! the reliability expected from Chesterton. Common design with interchangeable parts The S-Series is a complete system with common parts for predictable performance and simplified inventory. = Ali No other seal family uses parts commonality better , : ... than the S-Series.Unique"cassette within a cartridge" design lets users swap out the S10 for an S20 in a minute.Face materials swap out to match service needs while keeping spares to a minimum. S-Series face geometry is designed with the aid of Finite Element Outstanding performance and value Analysis(FEA)and computer fluid flow modeling.S-Series faces generate low heat to minimize face distortion for stable,reliable S-Series Seals can offer better performance because performance. the weaknesses found in other common platform seal designs have been eliminated.Superior value comes from long-term reliability coupled with inventory savings and workflow efficiencies. -.' , Two-step"bolt&go"installation .`"' With the S-Series,just bolt on the gland,tighten the set screws and go.Captive fastened centering pads move out of the way at start up,and won't get lost when it's time to re-set impellers or re-seal. (` h ( Rebuilding options smooth workflow - Standard options of factory or field rebuilds are easy i ' '-'�+s.r to execute and economical.But with complete sealing , cassettes available at attractive prices,it becomes possible to perform rapid re-sealing with no additional administration relating to rebuilding. Both S-10 and S20 Sealing Cassettes use the common S-Series Gland This unique"cassette-within-a-cartridge-design makes for easy handling and streamlined resealing.Get rapid,reliable re-seal by mounting a new cassette with all new parts and When you see CHESTERTON, avoid rebuild administrative costs. you see the future of sealing. The new benchmark for sealing excellence and value , , ,„ e, ,..,„„ S-Series S10 Cassette ` t o S-Series Common Parts reduce inventory 0 Multi-Port Flush cleans better and prevents while increasing options.The same gland is localized thermal seal face distortion used for both the single and dual seals to common with single port systems. -at maximize flexibility.Interchangeable -- , cassettes streamline repair administration. Floating Throttle Bushing for maximum safety is standard.Fluids are diverted to , Q Optimized Seal Faces balance low heat quench and drain ports. generation and distortion to handle a plant's toughest applications.FEA design and robust body withstand high pressures and torques compared to general duty designs. s 20 Cassette Q Self-Centering Lock Ring" is a patented 9 mechanism that ensures sleeve concentricity Fully Vented Gland ensures that li• id . s mounds the seal.Eliminates air •.ces that 1 and squares the rotary face to the shaft >• during installation.This prevents seal face pr- ent barrier fluid flow and in eased seal +�► wobble,increasing reliability in tough oper.ting temperatures. emissions and slurry services. LE High F w Pumping Rin• ools 0 High Torque,Cushioned Drives eliminate inboard a . outboard se. faces in high tempe "` metal to seal face contact on all S-Series faces. - •lure servi s.Aggressive _ Cushioned drives minimize shock and vibration. bi-directional anes c• bine with High strength drive pads resist shear load in cutwaters to de' er igh flow. tough applications. in Tandem Config =tion seals on the ® Captive Centering Pads set precise OD of both set of se. faces.Proven positioning automatically,then move out of design forth: ighest liability under the way at start-up.Non-sparking for safety, varying co II itions. and never misplaced for future use. FE Balanc- 'iston'°enables tr,a hydraulic 0 Micropolished Faces reduce drag for doubl: .alance with no movi : 0-rings to maximum face responsiveness.Highly hang up and fail under pressure eversals. Pa °nt pending,it eliminates the n-•.for polished surfaces ensure face tracking. de seal faces,which generate exc live Seal face hang-up is minimized. eat and contribute to 0-ring failure. OPERATING LIMITS STANDARD MATERIALS 510&S20 Process Pressure: Rotary Face: ■ To 450 psig(to 31 bar g) ■ Carbon,Silicon Carbide,Tungsten Carbide rrier Pressure: Stationary Face: ■ To 450 psi r ) ■ Silicon Carbide,Tungsten Carbide 50 psig(to 17 bar g)Inb ' rential Elastomers: Temperature Limits: • Viton }FLAS*,EP,ChemLast,PTFE Encapsulated ■ To 300°F(150°C)Ethylene Propylene,PTFE Metal Parts: ■ To 400°F(205°C)Fluorocarbon,AFLAS* IN 316SS all metal parts ■ To 500°F(250°C)ChemLast ■ Hastelloy C**springs Speed: ■ 5,000 FPM(25 m/sec) Other materials available on request. For higher pressure and temperature ' Asahi Glass Company Ltd.Registered trademark applications,please consult Chesterton. '•Haynes International,Inc Registered Trademark . 0 6 #a 0 S , 4p-- Nilo 4 "r` tom,, 4 .$� - t . ,� - w, , 2 l 6 :nh iti- ,.# ,,:� . . 13 3 ri " fi it N. ""' alb, 1, I . , . .., ,e,, 4, ...„,.. _ ..4.,, .,,,, ,,,,,,,:,,,4':-iiiiiji , . ' U: ISTiliairc" ..ram+---- - v' . ._____ r Si)/Cc�l i NM iff . , t 7';:c.i: — - - -7,, :.c.:;. .,, L Section II -- Mechanical Seal Installation Data Mechanical Seal Catalog S 1 0 SMALL SINGLE CASSETTE SEAL- Dimensional Data/Inch B 04ir S10 Flush E - F _.rlri k 1 ` t r,,' 0 , , ,: ,.. All ,41.-11"91111101._ loll III ,... ..__.__, _. _.• .^-,i,....,.. _iiihr‘v, ,; ago --Ir-%„-- 4 I ,... Q/D Q/D :__ \EI:W __II,SPI-, - - D A A , .r : I -, ,ir 46 it. „...„, . , A ; ,,. k,fir. ". .....EillAi ON= _ 'f G / -II X W Y W Y Z 510 KEY A -Shaft Size E - Minimum Seal Chamber Depth J -Seal Chamber to Bolt Surface Z -Quench 0-ring B - Maximum Gland Diameter F -Outboard Seal Length W-Rotary and Stationary 0-rings C -Seal Chamber Bore G -Minimum Bolt Circle by Bolt Size X -Shaft 0-ring D -Seal Outside Diameter H -Slot Width Y - IB&OB Cassette 0-rings B C C D E F G MIN H J X W Y MAX MIN MAX MIN 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" t ` 1.500 4.50 .25 2.44 2.19 0.53 2.11 3.31** 3.55** - 0.57 1.20 128 13 143* 142* 1.625 5.00 2.38 .70 2.31 0.53 2.11 3.49** 3.68** - 0.57 1.20 130 137 145* 144* 1.750 5.50 2.50 2.81 2.44 0.53 2.11 3.61** 3.80** - 0.57 1.20 132 139 147* 146* 1.750 OS 6.64 3.50 3.75 2.44 0.53 2.11 5.38 5.50 - 0.57 1.20 132 139 147* 146* 1.875 5.50 2.63 2.94 2.56 0.5 2.11 3.74** 3.93** - 0.57 1.20 134 141 149* 148* 1.875 OS 5.99 3.56 3.81 2.56 0.53 2.1 - 5.00 - 0.57 1.20 134 141 149* 148* 2.000 5.50 2.75 3.19 2.69 0.53 2.11 3.•• ,.12** - 0.57 1.20 136 143 150* 149* 2.125 6.00 2.88 3.44 2.81 0.53 2.11 ,.24 4. ' 4.49** 0.69 1.20 138 145 152 151 2.125 OS 6.99 3.88 4.25 2.81 0.22 .42 - 4.49 . 0.69 1.51 138 145 152 151 2.250 6.00 3.00 3.56 2.94 :. 3 2.11 4.36 4.49 4.61** 0.•• 1.20 140 147 152 151 2.375 6.00 3.13 3.62 .06 0.53 2.11 4.42 4.55 4.68** 0.69 . . 142 149 153 152 2.500 6.50 3.25 3.19 0.53 2.11 4.61 4.74 4.86** 0.69 1.20 151 153 152 2.500 OS 7.77 A. , 4.75 3.19 0.53 2.11 - 6.63 6.75** 0.69 1.20 144 153 152 2.625 • i 3.38 3.94 3.31 0.53 2.11 4.86 4.99 5.11 0.69 1.20 146 5-557 153 2• 01S 6.99 4.55 4.88 3.31 0.53 2.11 - 5.88 6.00 0.69 1.20 146 5-557 154 * Use next size larger for Style 76 0-rings **Minimum Bolt Circle requires D Washers. t The 510 uses a quantity of 2 0-rings and the S20 uses a quantity of 4 0-rings. 78 'VOSHESTERTON Global Solutions,Local Service. S10 & S20 Large- Dimensional Data/Inch 0-RINGS S10 AND S20 S20 S10 S20 S10 SHAFT GLAND STUFFING BOX SEAL SB SB OB BOLT CIRCLE SLOT SB TO BOLT IB AND OB ROTARY AND IB ROTARY SIZE OD BORE OD DEPTH DEPTH LENGTH BY BOLT SIZE WIDTH SURFACE SHAFT CASSETTE STATIONARY HOUSING HOLDER QUENCH A B C C D E E F G MIN H J 1 2 t MAX MIN MAX MIN MIN 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" each each 2.750 7.70 3.75 4.36 3.67 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.40 5.53 - 0.69 1.60 232 242 237 238 234 241 2.875 7.83 3.88 4.50 3.79 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.48 5.61 - 0.69 1.60 233 243 238 239 235 242 3.000 7.94 4.00 4.69 3.91 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.63 5.76 - 0.69 1.60 234 244 239 240 236 243 3.125 7.99 4.13 4.80 4.04 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.78 5.91 - 0.69 1.60 235 245 240 240 237 244 3.250 8.19 4.25 4.94 4.16 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.91 6.04 - 0.69 1.60 236 246 241 242 238 245 3.375 8.30 4.38 5.05 4.29 2.50 0.83 2.50 5.98 6.11 6.23 0.81 1.60 237 247 242 243 239 246 3.000 0.44 4.00 0.10 4.41 2.50 0.03 2.50 G.15 G.27 G.40 0.01 1.G0 230 240 243 244 240 247 3.625 8.49 4.63 5.30 4.54 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.28 6.40 6.53 0.81 1.60 239 249 244 245 241 248 3.750 0.71 4.70 5.30 4.GG 2.00 0.03 2.00 0.30 G.47 G.G0 0.01 1.G0 241 250 245 24G 242 240 3.875 8.84 4.88 5.51 4.79 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.48 6.61 6.73 0.81 1.60 241 251 246 247 243 250 4.000 8.96 5.00 5.69 4.91 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.62 6.75 6.87 0.81 1.60 242 252 247 248 244 251 4.125 8.99 5.13 5.80 5.04 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.74 6.87 6.99 0.81 1.60 243 253 248 249 245 252 4.250 8.99 5.25 5.94 5.16 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.88 7.00 7.13 0.81 1.60 244 254 249 250 246 253 4.375 9.33 5.38 6.06 5.29 2.50 0.83 2.50 6.99 7.12 7.24 0.81 1.60 245 255 250 251 247 254 4.500 9.49 5.50 6.19 5.41 2,50 0.83 2.50 7.14 7.27 7.39 0.81 1.60 246 256 251 252 248 255 4.625 9.49 5.63 6.31 5.40 2.50 0.83 2.50 7.24 7.37 7.49 0.81 1.60 247 257 252 253 249 256 4.750 10.49 5.75 6.47 5.66 2.50 0.83 2.50 7.37 7.49 7.62 0.81 1.60 248 257 253 254 250 256 S10 & S20 Large 12 mm 16 mm 20 mm Dimensional Data/Metric 70 95 110 93 63 21 63 136.4 140.4 154.4 17 41 232 242 237 238 41 75 202 104 99 63 21 63 142.3 146.3 160.3 17 41 234 244 239 236 243 80 203 109 122 103 21 63 146.1 150.1 164.1 17 41 45 240 241 238 244 85 211 114 128 109 63 21 1.1 155.1 169.1 41 237 247 242 243 239 246 90 214 119 132 113 63 21 63 158.6 76.6 20 41 239 248 244 244 240 247 95 221 124 137 118 63 21 160.4 164.4 178.4 41 240 250 245 246 242 249 100 228 129 144 125 21 63 167.4 171.4 185.4 20 41 52 247 248 244 251 110 237 1 134 63 21 63 176.8 180.8 194.8 20 41 245 255 251 247 254 266 146 164 144 63 21 63 186.3 190.3 204.3 20 41 248 257 253 254 Z59 256 t The S10 uses a quantity of 2 0-Rings and the S20 uses a quantity of 4 0-Rings. Consult Chesterton Applications Engineering for further information. STANDARD MATERIALS* OPERATING LIMITS All Metal Parts: 316 SS/EN 1.4401 Speed: 0 to 5000 FPM (25 mps) Springs: Alloy C276/EN 2.4819 Process Pressure: 28" Hg Vacuum to 450 psig (31 bar g) Rotary Face: Carbon,Tungsten Carbide, or Silicon Carbide Barrier Pressure (S20):To 450 psig (31 bar g) Stationary Face:Tungsten Carbide or Silicon Carbide IB Seal Pressure Differential: 250 psig (17 bar g) Elastomers: Fluorocarbon, EPR, ChemLastTM, FEPM, Temperature: PTFE Encapsulated 300°F (150°C) EPR 400°F (205°C) Fluorocarbon, FEPM *Other materials available upon request. 5j00°F (256°C) Perfluoroelastomer All S10 Seals come assembled with EPR Quench 0-Rings. All S10 and S20 Seals come assembled with FEPM-006 Centering Pad 0-Rings. For higher pressure and temperature applications, consult the factory. CHESTERTONChesterton ISO certificates available on www.chesterton.com/corporate/iso Global Solutions,Local Service. 860 Salem Street Groveland,Massachusetts 01834 USA Telephone:781-438-7000 Fax:978-469-6528 www.chesterton.com ©2018 A.W.Chesterton Company. ®Registered trademark owned by the 2/18 A.W.Chesterton Company in USA and other countries. FORM NO.071411 REV.5 S10/S20 SEAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS-ENGLISH k, 4 d d-proven technologyIlk that enhances the prat , environment mm_yR 4*r all mechanical seals and packing i '''' '-' II c ri.1 11100. „ illr i ' duct Ordering Informati*on ,„ .. vor Easy Installation 1 * a Opt!Jj ons if Total Environmental 0 ili f N iii v wX . jof k z 72%f- 100% x rt Improves TSR . Extends mechanical s seal and packing life S iralTrac Part Number Code p Example:The following part number identifies a device operating with greatly reduced flush(F),measured in inches(I),to fit over a 3.000"shaft(3000)in a pump with right fluid rotation(R). This is a split(S)SpiralTrac"for in-place installation with split seals in a pump with a 4.000"seal cavity bore diameter(4000).The device is made of Carbon Graphite Filled PTFE(ESC). This part number code applies to typical SpiralTrac"configurations.For special configurations please forward a drawing to EnviroSeal for review. Shaft Size(4) Outside Diameter(1) Material Actual diameter of rotating Actual diameter of the seal 316 316 Stainless Steel component under SpiralTrac.'"" cavity bore. —>416 416 Stainless Steel GLF Glass Filled PTFE(7) ESC Carbon Graphite Filled PTFE Measurement Units Fluid Rotation(3) BRZ Bronze I Inches As Viewed From Bearing End Ti Titanium M Metric R Right L Left \ \ \ I 3000 R S 4000 (ESC \ \ Operating Conditions(SpiralTrac Versions) Easy Installation Options(SpiralTrac Types) Greatly reduced flush. - Type A Counterbore Fit In with split seals while the equipme ' i in place ��\\ Press into Place using reduced or no Flushl6l: Recommended Upgrades (see Type I ✓ Drives Circulation for face cooling. 0 Drill 5/32"vent hole: ✓ Forces fluid Exchange for heat removal. ✓ Releases Air when flooding. Reduced ush(6)in ' rous applications. ✓ Removes Particulate. ggressive single spiral groove, air vent and L exit groove,available in Types A,B,I and . >\ Reduced or no flush(6)in fibrous applications. Type B Bore Fit -� D Double spiral grooves,deeper air vent and exit groove, 1 ,__ Press into Place using reduced Flush: Recommended Upgrades available in Types A,I and E.(5) ✓ Drives Circulation for face cooling. 0 Drill5/32"venthol / Enhances fluid Exchange for heat removal. ✓ Releases Air wh' flooding. • - •. . •acking only.(2) A® 0 Extend exit• •ove: P • -- / Positions Particulate so a small flush I Forces fl . xchange and re- 2 combined of ..I separator,axially 2 (5-7 GPH/23-32 LPIf)can force it under el an.manufactured with a single spiral gro.•-. move •articulate without fiusht the throat restriction and out of the cavity. w.'-eliminating shaft erosion. Reduced SpiralTrac"Packing Version Flush Installed in Stuffing Box Type© , ially Split Device(Typical for Spl' eals) Press i •Place using reduced Flush: No Upgrades Use half or less the normal flush rate. ✓ Drives ulation for face cooling. Not practical due to installation ✓ Enhances ...Exchange for heat re : al. while the pump is assembled. Greatly extends sleeve and ✓ Positions Parti ate for removal. mall packing fife. flush(5-7 GPH/2 . LPI). Notes: Type© Impeller Side S -Ilation (Typical for Open Bore Cavities) 1.For Type A or Type E SpiralTrac,'dimensions for the counterbore or external key iliw Press into Place -ng reduced or •Flush(6): (Horizontal Split Case Pumps)must be provided in addition to the part number. ✓ Superior Air -nting. Please contact EnviroSeal for sizing information sheets. ✓ Drives C' ulation for face cooling. 2.For Packing Version SpiralTrac,'"the width of the lantern ring as well as the size of ✓ Forc-- uid Exchange for heat removal. packing and number of packing rings being replaced by SpiralTrac'must be provided ✓ R. oyes Particulate. in addition to the part number.Please contact EnviroSeal for sizing information sheets. 3.For Double Ended Pumps both right and left rotation devices are required. Type E Externally Keyed (Typical for Horizontal Spli ase Pumps) 4.Depending on the pump,this may be a shaft,sleeve,or impeller hub diameter. — Installed using reduced or no Flusfdfil: 5.When air is a problem from process or dry running,the use of flush,quench or double I Superior Air release when vent specified. seals is necessary to provide face cooling. fa I Drives Circulation for face cooling. 6.Elimination of flush is dependent on the type of application.Please contact EnviroSeal ✓ Forces fluid Exchange for heat removal. to determine your application's suitability for total flush elimination. ✓ Removes Particulate. 7.Version P radial cross-section must be greater than.500"when using glass filled PTFE. AVAILABLE WORLDWIDE US PATENTS#5,553,868 EnviroSeal THROUGH #5,167,418 Engineering Products Limited A.W.CHESTERTON CO. Euro.Pat.App.0 912 848 P.O.Box 538,Waverley Nova Scotia,Canada BON 2S0 Tel(902)861-3464 Fax(902)861-3522 ST01272-280100 Website http://www.enviroseal.ca .,.._..,",. _ ,d: b , ,, ; PERMANENT N.�\ .� . - = BEARING :.. "�.,y�� ; , . i, PROTECTION .,� �, Bearing Isolator er i �*+'a • f J t ;� I z,. 1 =l, "� -fI • 400 I N PRO/SEAL A Waukesha Bearings Business ___________,......,,...........1 INCREASE THE RELIABILITY OF YOUR ROTATING EQUIPMENT The Importance of The High Cost of Contact Seals Bearing Protection A common method of bearing protection is the contact seal. A contact seal Bearing failure is the leading cause is a bearing seal that uses contact on the shaft to retain lubrication and/or of rotating equipment failure across exclude contamination by creating a barrier to the bearing housing. Examples multiple industries and applications. of contact seals are lip seals, mechanical seals and magnetic seals. It leads to expensive unscheduled downtime and lost production. All contact seals have a finite life expectancy, eventually wearing at the point While there are many factors that of contact or grooving the shaft. As a result, they no longer effectively seal the contribute to failed bearings, over bearing enclosure. This short and unpredictable service life makes contact half of bearing failures are caused seals inadequate. Rotating equipment becomes unreliable, and catastrophic by contamination ingress into the failure due to bearing degradation is common. bearing housing and lubrication loss. To eliminate seal failure and increase equipment reliability, finite-life contact Manufacturers and users of rotating seals need to be replaced with a permanent solution. equipment are placing increased emphasis on bearing protection as a means of improving the overall reliability of their rotating equipment. Stop LEADING CAUSES OF MOTOR FAILURE VBXX® Interface ��i BEARINGS 51% Stato -r , VBX® Ring D Groove STATOR WINDINGS 16% 11' EXTERNAL 16% _: ' `f Static Dynamic UNKNOWN 10% ROTOR BEARINGS 5% ( . SHAFT COUPLING 2% Rotor EASA:IEEE DATA 1 I Rotor Drive Ring viiiLube Return lit ^ ' 1 �` Expulsion Port SAME- D AY SHIPPING AVAILABLE Stator Gasket MOTORS it The Inpro/Seal® Solution < , `' i --- As the inventor of the original Bearing Isolator, is Inpro/Seal has delivered proven permanent bearing protection for rotating equipment applications for more ) t ..— than 30 years. . . The Inpro/Seal Bearing Isolator is a non-contacting, permanent bearing -'': protection device. Inpro/Seal's patented design consists of a unitized stator and rotor that form a compound labyrinth seal with no wearing parts— ensuring permanent protection. The stator is typically pressed into the bearing PUMPS housing, while the rotor turns with the shaft. The Inpro/Seal Bearing Isolator protects in multiple ways. Lubricant is captured in the inner portion of the labyrinth and flows back to the bearing housing. Outside contamination attempting to enter the bearing housing is captured in the outer `- -,,,,,r� '' • labyrinth paths and expelled through a port in the stator by centrifugal force and gravity. ;• ^ ,;F Inpro/Seal's patented VBX®vapor blocking ring inhibits the free transfer of vapor contamination when the rotating equipment is cycled off. Benefits: • Non-wearing, non-contacting, permanent bearing protection • Patented VBX® ring blocks the transfer of vapor contamination created by heating/cooling of the bearing enclosure PILLOW BLOCKS • Split designs available for easy installation • Can be installed by OEMs or retrofitted on site _ - 4,!' • Maintenance free _ ", • Zero energy consumption •_ • Can accommodate shaft sizes of 0.625—48.0 in. (1.59— 121.92 cm)* • Standard temperature tolerances range from -35i F(-37 C)—400 F(204 C)* • Manufactured in bronze, stainless steel, aluminum or other materials for more extreme conditions *Utilizing special design and material provisions,products can be manufactured to exceed these ranges. ".l I, GEARBOXES f._yaw. *Rr= .r. f " — The Inpro/Seal®Bearing Isolator is a non-contacting, non-wearing, permanent bearing protection device. GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE The InprolSeal®Bearing Isolator is backed A Universal Solution by an unconditional performance guarantee I The Inpro/Seal® Bearing Isolator is a unique barrier for contamination ingress See our website for complete details and lubrication retention for bearings installed in pumps, motors, gearboxes, '—"' ' - ----w- 'i j pillow blocks, steam turbines, sleeve-bearing motors, paper machine rolls, machine tool spindles and many other types of rotating equipment. This technology has been applied across a variety of industries including chemical processing, food and beverage, mining, oil and gas, power generation, Unmatched primary metals, processing, and pulp and paper. Customer Service Inpro/Seal's responsive global sales No matter the size or complexity of your application, Inpro/Seal can design network is committed to making an isolator to fit your exact specifications. sure you have the right technology for your application, right when Experience You Can Trust you need it. We know that time Permanent bearing protection requires a custom engineered solution that means money for you. That's why takes into account all these factors: we offer same-day shipping on most • Lubrication type • Operating equipment products, even new designs. No • Bearing type • Shaft movement matter what your application, we • Flooded applications • RPM can deliver a custom engineered • Size restrictions • SFPM solution designed to meet your specific needs. You don't need to be an expert; our knowledgeable team will help. You can count on Inpro/Seal, the leader in bearing and system protection, to Technology you can rely on, maximize the uptime of your rotating equipment. We've been the trusted supported by customer service source for bearing isolator technology for more than 30 years and have you'll appreciate. installed millions of bearing isolators on multiple applications worldwide. The Inpro/Seal Advantage 7:"--1 lnpro/Seal is committed to delivering innovative technology and superior =r customer support...standard with every solution. When you work with iL Inpro/Seal, you can expect: • Same-day shipments available on most products, including new designs • Custom engineered solutions for your application and operating environment • Knowledgeable sales network providing localized support • Unconditional performance guarantee—see website for complete details _ r , � READY TO GET STARTED? +. r , , Visit www.inpro-seal.com to contact your local Inpro/Seal representative or request a quote. All designs are custom engineered to fit exact requirements. The Inpro/Seal` Bearing Isolator is a custom engineered solution and some designs may be protected by one,more than one or none of the following US and/or foreign patents and/or pending patent applications including US Pat.7,052,014,6,419,233,6,311,984,6,234,489,6,182,972;6,062,568;5,951,020;5,865,441,5,498,006,5,378,000 and 5,335,921. AIN P RO/SEAL www.inpro-seal.com I info@inpro-seal.com I +1309-787-4971 A Waukesha Bearings Business d11.002.1-0C13 Fairbanks Nijhuis Paint Specifications • Coating Manufacturer Tnemec • Surface Preparation SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. • Prime Coat Series 27 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color 1211 Red Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor • Intermediate Coat Series N69 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color 1211 Red Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor • Finish Coat Series 1075 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color Pentair Blue Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor 0605222SR3.doc PC-1000 T E„�.t F.C. TYPDXY° SERIES 27 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Polyamide Epoxy COMMON USAGE Versatile low-temperature coating ideally suited for steel fabrication and OEM applications.Also widely used as a field tie- coat.Provides fast curing and rapid handling capabilities.Note:Series 27 conforms with air pollution regulations limiting Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC)to a maximum of 340 grams/litre(2.8 lbs/gal). COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide.Note:Epoxies chalk with extended exposure to sunlight.Lack of ventilation,incomplete mixing,miscatalyzation or the use of heaters that emit carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide during application and initial stages of curing may cause yellowing to occur. FINISH Flat PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available.Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. COATING SYSTEM PRIMERS Steel:Self-priming or Series 1,37H,66,L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F,90,94-H20,135,394,530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal:Self-priming,Series 66 or L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F. TOPCOATS Series 2H,30,66,73, 113, 114,115, 175,700,701, 1028, 1029,1070,1071,1072,1074, 1075,1077, 1078.Note:Series 27 exterior exposed for 3 weeks or longer requires an epoxy intermediate coat or scarification prior to topcoating with Series 2H.Refer to appropriate topcoat data sheet for additional information. SURFACE PREPARATION STEEL SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning GALVANIZED STEEL&NON- Surface preparation recommendations will vary depending on substrate and exposure conditions.Contact your Tnemec FERROUS METAL representative or Tnemec Technical Services. OVERCOATING For overcoat applications,reference Tnemec Technical Bulletin No.98-10 and contact your Tnemec representative. ALL SURFACES Must be clean,dry and free of oil,grease and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 58.0±2.0%(mixed)t RECOMMENDED DFT 2.0 to 6.0 mils(50 to 150 microns)per coat.Note:Number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate, application method and exposure.Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME Temperature To Touch To Handle To Recoat 75°F(24°C) 1/2 hour 2 hours 3 hours 65°F(18°C) 3/4 hour 4 hours 5-6 hours 55°F(11°C) 1 hour 4-5 hours 6-8 hours 45°F(7°C) 1-2 hours 6-8 hours 9-12 hours 35°F(2°C) 2-3 hours 9-12 hours 12-15 hours Curing time varies with surface temperature,air movement,humidity and film thickness. VOLITILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS Unthinned:2.36 lbs/gallon(282 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.83 lbs/gallon(339 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):2.83 lbs/gallon(339 grams/litre)t HAPS Unthinned:2.59 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.59 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):3.54 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 930 mil sq ft/gal(22.8 m2/L at 25 microns).See APPLICATION for coverage rates.t NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two:Part A and Part B PACKAGING 5 gallon(189L)pails and 1 gallon(3.79L)cans—Order in multiples of 2. NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 14.22±0.25 lbs(6.45±.11 kg)(mixed)t STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F(-7°C) Maximum 110°F(43°C) TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry)Continuous 250°F(121°C) Intermittent 275°F(135°C) SHELF LIFE 24 months at recommended storage temperature. FLASH POINT-SETA Part A:82°F(28°C) Part B:80°F(27°C) HEALTH&SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous.Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. ©September 29 2008 b Tnemec Co. Inc. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change widrout notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.com Page 1 of 2 P t y t should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. PRODUCT DATA SHEET F.C. TYPDXY° I SERIES 27 APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES Dry Mils(Microns) Wet Mils(Microns) Sq Ft/Gal(m2/Gal) Suggested(1) 4.0(100) 7.0(180) 233(21.6) Minimum 2.0(50) 3.5(90) 465(43.2) Maximum 6.0(150) 10.5(265) 155(14.4) (1)Note:Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness.Allow for overspray and surface irregularities.Wet film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns.Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance.t MIXING Power mix contents of each container,making sure no pigment remains on the bottom.Pour a measured amount of Part B into a clean container large enough to hold both components.Add an equal volume of Part A to Part B while under agitation.Continue agitation until the two components are thoroughly mixed. Do not use mixed material beyond pot life limits.Note:Both components should be above 50°F(10°C)prior to mixing.For applications to surfaces between 35°F to 50°F(2°C to 10°C),allow mixed material to stand thirty(30)minutes and restir before using.For optimum application properties,the material temperature should be above 60°F(16°C). THINNING Use No.60 or No.4 Thinner.For air spray,thin up to 10%or 3/4 pint(380 mL)per gallon.For airless spray,brush or roller,thin up to 5%or 1/4 pint(190 mL)per gallon. POT LIFE 16 hours at 35°F(2°C) 2 hours at 77°F(25°C) 1/2 hour at 100°F(38°C) APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID Mat'l Hose ID Atomizing Pot Pressure Pressure 5/16"or 3/8" 3/8"or 1/2" 75-100 psi 25-35 psi DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704 (7.9 or 9.5 mm) (9.5 or 12.7 mm) (5.2-6.9 bar) (1.7-2.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.015"-0.019" 4000-4800 psi 1/4"or 3/8" 60 mesh (380-485 microns) (276-331 bar) (6.4 or 9,5 mm) (250 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment,applicator technique and weather conditions. Note:Application over inorganic zinc-rich primers:Apply a wet mist coat and allow tiny bubbles to form.When bubbles disappear in 1 to 2 minutes,apply a full wet coat at specified mil thickness. Roller:Roller application optional when environmental restrictions do not allow spraying.Use 3/8"or 1/2"(9.5 mm to 12.7 mm)synthetic woven nap covers. Brush:Recommended for small areas only.Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 35°F(2°C) Maximum 135°F(57°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F(3°C)above the dew point.Coating won't cure below minimum surface temperature. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. tValues may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc.THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SI IALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF.The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LI.MITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As application,environmental and design factors can vary significantly,clue care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coatin . 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City,Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMEC1 Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com ©September 29,2008 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. PDS27 Page 2 of 2 TEME� HI-BUILD EPDXOIJNE® II SERIES N69 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Polyamidoamine Epoxy COMMON USAGE An advanced generation epoxy for protection and finishing of steel and concrete,It has excellent resistance to abrasion and is suitable for immersion as well as chemical contact exposure.Contact your local Tnemec representative for a list of chemicals.This product can also be used for lining storage tanks that contain demineralized,deionized or distilled water. COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide.Note:Epoxies chalk with extended exposure to sunlight.Lack of ventilation,incomplete mixing,miscatalyzation or the use of heaters that emit carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide during application and initial stages of curing may cause yellowing to occur. FINISH Satin SPECIAI.QUALIFICATIONS A two-coat system at 4.0-6.0 dry mills(100-150 dry microns)per coat passes the performance requirements of MIL-PRF- 4556F for fuel storage. PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available.Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. COATING SYSTEM SURFACER/FILLER/PATCHER 215 PRIMERS Steel:Self-priming or Series 1,27,37H,66,L69,L69F,N69F,V69F,90E-92,90-97,H90-97,90G-1K97,90-98,91-H20,94- H20, 135,161,394,530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal:Self-priming or Series 66,L69,L69F,N69F,V69F,161 Concrete:Self-priming or Series 130,215,218 CMU:Self-priming or 130,215,218, 1254 TOPCOATS 22,46H-413,66,L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F,72,73,84, 104, 113, 114, 141, 156, 157,161, 175,180, 181,287,446, 740,750, 1028,1029, 1070, 1070V, 1071, 1071V,1072, 1072V, 1074,1074U, 1075,1075U,1077, 1078, 1080, 1081.Refer to COLORS on applicable topcoat data sheets for additional information.Note:The following recoat times apply for Series N69:Immersion Service-Surface must be scarified after 60 days.Atmospheric Service-After 60 days,scarification or an epoxy tic-coat is required.When topcoating with Series 740 or 750,recoat time for N69 is 21 clays for atmospheric service. Contact your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations. SURFACE PREPARATION PRIMED STEEL Immersion Service:Scarify the epoxy prime coat surface by abrasive blasting with fine abrasive before topcoating if it has been exterior exposed for 60 days or longer and N69 is the specified topcoat. STEEL Immersion Service:SSPC-SP1O/NACE 2 Near-White Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. Non-Immersion Service:SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. GALVANIZED STEEL&NON- Surface preparation recommendations will vary depending on substrate and exposure conditions.Contact your Tnemec FERROUS METAL representative or Tnemec Technical Services. CAST/DUCTILE IRON Contact your Tnemec representative or Tnemec Technical Services. CONCRETE Allow new concrete to cure 28 days.For optimum results and/or immersion service,abrasive blast referencing SSPC- SP13/NACE 6,ICRI CSP 2-4 Surface Preparation of Concrete and Tnemec's Surface Preparation and Application Guide. (MU Allow mortar to cure for 28 days.Level protrusions and mortar spatter. PAINTED SURFACES Non-Immersion Service:Ask your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations. ALL SURFACES Must be clean,dry and free of oil,grease,chalk and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 67.0±2.0%(mixed)t RECOMMENDED DR 2.0 to 10.0 mils(50 to 255 microns)per coat.Note:MIL-PRF-4556F applications require two coats at 4.0-6.0 mils(100-150 microns)per coat.Otherwise,the number of coaLs and thickness requirements will vary with substrate,application method and exposure.Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME AT 5 MILS OFT Without 44-700 Accelerator Temperature To Handle To Recoat Immersion 90°F(32°C) 5 hours 7 hours 7 days 80°F(27°C) 7 hours 9 hours 7 days 70°F(21°C) 9 hours 12 hours 7 clays 60°F(16°C) 16 hours 22 hours 9 to 12 days 50°F(10°C) 24 hours 32 hours 12 to 14 days Curing time varies with surface temperature,air movement,humidity and film thickness.Note:For faster curing and low- temperature applications,add No.44-700 Epoxy Accelerator;see separate product data sheet for cure information. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS Unthinned:2.40 lbs/gallon(285 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):2.80 lbs/gallon(334 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.80 lbs/gallon(335 grams/litre) HAPS Unthinned:2.40 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):3.25 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.40 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 1,074 mil sq ft/gal(26.4 m2/L at 25 microns).See APPLICATION for coverage rates.t ©July 29 2013 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.com Page 1 Of 2 should be referenced for the m most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. PRODUCT DATA SHEET HI-BUILD EPDXOLINE® II I SERIES N69 NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two:Part A(amine)and Part B(epoxy)-One(Part A)to one(Part B)by volume. PACKAGING 5 gallon(18.9L)pails and 1 gallon(3.79L)cans-Order in multiples of 2. NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 13.67±0.25 lbs(6.10±.11 kg)(mixed)t STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F(-7°C) Maximum 110°F(43°C) TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry)Continuous 250°F(121°C) Intermittent 275°F(135°C) SHELF LIFE Part A:24 months;Part B: 12 months at recommended storage temperature. RASH POINT-SETA Part A:82°F(28°C) Part B:93°F(34°C) HEALTH&SAFELY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous.Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES Dry Mils(Microns) Wet Mils(Microns) Sq Ft/Gal(ma/Gal) Suggested(1) 6.0(150) 9.0(230) 179(16.6) Minimum 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75) 537(49.9) Maximum 10.0(250) 15.0(375) 107(10.0) Dense Concrete&Masonry:From 100 to 150 sq ft(9.3 to 13.9 mz)per gallon. CMU:From 75 to 100 sq ft(7.0 to 9.3 m2)per gallon. (1)Note for Steel:Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness.Also, Series N69 can be spray applied to an optional high-build film thickness range of 8.0 to 10.0 dry mils(205 to 255 dry microns)or 11.5 to 14.5 wet mils(209 to 370 wet microns).Allow for overspray and surface irregularities.Film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns.Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance.t MIXING L Start with equal amounts of both Parts A&B. 2. Using a power mixer,separately stir Parts A&B. 3.(For accelerated version.If not using 44-700,skip to No.4.) Add four(4)fluid ounces of 44-700 per gallon of Part A while Part A is under agitation. 4.Add Part A to Part B under agitation,stir until thoroughly mixed. 5.Both components must be above 50°F(10°C)prior to mixing.For application of the unaccelerated version to surfaces between 50°F to 60°F(10°C to 16°C)or the accelerated version to surfaces between 35°F to 50°F(2°C to 10°C),allow mixed material to stand 30 minutes and restir before using. 6.For optimum application properties,the material temperature should be above 60°F(16°C). Note:The use of more than the recommended amount of 44-700 will adversely affect performance. THINNING Use No.4 or No.60 Thinner.For air spray,thin up to 10%or 3/4 pint(380 mL)per gallon.For airless spray,roller or brush,thin up to 5%or 1/4 pint(190 mL)per gallon. POT LIFE Without 44-700:6 hours at 50°F(10°C) 4 hours at 75°F(24°C) 1 hour at 100°F(38°C) With 44-700:2 hours at 50°F(10°C) 1 hour at 75°F(24°C) 30 minutes at 100°F(38°C) SPRAY LIFE Without 44-700: 1 hour at 75°F(24°C) With 44-700:30 minutes at 75°F(24°C) Note:Spray application after listed times will adversely affect ability to achieve recommended dry film thickness. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray# Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID Mat'l Hose ID AtomizingPressure Pot Pressure 5/16"or 3/8" 3/8"or 1/2° 75-100 psi 10-20 psi DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704 (9.5 or 12.7 p p' (7.9 or 9.5 mm) mm) (5.2-6.9 bar) (0.7-1.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray I Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.015"-0.019" 3000-4800 psi 1/4"or 3/8" 60 mesh (380-485 microns) (207-330 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (250 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment,applicator technique and weather conditions. $Spray application of first coat on CMU should be followed by backrolling.Note:Application over inorganic zinc-rich primers:Apply a wet mist coat and allow tiny bubbles to form.When bubbles disappear in 1 to 2 minutes,apply a full wet coat at specified mil thickness. Roller:Use 3/8"or 1/2"(9.5 mm or 12.7 mm)synthetic woven nap roller cover.Use longer nap to obtain penetration on rough or porous surfaces. Brush:Recommended for small areas only.Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 50°F(10°C) Maximum 135°F(57°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F(3°C)above the dew point.Coating will not cure below minimum surface temperature. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. t Values may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc.THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SIIALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF.The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As a.plication,environmental and design factors can va significanil,due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coatin:. 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas Oily,Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMEC1 Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com ©July 29,2013 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. PDSN69 Page 2 of 2 Endura-Shield ® II SERIES1075 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane COMMON USAGE A coating highly resistant to abrasion, wet conditions, corrosive fumes and exterior weather- ing. High build quality combines with project specific primers for two-coat, labor saving systems. Fast curing options are available; see Curing Time below. Product has some applications as a direct to metal finish. Contact your Tnemec representative for more details. NOT FOR IMMERSION SERVICE. COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide. Note: Certain colors may require multiple coats depending on method of application and finish coat color. When feasible, the preceding coat should be in the same color family, but noticeably different. FINISH Semi-gloss SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS Series 1075 meets the requirements of SSPC-36 Paint Standard. PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. TNEMTC COATING SYSTEM PRIMERS Steel: Series 20, FC20, 27,66, N68, N69,91-H20, 90-97, 104, 135, N140, 161, 530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal: Series 66, N69, 161 Concrete: Series 66, N69, 84, 104, 161 CMU: 54-660, 130. Intermediate coat required. Note: Before topcoating with Series 1075, Series 530 exterior exposed more than 24 hours must first be scarified or receive an intermediate coat of Tnemec polyamide epoxy. Also, Series N68 exterior exposed for 21 days or Series N69, 104, N140 or 161 exterior exposed more than two months must first be scarified or reprimed with themselves. Blasting with fine abrasive is the preferred method of scarification. TOPCOATS Series 76, optional when extended weatherability is desired. SURFACE PREPARATION ALL SURFACES Must be clean, dry and free of oil, grease and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOWMESOLIDS* 75 ± 2.0% (mixed) RECOMMENDED DFT 2.0 to 5.0 mils (50 to 125 microns) per coat. Note: Number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate, application method and exposure. Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME Temperature To Touch To Handle To Recoat 75°F (24°C) 1 hour 6 hours 8 hours To resist moisture condensation: 6 hours. Curing time varies with surface temperature, air movement, humidity and film thickness. Note: For faster curing and low-temperature applications, add No. 44-710 Urethane Accelerator; see separate product data sheet. Contact Tnemec Technical Services for force curing times and temperatures. VOLATILE ORGANIC Unthinned No. 39 Thinner No. 42 Thinner No. 48 Thinner COMPOUNDS* (Maximum 15%) (Maximum 15%) (Maximun 15%) 1.84 lbs/gallon 2.42 lbs/gallon 2.48 lbs/gallon 2.55 lbs/gallon (220 grams/litre) (290 grams/litre) (297 grams/litre) (305 grams/litre) THEORETICAL COVERAGE* 1,203 mil sq ft/gal (29.5 m2/L at 25 microns). See APPLICATION for coverage rates. NUMBER OFCONPONENTS Two: Part A and Part B MIXING RATIO By volume: Eight (Part A) to one (Part B) PACKAGING Three Gallon Kit: Consists of a partially-filled five-gallon can of Part A and a partially-filled half-gallon can of Part B. When mixed, yields three gallons (11.4L). One Gallon Kit: Consists of a partially-filled one-gallon can labeled Part A and a partially- filled pint can labeled Part B. When mixed, yields one gallon (3.79L). NETWEIGHTPERGALLON* 12.75 ± 0.25 lbs (5.80 ± .11 kg) STORAGETEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F (-7°C) Maximum 110°F (43°C) TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry) Continuous 250°F (121°C) Intermittent 275°F (135°C) Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.corn should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. ©December 2002, by Tnemec Company, Inc. 1075 SERIES1075 Endura-Shield ° II TECHNICAL DATA continued FLASH POINT-SETA Part A: 95°F (35°C) Part B: 135°F (57°C) SHELF LIFE 12 months at recommended storage temperature. HEALTH&SAFETY This product contains chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous. Read container label warning and material safety data sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES* Conventional Build (Spray, Brush or Roller) High-Build (Spray Only) Dry Mils Wet Mils Sq Ft/Gal Dry Mils Wet Mils Sq Ft/Gal (Microns) (Microns) (m2/Gal) (Microns) (Microns) (m2/Gal) Suggested 2.5 (65) 3.5 (90) 481 (44.7) 4.0 (100) 5.5 (140) 301 (28.0) Minimum 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75) 602 (55.9) 3.0 (75) 4.0 (100) 401 (37.3) Maximum 3.0 (75) 4.0 (100) 401 (37.3) 5.0 (125) 6.5 (165) 241 (22.4) Note: Can be spray applied at 3.0 to 5.0 mils (75 to 125 microns) DFT per coat when extra protection or the elimination of a coat is desired. Allow for overspray and surface irregularities. Film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns. Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance. MIXING Stir contents of the container marked Part A, making sure no pigment remains on the bottom. Add the contents of the can marked Part B to Part A while under agitation. Continue agitation until the two components are thoroughly mixed. When used with 44-710 Urethane Accelerator, first blend 44-710 into Part A under agitation; continue as above. Do not use mixed material beyond pot life limits. Caution: Part B is moisture-sensitive and will react with atmospheric moisture. Unused material must be kept tightly closed at all times. POTLIFE 1'/ hours at 77°F (25°C) unthinned 2 hours at 77°F (25°C) thinned THINNING For air or airless spray, thin up to 15% or 1'% pints (570 mL) per gallon with No. 42 Thinner if temperatures are below 80°F (27°C), use No. 48 Thinner for temperatures above 80°F (27°C). For brush and roller, thin 15% or 11/4 pints (570 mL) per gallon with No. 39 Thinner. Note: Thinning is required for proper application. Caution: Do not add thinner if more than 30 minutes have elapsed after mixing. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 35°F (2°C) Maximum 120°F (49°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F (3°C) above the dew point. If coating is exposed to moisture before the applicable cure parameters are met, dull, flat or spotty appearing areas may develop. Actual cure time will vary with air movement, film thick- ness and humidity. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Air Cap Air Hose Mat'l Hose Atomizing Pot Tip ID ID Pressure Pressure DeVilbiss E 78 5/16" or 3/8" 3/8" or 1/2" 75-90 psi 10-20 psi MBC (7.9 or 9.5 mm) (9.5 or 12.7 mm) (5.2-6.2 bar) (0.7-1.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.009"-0.013" 3000-3500 psi 1/4" or 3/8" 100 mesh (230-330 microns) (207-241 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (150 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment, applicator technique and weather conditions. Roller: Use 1/4" (6.4 mm) synthetic nap cover. Do not use medium or long nap roller covers. Two coats are required to obtain dry film thickness above 3.0 mils (75 microns). Brush: Recommended for small areas only. Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. Two coats are required to obtain recommended film thickness above 3.0 mils (75 microns). CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. * Values may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc. THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As application,environmental and design factors can vary significantly,due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating.FOR INDUSTRIAL USE ONLY. TNEMEC COMPANY INCORPORATED PRINTED IN USA 6800 CORPORATE DRIVE,KANSAS CITY,MISSOURI 641 20-1 3 7 2 TEL:1 800 TNEMEC 1 www.tnemec.com (YDAT305)1075 Omega Close-Coupled Design with Straight Bore Hubs NOTE:Hub/shoulder design B C B B > c B varies per coupling size.Consult Rexnord for specific size assembly drawings._� , 1...,1 ---?----) I, .1 p (OUT)_ _ (OUT) A (IN) _ _ (IN) • F . (HUBS OUTBOARD) (HUBS INBOARD) Dimensions(in) Recom. Continuous Continuous Weight CouplingCD Max. Max. p Se Bore HP/700 Torque RPM A B C D (lb) (in)O RPM (lb-in) (In) (Out) (In) (Out) E2 1.13 0.30 190 7500 3.50 0.94 1.34 1.90 1.85 3.22 3.78 1.2 E3 1.38 0.58 365 7500 ' 4.00 1.50 0.81 1.31 2.32 3.81 4.31 2.4 E4 1.63 0.88 550 7500 4.56 1.69 0.44 1.31 2.60 3.81 4.69 3.0 E5 1.88 1.48 925 7500 5.38 1.75 0.81 1.81 3.13 4.31 5.31 5.4 E10 2.13 2.30 1450 7500 6.38 1.88 0.56 1.84 3.65 4.31 5.56 8.2 [20 2.38 3.C/5 2300 6000 7.25 2.0G 0.50 2.30 4.40 4.62 6.50 13.0 E30 2.88 5.79 3650 5800 8.25 2.31 0.56 2.44 5.42 5.19 7.06 21 [40 3.38 8.85 5300 5000 9.50 2.50 0.56 2.68 6.63 5.50 7.68 35 E50 3.63 12.14 7650 4200 11.00 2.75 0.63 3.38 8.13 6.13 8.88 54 E60 4 19.84 12,500 3800 12.50 3.25 0.69 3.44 8.75 7.19 9.94 72 E70 4.5 35.12 22,125 3600 14.00 3.62 0.75 3.75 9.25 8.00 11.00 86 E80 6 62.7 39,500 2000 16.00 4.87 0.75 5.00 11.25 10.50 14.75 170 E100 6.75 135 85,050 1900 21.00 5.50 1.75 3.75 14.13 12.75 14.75 244 E120 7.5 270 170,100 1800 25.00 6.00 2.25 4.88 17.63 14.24 16.88 425 E140 9.00 540 340,200 1500 30.00 7.00 3.00 5.00 20.88 17.00 19.00 746 5 See page 17 for larger bore capacities with shallow keyways. OO With maximum bore hubs. Split-in-Half Flex Element Reversible Hubs Allows disassembly and replacement without disturbing hubs Accommodates different shaft spacing requirements,and allows compression bushings to or connected equipment. be installed from either side of the hub. e r . NW Straight Bore Hubs QD Hubs and Bushings Taper-Lock Hubs and Bushings 8 NOTE:Dimensions subject to change.Certified dimensions of ordered material furnished on request. Installation ....1,.,,..-- — -,,,,.,.„,.?..,._;,::„, .‘,.. ,,r;''''. l'; : - l'-' 7,-;01-''',„, ' rc:- ":"t7'i;:=:•""1-.1..., ffi le • N'',,V,.-.,',,\''\ 4 �j l�'7a1 =T _ '\ ,.„%,•',:,-'A,:i-..,,,,.'1 , ,... ,_ ,„� °�..:. .`v , r. _ It _�. `. aa lam.-•E • '' Mount one hub to shaft,leave other hub loose for Place half of the Rexnord Omega element around hubs and Mount other half of the Omega element.Tighten all cap adjustment of spacing. secure with self-locking cap screws.Omega element will screws to recommended torques below and installation is space the other hub.Now secure the other hub. done.Refer to the installation instruction for further details. �.' ' Tested Tough : Rigorous testing demonstrates that the Rexnord Omega t,. ,� coupling protects connected equipment from the damaging effects of misalignment,vibration and gross overload. it iiili. Where other coupling designs might allow equipment damage,the super flexible element of Rexnord Omega . O. 4 ., couplings minimizes the reactionary forces on equipment bearings under severe misalignment conditions and reduces the effects of excessive shock overloads. Severe static testing(5 x rating)shows element flexibility, Demonstrates coupling's ability to accept severe rugged design and positive adhesive bond to the metal misalignment. shoes. Omega Coupling IMPORTANT Allowable Misalignment Recommended Cap Screw Torque for Proper Installation 4° Parallel Coupling Size Torque-Dry (lb-in) (lb-ft) Size 2-10 r t 2 OMEGA ~ 3 3° HUB OHUBGA 4 204 17 5 10 Angular^ 20 30 cn Size 20-50 R 40 360 30 Q 2° 50 60 OMEGA Size 60-80 0-- HUB 80 900 75 100 3240 270 )o 140 140 7080 590 )11L Size 100-1y NOTE:Cap screws have self-locking patches which should not be reused more than twice.Cap screws can 0° be further used if a thread locking adhesive is applied. 1/32 1/16 3/32 1/8 3/16 Do NOT Lubricate Cap Screw Threads. Parallel IMPORTANT NOTE: Coupling alignment is directly related to NOTE:Any combination of parallel and angular misalignment which falls under the triangle will not cause a premature smooth,efficient equipment operation.Care fatigue failure of the flexible element in normal use. should be taken for best possible alignment. 7 MOTOR DATA SHEET MOTOR/EQUIPMENT TAG FMB0605222A01 MOTOR NUMBER 18701930 SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA MANUFACTURER US Motors MODEL/SERIES CTI MODEL NO. 18701930 FRAME 405T ENCLOSURE TEFC NEMA DESIGN B HP 25 SERVICE FACTOR 1.15 RPM 592 INSULATION CLASS F VOLTS 460 FULL LOAD AMPS 43.1 AMBIENT TEMP 40 Deg C PHASE 3 NO LOAD AMPS 23 2 DESIGN TEMP RISE B HERTZ 60 LOCK ROTOR AMPS 173.9 INRUSH CODE LETTER F 100%LOAD 75%LOAD 50%LOAD GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES: 90.2 91.0 89.8 GUARANTEED MINIMUM POWER FACTOR: 62.9 56.7 45.9 MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: 15.7 KVAR ACCESSORIES MOTOR WINDING HEATER 115 VOLTS 192 WATTS WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION WINDING TEMP SWITCHES(YES/NO) YES RTD: Not Applicable TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE #OF WIRES NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP COEFFICIENT RECOMMENDED DEGREES RECOMMENDED DEGREES ALARM CELSIUS TRIP CELSIUS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS INVERTER DUTY*(YES/NO) YES PART WINDING(YES/NO) NO WYE-DELTA(YES/NO) NO 2 SPEED, 1 WINDING(YES/NO) NO 2 SPEED,2 WINDING(YES/NO) NO AREA CLASSIFICATION: Not Applicable CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31. Clean Water Services 16222-Data Sheet Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 CONFORMED SPECIFICATIONS Pentair Pump Group 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City,KS 66110 913-371-5000 FAX 913-748-4025 CERTIFIED MOTOR PERFORMANCE DATA MOTOR MANUFACTURER: U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS DATE: 17-Jan-19 FM PURCHASE ORDER#: 11868702 FM TAG#: 0605222A01 PERFORMANCE DATA BASED ON STANDARD RULES OF: X IEEE X ASA X NEMA HP SYNCHRONOUS FULL LOAD* FRAME TYPE ENCLOSURE SPEED(RPM) SPEED(RPM) NUMBER 25 600 592 405T CTI TEFC *Full Load Speed Tolerance Per NEMA MG1-12.46 is+/-20%of slip(Slip=Synchronous RPM-Full Load RPM) AMPERES MAX.TEMP. RISE NEMA PHASE HERTZ VOLTS FULL LOCKED INSULATION X RTD SERVICE KVA/HP NEMA LOAD ROTOR CLASS THERM. FACTOR CODE DESIGN 3 60 460 43.1 350.0 F 80 DEG C 1.15 F B AT1.0SF TORQUE AT FULL VOLTAGE MINIMUM GUARANTEED POWER FACTOR FULL LOAD LOCKED PULLOUT EFFICIENCY TORQUE AT STARTING BREAKDOWN FULL 3/4 1/2 FULL 3/4 1/2 FULL LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD SPEED(LB.FT) PERCENT OF FULL LOAD 90.2 91.0 89.8 62.9 56.7 45.9 221.7 115 200 VSS 0 VHS n NRR n SRC D HORIZ X❑ BEARINGS: PAINT: (Attach Technical Data Sheets) Drive End Lubrication: LOWER Factory Standard Oil EIGrease 110ther 02osite End Lubrication: UPPER Oil Grease MOTOR NO.: 18701930 MOTOR WEIGHT: 1180 LBS. ROTATION: X❑BI-DIRECTIONAL rim f ccw Certified by: famee Se a Ate Date: 17-Jan-19 Revision # 1 FM013/0194 Pentair Pump Group 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City,KS 66110 913-371-5000 FAX 913-748-4025 Accessory Data Motor Manufacturer: U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS Date: 17-Jan-19 FM Purchase Order#: 11868702 FM Tag#: 0605222A01 Required Not Required Description Space Heaters: X Watts: 192 Voltage: 115 Thermostats: X Type: ID N.O. Thermistors: X❑ Make&Model: Trip Range: Quantity _relay not Supplied Per Motor: _relay supplied:Type: factory set Ofield adjustable wiring diagram/ Winding RTD's: X Make&Model: Construction/OHM Rating: Quantity _relay not Supplied Per Motor _relay supplied:Type: Ofactory set field adjustable wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Bearing RTD's: X❑ Make&Model: Construction/OHM Rating: Quantity _relay not Supplied relay supplied:Type: factory set Dfield adjustable —wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Vibration Sensor: XD Make&Model: _relay not Supplied relay supplied:Type: Ofactory set field adjustable —wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Tests: X❑ X Complete Initial Test,unwitnessed —Sound Test, unwitnessed _Vibration Test,unwitnessed _Polarization Idex,witnessed _Complete Initial Test,witnessed _Reed Critical Frequency Test,unwitnessed X Short Commercial Test(Routine), witnessed IEEE841+Enhanced No Load Test,unwitnessed Other Features: TEFC, HORIZONTAL, PREMIUM EFFICIENT, INVERTER DUTY/PART 31, HOSTILE DUTY DESIGN 1.15 SERVICE FACTOR(1.0 ON VFD POWER), CLASS F INSULATION, 40 DEGREE C AMBIENT, INSULIFE 2000 TRTMT NEMA DESIGN B, BI-DIRECTIONAL ROTATION, F-1 ASSEMBLY, 115V SPACE HEATERS, Q3 N.C.THERMOSTATS CLASS B TEMP RISE @ 1.0 SF, 60,000 HR L-10 BEARING LIFE, BRASS DRAINS, GROUND LUG IN CONDUIT BOX AEGIS SHAFT GROUND RING, SPECIAL BALANCE, STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE, DIRECT CONNECTED TO LOAD SHAFT DEFLECTION DOES NOT EXCEED .002 MILS THROUGHOUT THE OPERATING RANGE, 91.7% NNE, 62.9% PF MOTOR NAMEPLATES ARE STAMPED'MEETS NEMA MG-1, PART 31', CUSTOMER MOTOR DATA SHEET INCLUDED EXCEPTIONS/CLARIFICATIONS/COMMENTS: REVISION#1, 1/17/2019:ADDED SHAFT DEFLECTION OF .002 MILS MAX, COMPLETED CUSTOMER MOTOR DATA SHEET CONFIRMATION THAT MOTOR NAMEPLATE IS MARKED NEMA MG-1 PART 31 COMPLIANT Certified by: 94.4ne4 Sect Date: 17-Jan-19 Revision#: 1 FM015/0198 EFFECTIVE: HORIZONTAL MOTORS PRINT: 20-NOV-12 TEFC 07-2933 SUPERSEDES: FRAME: 400T SHEET: 27-OCT-11 BASIC TYPE: CT 1 OF 1 -ftC4. P N T EAB � AC _4 -_L,-w I1. II 4 im• - i I Iam AF `p�74, ar!ft AI O ,,,. ES ml.�*1i.U,1;�m� 1 Y ��K J k G BS EV AA SIZE E CONDUIT - 2E 2F B Cl D- BA B '4te-- 4 HOLES ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND MILLIMETERS D 2E H J K N UNITS A B C -.06 E + 03 G +.05 J IN 19.75 16.75 37.63 10.00 8.00 16.00 1.38 .81 3.75 5.00 7.63 MM 502 425 956 254 203 406 35 21 95 127 194 UNITS 0 P2 T U V_ 01 MIN W AA AB AC AF BA V IN 20.47 20.75 3.22 2.875 7.00 .38 18.42 14.13 4.72 6.63 MM 520 527 82 73.03 178 10 3.00 468 359 120 168 UNITS BS MIN EV KEY V IN 6.88 5.66 1.50 .750 MM 175 144 38 19.05 FRAME UNITS 2F ±.03 - 404T IN 12.25 MM 311 - 405T IN 13.75 MM 349 w 0 0 w 0 O 0) 1:ALL ROUGH CASTING DIMENSIONS MAY VARY BY.25" 4:STANDARD ASSEMBLY POSITION F-1 IS SHOWN F-2 IS PROVIDED O. DUE TO CASTING AND/OR FABRICATION VARIATIONS. WHEN SPECIFIED.CONDUIT OPENINGS MAY BE LOCATED IN N 2:LARGEST MOTOR WIDTH. STEPS OF 90 DEGREES REGARDLESS OF LOCATION. cc 3:TOLERANCES SHOWN ARE IN INCHES ONLY. STANDARD AS SHOWN WITH CONDUIT OPENING DOWN. M 0 07-2933/C ISSUED BY M z INFORMATION DISCLOSED ON THIS DOCUMENT R. KING Nidec Motor Corporation IS CONSIDERED PROPRIETARY AND SHALL NOT BE APPROVED BY o REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT WRITTEN MOTORS J. O'BRIEN = St. Louis, Missouri CONSENT OF NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION EFFECTIVE: DIMENSION PRINT PRINT: 04-MAR-16 OUTLET BOXES 80-249 SUPERSEDES: STEEL CONSTRUCTION SHEET: 10-JAN-14 4.00" BOLT PATTERN 1 OF 1 xY - -xZ- ( -t--- 0 ® XX AF —XW - , AA SIZE CONDUIT O.B. PART NUMBERS O.B. OUTLET BOX DIMENSIONS VOLUME BASE P/N COVER P/N (CU.IN.) AA" AF XW* XX* XY XZ* X 644303 378705 563 3.00 4.72 3.50 9.69 9.38 7.88 2034999 378705 563 3.00 4.72 3.50 9.69 9.38 7.88 w a *DOES NOT INCLUDE GASKET MATERIAL THICKNESS. w **STANDARD CONDUIT SIZE SHOWN,CONFIRM ACTUAL VALUES 0 ON THE DIMENSION PRINT AND SUBMITTAL COVER LETTER. ***DRAIN HOLES ON BOTH SIDES. b N cK Q Q 0 ISSUED BY z z INFORMATION DISCLOSED ON THIS DOCUMENT APPROVED BY Nidec Motor Corporation IS CONSIDERED PROPRIETARY AND SHALL NOT BE MUTOR3 E. LIZANA G. MARTINEZ o = St. Louis, Missouri REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT OF NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATIONVal MOTORS C CUSTOMER: 18701930-100 ORDER NO.: PENTAIR FLOW TECH BEARING LIFE CALCULATION FOR HORIZONTAL MOTOR Bearing life can be calculated with various degrees of sophistication, depending on the accuracy with which the operating conditions can be defined. Basic rating life equation The most simple method of life calculation is to use the ISO or ABMA equation for basic rating life which is: 16667 (C Basic rating life equation: — L10 - N P / Where: Li, = Basic rating life in hours C= Basic dynamic load rating P= Equivalent dynamic bearing load(rotor wt. +magnetic force) p= Exponent of the life equation 3 for ball bearings N= Revolutions per minute SIZE: 6316 Bearing Life (hrs) = Exceeds 100,000 RADIAL LOAD: 430 AXIAL THRUST: 0 N= 600 C= 29200 P= 430 BY: M.RAMIREZ DATE: 07/17/18 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI TORS MOw -600 -50 -75 C EFFICIENCY p K R OMNIEll — — POWER FACTOR ��D W N T E .IIMMEIIIIIIM �__ -- T 4� 598 40 60 100 ■■■ ■ AMPS 1 E — — — — — INPUT POWER N P N F iii 'il!!' T - _-30 -45 EPEE! iM N i P - P I RE ■ _ ' M S D 116 / / / -594 -20 -30 -50 ill ■ - / milimmi DISCLAIMER / P ■ . _-. P r. Fr. ., \ NOTED OTHERWISE. 592 10 15 25 N r ' ' Hp El 460 Volts 60 Hz 40°C I MPI=228073 -590 -0 -0 -0 52.00 104.00 156.00 208.00 260.00 TORQUE IN LB-FT 07-18-2018 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION MOTORS w LATERAL CRITICAL SPEED ANALYSIS DATA ORDER NO: 18701930-100 FRAME SIZE 405T A B ROTOR CORE C ;---141-11111111111EI.-- D DRIVE = E END SHAFT BEARING BEARING ROTOR DATA (dimensions in inches) A— ROTOR CORE B — ROTOR CORE C — OPPOSITE D — DRIVE END LOCATION LENGTH DRIVE END BRG. BRG. LOCATION 10.813 10.000 6.000 10.810 E - ROTOR CORE SHAFT LENGTH ROTOR CORE ROTOR ASSEMBLY DIAMETER END TO END WEIGHT (Ibs) WEIGHT (Ibs) 12.432 36.550 276 418 ROTOR INERTIA ROTOR INERTIA SHAFT/ROTOR ASM POLAR (Ib-ft2) TRANSVERSE (Ib-ft2) BALANCE 43 21.5 ISO 1940 G 2.5 BEARING DATA DRIVE END BEARING OPPOSITE END BEARING NUMBER STIFFNESS (lb/in) NUMBER STIFFNESS (lb/in) 6316-J/C3 8.03 X 105 6316-J/C3 8.03 X 105 SHAFT DATA DRAWING NO. MATERIAL DENSITY YIELD 0635396 AISI 1040 —1045 HR .283 LBS/IN3 45,000 psi TENSILE YOUNG'S MODULUS SHEAR MODULUS 82,000 psi 30.0 x106 psi 12.0 x 106 psi NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI 8/15/2018 `MOTORS TORSIONAL ANALYSIS DATA ORDER NO: 18701930-100 FRAME SIZE 405T ROTOR CORE MEI ---MELMPII2= END SHAFT I< TORSIONAL STIFFNESS - SHAFT DATA DRAWING NO. MATERIAL DENSITY YIELD 0635396 AISI 1040 —1045 HR .283 LBS/IN3 45,000 psi TENSILE YOUNG'S MODULUS SHEAR MODULUS 82,000 psi 30 x106 psi 12 x 106 psi MOMENT OF INERTIA - ROTOR ASSEMBLY: WR2 = 43 LB-FT2 SHAFT TORSIONAL STIFFNESS: 6.2947 X 106 LB-IN/RADIAN Torsional stiffness is the spring rate or constant which allows a user to determine the amount of twist or angular deflection in a shaft based on the amount of torque applied. The portion of the shaft for which the shaft stiffness has been calculated from 1/3 the length of the rotor core to the end of the drive end of the shaft (shafts with an annular keyways are measured from inboard side of the ring groove). It is the users responsibility to correct for coupling mounting effects. SHAFT EXTENSION De - EFFECTIVE DIAMETER WITH KEYWAY 2.45 INCHES 1(11)— De NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI 8/15/2018 NAMEPLATE DATA CATALOG NUMBER: € H25V6C-P _ NAMEPLATE PART#: i 422699-007 f MODEL = -1 FR 405T TYPE 3 CTI ENCL TEFC END BRG 80BC03J3-QTY 1 END BRG 80BC03J3-QTY 1 PH MAX3 M * 40 C ] ID# (ref: Order#: 18701930,Type: SO, Line#: 100) ' __INSUL F ) sm' I! F1 DUTY I� CONT I--_._._. CLASS ___..� Pos. - - ___ __�.„ - HP 25 ------ --1 RPM -__.:=. - -- 592 �` -- 1 Hp ;,-_____=_ Ar_.-- _ .„=1 RPM a,=; .,r._= e,_*I VOLTS r 46- € -= - .1;,- -__=1 VOLTS ;,._.. __=1; ----_ __ ...,t r� -------_ 1 FL FL 41.0 � -Je 1� Fl �1 AMPS 1---- --- AMPS SF �..... SF 45.0 ir_------- ..:::::::::::: 1 ;�.._. ':: `: m_.1 _ _.. �w:1 AMPS AMPS SF 1.15 DESIGN i� B CODE F "` 1= M.. 1 SF ��------� 1 DESIGN _ 1 CODE I i_ _ _ NEMA NOM ..._---___ NOM NEMA NOM - NOM l r�: �l EFFICIENCY —91'7-- PF L62.9 1 KiloWatt 18.7 ] EFFICIENCY PF GUARANTEED GUARANTEED ,__...._._............... MAX .__--____- MAX EFFICIENCY KVAR �- ---__=a HZ 3�..:�::w= m 90 2 1 1 EFFICIENCY �---�---'-----_ KVAR ' .__._1 HZ 60 HAZARDOUS LOCATION DATA(IF APPLICABLE): DIVISION CLASS I 1 GROUP TEMP CODE i —.,- ___ .. 1 CLASS II i -===-._=====__1 GROUP II VFD DATA(IF APPLICABLE): VOLTS 460 �------- ----- - l AMPS 43.1 j 1:7= -- TORQUE �1 TORQUE 1 I 221.7LB-FT TORQUE 2 VFD LOAD TYPE 1 11 VT/PWM VFD LOAD TYPE 2 _._." 1 VFD HERTZ RANGE 1 6-60 E VFD HERTZ RANGE 2 VFD SPEED RANGE 1 60-600 VFD SPEED RANGE 2 SERVICE FACTOR 1.00 FL SLIP __ . NO.POLES - ___ 1 MAGNETIZING AMPS fr =_ VECTOR MAX RPM _ .__.. q Encoder PPR „- 1 Radians/Seconds -11 Encoder Volts €I _...._..._....-. _ TEAO DATA(IF APPLICABLE): HP(AIR OVER __w.__-- .._._._.._.__ RPM(AIR _, RPM(AIR OVER V^=v= HP(AIR OVER) Imo_.___w ,i M/S) .._.._... OVER) �.:wn ! M/S) FPM AIR FPM AIR FPM AIR VELOCITY 1 VELOCITY M/S 1 VELOCITY SEC `; wI—��:.... ____...._.1 ADDITIONAL NAMEPLATE DATA: Decal/Plate WD=499495 Customer PN 1 FMB0605222A01 Notes L Non Rev Ratchet Max Temp Rise 1 80C RISE/RES@1.00SF 1 OPP/Upper Oil Cap i GREASE Thermal(WDG) 1 OVER TEMP PROT 2 I SHAFT/Lower Oil Cap 1 GREASE Altitude Regulatory Notes I i_ Regulatory Compliance ! 1 COS Marine Duty Balance 1 0.04 IN/SEC Arctic Duty 3/4 Load Eff. j 91.9 Inrush Limit 1 Motor Weight(LBS) I 1180 I Direction of Rotation Sound Level i Special Note 1 I 1 Vertical Thrust(LBS) 1 i Special Note 2 1 I Thrust Percentage 1 Special Note 3 Bearing Life i I Special Note 4 —I- L Starting Method I I Special Note 5 Number of Starts Special Note 6 200/208V 60Hz Max Amps I SH Max.Temp. 190V 50 hz Max Amps i SH Voltage SH VOLTS=115V 380V 50 Hz Max Amps 1 SH Watts 1 SH WATTS=192W NEMA Inertia I , Load Inertia Sumpheater Voltage 1 Sumpheater Wattage 1 1 Special Accessory Note 1 I Special Accessory Note 16 Special Accessory Note 2 I Special Accessory Note 17 1 Special Accessory Note 3 1 1 Special Accessory Note 18 1 1 Special Accessory Note 4 I GREASE LUBRICATED i Special Accessory Note 19 Special Accessory Note 5 I RECOMMENDED GREASE 1 Special Accessory Note 20 11 Special Accessory Note 6 I EXXON POLYREX-EM i Special Accessory Note 21 I 1 i --- Special Accessory Note 7 I i Special Accessory Note 22 Special Accessory Note 8 i Special Accessory Note 23 _ J Special Accessory Note 9 1 1 Special Accessory Note 24 1 I Special Accessory Note 10 1 I Special Accessory Note 25 1 i Special Accessory Note 11 1 I Special Accessory Note 26 1 1 1 - _ Special Accessory Note 12 j 1 Special Accessory Note 27 Special Accessory Note 13 j I Special Accessory Note 28 Special Accessory Note 14 I 1 Special Accessory Note 29 1 Special Accessory Note 15 Special Accessory Note 30 1 1 Heater in C/B Voltage I Heater in C/B Watts 1 1 .„_ L Zone 2 Group ., ., _ pivis_iph_2_Service Factor Note 1 ,• I Note 2 Note iL 3 1 . 1 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION f'-----' . . . ';• oTog;i ST. LOUIS, MO TYPICAL NAMEPLATE DATA ACTUAL MOTOR NAMEPLATE LAYOUT MAY VARY SOME FIELDS MAY BE OMITTED Nidec trademarks followed by the®symbol are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. Silicone Rubber Heaters Improve Heat Transfer, Speed Warm Ups and Decrease Wattage Requirements. Rugged, yet thin, lightweight and flexible—the use of Watlow®silicone rubber heaters is limited only by the �` imagination. With these heaters, heat can be placed where 0.055 in.(1.4 mm) it is needed. In the application process these heaters Thick Heater with improve heat transfer,speed warm ups and decrease Wire-Wound Element wattage requirements. Teflon®or Silicone 111411 Leads Available Fiberglass-reinforced silicone rubber gives the heater dimensional stability without sacrificing flexibility. Because ° ° very little material separates the element from the part, heat � ��\�. o 0 transfer is rapid and efficient.The heaters are constructed \`� with a wire-wound element or an etched foil element. The heater construction creates a very thin heater allowing 0.022 in.(0.6 mm)Thick Heater it to fit applications where space is limited. with Etched Foil Element Performance Capabilities Element Vulcanized Between Two Layers of • Operating temperatures up to 500°F(260°C) Silicone Rubber/Fiberglass • Watt densities up to 80 W/in2(12.5 W/cm2), dependent upon application temperature Typical Applications • Wire-wound element thickness — 0.055 in. (1.4 mm) • Freeze protection and condensation prevention for many • Etched foil element — 0.022 in. (0.56 mm) types of instrumentation and equipment • UR®, cUR®,VDE and CE recognitions are available on • Medical equipment such as blood analyzers and test many designs up to 428°F(220°C) tube heaters • Computer peripherals such as laser printers Features and Benefits • Curing of plastic laminates Designed to the exact shape and size needed • • Conforms to your component and/or equipment Photo processing equipment More than 80 designs available immediately from stock • Semiconductor processing equipment • Reduces downtime Mounting Methods Constructed with wire-wound or etched foil elements • Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Surface(PSAS) • Delivers a thin, lightweight heater • Silicone contact cement kit • Provides the desired flexibility for many dynamic • Field applied adhesive applications • Delivers low mass and easily repeatable distributed • Mechanical fasteners watt densities • Factory bonding Moisture-and chemical-resistant silicone rubber material • Provides longer heater life Vulcanizing adhesives or fasteners • Allows heaters to be easily bonded to the part WATLOW° Better Thermal Solutions...Foster COL-SRH-0311 ©2001,2011 Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company,all rights reserved. Termination Styles Extended Capability Termination Style Watlow offers many types of leads and terminations. HPN Cord and Plug Set Leads can project from any position along the perimeter of the unit.They will be centered on the short side width of rectangular heaters unless otherwise specified. Teflon®UL®1180 CSA _ i �'',,,,. Leads Shown Exiting End of Molded Leads are Shown Exiting Edge of Heater. Heater,Centered on Short Side Capped Leads are also Available Watlow's leads are 12 in. (305 mm) long, white,Teflon® insulated, flexible, plated copper UL® 1180 CSA wire.They For removable heaters, a 6 ft(1.8 m) HPN cord and plug set are rated for 392°F(200°C)/300V.The lead connections provides convenience. It is rated for 194°F(90°C)/300V. HPN on or at the heater are insulated with a cap of sheath cord without a plug is also available in any length. material,vulcanized to the heater body. — Teflon®Leads Extended Capability Options Formed Heaters ill Leads Shown Exiting Middle of Heater Teflon Type E(MIL W-1 and Teflon' UL® 1199 rated for 6878) 392°F(200°C)/600V are also available. 11 Silicone Insulated Leads �_ \� Many three-dimensional shapes, such as cylinders, cones and boxes, can be factory formed. Semi-rigid shapes can be self-gripping to the part. Special tooling may be required for some designs. Leads Shown Exiting Corner of Heater Holes,Cutouts and Notches For a better moisture seal, specify UL®silicone insulated lead wires.This lead type is rated for 302°F (150°C)/600V.Any litr-: lead length is available. Note: Silicone rubber heaters are not e designed to be waterproof. Excess exposure to moisture may facilitate premature heater failure. O Option a/ Thermal Insulation To increase the heating efficiency of Watlow can provide flexible heaters with special holes, your application, silicone rubber cutouts and notches in nearly any position required for 0 heaters can be thermally insulated your design.The resistance element can be brought to with silicone sponge rubber, bonded to within ''A in. (3.2 mn)of all edges. Standard spacing is one side in the following thicknesses: / in. (6 mm)from all edges. tie, '/, '/, 3A or'f in. (1.6, 3.2, 6, 9.5 or 13 mm) 4 a �� An aluminized surface can be added to the back of the heater to reduce -- ____J radiated heat losses.This aluminized surface, called "low loss treatment," Watlow`°is a registered trademark of Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company. adds very little to the unit thickness Teflon'is a registered trademark of E.I.duPont de Nemours&Company. and maintains a very clean appearance. UR°and cUR8 are registered trademarks of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. To be automatically connected to the nearest North American Technical Sales Office: 1 -800-WATLOW2 • www.watlow.com • inquiry@watlow.com International Technical Sales Offices:Australia,+61 3 9335 6449•China,+86 21 3381 0188•France,+33 1 41 32 79 70 Germany,+49(0)72 53/94 00-0• Italy,+39 024588841 •Japan, +81 3 3518 6630•Korea, +82 2 2628 5770 Malaysia,+60 3 8076 8745•Mexico,+52 442 217 6235•Singapore,+65 6773 9488•Spain,+34 91 675 12 92 Taiwan,+886 7 288 5168•United Kingdom,+44(0)115 964 0777 ' 970798 SPACE H EAT E R CONNECTION DIAGRAM SPACE HEATER LEADS MAY BE LOCATED IN EITHER THE MAIN OUTLET BOX OR IF SO EQUIPPED, AN AUXILIARY BOX MOTOR STARTER AtX.CONTACT (N.C.) she I 4 r ! 1 MOTOR ENCLTURE I 1 PHASE I t � I i eft mNe um - THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUPPLIED WITH ANTI- CONDENSATION HEATERS. HEATERS SHOULD BE ENERGIZED WHEN EQUIPMENT IS NOT OPERATING TO PROTECT UNIT BY PREVENTING INTERNAL CONDENSATION. CONNECT THE"H"OR HEATER LEADS TO 1 1 5V VOLTS 192W WATTS RATING SPACE HEATER NAMEPLATE (ON MOTOR) Revision: 7/30/2008 Mike Cullen Thermal Protector for Motor/Fluorescent ballasts and Temperature Sensing Controls The Klixon®9700 protector is a field proven miniature protector developed to protect shaded pole and permanent split capacitor motors, fluorescent ballasts, solenoids, transformers and other electrical equipment against overheating. KEY BENEFITS In addition to being small and lightweight, the unit is both temperature and cur- rent sensitive. Since the 9700 is sealed to withstand varnish dipping, it can be mounted directly in windings where it can best sense the true temperature of the electrical equipment.As a result, over-temperature protection is assured. Miniature size-compact design assures ease of installation Since the case is not electrically insulated, the protector is furnished with a Precision Calibration-temperature cali- durable Mylar insulating sleeve. Shrinkable and non-shrinkable sleeves are brated and inspected in controlled available. ambients for dependable consistent performace Technical Characteristics Snapaction-positive make and break assured with proven Klixon®strip Purpose of control: thermal motor protector(TMP) disc...contact pressure at open temper- thermal ballast protector (TBP) ature eliminates nuisance trips due to vibration thermal cut-out (TCO) Contact capacity: 250VAC 13A for TCO Sealed steel case-withstands impreg- 250VAC 2A for TBP nation and baking...maybe varnish Temperature range: 60°C to 150°C for TCO and TMP dipped...prevents changes in calibra- tion during installation 60°C to 135°C for TBP Tolerance on Open temp: +/- 5K or+/-8K Automatic action: Type 3C for TMP Type 2C for TBP and TCO Operating time: Continuous Pollution situation: Normal Extent of sensing element: Whole control PTI of the insulation: 175 Enclosure protection degree: IPOO t aP ..-7 24 5 66 5 10-► -a• J 0 i 14 !E 24 ._._0112.5 --- Ultimate trip current vs ambient r 9700 X X YY -ZZZZ temperature Z:Wire Lead and sleeve Serial number is assigned for each lead and sleeve configuration, i.e.wire type,length,AWG#,stripped °,;l',..,,,•,,,« ' length,sleeve type,and length. Y:Operating temperature and actuation disc material 3 Serial number is assigned for each desired temperature and resistance rating. ? ; Nominal Resistance of actuation disc 1 operating _ ohms/cmf) � eratin P { temperature 30 1 250 F. 850 1 100 T 475 Tem erature code __ I .a 60 r 56 i 57 _ 58 59 W f 60 i 80 91 27 28 29 30 1 1 . 90 21 22 23 24 25 , 4 110 36-- 37_ — 38 39 _ .1 40 120 1 2 3 4 r 5 i r I 130 , 11 12 13 14 i 15 F 140 66 67 68 69 70 , 150 46 47 48 I s 49 50 1 = This is a typical temperature code. There is a temperature code at each 5 t in a step from 60 to 150"C. i, f —.. X:Open Temperature tolerance Example: i 1411111014 &AMMO ILIsoimusir31 r ;o +f_ K 1 9700K01-215 2:+/-8K € S Bimetal of 30ohms/cmf, !, 120°C operating temperature, i i X.Contact material combination +i-5K tolerance with -- Aw era<> Code Stational contact Movable contact S r first cpcle tripping ttmt' r - - AWG#18(uL3343 125'C-600V) ' L Steel+Fine silver Steel+copper+ vs current 25 .(, antbtent Silver Cadmium oxide 66.7mm length leads, Ape.r,,,.,i„6 d.„l� 1 - „,u,, ,�,t.t,-,,•, K Ag-Ni+Silver Steel+copper+ Cadmium oxide Silver Cadmium oxide thick 0.15mm,dia.6.9mm, • ii1'•`r�^'��<<��' H Brass+Fine silver ! Steel+copper+ length 34mm,Mylar sleeve Silver Cadmium oxide P Ag-Ni+Fine silver Steel+Fine silver S Brass+Fine silver Steel+Copper+ Ag-Ni Type"S"is set up for Cadmium-free contact 9700:Device Identification .„, r Certifications Agency File number Standard Note UL E 15962 UL2111 Motor protector ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-9 Thermal cut-out ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-2 Thermal motor protector ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-3 Thermal ballast protector CQC CQCO200 2001344 1I,,;e�„�.•,.,,,!, egminat i i,,was It l urn**WOW 13i'-,i,-1 i1 as,, TECHNICAL 1 SALES SUPPORT • •• • • • • • • • •• Holland Internet; wwwr,sensata.,Corrr• • • • Phone +31 546 879560 Fax +31 S b s 879204 Italy Ertt<I I; Info-cpe(cc?f st.sensatd4,rsoiti AI Phone +39 039 6568310 Fax +39 039 6568316 TechnologiesImportant Notice:The products and services of Sensata Technologies and its subsidiaries described herein are sold subject to Sensata's standard terms and conditions of sale.Customers are advised to obtain the most current and complete information about Sensata products and services before placing orders.Sensata assumes no liability for applications assistance, customer's applications or product designs,software performance,or infringement of patents.The publication of information renardinn any other cmmnanv's nrnducts or services does not constitute Sensata's annroval warranty or endorsement thereof. THERMOSTATS 1. MOTOR IS EQUIPPED WITH QTY-3(1 PER PHASE)NORMALLY CLOSED THERMOSTATS. THERMOSTATS ARE SET TO OPEN AT HIGH TEMPERATURE. 2. CONTACT RATINGS FOR THERMOSTATS: 120-600 VAC, 720 VA N. C.THERMOSTATS P1 P2 NOTE:THERMOSTATS LEADS MAY BE LOCATED IN EITHER THE MAIN OUTLET BOX OR IF SO EQUIPPED,AN AUXILIARY BOX. ACCESSORY LISTING QTY-3 N.C.THERMOSTATS REVISION DESCRIPTION FOR: MISC SCALE NONE UNITS IN TITLE CUSTOMER NIDEC MOTOR STL0211 -UPDATED FORMAT. TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS CORPORATION (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) CONNECTION DIAGRAM INCHES mm ISSUED BY APPROVED BY REVISION DATE MATERIAL R. KING C. CADE 24-FEB-11 CODE DWG NO. REV SHEET DWG NIDEC CONFIDENTIAL MUST BE COMPLIANT TO RoHS DIRECTIVE EU 2002/95/IEC ANGLES x�—±,o 0834066 NUMBER SIZE G 1 OF 1 A NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 24-Feb-11 AND REGULATION EC 1907/2006(REACH)AS AMENDED SOLIDEDGE NMCA(JAN-20111 ---.3745+.0010 WIDE X/1.250 WOODRUFF KEYSEAT 1-1.020 A-B D // 0021 A-B 1 DII .0151A 131 (36.55) 6.00 19.738t.008 10.81 7 N 3.69 15.44 H- 3.56 (7.25) H 1.88 -- 4.70 _. __.- I--1.75 N .. -yl 7 000 5 - 1.44 3.16 1 ^ 3.16 1.44 1.63 - 1.25 R.055±.023 RC.055 t.023 R.055±.023 I REV C -RC.253.13 F i Cj .360 63 1 750+.002 +015 000 1 63/1 R -.000 1 �. �� i 4 1 i 020IC- 1- --u ' 003 C ' /2.375+.000 11111111 1111 - ff .031 X 45° y ^� + 1 -- 31 X 45° .031 X 45° 002 3.878.002 2.450 015 0 +000 6.13 �, 0 2.938 +.000 +.000 3.137 010 0 1 /2.875-.001 , 3.866+.000 J 010 _ '001�A B 1 SEE DETAIL A 015 A B C-j B , 2.986 6 3.781 0030 2 0.0 0 .935 B /.006 A I V3.1602+00.0000_ /3.137 0100 r055 -/3.1508+.0000 + -.0008 /3.656-.003.000 B /3.866 6 0°- 015E B (/2.986) 1_ QIZI R.010 MAX 125+.000016 (1 637) ENGINEERING REFERENCE A DE BEARING HAS M6 FIT FOR A DETAIL A ' ROLLER BEARING CONVERSION SCALE 2:1 PROCESS PER GROUP 91500 GE T' 1 xE0635396-SHA I`NS ---- IP�635396-000 IER.ME 405T E CT,TCE,CE NOTES:(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) REVISION DESCRIPTION FOR MISC SCALE Rs TITLE M0T0212-UPDATE KEYWAY 1 2 IN NIDEC MOTOR TOLERANCE PER NEMA STANDARD TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS AS SHAFT,ROTOR E05OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)EDI CORPORATION 1. NO AXIAL RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN KEYWAY AND KEYSEAT NA.ER,AE- INCHES { mm SSxEDB. RE�IBIDxDATE P RGRE°BY 2. ALL DIAMETERS TO BE I: 002 HR STEEL AISI 1045 XX=t 03 X O.GALLEGOS R.TIMMERMAN 09 FEB-12 �x CODE NWSUD. REV BURET DWG '' Y X%%-}.015 XX xuxBBR DWG A-B NIDEC CONFIDENTIAL ANNREAULLR NEU 9 R2025 RECT ZASLOW AND _--__ 0635396 F.1 of 1 C -- -_ NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 02-APR-0B Ax0 REGuuTrox BC iwn B Au[xDEO ANGLES X-+1° lWil7 1 CENTER OF GRAVITY CUSTOMER: Pentair Flow Technologies LLC ORDER NO: 18701930-100 APPA •r 11111111,11111 VA ' I A I — O FRAME /TYPE A B C 405T-CTI 6.94 9.44 0.84 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI ''' /r� 1C°/ \ Protecting VFD-Driven Motors: illb." i AI Mom + III ✓ Bearing Protection BEARING PROTECTION RINGS Best Practices VFD-Driven Motors Can Fail From Destructive Bearing Currents-Costing Downtime and Lost Production �, Motors operated by variable frequency drives (VFD) are vulnerable to premature bearing failure from VFD induced shaft voltages and bearing #'" currents — sometimes within only weeks or months—and the result is '" �' costly down time and production interruptions. .. �4 VFDs induce destructive shaft voltages and high frequency currents „ . ' ' '' which will cause electrical discharge machining (EDM) pitting, fusion . y craters,and fluting damage to the motor's bearings and deteriorate the ,,-.- bearing " '' lubrication by allowing electrical arcing to burn the grease. EDM Pitting and Fluting Cost Avoidance-Follow Best Practices to Ensure .., � Uptime and Reliability .„-- � j Motor repair best practices will provide bearing protection from these 5 destructive bearing currents by adding AEGIS® Shaft Grounding Ring' Technology and when needed insulating a bearing to prevent high v = ` frequency circulating currents. ' �� •Motors up to 100 HP-Add AEGIS®Shaft Grounding Ring to discharge shaft voltages to ground. _ •Motors over 100 HP-Add AEGIS®Rings by one bearing and insulate AEGIS°Shaft Voltage Testing the opposite bearing. Detailed recommendations are contained in the +g`- AEGIS®Shaft Grounding Ring Motor Repair ) ti Handbook-an essential reference available upon l request at www.est-aegis.com/bearing :'1--.:el,, -_,,,,;.'4, ;:iit.:.--‘:-:-*'.:::=;-,.. .-''''''-' " ; 4 Motor Bearings are the Most Vulnerable Parts- .• `� } Cost of a Failed Motor Adds Up Quickly F "''M 4. • ,t' %46% � f o.s% Solution:AEGIS°Bearing Protection Rings r,, •Downtime cost a l t ■Motor Repair Cost ii' 93% 'Rigging in and Transportation , r 111 ■Overhead '`1 The return on investment in repairing motors and following the , .. ' %®w AEGIS® Shaft Grounding Ring Motor Repair Handbook's best practices recommendations will pay dividends day after day and ensure the most '' reliable repair to the motor. AEGIS°uKIT /i Ili M N a , • Mounting �' �_ _ ( ' /:a IC® (2) � . r,-- .„„i„..„ Opti o n s BEARING PROTECTION RINGS Patented Technology - uKIT - SGR with Universal Mounting Brackets Motors up to and including 100 HP(75 kW) ___---/r Sized for NEMA and IEC Frame motors Low Voltage ,•,.' \_ . • Solid and Split Ring w , CS015 Install with screws or conductive epoxy AEGIS•SGR , ip •- 4j 4 different bracket sizes St®" 6x5,{� , asi C/ aConductive Epoxy Mounting(-OAW,-OA4W) 'a Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02" b.° • - .. Solid and Split Ring �.. Iiikar 'a Conductive Epoxy Included •Install one AEGIS°SGR Bearing Protection Ring on either the drive end or the non-drive end of the motor. Standard Mounting Brackets(-1) •AEGIS®SGR may be installed either internally or externally. Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02" •Use AEGIS®Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating(PN#CS015)on `I w Mounting clips,6-32 x 1/4"cap screws and motor shaft where fibers touch. washers Product recommendation:AEGIS®SGR • /'EGib' SSR\ • -Y -A Motors Greater than 100 HP(75 kW) l 4 /1� ifsleeve ,air V gin' C5015 ",+sabab e•+ AEGIS Ring .*5Ls �'✓ �' `� Insulated Bearing Bolt Through Mounting(-3FH) 1 : Shaft amets: " 6.02" •O Shaft Curtenta . • 6-32 x 1/2"flat head screws ,, • �. • 2 Sha mountingdi holeser0.311 up to shaftto size 3.395" 4 mounting holes for larger sizes I .r.•, 1' 1 Install AEGIS'Ring on opposite end of insulation N Press Fit Mounting •Non-Drive end: Bearing housing must be isolated with ., insulated sleeve or coating or use insulated ceramic or . ,.. Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02 hybrid bearing to disrupt circulating currents. OA Clean dry 0.004"press fit •Drive end: Install one AEGIS®Bearing Protection Ring. Press into motor end bracket or bearing cap •AEGIS®Ring can be installed internally on the back of the bearing cap or externally on the motor end bracket. Use AEGIS®Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating(PN#CS015)on Large SGR,iPRO,WTG motor shaft where fibers touch. Large Rings over 6.02" Product recommendation: • • •Medium Voltage Motors: C iPRO for Medium Voltage Motors •Low Voltage Motors up g -. WTG for Wind Turbine Generators to 500HP:AEGIS®SGR AEGIS®iPRO 4' •Low Voltage Motors over 500HP:AEGIS®iPRO _ Accessories 4 ' SVP-AEGIS®Shaft Voltage Probe /CMIIIIIIII ' /P' * CS015-AEGIS®Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating For more recommendations,download the { ' EP2400-AEGIS®Conductive Epoxy AEGIS°Handbook from our website. ...------- www.est-aegis.com/bearing :,______Jim, ©2015 Form 105-7 Electro Static Technology I 1 -866-738- 1857 I www.est-aegis.com MOTORS Standard Paint Specification For EM Gray NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION Industrial Motors & Systems Division Monterrey, Mexico hir4 MOTORS \IX 1. Air dry topcoat enamels for use on cast iron (primed), steel (primed), aluminum, and plastic (primed or unprimed) surfaces. 2. Spray application, total dry film thickness of the topcoat shall be a minimum of 2.0 Mils and a Max. of 4.0 Mils. 3. Reduction: All materials shall be supplied suitable for application at the specific facility in conjunction with the application equipment employed, without reduction. 4. Basic Physical Requirements: A. Salt Spray(fog) testing A.S.T.M. B-117-90 Minimum 250 hours D. Adhesion by tape test A.S.T.M. D3359-90. Coating removal shall pass classification 4 or 5 E. Film hardness by pencil test A.S.T.M. D3363-74 shall pass B to HB. F. Elongation of attached organic coating with cylindrical mandrel. A.S.T.M. D522-88. Pass 1/4 inch-no cracking or flaking G. Resistance of organic coatings to the effects of rapid deformation (impact). Direct Impact: Pass 28 inch pounds, A.S.T.M. D2794-90 Reverse Impact: Pass 28 inch pounds K. Chemical Resistance: A.S.T.M. D1308-87 Spot Test, Open per paragraph 7.3 - 1 Hour Duration: Sulfuric Acid 10% Nitric Acid 10% Hydrochloric Acid 10% Acetic Acid 10% Sodium Hydroxide 10% Sodium Chloride 10% All (3)USEM standard Gear Oils 100% M. The topcoat enamels will dry to package in cardboard boxes without chafing at the following schedules: 1. Force Dry: 1-2 minute flash, 3-5 minute @ 150-200°F and 3-5 minute cool down. 2. Air Dry: A minimum of 5 minutes at a relative humidity of 50% @ 70-80°F. N. Label Test: Apply a USEM performance specification label (nameplate) to a test panel cured for seven days and immerse in distilled water for 48 hours. Upon removal allow a 5 minute recovery period and remove label. No paint shall be removed with the label. O. Shelf Stability: The unreduced enamel after three months storage in a closed, filled container at room temperature (20°C) shall show no permanent separation and readily mix to homogeneous state. The unreduced viscosity shall not have risen more than 30 Saybolt seconds. rMA MOTORS 5. Vendor Formulation Approval: A. To approve a vendor's formulation, the listed tests shall be certified by the vendor in writing (to the plant and copied to engineering for approval) that the paint has met the above requirements, listing results in appropriate terms (Pass/Fail, Hrs., days, etc.). Engineering may at its discretion perform these tests using in-house capabilities or an outside lab. B. After Engineering and plant approval, the vendor's formulation will be added to this specification as an approved vendor formulation for that duty. C. Changes in formulation other than color will require recertification and approval. D. USEM part numbers will define the of duty, color and specification. The vendor will supply only USEM approved formulation meeting these requirements, matched to the color required per this specification. E. The USEM plants to meet EPA standards want to adhere to a limit of 3.0 lbs/gal. VOCs. Any deviation above this must be acceptable to the plant before order entry. 6. Approved Vendors: Vendor Formulation Other OSEL EM Gray Osel Oro Modified alkyd Color: According to Sample Enamel Code: 4588 provided by Nidec NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 8050 W. Florissant Avenue 1St Louis, MO 63136 www.nidec-motor.com I www.usmotors.com ElOwlyTO...z! LY\ 499495 Motor Wiring Diagram T1 T3 WYE T2 Connection LEAD CONNECTION I I I Line Each lead may consist of one or more cables having the same lead number. 499495 To reverse direction of rotation interchange connections L1 and L2. Each lead may be comprised of one or more cables. Each cable will be marked with the appropriate lead number. EFFECTIVE:2/27/96 SUPERCEDES:X736618,96441,179879,284138 Connection Plate: 499495 Connection Decal: 912113 ►► PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS- June 12, 2019 McClure and Sons, Inc. 15714 County Club Drive Mill Creek, WA 98012 Attn: Jon Varriano Subject: Purchase Order Number: 3305-112 Sales Order Number: 51830625 Project: CWS Durham WWTP 0605225 Jon: The revised submittal data for the above order is attached. This revised submittal is for your review and approval prior to release for manufacturing. We require submittal return with your review comments and/or approval to release within 35 days for production scheduling purposes. At time of release, please advise firm "on-site" requirement dates for this equipment. Very Truly Yours, Specifications Department Pentair Flow Technologies Return Submittal to: Harley Alt Project Manager cc: Enclosures: (1) pdf submittal 3601 Fairbanks Ave. • P.O. Box 6999 • Kansas City,Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • Fax: 913-748-4025 Pentair Flow Technologies General Clarifications 1. The supply and installation of the following items are by others unless otherwise identified in this submittal. • Anchor bolts, nuts and washers • Gauges, valves and miscellaneous fittings and adapters. • Connecting piping and/or supports • Maintenance lubrication piping and related equipment. • System control apparatus • Maintenance tools and/or storage boxes. • Equipment tags • Installation or field performance testing. 2. The following information is required by Pentair Flow Technologies prior to or at release of the pumps to production. • Verification of rotation and discharge position. Fairbanks Nijhuis Submittal Data For WS Durham WWTP Tigard, OR Supplier: McClure and Sons, Inc. 15714 County Club Drive Mill Creek, WA 98012 Manufacturer: Pump: Fairbanks Nijhuis 3601 Fairbanks Ave. Kansas City, Kansas 66106-0906 (913) 371-5000 Fax: (913) 748-4025 Project Number: 0605225 Sales Order Number: 51830625 Service: Drainage Tag: 470P8102 Quantity: 1 Pump Size& Model: 4" B5422CLVK Coupling: Rexnord Corp. 1217 Corporate Dr. Arlington, TX. 76006 (817)640-3332 Motor: U S Electrical Motors P. O. Box 3946 St. Louis, MO 63136 (314) 553-2000 0605225SR3.doc, Fairbanks Nijhuis Table of Contents Pump: Response to Comments Dated January 21, 2019 1 Page Response to Comments Dated December 05, 2018 1 Page Response to Comments Dated November 14, 2018 1 Page Response to Comments Dated September 6, 2018 3 Pages Included Features IF-5420 Technical Clarifications C&E-5000 Test Procedure 3 Pages Test Set Up Drawing 0605225TS Performance Curve 0605225CR1 Setting Plan 0605225SP Material Specifications ML-5420 Assembly Drawings 0605225APR1 Full Data Nameplate 0605225NPR1 Pump Technical Data TD-5420 Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 4 Pages Rotor Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 5 Pages Seismic Analysis of Anchor Bolts 10 Pages Shaft Deflection Calculations (Rev1) 1 Page Typical Lubricants GR-1000 Bearing Life Calculations 1 Page Chesterton S10 Mechanical Seal 6 Pages Spiral Trac Bushing 2 Pages Inpro Seal 4 Pages Paint Specifications PC-1000 Coupling Rexnord Omega 2 Pages Driver Performance Data FM013 Certification &Accessory Data FM015 Dimensions 1008-1-27 Outlet Boxes 80-202-04 Bearing Life Calculations 1 Page Curves 1 Page Lateral Critical Speed Analysis 1 Page Torsional Critical Data 1 Page Nameplate 2 Pages Lubrication 2 Pages Silicone Rubber Space Heaters 2 Pages Connection Diagram 970798 Klixon Miniature Protector 2 Pages Connection Diagram 834066 AEGIS Bearing Protection Ring 2 Pages Paint Specifications 3 Pages Wiring Diagram 499495 0605225SR3.doc 0605225 Response to Submittal Comments Dated January 21, 2019 1. Comment: Contractor shall submit completed motor data sheets that conform to the data sheet in the appendix of section 16222. Blank data sheets are not acceptable. Response: This is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor to respond. 2. Comment: Change impeller fasteners to stainless steel in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide stainless steel impeller fasteners. Please see the revised material page. 3. Comment: Change seal to Chesterton S10 mechanical seal with Spiraltrac bushing in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide the Chesterton S10 mechanical seal with a Spiral Trac bushing. Please see the revised submittal. 4. Comment: Change to grease-lubricated Inpro seals for pump frame in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide Inpro seals. Please see the revised submittal 5. Comment: Change couplings to Rexnord Omega couplings in accordance with WCD 007. Response: FN will provide the Rexnord Omega couplings. Please see the revised submittal. 0605225 Response to Submittal Comments Dated December 05, 2018 1. Comment: Submit Aegis bearing protection rings for the following motors: 465P1903, 465P1904 & 470P8102 for consistency on the manufacture for all bearing protection rings. Response: Aegis bearing protection ring data has been added to the motor submittal. Please see the revised motor submittal. 2. Comment: Contractor shall submit motor data sheets that conform to the data sheet in the appendix of section 16222. Response: Motor Data Sheet has been added to the revised motor submittal. 3. Comment: Motor nameplates shall indicate compliance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31 for inverter duty motors per section 16222.2.02.9.a.1. Response: Motor nameplate will be marked NEMA MG-1, Part 31 compliant. This has been noted on the accessory data page of the revised motor submittal. 4. Comment: 470P8101 -Confirm shaft deflection does not exceed 2 mils at any point in the operating range. Revise H to 90 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 126) Response: Confirmation on shaft deflection not exceeding 2 mils throughout the operating range. H cannot be revised to 90 ft at the rated flow due to insignificant impeller diameter. 90 ft is shown within the AOR but at a different flow rate. 5. Comment: 470P8102 - Confirm shaft deflection does not exceed 2 mils at any point in the operating range. Revise H to 38 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 296) Response: Confirmation on shaft deflection not exceeding 2 mils throughout the operating range. H cannot be revised to 38 ft at the rated flow due to insignificant impeller diameter. 38 ft is shown within the AOR but at a different flow rate. 0605225 Response to Submittal Comments Dated November 14, 2018 1. Comment: Motor nameplate data, Page 61 -Verify in writing if motor is Inverter Duty and labeled per 16222 2.02 C 2. -A&R Response: This was included in the original submittal and was overlooked. Project Engineer was reviewed the information with Granich. 2. Comment: Motor nameplate data, Page 61, 125, 254- Motor power factor shall be 80% or better at full rated load. -A&R Response: A power factor of 80, on this size/speed of motor is not available from any motor brand. GE's version has a lower power factor than US Motors. Project Engineer has reviewed the information with Granich and has accepted the motor as-is. 3. Comment: All motors on VFD shall have shaft-grounding rings, and shall be inverter duty. -A&R Response: The project Engineer has reviewed the information with and has accepted the motor as- is. 4. Comment: 465P1901, 1902- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. No clarifications or questions were responded to during the bid phase that modified these requirements. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. This requirement has been waived. 5. Comment: 465P1901, 1902, 1903, 1904- It is not acceptable to overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. Project Engineer is in agreement that the motor should never see an overload condition. This issue has been resolved. 6. Comment: 465P8101 - Using the service factor of the motor is not acceptable for reaching the low point in the head range at full speed. -A&R Response: Information has been reviewed by project Engineer with Granich. This issue has been resolved 7. Comment: 465P1901, 1902 - Does not meet the specified operating head range of 11 to 17ft at full speed. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. -A&R Response: FN has revised the curves. Please see revised curve in the revised submittal. �►► PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS' 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City, KS 66106 PH: 913-371-5000 September 20, 2018 McClure & Sons, Inc. Attn: Jason Jarmin Ref: CWS Durham Phase 5 Expansion - End Suction Pumps Submittal Review Dated 9/6/18 FN Project Number(s): 0605222-25 Mr. Jarmin: Please see our responses to the comments we received via email on 9/6/18. 1. Motors shall be seismic rated as specified in 16222-1.07-A. FN Response: The motors provided are not seismic; there aren't any seismic rated motors commercially available to provide for the motor/pump assembly. 2. Nameplate shall be stainless steel per NEMA standard motor data. FN Response: Stainless steel nameplates will be provided. 3. Confirm that the vibration of the pumping units will meet the requirements specified under Section 1 1 1 1 5-1-5.01. FN Response: Confirmed, the vibration will meet the Hydraulic Institute standard. 4. Is Fairbanks/Pentair including a witness test in the scope? FN Response: A witness performance test is included with our scope. 5. 465P1901, 1902- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The shutoff head will be as plotted. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 6. 465P1902, 1902- Does not meet the specified operating head range of 11 to 17 ft at full speed. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605222CR1). A reduced speed has been plotted to show performance at the low head range. At full speed, the low head condition point is outside of the AOR and/or would overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. 7. 465P1902, 1902-Minimum efficiency is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The efficiency is as guaranteed on the submittal curve. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 8. 465P8101 - Pump at full speed does not appear to hit 56 ft TDH. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605224CR1). The service factor of the motor will be used to reach the low point in the head range at full speed. 9. 465P8101 - Maximum shaft deflection exceeds specified 2 mils by a significant margin. Not acceptable. FN Response: Please see the attached revised deflection calculations (0605224SDR1). A value of deflection at the seal box has been added and meets the specification. 10. 465P8101 - Revise H to 90 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 83) FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605224CR1). 90 feet is achievable at full speed and is within the AOR. 11. 465P1903, 1904- Minimum shutoff head is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet specified requirements. FN Response: The shut off head will be as plotted. Please review the clarification on the performance curve made at the time of bid. 12. 465P1903, 1904-Operating head range of 11 to 17 ft at full speed is not met. Revise pump selection/curve to meet 11 ft at run out. FN Response: Please see the attached revised curve (0605223CR1). A reduced speed has been plotted to show performance at the low head range. At full speed, the low head condition point is outside of the AOR and/or would overload the maximum rating of the driver while operating on a VFD. 13. 465P8102- Maximum shaft deflection exceeds specified 2 mils. Not acceptable. FN Response: Please see the attached revised deflection calculations (0605225SDR1). A value of deflection at the seal box has been added and meets the specification. 14. 465P81012- Revise H to 38 ft- upper end of the operating head range. (PDF Page 211) FN Response: Please see the attached curve 0605225CR0. 38 feet is achievable at full speed and is within the AOR. 2 If you have any further questions, please do not hesitate to contact me at (913) 748- 4108 or via email at harlev.alt@Qentair.com. Sincerely, 0;f44-ieff WA' Harley Alt Project Manager Pentair Flow Technologies cc: J. Eaves, Pentair K. Hogan, Granich J. Hayes, Granich Attach: 0605223CR 1, 0605222CR 1, 0605224CR 1, 0605225CR0, 0605224SDR1, 0605225SDR 1 3 Fairbanks Nijhuis Included Features • Variable Speed Operation • Rotation: Clockwise • Discharge Position: #1 • Dynamically Balanced Impeller to G6.3 • High Chrome Cast Iron on Casing, Casing Cover and Impeller • Stainless Steel Impeller Fasteners • Stainless Steel Impeller Wear Ring • Stainless Steel Casing Wear Ring • Stainless Steel Shaft Sleeve • Structural Steel Base • Rexnord Omega Coupling • Chesterton S10 Mechanical Seal • Spiral Trac Bushing • Inpro Seals • Lifting Eyes • Lateral Critical Speed Analysis • Torsional Critical Speed Analysis • Seismic Analysis of Anchor Bolts • Shaft Deflection Calculations • Bearing Life Calculations • Certified Witness Performance Test • Certified Non-Witness Hydraulic Test at 1.5 x Shutoff Head Plus Maximum Suction Pressure (7psi) • Curve Approval Required Prior to Shipment • 15 Day Notice Prior to Performance Test • Holiday Testing on Coating • Film Thickness, Spark&Adhesion Testing on Coating • SHP, 1200RPM, 3/60/460V, Inverter Duty Motor 0605225SR3.doc IF-5420 Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Clarifications & Exceptions 1. (01610#11)Anchor bolts are not in FN's Scope of Supply and shall be provided by others. 2. (01610#12) In lieu of a drip tray, the pump is supplied with a back head, which includes an integral cast reservoir to collect leakage. This reservoir is tapped to allow connection of customer supplied drain piping. FN requests approval of the exception. 3. (11115, 2-2) Guaranteed efficiency will be 52% in lieu of 55%. Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Clarifications& Exceptions 1. (16222 1.05 D.5; 107 A) Motors are not seismic rated. 2. (16222 2.02 A 9.a.1) Nameplate shall be stainless steel per Nidec standard offering with laser etched letters. 0605225SR3.doc C&E-5000 + PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS`" TEST PROCEDURE FOR CENTRIFUGAL TYPE PUMPS Model: 4" B5422CLVK Project Number: 0605225 Quantity of Pumps to Test: One (1) GENERAL INFORMATION: Tests will be conducted to assure pump performance meets the requirements of sold conditions, as shown on the previously proposed submittal curve. Tests will be conducted at the original manufacturer's factory, located in Kansas City, Kansas. Data points (at least eight) will be taken to assure that a performance curve has been sufficiently established. For each pump being test, a certified curve will be plotted on an 8-1/2" x 11" sheet of paper and submit to the customer soon thereafter. Measurements will be taken using calibrated equipment and the values of each measurement will be determined as follows: PRESSURE HEAD (FEED The total head will be the summation of the discharge pressure transducer reading, plus or minus the suction pressure transducer (or suction manometer), plus or minus the vertical distance between the gauge zero reference points and any velocity head correction when gauge taps are located on different pipe inside diameters. FLOW RATE (GPM) The flow rate will be measured with a differential pressure transducer used in conjunction with a venturi meter. Differential head will then be used to derive the flow in terms of GPM by using the constant established from the venturi's calibration data. HORSEPOWER(BHP) The power input to the motor will be measured with a digital power analyzer. Drive motor efficiencies will then be used to convert this measurement to horsepower. SPEED (RPM) The rotational speed will be determined by means of a calibrated, electronic tachometer. EFFICIENCY(%) From the previously obtained values for horsepower, total head, and flow rate, efficiency will be calculated for each individually run test. 3601 Fairbanks Avenue • PO Box 6999 • Kansas City, Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • FAX:913-371-2272 SPECIFIC REMARKS: • Customer witnessed certified factory performance test utilizing Acceptance Grade 1U per ANSI/HI 14.6. • 0%to 10%flow rate at rated head • 0%to 6%head at rated flow • Pump(s)will be tested with job motor. • 15 day notification given prior to factory tests. • Curve approval is required prior to shipment. • A copy of a sample pump test log is attached. • A copy of the test set-up is attached PUMP TEST STANDARDS: Pump tests meet the following standards: Hydraulic Institute Test Standards—latest edition American Water Works Association—latest edition Certified by: ‘ c�Ac Billy Faltas Product Engineer Date: August 3, 2018 3601 Fairbanks Avenue • PO Box 6999 • Kansas City,Kansas 66106-0999 913-371-5000 • FAX:913-371-2272 Test Location of Test PENTAI R FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS'" Kansas City Customer: Water Temperature Model: Impeller Information Guaranteed Performance End User: Series: Impeller: Flow Head Power Efficiency Barometric Pressure Sales No. Proj. No. Serial No. Retest No. Application: Diameter Quantity Underfile Material (GPM) (ft) (HP) (%) Stages: Guaranteed Head Tested By Witnessed By Rotation: Running Pos: Guaranteed Efficiency Date: Date: Bowl Coat: Design: Surface: Measured Values Calculated Performance (at RPM) Pressure at Suction Venturi Power Head Velocity Flow Comments Discharge Lift Apressure Volts Amps Power Factor Speed Loss Head Rate Head Power Efficiency (ft) (ft) (ft) (V) (A) (kW) (%) RPM) (ft) (ft) (GPM) (ft) (HP) (%) (1) (2) J ( (3) (4) 1 (7) (5) 1 (6) J I(8) ] (16) (9) (10) (11) 1 1 (12) (13) Explanation (1)Discharge gauge head reading (2)Suction gauge head reading ;(Distance between water level and CL of discharge gauge for Column type,Negative sign used when there is positive suction head) (3) Feet of water across the venturi meter (4)Volt reading from the power meter (5)K.W.reading from the power meter (6)Power factor reading from the power meter ` 0 \* (7)Amp reading from the power meter (8) RPM Tachometer from the pump shaft . \ , , (9)V2/2g at the discharge tap-V2/2g at the suction tap(0 for submerge impeller type/no suction gauge) (10)Flow:Square root of the Venturi Delta P*The Venturi Constant K(('l(3)*(14)) (11)Total Head((1)+(2)+(9) +(16)) (12)Horsepower,calculated from motor efficiencies(15)and KW reading. (13)Pump Efficiency: (GPM x TDH)/(39.60 X BHP) (14)Venturi Constant (15)Motor efficiencies (16)Head losses due to column,lineshafting,and discharge head (Used for calculating bowl performance) Suction Inner Diameter Discharge Inner Diameter Suction Transducer Discharge Transducer Venturi Venturi K Venturi Transducer Submerg. Dist. Btwn Gauges 0 (14) Details of()Motor Used for Test Motor Efficiency Full Load Speed: Power Analyzer Horsepower Nom. Speed Shaft Config. Serial Number 1/4 Load 1/2 Load 3/4 Load Full Load 5/4 Load Max Allowable HP: _ Serial Number (15) (15) 1 (15) Service Factor: 1.15 -D POWER METER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER 4" SUCTION n r___- _ F 1 I SC300 SIGNAL CONDITIONER JOB MOTOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER PRESSURE �� 4" DIFFERENTIAL DISCHARGE TRANSDUCER 1 I I I I I I I I - - _, - 1J) 5"5" GATE VALVE V x 3.33" 5" PIPE VENTURI METER NOTES: r: PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 1. DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE. 2. GAUGE LOCATIONS AND PIPE DISTANCES BEFORE THE VENTURI METER 0605225 ARE PER HYDRAULIC INSTITUDE STANDARDS LATEST EDITION. TEST SET- UP DWG. 0605225TS lRE 0 4" B5422CLVK Submittal Curve q PENTAI R FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS" CURVE NUMBER: 0605225C SPEED DRIVER DIAMETER SPHERE GUARANTEED VALUES REV. 1 1170 RPM 5 HP 9.75" 3.00" FLOW HEAD PUMP EFF HP STAGES IMPELLER DATE BY 200 35 52 THIS CURVE IS BASED ON THE ACTUAL TEST 1 T4B1AF 11/29/2018 WSF 100 22 PERFORMANCE OF A SIMILAR PUMP. ONLY THE INDICATED POINT(S)IS GUARANTEED. 50 Pump Head 4$ 1170 RPM 40 I 35 1030 RPM POR I ,_ 30 25 890 RPM 13 CO x 2U 15 10 —AOR 5 0 f 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 100 Pump Efficiency 50 90 I 45 80 40 70 35 60 ` 30 E 50 25= v 40 ,c-a—a 20a a CL Z w 30 0-0 15 10 5 0 NPSH3 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 5.0 4.5 Power 4.0 3.5 a 3.0 x 2.5 a� 3 2.0 0 a 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.0 1170 RPM ONLY 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 Flowrate - (GPM) DISCHARGE POSITIONS ,A WARNING CLOCKWISE MOTOR DIMENSIONS DO NOT OPERATE THIS MACHINE WITHOUT PROTECTIVE GUARD C T IN PLACE. ANY OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE WITHOUT 19.19 5.53 2 8 PROTECTIVE GUARD CAN RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY. -A- SUPPLIED BY FN -B- SUPPLIED BY OTHERS 3 O 7 WHEN VIEWED FROM DRIVER END. C -L CP VENT TAP c DISCHARGE 1/4— GAUGE TAP — Y — Z SUCTION II VOLUTE CLEANOUT 4\X T I 1 I �� ° I — T _ E!J�I I _' — HO I O O I -__ F ra 1►.I DD ° I�r HD HGJ 1 1 1----HF I HF —31/4 I BOX DRAIN HE I HE DRAIN TAP [ HR--I HA HB - 11h6" DIA. 6 HOLE PUMP FRAME SUCT DISCH X Y CP DD HA HB HD HE HF HG HO HR PUMP MOTOR 4" B5422-CLVK T20 215T 4 4 11 33/4 267/8 71/2 221/4 361/2 121/4 101/2 15 1/4 231/4 11 /8 NOTES: (1) DISCHARGE FLANGE IS 125# ANSI DRILLING, SUCTION (5) SUCTION GAUGE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE AND FLANGE IS DRILLED AND TAPPED TO MATCH 125# ANSI. SHOULD BE LOCATED ON ADJACENT SUCTION PIPING. (2) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. (6) DIMENSIONS SHOWN MAY VARY DUE TO NORMAL (3) 5400'S AND 5400K'S ARE DIMENSIONALLY IDENTICAL. MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES. (4) BASES ARE DESIGNED TO BE COMPLETELY FILLED WITH GROUT. CUSTOMER P.O. NO. MCCLURE AND SONS, INC. 3305-112 *PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NOW JOB NAME TAG NAME CWS DURHAM WWTP 470P8102 SETTING PLAN PUMP SIZE AND MODEL GPM TDH RPM ROTATION DISCH POS 4" B5422CLVK 200 35 1200 CW 1 4" B5422CLVK MOTOR HP FRAME PHASE HERTZ VOLTS ENCLOSURE WITH NIDEC 5 215T 3 60 460 TEFL STRUCTURAL BASE CERTIFIED FOR CERTIFIED BY DATE PROJECT # 0605225 SMF 07/2018 NnwG 0 6 0 5 2 2 5 S P 12E 0 Fairbanks Nijhuis Material Specifications Item Description Material Specification' 1 Impeller Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 4 Shaft Steel AISI 1144 9 Bolt, Impeller Stainless Steel A193 CL2 B8 9A Washer, Impeller Stainless Steel AISI 316 14 Sleeve, Shaft Stainless Steel AISI 316 16 Wear Ring, Fronthead Stainless Steel A743 Gr. CA40 410-484 BHN 17 Wear Ring, Impeller Stainless Steel A743 Gr. CA15 300-350 BHN A28 Foot, Mounting Steel A36 B28 Pedestal, Mounting Steel A36 30 Volute Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 31 Solid Gland Cast Iron A48 Class 30 33 Fronthead Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 34 Backhead Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 90 Frame Cast Iron A48 Class 30 102 Impeller Key Stainless Steel AISI 316 A126 Deflector, Inner Rubber Commercial B126 Deflector, Outer Rubber Commercial 156 Gasket, Volute Tag Board D1170-G3111 158 Housing, Thrust Bearing Cast Iron A48 Class 30 161 Locknut, Bearing Steel SAE Bolt Steel 162 Lockwasher, Bearing Steel AISI 1215 163 Bearing, Radial Steel Commercial 168 Bearing, Thrust Steel Commercial 168A Snap Ring, Bearing Steel Commercial 202 Cover, Volute Cleanout Cast Iron A532 Class III Type A 203 Gasket, Cleanout Rubber Commercial 272 Key, Coupling Steel A108 Grade 1018 456 Mechanical Seal Commercial Commercial Base Fabricated Steel A36 Coupling Guard Steel Commercial 1 All material specifications are ASTM unless otherwise noted and are or description of chemistry only. 0605225SR3.doc ML-5420 456 IIIIIIIIIR CHESTERTON S10 MECHANICAL SEAL WITH SPIRALTRAC VERSION D, TYPE A BUSHING 33 16 17 1 WEAR RING CONSTRUCTION INPRO INPRO 202 272 SEAL 158 4 90 SEAL A126 14 102 1 203 30 11rw AP/I g 1.4\11u ,, . IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIP 0E11jMII! mil \ - 1 r ._ 1 � Sri' ���� t � � • '• • — 'ili'fli. rail IA -oi Vil. is I' 4, 44iWi%,: J 'nnm __ ----- .., k 7ii//I I, �-�. \�\ �1�/�1 a �/�1\1 d/-,ifti Pm I r :II I.11oiA 1 ) i 0 B126 g ir r�i III�I��ii IMPELLER ADJUSTMENT - I ,� , i CAPSCREWS (QTY3) r Ir / /I • / • imi 161 A28 162 168 168A B28 163 34 156 9A 9 156 33 ASSEMBLY $PENTAIR F*BANKS NUHUIS B5422 T20 FRAME °° 0605255AP IN�" 1 MANUF. YEAR 2019 MAX. CASING PSI 75 SIZE 4 INCH MODEL B5422CLVK STAGE 1 GPM 200 TOTAL HD. 35 FT. RPM 1170 FRAME T20 LUBE GREASE IMP.DIA. 9.75 SERIAL 10560854 MADE OM UTAC OMFAMROIRTSD 521A136M E. PENTAIR FAIRBANKS WHUS' KANSAS CITY, KANSAS FULL DATA NAMEPLATE *PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NUNUIS' ° 0605225NP INEnv 1 Fairbanks Nijhuis Technical Data Pump' Frame Size T20 Pump Size 4 Suction Size, Standard 4 Nominal Wear Ring Clearance 0.010-0.020 Impeller Fastener Size 1/2-13 Tightening Torque, lb.-ft 80 Impeller Weight, lb 41.2 Inlet Area, sq. In 26.22 WK2 Lb.-Ft.2 2.8 Sphere Size, Maximum 3 Shaft Diameter: at Impeller 1 1/4 at Sleeve 1 1/2 at Thrust Bearing 1.969 at Radial Bearing 1.969 Between Bearings 2 3/8 at Coupling 1 3/8 Keyway at Coupling 5/16 X 5/32 Torsional Shaft Stiffness, lbs./rad. 3.7X10 5 Center to Center of Bearings 8 3/4 Thrust Bearing Number 6310 Radial Bearing Number 6310 Sealing Box: Mechanical Seal Type Chesterton S10 Recommended Flush Water Pressure, PSI (above operating pressure) 1-10 Flow, GPM 1/2-1 Sleeve OD 1 7/8 Box ID 2 5/8 Box Depth 2 7/8 Box Inlet Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Box Outlet Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Backhead Drain Tap Size, NPT 3/4 Volute Cleanout Diameter 2 7/8 Vent/Priming Tap Size, NPT 1/4 Gauge Tap Size Discharge, NPT 1/2 Hydrostatic Test Pressure, Maximum, PSI 90 Casing Working Pressure, Maximum, PSI 60 Nominal Casing Thickness 3/8 Operating Temperature,°F 150 Shipping Weight, lb. Basic Pump 230 Base&Coupling Weight Structural Steel 420 1 All dimensions are in inches unless otherwise noted. 0605225SR3.doc TD-5420 Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Project Name: CWS Durham WWTP Sales Order Number: - Project Number: 0605225 Pump Model: 4" B5422-CLV Revision: 0 Prepared By: Matt Black Project Engineer Date Prepared: 8/16/2018 Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605225 LN PG1 Revision: 0 Summary of Analysis Method Analysis is performed in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.8-2014 level 1.The first lateral natural frequency, co,, was calculated using the equation for the natural frequency of a cantilever beam. The equation can be expressed as 187.7 (Di = where D is the deflection at the end of the beam. Summary of Results No natural frequency problem was found. ur, = 43039 RPM Minimum Speed = 890 RPM Maximum Speed = 1170 RPM wi Percentage of Minimum Speed = 4836% wi Percentage of Maximum Speed = 3679% Required Margin = 30% Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605225 LN PG2 Revision: 0 Inputs Pump Pump Model = 4" B5422-( Motor Frame = 143T-256T Pump Weight, F = 230 lbs Pump Center of Gravity, L= 12.25 in Moment of Inertia, I = 247.00 in4 Material Properties Modulus of Elasticity, E= 30000000 psi Operating Conditions Minimum Operating Speed = 890 RPM Maximum Operating Speed = 1170 RPM Required Separation Margin = 30% Calculations Deflection FL3 Pump Deflection = 0.000019 in D = 3E1 Natural Frequency 187.7 w,= 43039 RPM _ Minimum Speed = 890 RPM wl vD Maximum Speed = 1170 RPM w, Percentage of Minimum Speed = 4836% w, Percentage of Maximum Speed= 3679% Required Margin = 30% Pump Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605225 LN PG3 Revision: 0 A Campbell diagram provides a visual method to verify no resonance conditions will occur when operating a pump over its operating speed range.The diagram is constructed by plotting frequency in Hz versus frequency in RPM. Common excitation frequencies are shown as diagonal lines.The natural frequency of the pump is shown as a horizontal line.A resonance condition is likely to occur when a horizontal line crosses a diagonal line within the operating speed ranee. Campbell Diagram 800 Low Margin Min Speed Max Speed High Margin Natural Frequency 700 — 600 N 500 cu � va 400 C i o a o cc 300 200 100 Nabe Pass 0 -_._ _ ,.-_ _ --ram _ 7 T- I 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 Rotation Speed(RPM) Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Project Name: CWS Durham WWTP Sales Order Number: - Project Number: 0605225 Pump Model: 4" B5422-CLV Revision: 0 Prepared By: Matt Black Project Engineer Date Prepared: 8/16/2018 Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605225 RN PG1 Revision: 0 Summary of Analysis Method Analysis is performed in accordance with ANSI/HI 9.6.8-2014 level 1.The rotor's first lateral natural frequency, WI, was calculated using Rayleigh's method.The equation can be expressed as wi = 92F` rad/s JFy2i where g is the gravitational constant, F, is the force at the ith location,and y; is the deflection at the ith location. The model of the shaft used is shown below. F, is the weight of the impeller, B,and B2 are the bearing reaction forces, and F2 through F7 are the lumped weights of the shaft sections. L2 through L7 are the lengths to the lumped weights, LB, and LB2 are the lengths to the bearing reaction forces,and Ls is the length of the shaft. Fl ,-F2 F3 F4 j F5 #' % -,..-F6 F7 ri U o' Qi Q 0 o of L3 B2 L2 __ ._ L4.LB1 BI L3 I L5 LB2 " I- _ L6 r f L7 LS 1" ` In order to account for the stepped geometry of the shaft, a numerical method to calculate the deflection of the shaft was used. Summary of Results No natural frequency problem was found. w, = 5578 RPM Min Speed = 890 RPM Max Speed = 1170 RPM w, Percentage of Min Speed = 627% w, Percentage of Max Speed = 477% Required Margin = 30% Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605225 RN PG2 Revision: 0 Inputs Forces F, = 41.2 lbs F2 = 0.63 lbs F3 = 2.95 lbs F4 = 0.86 lbs F5= 9.72 lbs F6 = 1.40 lbs F7 = 1.66 lbs Section Diameters D, = 1.250 in D2 = 1.500 in D3= 1.969 in D4= 2.375 in D5= 1.969 in D6= 1.375 in Lengths L2 = 0.905 in L3 = 4.755 in L4,LB, = 8.200 in L5= 12.575 in LB2 = 16.950 in L6= 17.260 in L7= 20.040 in Ls= 22.010 in Material Properties Shaft Modulus of Elasticity= 29500000 psi Operating Conditions Minimum Operating Speed = 890 RPM Maximum Operating Speed = 1170 RPM Required Separation Margin = 30% Calculations Section Moment of Inertias = 0.120 In" 12 = 0.249 In" 13= 0.738 In" = irD4 14= 1.562 In" 1 64 15= 0.738 In" 16 = 0.175 In" Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605225 RN PG3 Revision: 0 Calculations Continued Bearing Reaction Forces B2 = -31.75 lb Moments = 0 Let B1 = 90.15 lb Forces = 0 A plot of the deflection of the shaft obtained from the numerical results is shown below. Deflection 2.00E-04 0.00E+00 — ___�______ — _ — , -2.00E 04 5 10 15 20 25 L. -4.00E-04 -6.00E-04 — — — — — d -8.00E-04 — — — — C -1.00E-03 _.-- -1.20E-03 — — — -- — — -1.40E-03 Length(in) Deflection Deflections Squared y1= 0.001158 in y12 1.34E-06 in2 Y2= 0.000967 in Y22 9.35E-07 in2 y3= 0.000281 in y32 7.9E-08 in2 y4= 0.000000 in y42 0 in2 y5= 0.000033 in y52 1.1E-09 in2 y6= 0.000007 in y62 4.37E-11 in2 y7= 0.000039 in y72 1.52E-09 in2 Natural Frequency = 5578 RPM w ig E F`Y` rad s 1 EFiYi2 / w, Percentage of Min Speed = 627% w, Percent of Max Speed = 477% Rotor Lateral Natural Frequency Analysis Ref: 0605225 RN PG4 Revision: 0 A Campbell diagram provides a visual method to verify no resonance conditions will occur when operating a pump over its operating speed range.The diagram is constructed by plotting frequency in Hz versus frequency in RPM. Common excitation frequencies are shown as diagonal lines.The natural frequency of the rotor is shown as a horizontal line. A resonance condition is likely to occur when a horizontal line crosses a diagonal line within the operating speed range. Campbell Diagram 100 - Low Margin Min Speed Max Speed High Margin Natural Frequency 90 80 70 60 a d VI 50 0 0c 40 30 _a _ aloe Pass 20 10 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 Rotation Speed(RPM) STRUCTURAL CALCULATION S FOR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 3601 FAIRBANKS AVENUE KANSAS CITY, KANSAS 66110 Seismic Anchorage for a 4" B5422CLVK Pump Fairbanks Nijhuis Project #0605225 CWS Durham WWTP Phase 5 Secondary Treatment Tigard, OR BROOKS-RANSOM ASSOCIATES STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS CIVIL ENGINEERS WWW.BRDOKSRANSOM.COM [ 1"1 I S.�RUCT UR,4 xyf ����� PROFS 191 ' Jt► t !3 c� �� 7415 NORTH PALM, SUITE 100 17013 r FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 `+ 449-8444 t/ � ` OFFICE: (559) REOCIv v 1 A I FAX: (559) 449-8404 C vqY •�Oc 4 Brooks Karn�•.i JDB# 1 85Z4 nn q 0. R l`♦ UY !!n AIL ZO 1 8- 1 0-08 „W .�ir� DISCHARGE POSITIONS A\ WARNING R N I N G MOTOR DIMENSIONS CLOCKWISE \\\\ DO NIT OPERATE THIS MACHINE WITHOUT PROTECTIVE GUARD C T ` �_ +. ✓ IN PLACE ANY OPERATION OE THIS MACHINE WITHOUT 19.19 5.53 2, ra PROTECi1VE GUARD CAN RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY. I -A- SUPPLIED 8Y EN -8- SUPPLIED BY OTHERS 3 f ~� 7 WHEN VIEWED FROM DRIVER END C CP VENT TAP DISCHARGE V4-- GAUGE TAP Y SUCTION VOLUTE / // CLEANOUT 1 / / / ---ti I T I ..- /0 reJV1 I / I I - I - :t;' , di DP N I - HO 0 o f as a Na ` I ---___- , L_\_, ,,,__ ` ,11 I Q U I II Qi I HF I HF I —31/4 BOX DRAIN --HE HE DRAIN TAP I- HRH HA HB I1A6" DIA. 6 HOLE PUMP IRAME ISUCT DISCH x Y CP DD HA HB HD HE HF NG HO HR PUMP MOTOR I 1 4" 85422-CLVI< 120 215T 4 4 11 3 A4 267/8 7112 221/4 36 V2. 121/4 101/2 15 1/4 231/4, 114a * REQUIRED ANCHOR NOTE: (6) 1/2"0 ASTM F593, (AISI 316) STAINLESS STEEL HEX HEADED BOLTS WITH POLYETHELYNE SLEEVE. SEE INSTALLATION DETAILS ON SHEET 2 & INSPECTION NOTES ON SHEET 3. NOTES: (1) DISCHARGE FLANGE IS 125# ANSI DRILLING, SUCTION (5) SUCTION GAUGE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE AND FLANGE IS DRILLED AND TAPPED TO MATCH 125# ANSI. SHOULD BE LOCATED ON ADJACENT SUCTION PIPING. (2) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. (6) DIMENSIONS SHOWN MAY VARY DUE TO NORMAL (3) 5400'S AND 5400K'S ARE DIMENSIONALLY IDENTICAL. MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES. (4) BASES ARE DESIGNED TO BE COMPLETELY fILLED WITH GROUT_ CUSTOMER P.D. NO. MCCLURE AND SONS, INC- 3305-112 410° " "' MIROMMEMJNUIF JOS NAME � "TAC NAME CWS DURHAM WWTP 4OOP8102 SETTING PLAN PUMP 512E AND MODEL GPM TDH RPM ROTATION DISCH POS 4" B5422CLVK 200 35 1200 CW 1 4" B5422CLVK MDTOR HP FRAME PHASE HERTZ VOLTS ENCLOSURE WITH NIDEC 5 215T 3 60 460 TEFC STRUCTURAL BASE CERTIFIED FOR CERTIFl ED BY DATE ,r� PROJECT # 0605225 SMF 07/2018 2r0605275SP rRE () mmmmmilin BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS DD So By h STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 4" B5422CLVK Horizontal Pump CIVIL ENGINEERS 7415 We: 10-08-18 1 N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 SecondaryTreatment FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham,OR Job no: 18524 .O SEE DETAILS ON THE ENGINEER S E OF RECORD'S APPROVED ( BOLT TO BOLT ) CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR Dy CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD LOCK-NUT CONSTRUCTION DETAILS EQUIPMENT BASE CUT 4 REMOVE FORM ABOVE PAD AFTER THREE LAYERS CONCRETE 15 CAST d PRIOR TO GROUTING OF DUCT TAPE i" MIN. I" NON-SHRINK GROUT, Pc 4_ SEE NOTES 3 TRHU 6 BELOW. 7 I i D + I" MIN. m 40 i 11101 II WILSON HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PLASTICin - ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE OR APPROVED EQUAL 4 I '' J FILL SLEEVE SOLID WITH SILICONE N RUBBER OR WAX. SEE NOTE2. in n r II � ANCHOR BOLT ' Y �y II D_ SIZE A5 NOTED _ I 3/S" PLATE WASHER C 7:11-A 4" SQ. MIN. , SEE NOTE 2 EXISTING 3" CLR FOR SLABS T BASE SLAB ON GRADE F3L-NUTS 11/2 CLR FOR ALL OTHER SLABS �4-....-- ,_A ? • Zl PREPARE AND CONSTRUCT NEW HOUSEKEEPING PAD IN COMPLIANCE WITH' A _ THE APPROVED CON. DOC'S `` Zr: �u NOTES: I. FOR CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD DETAILS AND NOTES NOT SHOWN SEE DETAILS ON THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 2. FILL SLEEVE WITH SILICONE RUBBER OR WAX. PROTECT THREADS ABOVE SLEEVE FROM DAMAGE AND CONCRETE SPLATTER. DO NOT FILL PIPE SLEEVE WITH GROUT. 3. NON-SHRINK EPDXY GROUT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROJECT SPECIFICATION AFTER LEVELING OF BASE PLATE, SOLE PLATE, OR MOUNTING BLOCK AND ALL SHIMS HAVE BEEN REMOVED. 4. REMOVE SHIMS 4 BLOCKS PRIOR TO TORQUEING BOLTS. 5. APPLY ANCHOR PRE-LOAD TORQUE OF 30 FT-LBS WITH A CALIBRATED WRENCH ONLY AFTER GROUT HAS BEEN ALLOWED TO CURE AND SHIMS ARE REMOVED. 2 ANCHORAGE NOTES AND DETAILS ► By: DD BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS Sheet: STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 4" B5422CLVK Horizontal Pump 2 CIVIL ENGINEERS 7415 N. PALM. SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 Secondary Treatment Date: 10-08-18 FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 18524 (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: V . /1i. NOTES: I. COMPLIANCE WITH THE ANCHOR BOLT DESIGN AND THE INSTALLATION OF THE ANCHOR BOLTS 15 THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 2. THE PUMP FOUNDATION MUST HAVE ADEQUATE STRENGTH AND MASS TO HOLD THE PUMP FIRMLY IN PLACE. DESIGN OF THE FOUNDATION SYSTEM 15 BY OTHERS. 3. ALL VALUES ARE BASED ON MIN. F'G= 4,000 P.S.I. CONCRETE STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS 4 Fy= 60,000 P.5.1. REBAR STRENGTH. 4. CODE REFERENCE: 2012 IBC, SECTION I4102, STRENGTH DESIGN, ASCE 1-10, ACI 318-11 APPENDIX D AND LOCAL AMENDMENTS: CITY OF COMMERCE. SEE STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS. HEX HEADED BOLTS SHALL BE ASTM ASTM F513, GROUP 2, CONDITION CWI (AI51 316) A5 FOLLOWS: NUTS: ASTM F5' 4 (AISI TYPE 316) STAINLESS STEEL BOLT SIZE Anom (IN2) EMBEDMENT (MIN.) EDGE DISTANCE (MIN.) D L E* HEX HD. A316 55 TYPE BOLT 1/2" 0.14165 8 6" D=BOLT DIAMETER - INCHES L=BOLT EMBEDDED LENGTH - IN. E=DISTANCE TO EDGE - INCHES L = Ls + Le Ls = LENGTH OF SLEEVE Le = LENGTH OF BOLT BEYOND THE SLEEVE * ANCHORS CENTERED NO CLOSER THAN 6" FROM EDGE OF CONCRETE OR COLD JOINT. MINIMUM CONCRETE BASE THICKNESS = 12" SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: I. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE INSPECTED BY AN APPROVED TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2012 IBC, SECTION 1105.1.1, TABLE 1105.5, BUILDING DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS, AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 2. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD AND POSSESS PROPER QUALIFICATION/CERTIFICATION. 3. SPECIAL INSPECTION 15 REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS AND PROCEDURES NOTED: HEX HEADED ANCHOR BOLTS: A. CONTINUOUS INSPECTION OF THIS INSTALLATION 15 REQUIRED. B. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY TYPE AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CONFORMS WITH DESIGN. CONCRETE BASE SHALL EXTEND ANY MINIMUM DISTANCE BEYOND THE CENTER OF ANCHORS AS INDICATED ABOVE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. C. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY SIZE AND GRADE OF ANCHOR BOLT MATERIAL, NUTS, AND WASHERS. D. INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT BOLTS ARE CLEAN AND FREE FROM RUST, DIRT, LUBRICANT, OR ANY OTHER CONTAMINANTS. 3 SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS 5�� STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 4" B5422CLVK Horizontal Pump Da DD CIVIL. ENGINEERS .. 10-08-18 7415 N. PALM, SUITE 100 Durham AWWTF Phase 5 Secondary Treatment FRESNO, CALIFORNIA 93711 (559)449-8444 FAX (559)449-8404 System Expansion Project, Durham, OR Job no: 18524 PROJECT: CWS Durham WWTP Phase 5 Secondary Treatment BROOKS RANSOM ASSOCIATES LOCATION: Tigard,OR 4715 N.PALM AVE,SUITE 100 Fairbanks Nijhuis Project No.: 0605225 FRESNO,CA 93711 JOB NO.: 18524 DATE: 10/8/2018 EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE Fairbanks Nijhuis Model 4" B5422CLVK Horizontal Pump DESIGN OF ANCHORAGE PER Channel Base To Concrete Pedestal 2014 Orgeon Bldg Code,Based on 2012 International Building Code Section 1613 Section 13.3&13.6 of ASCE 7-10 With IBC Amendments,Al 318-11,Appendix D, &AISC 314-10 4 ph/No.Anchors-, Fp`r G.6. Fphx Gb. fphg G 6. )Pphx Fph/No.Anchors-, F - Mot 4- ANCHOR ; i v i` WIDTH ---_ "------WIDTH OR PLATFORM DEPTH PLAN VEW S DE VEW Anchor In Tension END VEW ANCHOR ANCHORAGE CALCULATIONS Fp=0.4apSDSWp/(Rp/Ip)`(1+2*z/h) (Eq 13.3-1) f10Fp= 390.39 Lbs. Fp=0.3SDsIpWp(Minimum) (Eq 13.3-3) (Not less than) O0Fp(min.)= 731.98 Lbs. <GOVERNS Fp=1.6SDslpWp(Maximum) (Eq 13.3-2) (Not more than) BoFp(max.)= 3,903.90 Lbs. ap= 1.00 (Per Table 13.5-1 or 13.6-1) (For Vibration Isolators ap=2.5,Rp=2.5) Sps= 0.715 (Per Section 11.4.4) z= 0.00 (Height in structure at point of attachment of component.Base or below z=0. Roof or above z=h.) h= 0.00 (Average roof height of structure relative to the base elevation in feet.) Rp= 2.50 (Per Section 13.4.2) Ip= 1.50 Importance Factor (Per Section 13.1.3) Bo= 2.5 (Per Section 13.3.1) Unit Operating Wt. Misc. Wet Weight WEIGHT= 825.00 Lbs. + 85.00 = 910.00 Lbs. Y-cc X-cc Z-bar Anchor Spacings 21.000 Inches X 2 @ 15.00 Inches 12.510 Inches Number of Anchors Effective in Shear- 6 Total Y-bar= 0.400 Inches Number of Anchors Effective in Tension= 6 Total X-bar= 9.670 Inches Unit Only Fp Horiz.= f1,Fp= 731.98 Lbs. (Per ASCE 7-10 Section 13.4.2 Anchors in Concrete or Masonry) Fp Vert.= 0.2ScsWp= 130.13 Lbs. (Per ASCE 7-10 Section 13.3.1&Section 13.4.2a) Anchor Forces(at base of unit) LRFD Load Combination(Eq 16-7): 0.9D-Fpv+O,Fp Tension due to Pretensioninq 0.500"Dia.Bolts 30 Ft-Lbs Clamping Torque= 22,680 Lbs. Pu= 0.9Total Weight-1.0Fpv= 688.87 Lbs. Mux=Vux(Z)+Wp(eX)= 17,956.79 In-Lbs./12= 1,496 Ft-Lbs Muy=Fph(Z)+Wp(eY)= 9,521.09 In-Lbs./12= 793 Ft-Lbs Muz=Fph(eX)+Fph(eY)= 7,371.05 In-Lbs./12= 614 Ft-Lbs Orthogonal Effects Vux=1.0Fph= 731.98 Lbs. Vuy= 0.30Fph= 731.98 Lbs. Vur=SRSS = Wux2+Vuy2= 1,035.18 Lbs. Use(6)1/2"Diameter ASTM F593,(AISI 316)Stainless Steel Heavy Hex Hd Bolts w/Void Plastic Sleeve Cast in Place Min.12"Thick Normal Weight Concrete Slab,F'c=4,000 psi,8"Min.Embedment,6"Min.Edge Distance Min.1 1/2"Non-Shrink Leveling Grout Per SIMPSON ANCHOR DESIGN SOFTWARE Nua= 22,680.00 LBS. ONn= 38,724 LBS. To verify steel bolt's strength only) Vua= 258.00 LBS. OVn= 5,112 LBS. See shear transfer due to friction below. Nua/EINn= 0.586 Vua 10Vn= 0.050 Section D.7.1.permits full strength in tension to be permitted (Nua/0Nn+ Vua/EIVn)= 0.586 <1.00 OK Friction between base and concrete=0.57 x Pu= 12,927.60 LBS.Total >Vur(SRSS)= 1,035.18 Lbs. OK SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 1/5 Strong-Tie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: 1.Proiect information Customer company:Pentair FN 0605225 Project description:6"B5423 Horizontal Pump Customer contact name: 18554 Location: Customer e-mail: Fastening description: Comment: 2.Input Data&Anchor Parameters General Base Material Design method:ACI 318-11 Concrete:Normal-weight Units: Imperial units Concrete thickness,h(inch): 12.00 State:Cracked Anchor Information: Compressive strength,fc(psi):4000 Anchor type:Cast-in-place 4ic,v: 1.0 Material:F593 304/316SS Reinforcement condition: B tension,B shear Diameter(inch):0.500 Supplemental reinforcement:Not applicable Effective Embedment depth,lief(inch):8.000 Reinforcement provided at corners: No Anchor category:- Ignore concrete breakout in tension:No Anchor ductility:Yes Ignore concrete breakout in shear:Yes hmin(inch):9.25 Ignore 6do requirement:No Cmin(inch):3.00 Build-up grout pad:Yes Smin(inch):3.00 Base Plate Length x Width x Thickness(inch):22.25 x 36.50 x 0.38 Recommended Anchor Anchor Name: Heavy Hex Bolt-1/2'0 Heavy Hex Bolt, F593 304/316SS i if tlS 4f�51 L�. 1�55h i' 1 ee+'A4II 4 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor Desi nerT"" Company: Date: 10/5/2018 g Engineer: Page: 2/5 Software Project: Strong-Tie Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: Load and Geometry Load factor source:ACI 318 Appendix C Load combination:not set Seismic design:Yes Anchors subjected to sustained tension: Not applicable Ductility section for tension:D.3.3.4.3(d)is satisfied Ductility section for shear:D.3.3.5.3(c)is satisfied 00 factor:not set Apply entire shear load at front row: No Anchors only resisting wind and/or seismic loads:Yes Strength level loads: Nua[Ib]:22680 Vuax[Ib]:732 Vuay[Ib]:732 M.[ft-lb]:-1496 M„y[ft-lb]:793 M.[ft-lb]:614 <Figure 1> 22680 lb / 732 lb 793 ft-lb 14%tt. 'i Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 6 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor DesignerT"' Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 3/5 Software Strong-TieProject: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: <Figure 2> o'' o', ol. o: 6.00 6.00 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 7 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 4/5 strong-TieSoftware Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: 3.Resulting Anchor Forces Anchor Tension load, Shear load x, Shear load y, Shear load combined, N.(lb) V.(lb) V.(Ib) J(Vuax)2+(Vuay)2(lb) 1 4230.1 192.8 72.5 205.9 2 3930.9 122.0 72.5 141.9 3 3631.8 51.2 72.5 88.7 4 3329.9 51.2 171.5 179.0 5 3629.1 122.0 171.5 210.5 6 3928.2 192.8 171.5 258.0 Sum 22680.0 732.0 732.0 1084.2 Maximum concrete compression strain(%o):0.00 <Figure 3> Maximum concrete compression stress(psi):0 0 1 o L o s Resultant tension force(Ib):22680 Resultant compression force(Ib):0 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in x-axis,e'Nx(inch):0.42 Eccentricity of resultant tension forces in y-axis,e'Ny(inch):0.79 Y Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in x-axis,e'vx(inch):5.03 Eccentricity of resultant shear forces in y-axis,e'vy(inch):5.03 X 06 05 04 4.Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension{Sec.D.5.1) Nsa(Ib) 0 MNsa(Ib) 14200 0.80 11360 5.Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.2) Nb=kc l,al1fcher"(Eq.D-6) kc Aa fc(psi) her(in) Nb(Ib) 24.0 1.00 4000 6.995 28080 0.750Ncbg=0.750(ANc/ANco)-ec,N-ed,N-c,NFcp,NNb(Sec. D.4.1 &Eq. D-4) ANc(in2) ANco(in2) cumin(in) Vec,N Wed,N VqN Pcp,N Nb(lb) 0 0.750Ncbg(Ib) 1385.34 440.34 6.00 0.894 0.872 1.00 1.000 28080 0.75 38724 6.Pullout Strength of Anchor in Tension(Sec.D.5.3) 0.750Npn=0.750Y'c,PNp=0.750'f%,P8Abrgfc(Sec.D.4.1,Eq.D-13&D-14) Yyc,P Abrg(in2) f'c(psi) 0 0.750Npe(Ib) 1.0 0.47 4000 0.75 8406 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 8 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com SIMPSON Anchor Designer TM Company: Date: 10/5/2018 Engineer: Page: 5/5 StrongTie Software Project: Version 2.6.6794.11 Address: Phone: E-mail: 8.Steel Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.11 Vsa(Ib) (grout 0 Ogrout0Vsa(Ib) 8520 0.8 0.75 5112 10.Concrete Pryout Strength of Anchor in Shear(Sec.D.6.31 0Vcpg=/kcpNcbg=Idkcp(ANc/ANco)�ec,N�ed,NY�C,N Pcp,NNb(Sec. D.4.1 &Eq.D-41) kcp ANC(in2) ANco(in2) Pec,N Fed,N WC,N Pcp,N Nb(Ib) 0 0Vcpg(Ib) 2.0 1385.34 440.34 0.457 0.872 1.000 1.000 28080 0.75 52751 11.Results Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces(Sec.D.7.1 Tension Factored Load,N.(lb) Design Strength,®N°(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 4230 11360 0.37 Pass Concrete breakout 22680 38724 0.59 Pass(Governs) Pullout 4230 8406 0.50 Pass Shear Factored Load,V.(lb) Design Strength,0V°(Ib) Ratio Status Steel 258 5112 0.05 Pass(Governs) Pryout 1035 52751 0.02 Pass Interaction check Nua/ONn Vua/tbVV Combined Ratio Permissible Status Sec. D.7..1 0.59 0.00 58.6% 1.0 Pass 112"0 Heavy Hex Bolt,F593 304/316SS with hef=8.000 inch meets the selected design criteria. 12.Warnings -Concrete breakout strength in shear has not been evaluated against applied shear load(s)per designer option. Refer to ACI 318 Section D.4.2.1 for conditions where calculations of the concrete breakout strength may not be required. -Per designer input,ductility requirements for tension have been determined to be satisfied—designer to verify. -Per designer input,ductility requirements for shear have been determined to be satisfied—designer to verify. -Designer must exercise own judgement to determine if this design is suitable. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing circumstances,the standards and guidelines must be checked for plausibility. 9 Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. 5956 W.Las Positas Boulevard Pleasanton,CA 94588 Phone:925.560.9000 Fax:925.847.3871 www.strongtie.com ►►� PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS" FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS DYNAMIC SHAFT DEFLECTION r IA I� mit i-— -f ------ MODEL 4"B5422CLVK Ir ORDER 0605225 IMPELLER SYMBOL T4B1AF SHAFT SYMBOL T20B4A f DEFLECTION AT OPERATING CONDITION Head = 35 feet YBOX= 0.00041 inches Flow= 200 GPM MAXY = 0.00259 inches VARIABLE DESCRIPTION VALUE A Shaft length between bearings,inches 8.75 B Shaft,length,inches,radial brg to sleeve 1.12 C Shaft length,inches,from impeller discharge to sleeve 3.94 IA Moment of Inertia of the shaft section between bearings,inches4 1.575 IB Moment of Inertia of the shaft section under the radial bearing,inches4 0.736 Ic Moment of Inertia of the shaft section under the sleeve inches4 0.175 E Modulus of elasticity,psi 30000000 B2 Width between impeller shrouds including shroud thickness,inches 3.50 D Impeller diameter,inches 9.75 R Radial thrust,pounds,at operating condition 108.58 H Total head at operating condition,feet 35 Kr Thrust factor at operating condition 0.21 X Distance from impeller discharge centerline to face of packing box 7.19 Z Distance from the radial bearing CL to impeller discharge 5.06 EQUATIONS 4 I 71"64 P= KrxDxB2XHxS.G./2.31 Y —P ZA(Z—X)+C3 1 _ 1 +Z3 + X3 _3X/C2I 1 _ 1 +Z2 vv box—3E IA \IC IB ) IB 21c 2 \,Ic IB ) IB ji WSF (Signed) 9/17/2018 (Date) Rev.1 Fairbanks Nijhuis Typical Pump Bearing Lubricants Fairbanks Nijhuis recommends a superior quality, NLGI No. 2, multipurpose, lithium complex grease for all pump rolling element bearing applications that require grease lubrication. The grease characteristics should include good high temperature performance, extreme pressure properties, water resistance, excellent oxidation stability, good rust protection and resistance to chemical breakdown. Fairbanks Nijhuis does not recommend grease with molybdenum disulfide (moly)additives. In addition to the characteristics listed above, the grease should meet the following specification. Specifications Consistency: NLGI No. 2 Dropping Point ASTM D2265 >450° F Base fluid viscosity SUS @ 100° F 700 to 1200 SUS@212° F 70to100 Rust Prevention ASTM 1743 Pass Water Washout ASTM 1264 <4% @ 175° F Four Ball EP Test ASTM D2596>40kg load wear >250kg weld point Fairbanks Nijhuis has compiled a general list of products that meet the grease requirements above. This list is not an endorsement of any particular manufacture and should not be construed as exclusive recommendations. When choosing an alternate manufacture, customers should discuss this typical lubricant recommendation with their vendor to ensure that an equivalent grease is supplied. Typical Products Manufacturer Lubricant Brand Name NLGI No. BP BP Energrease"LC EP 2 2 Castrol Pyroplex Red 2 Chevron Delo Greases EP 2 Exxon Ronee MP 2 Mobil AW2 2 Shell Retinax`"' LC 2 Texaco Starplee 2 2 76 76 Multiplex EP 2 0605225SR3.doc GR-1000 ►t PENTAIR FAIRBANKS NIJHUIS' HORIZ. BEARING LIFE CALCULATIONS 50 Rio OF BEP PUMP MODEL: 4" B5422CLVK DONE BY: Kolton Stimpert DATE SPEED = 1170 RPM ORDER NO.: 0605225 8/7/2018 CAPACITY DESIGN = 200 GPM — LIMP i L, HEAD DESIGN = 35 Ft k—B, /I L gH� IMPELLER SYMBOL = T4B1AF /I II 1 T, T, IMPELLER WEIGHT = 38 Lbs D DR, TA— I SHAFT SYMBOL = T2064A r IYYY SHAFT WEIGHT = 17.5 Lbs I } �\I I D R' WW1' iRz CAP DESIGN BEP = 400 GPM T" WIMP CAPACITY BEP = 610 GPM LIMP = 17.9 in IN-BOARD BEARINGS-->BALL BRG HEAD BEP = 64 Ft Li = 8.81 in OUT-BOARD BEARINGS-->BALL BRG DR = 4.75 in BEARING INFORMATION SPEED BEP = 1750 RPM D2 = 9.75 in RADIAL BRG NUMBER 310KD DR = 1.875 in RADIAL DYN.CAPACITY 15300 Lbs B2 = 3.5 in THRUST BRNG NUMBER 310KD CERTIFIED BY: WSF LSHFT = 5 in THRUST DYN.CAPACITY 15300 Lbs DATE: 08-06-18 1 z SPECIFIC SPEED N - NQBEP = 1910 IMPELLER RADIAL QD = 0.50 K = 0.21 (BEP@FULL DIA.) s THRUST FACTOR QD-BEP R HBEP° FROM CHART D2 IMPELLER RADIAL _(KR• HD• DZ• BZ• SG) = 109 Lbs THRUST TR 2.31 IMPLELLER AXIAL DR = 0.49 XR = 0.57 DH = 0.19 xi" = 0.52 THRUST CONST. D2 FROM CHART D5 Dz FROM CHART D5 ( = DR)z ( )7854 = 17.7 IMPELLER AXIAL _ `XR+XH� `4R =(DRY 0.55 THRUST FACTOR KA 2 A,=(DX)2• (.7854) = 2.8 IMPELLER AXIAL H • SG THRUST TA = °2.31 (An—AH)(KA) = 124 Lbs R1 — {(TR+ WIMP)x LIMP) + (WSHFT)SHFT)x(LSHFT) }/L 1 = 309 Lbs RESULTANT BEARING , FORCES R2= R1 - TR- WIMP- WSHFT = 145 Lbs T1=O X= 1 Y=0 RADIAL BEARING LIFE C' \a H PURE RADIAL LOAD P= .XR1+7 = 309 Lbs L io LIFE _ — = 1,729,300 hours NO THRUST 1'1 / N D THRUST BEARING LIFE T2= TA =124 Lbs X=0.56 Y=1.84 COMBINED AXIAL 1 AND RADIAL LOAD r C � A P = XR ±Y =309 Lbs L10 LIFE = I P2 � D N = 1,729,300 hours \l EXPONENTS&COEFF RADIAL BRG a= 3 H= 16667 THRUST BRG Q = 3 A= 16667 HESTERTO , , Global Solutions,Local Service. Sri' 1=I[7l l till IC„. - S10 Single & 520 Dual Seals Streamlines inventory,installation,maintenance and workflow (iirerAlti alct Optimized seal design for plantwide use S-Series full featured common gland Two-step"bolt&go"installation Delivers greater performance and value 4th Generation Sealing combines technology with workflow efficiency f , 4'''';.“—* '8: ' ' %,‘,. .., . , )-,,,, ,,,..., ..1‘„, .,: , . iii ) .,,. x r' Zs } - ,..., _, , t ti ... ,,, , +� n re i TR t W fir.. - ° j4, It a .. + 5 :tt:v1:11 ,, t (irt t , t , , \ i i if,..). ie.',:4 : ,''. . , 1--'( -'. ., . • ,,, (. i .' + . t() / 1 Chesterton has a unique position in the sealing industry,with over a century of continuous innovation under one ownership and brand name.The result of this continuity of effort is a record of patents and 1 innovations unmatched in the world.Chesterton is proud to continue this winning tradition with the " °: It introduction of the Streamline S-Series Seals. 1st Generation:Component Seals ; Chesterton introduced non-fretting seals to lead the way towards seals that won't damage shafts.Other ' `w , r innovations in this period included patented Self- - , j Aligning Stationaries and universal slotted glands. 2nd Generation:Cartridge Seals .. ' The Chesterton innovation of off-the-shelf cartridge seals is an enduring contribution to worldwide sealing .. technology.Cartridge sealing has become the a dominant sealing form since that time.It offers m increased sealing reliability due to factory presets, : 'kNi . and faster,easier installation. ;.'° 3rd Generation:Advanced Technology Chesterton jumped fully into the computer revolution irta, with the introduction of seal lines engineered and designed with the aid of sophisticated software. , This included Finite Element Analysis(FEA)to predict i -�'� 4. seal face flatness using monolithic faces.This third generation also featured patented innovations / , v' ` 1 ( ,..,,,, ,,,. 41 ' ' . t kik such as the Self-Centering Lock Ring,to make seal •�'` '�' concentricity easily achievable for greater reliability. 4th Generation:Streamline 5-Series The new Streamline S-Series is the culmination oft our engineering efforts with with the business of • sealing.This is the seal generation that goes beyond ,,, sealing to deal with seal process workflow.The result -, . is greater total economies from inventory reduction, less administration,increased reliability,and flexible, > " cost-saving rebuild options.This 4th Generation of P Chesterton sealing brings greater value than ever -.. before possible. I: - SUCH//1111I ... IS: CHESTERTON. Global Solution;Loral Servke 1.11tsc7///////CM S10 Single & S20 Dual Seals Simply superior for standardization, 444,r workflow efficiency and value New Chesterton Streamline S-Series is engineered to meet the vast majority of plantwide applications with tal' great reliability in service.But the S-Series goes beyond iE the basics of fluid sealing,to address the economies _ of total sealing workflow.S-Series will streamline inventory,simplify seal selection,reduce installation complexity and minimize total maintenance costs. e, Optimized design for plantwide use S10 Single and 520 Dual Tandem are a matched �" f pair of high performance,robust seals that make standardization easy.These benchmark seals deliver the reliability expected from Chesterton. Common design with interchangeable parts The S-Series is a complete system with common parts for predictable performance and simplified inventory. # �; No other seal family uses parts commonality better ( :.,>-' than the S-Series.Unique"cassette within a cartridge" design lets users swap out the S10 for an S20 in a minute.Face materials swap out to match service needs while keeping spares to a minimum. S-Series face geometry is designed with the aid of Finite Element Outstanding performance and value Analysis(FEA)and computer fluid flow modeling.S-Series faces generate low heat to minimize face distortion for stable,reliable S-Series Seals can offer better performance because performance. the weaknesses found in other common platform seal designs have been eliminated.Superior value comes from long-term reliability coupled with inventory savings and workflow efficiencies.Two-step"bolt&go"installation With the S-Series,just bolt on the gland,tighten the , set screws and go.Captive fastened centering pads move out of the way at start up,and won't get lost when it's time to re-set impellers or re-seal. `r' Rebuilding options smooth workflow Standard options of factory or field rebuilds are easy `; - '-'` to execute and economical.But with complete sealing cassettes available at attractive prices,it becomes possible to perform rapid re-sealing with no additional administration relating to rebuilding. Both S-10 and S20 Sealing Cassettes use the common S-Series Gland This unique"cassette-within-a-cartridge'design makes for easy handling and streamlined resealing.Get rapid,reliable rWhen you see CHESTERTON av-seal oid settewith all new parts and , avoid rebuild administrative costs. you see the future of sealing. The new benchmark for sealing excellence and value S-Series S 10 Cassette S-Series Common Parts reduce inventory n Multi-Port Flush cleans better and prevents while increasing options.The same gland is localized thermal seal face distortion 0-1111" used for both the single and dual seals to common with single port systems. lb — maximize flexibility.Interchangeable Floating Throttle Bushing for maximum -.�, cassettes streamline repair administration. safety is standard.Fluids are diverted to El Optimized Seal Faces balance low heat quench and drain ports. 0 : ' ': - generation and distortion to handle a plant's 2 toughest applications.FEA design and robust body withstand high pressures and torques compared to general duty designs. • 20 Cassette Ei Self-Centering Lock Ring'"`is a patented 9' Fully Vented Gland ensures that Iie id mechanism that ensures sleeve concentricity s mounds the seal.Eliminates air ..ces that and squares the rotary face to the shaft pr- ent barrier fluid flow and in eased seal 1►> during installation.This prevents seal face wobble,increasing reliability in tough oper.ting temperatures. emissions and slurry services. High F .'w Pumping Rin. ools 0 High Torque,Cushioned Drives eliminate inboard a d outboard se. faces in b n.' ,�. high tempe .ture servi -s.Aggressive metal to seal face contact on all S-Series faces. - bi-directional anesc•.mbinewith y Cushioned drives minimize shock and vibration. cutwaters to de er igh flow. High strength drive pads resist shear load in tough applications. aiTandem Config tion seals on the OD of both set of se. faces.Proven ® Captive Centering Pads set precise design forth: ighest -liability under positioning automatically,then move out of varying co i itions. the way at start-up.Non-sparking for safety, and never misplaced for future use. ry3 Balanc- •iton" enables t .e hydraulic Micro fished Faces reduce dra for doubt: .alance with no movi it 0-rings to p° g han. up and fail under pressure eversals. maximum face responsiveness.Highly Pa •nt pending,it eliminates the n d for , 4, polished surfaces ensure face tracking, de seal faces,which generate exc- sive Seal face hang-up is minimized. eat and contribute to 0-ring failure. OPERATING LIMITS STANDARD MATERIALS 510&S20 Process Pressure: Rotary Face: ■ To 450 psig(to 31 bar g) ■ Carbon,Silicon Carbide,Tungsten Carbide trier Pressure: Stationary Face: ■ To 450 psi r ) ■ Silicon Carbide,Tungsten Carbide 50 psig(to 17 bar g)Inb ' rential Elastomers: Temperature Limits: i Viton FLAS',EP,ChemLast,PTFE Encapsulated ■ To 300°F(150°C)Ethylene Propylene,PTFE Metal Parts: ■ To 400°F(205°C)Fluorocarbon,AFLAS' ■ 31655 all metal parts ■ To 500°F(250°C)ChemLast II Hastelloy C'.springs Speed: Other materials available on request. ■ 5,000 FPM(25 misec) For higher pressure and temperature ' Asahi Glass Company Ltd.Registered Trademark applications,please consult Chesterton. ••Haynes International,Inc,Registered Trademark El sue► =ATM g ?1 4 ' Si 2 6 € gyro 11 ' ` "10'f`' } ii I 1 ..... .,,,, ln11N. aaf ...41/4. 5`u t-o►r r/1//ram. Section li ---" Mechanical Seal Installation Data Mechanical Seal Catalog Si 0 SMALL SINGLE CASSETTE SEAL- Dimensional Data/Inch fr -B -- 41iia S10 Flush E - F 1 # (y it . . j I ) 5i rw 1■IIII M1` � / - 'C' Ill 0 y 'if -----i'N\ ei,---- r.,_.„. Q/D C. ., D A J 1 1 h11111111111 f 111.1p - ra.f Ill H G r~ J --*I ___.... _. X W Y WY Z S10 KEY A - Shaft Size E -Minimum Seal Chamber Depth 1 -Seal Chamber to Bolt Surface Z -Quench 0-ring B - Maximum Gland Diameter F -Outboard Seal Length W- Rotary and Stationary 0-rings C -Seal Chamber Bore G -Minimum Bolt Circle by Bolt Size X -Shaft 0-ring D -Seal Outside Diameter H -Slot Width Y - IB&OB Cassette 0-rings A B C C D E F G MIN H 1 X W Y Z MAX MIN MAX MIN 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" t 1.500 4.50 2.25 2.44 2.19 0.53 2.11 3.31** 3.55** - 0.57 1.20 128 135 143* 142` 1.625 5.00 2.38 2.70 2.31 0.53 2.11 3.49** 3.68** - 0.57 1.20 130 137 145* 144* 1.750 5.50 2.50 2.81 2.44 0.53 2.11 3.61** 3.80** - 0.57 1.20 132 139 147* 146* 1.7G0 OS G.61 3..0 3.75 2.41 0.53 2.11 5.38 5.50 0.57 1.20 132 139 147* 116* 1.875 5.50 2.63 2.94 2.56 0.53 2.11 3.74** 3.93** - 0.57 1.20 134 141 149* 148* 1.n/]U] ].V9 S.]b 3.6l L.]b U.]i L.1 I - ].UU - U.]/ i.LU 134 141 14V" ten" 2.000 5.50 2.75 3.19 2.69 0.53 2.11 3.99 4.12** - 0.57 1.20 136 143 150* 149* 2.125 6.00 2.88 3.44 2.81 0.53 2.11 4.24 4.37 4.49** 0.69 1.20 138 145 152 151 2.125 OS 6.99 3.88 4.25 2.81 0.22 2.42 - 4.49 5.25 0.69 1.51 138 145 152 151 2.250 6.00 3.00 3.56 2.94 0.53 2.11 4.36 4.49 4.61"* 0.69 1.20 140 147 152 151 2.375 6.00 3.13 3.62 3.06 0.53 2.11 4.42 4.55 4.68** 0.69 1.20 142 149 153 152 2.500 6.50 3.25 3.81 3.19 0.53 2.11 4.61 4.74 4.86** 0.69 1.20 144 151 153 152 2.500 OS 7.77 4.50 4.75 3.19 0.53 2.11 - 6.63 6.75** 0.69 1.20 144 151 153 152 2.625 6.50 3.38 3.94 3.31 0.53 2.11 4.86 4.99 5.11 0.69 1.20 146 5-557 154 153 2.625 OS 6.99 4.55 4.88 3.31 0.53 2.11 - 5.88 6.00 0.69 1.20 146 5-557 154 153 * Use next size larger for Style 76 0-rings **Minimum Bolt Circle requires D Washers. t The S10 uses a quantity of 2 0-rings and the S20 uses a quantity of 4 O-rings. 78 & CHESTERTON. Global Solutions,Local Service. S 6 -proven technology111111 ..�:. thatenhances the 't"ts,....,.1.,,,,„_______Itu,k10.000,°11:. ) operating environment mechaical seas r " and packing / . r ir c 41111 act Ordering kg ,. /Easy Installation #� a a ,.� . et Rom._ TotalEnvironmental Control ' s Flush .. , — 1 ii se • -` vof improves MTBR a Extends mechanical seal and packing life S iralTraCM Part Number Code p Example:The following part number identifies a device operating with greatly reduced flush(F),measured in inches(I),to fit over a 3.000"shaft(3000)in a pump with right fluid rotation(R). This is a split(S)SpiralTrac"for in-place installation with split seals in a pump with a 4.000"seal cavity bore diameter(4000).The device is made of Carbon Graphite Filled PTFE(ESC). This part number code applies to typical SpiralTrac configurations.For special configurations please forward a drawing to EnviroSeal for review. Shaft Size(4) Outside Diameter(1) Material Actual diameter of rotating Actual diameter of the seal 316 316 Stainless Steel component under SpiralTracTM cavity bore. >416 416 Stainless Steel GLF Glass Filled PTFE(7) ESC Carbon Graphite Filled PTFE Measurement Units Fluid Rotation(3) BRZ Bronze I Inches As Viewed From Bearing End Ti Titanium M Metric R Right L Left \ \ \ F I 3000 R S 4000 (ESC \ \ Operating Conditions(SpiralTrac Versions) Easy Installation Options(SpiralTrac Types) Greatly reduced flush. Type A Counterbore Fit In with split seals while the equipme ' i in place Press into Place using reduced or no Flushl6l: Recommended Upgrades (see Type / Drives Circulation for face cooling. 0 Drill 5/32"vent hole: / Forces fluid Exchange for heat removal. ✓ Releases Air when flooding. Reduced sh(6)in ' rous applications. ✓ Removes Particulate. gressive single spiral groove, air vent and exit groove,available in Types A,B,I and , Reduced or no flush(6)in fibrous applications. Type B Bore Fit DDouble spiral grooves,deeper air vent and exit groove, 1 Press into Place using reduced Flush: Recommended Upgrades available in Types A,I and El 1 !� ✓ Drives Circulation for face cooling. 0 Drill5/32"vent hot:. ✓ Enhances fluid Exchange for heat removal. ✓ Releases Air wh r flooding rasa wltLlpacking only(2) ►! g a Extend exit. .ove: — ✓ Positions Particulate so a small flush A combined I al separator,axially ✓ Forces it xchange and re- 2 (5-7 GPH/23 32 LPF�can force it under an a manufactured with single spiral groove— move .articulate without flush(6) the throat restriction and out of the cavity. w. -eliminating shaft erosion. Reduced SpiralTrac'"Packing Version Flush Installed in Stuffing Box Type© ' ially Split Device (Typical for Spr eats) Press i .Place using reduced Flush: No Upgrades 4. Use half or less the normal flush rate. ✓ Drives ulation for face cooling. Not practical due to installation Greatly extends sleeve and ✓ Enhances .'.Exchange for heat re : al. while the pump is assembled. packing life. - ✓ Positions Parti ate for removal. mall flush(5.7 GPH/2 LPH). Notes: Type© Impeller Side y�I' 1 -�Ilation (Typical for Open Bore Cavities) 1.For Type A or Type E SpiralTrac,'"dimensions for the counterbore or external key Press into Place ng reduced or •Flushl6t: (Horizontal Split Case Pumps)must be provided in addition to the part number, ✓ Superior Air -nting. Please contact EnviroSeal for sizing information sheets. -. _- ✓ Drives C' ulation for face cooling. 2.For Packing Version SpiralTrac,'"the width of the lantern ring as well as the size of ( "'° ✓ Forc•• uid Exchange for heat removal. packing and number of packing rings being replaced by SpiralTrac'"must be provided . 2 ✓ R. oves Particulate. in addition to the part number.Please contact EnviroSeal for sizing information sheets. 3.For Double Ended Pumps both right and left rotation devices are required. Type E Externally Keyed (Typical for Horizontal Spli ase Pumps) 4.Depending on the pump,this may be a shaft,sleeve,or impeller hub diameter. 5.When air is a problem from process or dry running,the use of flush,quench or double �� Installed using reduced or no Fluslrlst: seals is necessary to provide face cooling. ✓ Superior Air release when vent specified. � ✓ Drives Circulation for face cooling. 6.Elimination of flush is dependent on the type of application.Please contact EnviroSeal ✓ Forces fluid Exchange for heat removal. to determine your application's suitability for total flush elimination. ✓ Removes Particulate. 7.Version P radial cross-section must be greater than.500"when using glass filled PTFE. E n v i roSeal AVAILABLE WORLDWIDE THROUGH US PATENTS#5,553,868 #5,167,418 .40 Engineering Products Limited A.W.CHESTERTON CO. Euro.Pat.App.0 912 848 P.O.Box 538,Waverley Nova Scotia,Canada BON 2S0 Tel(902)861-3464 Fax(902)861-3522 ST01272-280100 Website http://www.enviroseal.ca 4 ...,ezr,, ,,,,l., - .. PERMANENT w` F . B EAR I N G e ' `m �� PROTECTION ` � .``5 Bearing Isolator ram+ 1 77, �i.,,.,,141 • A. ��li _ _ -. C I N P RO/SEAL A Waukesha Bearings Business ________..,..,...miuimmo. INCREASE THE RELIABILITY OF YOUR ROTATING EQUIPMENT The Importance of The High Cost of Contact Seals Bearing Protection A common method of bearing protection is the contact seal. A contact seal Bearing failure is the leading cause is a bearing seal that uses contact on the shaft to retain lubrication and/or of rotating equipment failure across exclude contamination by creating a barrier to the bearing housing. Examples multiple industries and applications. of contact seals are lip seals, mechanical seals and magnetic seals. It leads to expensive unscheduled downtime and lost production. All contact seals have a finite life expectancy, eventually wearing at the point While there are many factors that of contact or grooving the shaft. As a result, they no longer effectively seal the contribute to failed bearings, over bearing enclosure. This short and unpredictable service life makes contact half of bearing failures are caused seals inadequate. Rotating equipment becomes unreliable, and catastrophic by contamination ingress into the failure due to bearing degradation is common. bearing housing and lubrication loss. To eliminate seal failure and increase equipment reliability, finite-life contact Manufacturers and users of rotating seals need to be replaced with a permanent solution. equipment are placing increased emphasis on bearing protection as a means of improving the overall reliability of their rotating equipment. r Stop LEADING CAUSES OF MOTOR FAILURE , VBXX® Interface BEARINGS 51% Stator 1 • %r£ n VBX�' Ring x . STATOR WINDINGS 16% D Groove 1 i , '_:., n EXTERNAL 16% .. Static Dynamic UNKNOWN 10% \ ROTOR BEARINGS 5% SHAFT COUPLING 2% k \\'', Rotor EASA:IEEE DATA fi i Rotor Drive Ring Lube Return ' , r Nlull rili SAME - DAY Expulsion Port SHIPPING AVAILABLE Stator Gasket t MOTORS w---e The Inpro/Seal® Solution - As the inventor of the original Bearing Isolator, Inpro/Seal has delivered proven permanent bearing protection for rotating equipment applications for more than 30 years. 43. The Inpro/Seal Bearing Isolator is a non-contacting, permanent bearing .et protection device. Inpro/Seal's patented design consists of a unitized stator and rotor that form a compound labyrinth seal with no wearing parts— ensuring permanent protection. The stator is typically pressed into the bearing PUMPS housing, while the rotor turns with the shaft. The Inpro/Seal Bearing Isolator protects in multiple ways. Lubricant is captured in the inner portion of the labyrinth and flows back to the bearing housing. Outside contamination attempting to enter the bearing housing is captured in the outer ,,,,,,e+ labyrinth paths and expelled through a port in the stator by centrifugal force and gravity. `A A Inpro/Seal's patented VBX®vapor blocking ring inhibits the free transfer of vapor contamination when the rotating equipment is cycled off. Benefits: • Non-wearing, non-contacting, permanent bearing protection • Patented VBX® ring blocks the transfer of vapor contamination created by heating/cooling of the bearing enclosure PILLOW BLOCKS • Split designs available for easy installation • Can be installed by OEMs or retrofitted on site j tea° • Maintenance free • Zero energy consumption • Can accommodate shaft sizes of 0.625—48.0 in. (1.59— 121.92 cm)* , • Standard temperature tolerances range from -35i F(-37 C)—400 F(204 C)* • Manufactured in bronze, stainless steel, aluminum or other materials for more extreme conditions .` *Utilizing special design and material provisions,products can be manufactured to exceed these ranges. � GEARBOXES .. The Inpro/Seal®Bearing Isolator is a non-contacting, non-wearing, permanent bearing protection device. _ ' GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE . The Inpro/Seal®Bearing Isolator is backed A Universal Solution by an unconditional performance guarantee. I The inpro/Seal® Bearing Isolator is a unique barrier for contamination ingress See our website for complete details t and lubrication retention for bearings installed in pumps, motors, gearboxes, ' ,~ —� �w --~°-- '�_,' pillow blocks, steam turbines, sleeve-bearing motors, paper machine rolls, machine tool spindles and many other types of rotating equipment. This technology has been applied across a variety of industries including chemical processing, food and beverage, mining, oil and gas, power generation, Unmatched primary metals, processing, and pulp and paper. Customer Service Inpro/Seal's responsive global sales No matter the size or complexity of your application, Inpro/Seal can design network is committed to making an isolator to fit your exact specifications. sure you have the right technology for your application, right when Experience You Can Trust Permanent bearing protection requires a custom engineered solution that you need it. We know that time means money for you. That's why takes into account all these factors: we offer same-day shipping on most • Lubrication type • Operating equipment products, even new designs. No • Bearing type • Shaft movement matter what your application, we • Flooded applications • RPM can deliver a custom engineered • Size restrictions • SFPM solution designed to meet your specific needs. You don't need to be an expert; our knowledgeable team will help. You can count on Inpro/Seal, the leader in bearing and system protection, to Technology you can rely on, maximize the uptime of your rotating equipment. We've been the trusted supported by customer service source for bearing isolator technology for more than 30 years and have you'll appreciate. installed millions of bearing isolators on multiple applications worldwide. The Inpro/Seal Advantage 7 """'1� Inpro/Seal is committed to delivering innovative technology and superior customer support...standard with every solution. When you work with Inpro/Seal, you can expect: • Same-day shipments available on most products, including new designs • Custom engineered solutions for your application and operating environment • Knowledgeable sales network providing localized support • Unconditional performance guarantee—see website for complete details READY TO GET STARTED? 4f • , f . Visit www.inpro-seal.com to contact your local Inpro/Seal representative or request a quote. All designs are custom engineered to fit exact requirements. The Inpro/Seal"'Bearing Isolator is a custom engineered solution and some designs may be protected by one,more than one or none of the following US and/or foreign patents and/or pending patent applications including US Pat.7,052,014,6.419,233;6,311,984;6,234,489;6,182,972;6,062,568;5,951,020;5,865,441;5,498,006.5,378,000 and 5,335,921. INPRO/SEAL www.inpro-seal.com I info@inpro-seal.com I +1309-787-4971 A Waukesha Bearings Business d11.002.1-0C13 Fairbanks Nijhuis Typical Pump Bearing Lubricants • Coating Manufacturer Tnemec • Surface Preparation SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. • Prime Coat Series 27 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color 1211 Red Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor • Intermediate Coat Series N69 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color 1211 Red Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor • Finish Coat Series 1075 Number of Coats One Dry Film Thickness 4 to 6 mils Color Pentair Blue Surfaces to be coated Exterior of Pump, Base and Motor 0605225SR3.doc PC-1000 F.C. TYPDXY° SERIES 27 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Polyamide Epoxy COMMON USAGE Versatile low-temperature coating ideally suited for steel fabrication and OEM applications.Also widely used as a field tie- coat.Provides fast curing and rapid handling capabilities.Note:Series 27 conforms with air pollution regulations limiting Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC)to a maximum of 340 grams/litre(2.8 lbs/gal). COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide.Note:Epoxies chalk with extended exposure to sunlight.Lack of ventilation,incomplete mixing,miscatalyzation or the use of heaters that emit carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide during application and initial stages of curing may cause yellowing to occur. FINISH Flat PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available.Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. COATING SYSTEM PRIMERS Steel:Self-priming or Series 1,3711,66,L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F,90,94-H20, 135,394,530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal:Self-priming,Series 66 or L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F. TOPCOATS Series 2H,30,66,73, 113, 114, 115,175,700,701,1028, 1029, 1070, 1071, 1072, 1074, 1075, 1077,1078.Note:Series 27 exterior exposed for 3 weeks or longer requires an epoxy intermediate coat or scarification prior to topcoating with Series 2H.Refer to appropriate topcoat data sheet for additional information. SURFACE PREPARATION STEEL SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning GALVANIZED STEEL&NON- Surface preparation recommendations will vary depending on substrate and exposure conditions.Contact your Tnemec FERROUS METAL representative or Tnemec Technical Services. OVERCOATING For overcoat applications,reference Tnemec Technical Bulletin No.98-10 and contact your Tnemec representative. ALL SURFACES Must be clean,dry and free of oil,grease and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 58.0±2.0%(mixed)t RECOMMENDED DR 2.0 to 6.0 mils(50 to 150 microns)per coat.Note:Number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate, application method and exposure.Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME Temperature To Touch To Handle To Recoat 75°F(24°C) 1/2 hour 2 hours 3 hours 65°F(18°C) 3/4 hour 4 hours 5-6 hours 55°F(11°C) 1 hour 4-5 hours 6-8 hours 45°F(7°C) 1-2 hours 6-8 hours 9-12 hours 35°F(2°C) 2-3 hours 9-12 hours 12-15 hours Curing time varies with surface temperature,air movement,humidity and film thickness. VOLITILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS Unthinned:2.36 lbs/gallon(282 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.83 lbs/gallon(339 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):2.83 lbs/gallon(339 grams/litre)t HAPS Unthinned:2.59 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.59 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):3.54 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 930 mil sq ft/gal(22.8 m2/L at 25 microns).See APPLICATION for coverage rates.t NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two:Part A and Part B PACKAGING 5 gallon(18.9L)pails and 1 gallon(3.79L)cans—Order in multiples of 2. NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 14.22±0.25 lbs(6.45±.11 kg)(mixed)t STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F(-7°C) Maximum 110°F(43°C) TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry)Continuous 250°F(121°C) Intermittent 275°F(135°C) SHELF LIFE 24 months at recommended storage temperature. FLASH POINT-SETA Part A:82°F(28°C) Part B:80°F(27°C) HEALTH&SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous.Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. ©September 29,2008 by Tnemec Inc. puhsshed technical data and instructions are sub;ect change widtout notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.com Page 1 of 2 Co., should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. PRODUCT DATA SHEET F.C. TYPDXY° I SERIES 27 APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES Dry Mils(Microns) Wet Mils(Microns) Sq Ft/Gal(mz/Gal) Suggested(1) 4.0(100) 7.0(180) 233(21.6) Minimum 2.0(50) 3.5(90) 465(43.2) Maximum 6.0(150) 10.5(265) 155(14.4) (1)Note:Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness.Allow for overspray and surface irregularities.Wet film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns.Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance.t MIXING Power mix contents of each container,making sure no pigment remains on the bottom.Pour a measured amount of Part B into a clean container large enough to hold both components.Add an equal volume of Part A to Part B while under agitation.Continue agitation until the two components are thoroughly mixed. Do not use mixed material beyond pot life limits.Note:Both components should be above 50°F(10°C)prior to mixing.For applications to surfaces between 35°F to 50°F(2°C to 10°C),allow mixed material to stand thirty(30)minutes and restir before using.For optimum application properties,the material temperature should be above 60°F(16°C). THINNING Use No.60 or No.4 Thinner.For air spray,thin up to 10%or 3/4 pint(380 mL)per gallon.For airless spray,brush or roller,thin up to 5%or 1/4 pint(190 mL)per gallon. POT LIFE 16 hours at 35°F(2°C) 2 hours at 77°F(25°C) 1/2 hour at 100°F(38°C) APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID Mat'l Hose ID Atomizing Pot Pressure Pressure 5/16"or 3/8" 3/8"or 1/2° 75-100 psi 25-35 psi DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704 (7.9 or 9.5 mm) (9.S�m�2.7 (5.2-6.9 bar) (1.7-2.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.015"-0.019" 4000-4800 psi 1/4"or 3/8" 60 mesh (380-485 microns) (276-331 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (250 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment,applicator technique and weather conditions. Note:Application over inorganic zinc-rich primers:Apply a wet mist coat and allow tiny bubbles to form.When bubbles disappear in 1 to 2 minutes,apply a full wet coat at specified mil thickness. Roller:Roller application optional when environmental restrictions do not allow spraying.Use 3/8"or 1/2"(9.5 mm to 12.7 mm)synthetic woven nap covers. Brush:Recommended for small areas only.Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 35°F(2°C) Maximum 135°F(57°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F(3°C)above the dew point.Coating won't cure below minimum surface temperature. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. tValues may vary with color. WARRANTY 8r LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc.THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NC)WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF.The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As a..lication,environmental and desi•n factors can vary significantl,due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating. 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City,Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMECI Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com ©September 29,2008 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. PDS27 Page 2 of 2 TNEMEC HI-BUILD EPDXOLINE® II SERIES N69 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Polyamidoamine Epoxy COMMON USAGE An advanced generation epoxy for protection and finishing of steel and concrete.It has excellent resistance to abrasion and is suitable for immersion as well as chemical contact exposure.Contact your local Tnemec representative for a list of chemicals.This product can also be used for lining storage tanks that contain demineralized,deionized or distilled water. COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide.Note:Epoxies chalk with extended exposure to sunlight.Lack of ventilation,incomplete mixing,miscatalyzation or the use of heaters that emit carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide during application and initial stages of curing may cause yellowing to occur. FINISH Satin SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS A two-coat system at 4.0-6.0 dry mills(100-150 dry microns)per coat passes the performance requirements of MIL-PRF- 4556F for fuel storage. PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available.Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. COATING SYSTEM SURFACER/FILLER/PATCHER 215 PRIMERS Steel:Self-priming or Series 1,27,37H,66,L69,L69F,N69F,V69F,90E-92,90-97,H90-97,90G-1K97,90-98,91-H20,94- H20, 135,161,394,530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal:Self-priming or Series 66,L69,L69F,N69F,V69F,161 Concrete:Self-priming or Series 130,215,218 CMU:Self-priming or 130,215,218,1254 TOPCOATS 22,4611-413,66,L69,L69F,N69,N69F,V69,V69F,72,73,84, 104, 113, 114, 141, 156, 157, 161, 175, 180, 181,287,446, 740,750, 1028,1029, 1070, 1070V, 1071,1071V, 1072, 1072V,1074, 1074U, 1075,1075U, 1077,1078,1080, 1081.Refer to COLORS on applicable topcoat data sheets for additional information.Note:The following recoat times apply for Series N69:Immersion Service-Surface must be scarified after 60 days.Atmospheric Service-After 60 days,scarification or an epoxy tie-coat is required.When topcoating with Series 740 or 750,recoat time for N69 is 21 clays for atmospheric service. Contact your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations. SURFACE PREPARATION PRIMED STEEL Immersion Service:Scarify the epoxy prime coat surface by abrasive blasting with fine abrasive before topcoating if it has been exterior exposed for 60 days or longer and N69 is the specified topcoat. STEEL Immersion Service:SSPC-SP1O/NACE 2 Near-White Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. Non-Immersion Service:SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. GALVANIZED STEEL&NON- Surface preparation recommendations will vary depending on substrate and exposure conditions.Contact your Tnemec FERROUS METAL representative or Tnemec Technical Services. CAST/DUCTILE IRON Contact your Tnemec representative or Tnemec Technical Services. CONCRETE Allow new concrete to cure 28 days.For optimum results and/or immersion service,abrasive blast referencing SSPC- SP13/NACE 6,ICRI CSP 2-4 Surface Preparation of Concrete and Tnemec's Surface Preparation and Application Guide. CMU Allow mortar to cure for 28 days.Level protrusions and mortar spatter. PAINTED SURFACES Non-Immersion Service:Ask your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations. ALL SURFACES Must be clean,dry and free of oil,grease,chalk and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 67.0±2.0%(mixed)t RECOMMENDED DFT 2.0 to 10.0 mils(50 to 255 microns)per coat.Note:MIL-PRF-4556F applications require two coats at 4.0-6.0 mils(100-150 microns)per coat.Otherwise,the number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate,application method and exposure.Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME AT 5 MILS DFT Without 44-70o Accelerator Temperature To Handle To Recoat Immersion 90°F(32°C) 5 hours 7 hours 7 days 80°F(27°C) 7 hours 9 hours 7 days 70°F(21°C) 9 hours 12 hours 7 days 60°F(16°C) 16 hours 22 hours 9 to 12 days 50°F(10°C) 24 hours 32 hours 12 to 14 days Curing time varies with surface temperature,air movement,humidity and film thickness.Note:For faster curing and low- temperature applications,add No.44-700 Epoxy Accelerator;see separate product data sheet for cure information. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS Unthinned:2.40 lbs/gallon(285 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):2.80 lbs/gallon(334 grams/litre) Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.80 lbs/gallon(335 grams/litre) HAPS Unthinned:2.40 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.4 Thinner):3.25 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%(No.60 Thinner):2.40 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 1,074 mil sq ft/gal(26.4 mt/L at 25 microns).See APPLICATION for coverage rates.t 1pf,2D 1©JU�V 2 13 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. ublished technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.com 7 should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative Page 1 of 2 for current technical data and instructions. PRODUCT DATA SHEET HI-BUILD EPDXOLINE® II I SERIES N69 NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two:Part A(amine)and Part B(epoxy)-One(Part A)to one(Part B)by volume. PACKAGING 5 gallon(18.9L)pails and 1 gallon(3.79L)cans-Order in multiples of 2. NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 13.67±0.25 lbs(6.10±.11 kg)(mixed)t STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F(-7°C) Maximum 110°F(43°C) TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry)Continuous 250°F(121°C) Intermittent 275°F(135°C) SHELF LIFE Part A:24 months;Part B: 12 months at recommended storage temperature. FLASH POINT-SETA Part A:82°F(28°C) Part B:93°F(34°C) HEALTH&SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous.Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES Dry Mils(Microns) Wet Mils(Microns) Sq Ft/Gal(m2/Gal) Suggested(1) 6.0(150) 9.0(230) 179(16.6) Minimum 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75) 537(49.9) Maximum 10.0(250) 15.0(375) 107(10.0) Dense Concrete&Masonry:From 100 to 150 sq ft(9.3 to 13.9 m2)per gallon. CMU:From 75 to 100 sq ft(7.0 to 9.3 m2)per gallon. (1)Note for Steel:Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness.Also, Series N69 can be spray applied to an optional high-build film thickness range of 8.0 to 10.0 dry mils(205 to 255 dry microns)or 11.5 to 14.5 wet mils(209 to 370 wet microns).Allow for overspray and surface irregularities.Film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns.Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance.t MIXING I.Start with equal amounts of both Parts A&B. 2.Using a power mixer,separately stir Parts A&B. 3.(For accelerated version.If not using 44-700,skip to No.4.) Add four(4)fluid ounces of 44-700 per gallon of Part A while Part A is under agitation. 4.Add Part A to Part B under agitation,stir until thoroughly mixed. 5. Both components must be above 50°F(10°C)prior to mixing.For application of the unaccelerated version to surfaces between 50°F to 60°F(10°C to 16°C)or the accelerated version to surfaces between 35°F to 50°F(2°C to 10°C),allow mixed material to stand 30 minutes and restir before using. 6.For optimum application properties,the material temperature should be above 60°F(16°C). Note:The use of more than the recommended amount of 44-700 will adversely affect performance. THINNING Use No.4 or No.60 Thinner.For air spray,thin up to 10%or 3/4 pint(380 mL)per gallon.For airless spray,roller or brush,thin up to 5%or 1/4 pint(190 mL)per gallon. POT LIFE Without 44-700:6 hours at 50°F(10°C) 4 hours at 75°F(24°C) 1 hour at 100°F(38°C) With 44-700:2 hours at 50°F(10°C) 1 hour at 75°F(24°C) 30 minutes at 100°F(38°C) SPRAY LIFE Without 44-700: 1 hour at 75°F(24°C) With 44-700:30 minutes at 75°F(24°C) Note:Spray application after listed times will adversely affect ability to achieve recommended dry film thickness. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray$ Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID Mat'l Hose ID Atomizing Pot Pressure Pressure 5/16"or 3/8" 3/8"or 1/2" 75-100 psi 10-20 psi DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704 (9.5 or 12.7 (7.9 or 9.5 mm) mm) (5.2-6.9 bar) (0.7-1.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray$ Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.015"-0.019" 3000-4800 psi 1/4"or 3/8" 60 mesh (380-485 microns) (207-330 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (250 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment,applicator technique and weather conditions. $Spray application of first coat on CMU should be followed by backrolling.Note:Application over inorganic zinc-rich primers:Apply a wet mist coat and allow tiny bubbles to form.When bubbles disappear in 1 to 2 minutes,apply a full wet coat at specified mil thickness. Roller:Use 3/8"or 1/2"(9.5 mm or 12.7 mm)synthetic woven nap roller cover.Use longer nap to obtain penetration on rough or porous surfaces. Brush:Recommended for small areas only.Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 50°F(10°C) Maximum 135°F(57°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F(3°C)above the dew point.Coating will not cure below minimum surface temperature. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. t Values may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY:Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc.THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR I.MPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF.The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO TILE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately re.resent all environments.As a.placation,environmental and design factors can vary sitnificantly,due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coatint. 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City,Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMECI Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemeccom ©July 29,2013 by Tnemec Co.,Inc. PDSN69 Page 2 of 2 Endura-Shield ® II SERIES1075 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane COMVIONUSAGE A coating highly resistant to abrasion, wet conditions, corrosive fumes and exterior weather- ing. High build quality combines with project specific primers for two-coat, labor saving systems. Fast curing options are available; see Curing Time below. Product has some applications as a direct to metal finish. Contact your Tnemec representative for more details. NOT FOR IMMERSION SERVICE. COLORS Refer to Tnemec Color Guide. Note: Certain colors may require multiple coats depending on method of application and finish coat color. When feasible, the preceding coat should be in the same color family, but noticeably different. . FINISH Semi-gloss SPECIALQUALIFICATIONS Series 1075 meets the requirements of SSPC-36 Paint Standard. PERFORMANCECRITERIA Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. TNEMEC COATING SYSTEM PRIMERS Steel: Series 20, FC20, 27,66, N68, N69,91-H20, 90-97, 104, 135, N140, 161, 530 Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal: Series 66, N69, 161 Concrete: Series 66, N69, 84, 104, 161 CMU: 54-660, 130. Intermediate coat required. Note: Before topcoating with Series 1075, Series 530 exterior exposed more than 24 hours must first be scarified or receive an intermediate coat of Tnemec polyamide epoxy. Also, Series N68 exterior exposed for 21 days or Series N69, 104, N140 or 161 exterior exposed more than two months must first be scarified or reprimed with themselves. Blasting with fine abrasive is the preferred method of scarification. TOPCOATS Series 76, optional when extended weatherability is desired. SURFACE PREPARATION ALLSURFACES Must be clean, dry and free of oil, grease and other contaminants. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS* 75 ± 2.0% (mixed) RECOMNENDEDDFT 2.0 to 5.0 mils (50 to 125 microns) per coat. Note: Number of coats and thickness requirements will vary with substrate, application method and exposure. Contact your Tnemec representative. CURING TIME Temperature To Touch To Handle To Recoat 75°F (24°C) 1 hour 6 hours 8 hours To resist moisture condensation: 6 hours. Curing time varies with surface temperature, air movement, humidity and film thickness. Note: For faster curing and low-temperature applications, add No. 44-710 Urethane Accelerator; see separate product data sheet. Contact Tnemec Technical Services for force curing times and temperatures. VOLATILE ORGANIC Unthinned No. 39 Thinner No. 42 Thinner No. 48 Thinner COMPOUNDS* (Maximum 15%) (Maximum 15%) (Maximun 15%) 1.84 lbs/gallon 2.42 lbs/gallon 2.48 lbs/gallon 2.55 lbs/gallon (220 grams/litre) (290 grams/litre) (297 grams/litre) (305 grams/litre) THEORETICALCOVERAGE* 1,203 mil sq ft/gal (29.5 m2/L at 25 microns). See APPLICATION for coverage rates. NUMBER OFCOMPONENTS Two: Part A and Part B MIXING RATIO By volume: Eight (Part A) to one (Part B) PACKAGING Three Gallon Kit: Consists of a partially-filled five-gallon can of Part A and a partially-filled half-gallon can of Part B. When mixed, yields three gallons (11.4L). One Gallon Kit: Consists of a partially-filled one-gallon can labeled Part A and a partially- filled pint can labeled Part B. When mixed, yields one gallon (3.79L). NET WEIGHTPERGALLON* 12.75 ± 0.25 lbs (5.80 ± .11 kg) STORAGETENPERATURE Minimum 20°F (-7°C) Maximum 110°F (43°C) TEMPERATURERESISTANCE (Dry) Continuous 250°F (121°C) Intermittent 275°F (135°C) Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice.The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. ©December 2002, by Tnemec Company, Inc. 1075 SERIES1075 Endura-Shield ® II TECHNICAL DATA continued FLASH POINT-SETA Part A: 95°F (35°C) Part B: 135°F (57°C) SHELF LIFE 12 months at recommended storage temperature. HEALTH&SAFETY This product contains chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous. Read container label warning and material safety data sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES* Conventional Build (Spray, Brush or Roller) High-Build (Spray Only) Dry Mils Wet Mils Sq Ft/Gal Dry Mils Wet Mils Sq Ft/Gal (Microns) (Microns) (m2/Gal) (Microns) (Microns) (m2/Gal) Suggested 2.5 (65) 3.5 (90) 481 (44.7) 4.0 (100) 5.5 (140) 301 (28.0) Minimum 2.0 (50) 3.0 (75) 602 (55.9) 3.0 (75) 4.0 (100) 401 (37.3) Maximum 3.0 (75) 4.0 (100) 401 (37.3) 5.0 (125) 6.5 (165) 241 (22.4) Note: Can be spray applied at 3.0 to 5.0 mils (75 to 125 microns) DFT per coat when extra protection or the elimination of a coat is desired. Allow for overspray and surface irregularities. Film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns. Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance. MIXING Stir contents of the container marked Part A, making sure no pigment remains on the bottom. Add the contents of the can marked Part B to Part A while under agitation. Continue agitation until the two components are thoroughly mixed. When used with 44-710 Urethane Accelerator, first blend 44-710 into Part A under agitation; continue as above. Do not use mixed material beyond pot life limits. Caution: Part B is moisture-sensitive and will react with atmospheric moisture. Unused material must be kept tightly closed at all times. POT LIFE 11/2 hours at 77°F (25°C) unthinned 2 hours at 77°F (25°C) thinned THINNING For air or airless spray, thin up to 15% or 1% pints (570 mL) per gallon with No. 42 Thinner if temperatures are below 80°F (27°C), use No. 48 Thinner for temperatures above 80°F (27°C). For brush and roller, thin 15% or 1'% pints (570 mL) per gallon with No. 39 Thinner. Note: Thinning is required for proper application. Caution: Do not add thinner if more than 30 minutes have elapsed after mixing. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 35°F (2°C) Maximum 120°F (49°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F (3°C) above the dew point. If coating is exposed to moisture before the applicable cure parameters are met, dull, flat or spotty appearing areas may develop. Actual cure time will vary with air movement, film thick- ness and humidity. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Air Cap Air Hose Mat'l Hose Atomizing Pot Tip ID ID Pressure Pressure DeVilbiss E 78 5/16" or 3/8" 3/8" or 1/2" 75-90 psi 10-20 psi MBC (7.9 or 9.5 mm) (9.5 or 12.7 mm) (5.2-6.2 bar) (0.7-1.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat'l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.009"-0.013" 3000-3500 psi 1/4" or 3/8" 100 mesh (230-330 microns) (207-241 bar) (6.4 or 9.5 mm) (150 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment, applicator technique and weather conditions. Roller: Use 1/4" (6.4 mm) synthetic nap cover. Do not use medium or long nap roller covers. Two coats are required to obtain dry film thickness above 3.0 mils (75 microns). Brush: Recommended for small areas only. Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. Two coats are required to obtain recommended film thickness above 3.0 mils (75 microns). CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner or MEK. * Values may vary with color. WARRANTY&LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY.Tnemec Company,Inc.warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company,Inc. THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY,EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED.INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company,Inc.shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer.NO OTHER REMEDY(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS,LOST SALES,INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY,ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS)SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER.Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures.Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests,accurately represent all environments.As application,environmental and design factors can vary significantly,due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating.FOR INDUSTRIAL USE ONLY. TNEMEC COMPANY INCORPORATED PRIMED IN USA 6800 CORPORATE DRIVE,KANSAS CITY,MISSOURI 641 20-1 3 7 2 TEL:1 800 TNEMEC 1 Www.tnemec.com (Y D AT305)1075 Omega Close-Coupled Design with Straight Bore Hubs NOTE:Hub/shoulder design B C B - B- c B varies per coupling size.Consult Rexnord _r for specific size assembly drawings. / I I (OUT) L (OUT) (IN) (IN) -- A ._• ._. I ,, _ (HUBS OUTBOARD) (HUBS INBOARD) Dimensions(in) Recom. Continuous Continuous Weight 4 Coupling Max. Max. C F Size Bore HP/100 Torque RPM A B D (lb) (in) l0 RPM (lb-in) (In) (Out) (In) (Out) E2 .9.3! 190 7500 3.50 0.94 134 1.90 1.85 3.97 immigoim 1.2 E3 1.38 0.58 365 7500 4.00 1.50 0.81 1.31 2.32 3.81 4.31 2.4 El .66+ 0.6G 650 7699 4,66 1.69 9.41 1.31 2.69 3.81 4.69 3.0 E5 1.88 1.48 925 7500 5.38 1.75 0.81 1.81 3.13 4.31 5.31 5.4 E10 2.13 2.30 1450 7500 6.38 1.88 0.56 1.84 3.65 4.31 5.56 8.2 E20 2.38 3.65 , 2300 6600 7.25 2.06 0.50 2.38 4.48 4.62 6.50 13.0 E30 2.88 5.79 3650 5800 8.25 2.31 0.56 2.44 5.42 5.19 7.06 21 E40 3.38 8.85 5500 5000 9.50 2.50 0.56 2.68 6.63 5.56 7.68 35 E50 3.63 12.14 7650 4200 11.00 0.63 3.38 8.13 6.13 8.88 54 E60 4 19.84 12,500 3800 12.50 3.25 0.69 3.44 8.75 7.19 9.94 72 E70 4.5 35.12 22,125 3600 14.00 3.62 0.75 3.75 9.25 8.00 11.00 86 E80 6 62.7 39,500 2000 16.00 4.87 0.75 5.00 11.25 10.50 14.75 170 E100 6.75 135 85,050 1900 21.00 5.50 1.75 3.75 14.13 12.75 14.75 244 E120 7.5 270 170,100 1800 25.00 6.00 2.25 4.88 17.63 14.24 16.88 425 E140 9.00 540 340,200 1500 30.00 7.00 3.00 5.00 20.88 17.00 19.00 746 O See page 17 for larger bore capacities with shallow keyways. © With maximum bore hubs. Split-in-Half Flex Element Reversible Hubs Allows disassembly and replacement without disturbing hubs Accommodates different shaft spacing requirements,and allows compression bushings to or connected equipment. be installed from either side of the hub. .r 1 i a x : • , , 00 Straight Bore Hubs QD Hubs and Bushings Taper-Lock Hubs and Bushings 8 NOTE:Dimensions subject to change.Certified dimensions of ordered material furnished on request. Installation ` j " .\ ` �. t. - r pp-- a . i y --f lmo;R 'two A Mount one hub to shaft,leave other hub loose for Place half of the Rexnord Omega element around hubs and Mount other half of the Omega element.Tighten all cap adjustment of spacing. secure with self-locking cap screws.Omega element will screws to recommended torques below and installation is space the other hub.Now secure the other hub. done.Refer to the installation instruction for further details. ' Tested Tough , � a, , Rigorous testing demonstrates that the Rexnord Omega a7 -' coupling protects connected equipment from the damaging .E effects of misalignment,vibration and gross overload. �+ it , Where other coupling designs might allow equipment ,,.f E damage,the super flexible element of Rexnord Omega couplings minimizes the reactionaryforces on equipment .iiill '!x- ' , bearings under severe misalignment conditions and , , reduces the effects of excessive shock overloads. t¢? Severe static testing(5 x rating)shows element flexibility, Demonstrates coupling's ability to accept severe rugged design and positive adhesive bond to the metal misalignment. shoes. Omega Coupling IMPORTANT Allowable Misalignment Recommended Cap Screw Torque for Proper Installation 4° Parallel + Coupling Size Torque-Dry } (lb-in) (lb-ft) Size 2-10 2 OMEGA ~ 3 OMEGA 4 204 17 30 HUB HUB 5 10 Angular 20 30 a 20 Size 20-50 — ^ 40 360 30 50 60 OMEGA Size 60-80 °NAB HUB 70 900 75 100 3240 270 10 III \Ikih ‘, 140 140 7080 590 IL Size 100-140 Ir/ NOTE:Cap screws have self-locking patches which should not be reused more than twice.Cap screws can 0o be further used if a thread locking adhesive is applied. 1/32 1/16 3/32 1/8 3/16 Do NOT Lubricate Cap Screw Threads. Parallel IMPORTANT NOTE: Coupling alignment is directly related to NOTE:Any combination of parallel and angular misalignment which falls under the triangle will not cause a premature smooth,efficient equipment operation.Care fatigue failure of the flexible element in normal use. should be taken for best possible alignment. 7 MOTOR DATA SHEET MOTOR/EQUIPMENT TAG FMB0605225A01 MOTOR NUMBER 18701928 SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA MANUFACTURER US Motors MODEL/SERIES CTI MODEL NO. 18701928 FRAME 215T ENCLOSURE TEFC NEMA DESIGN B HP 5 SERVICE FACTOR 1.15 RPM 1170 INSULATION CLASS F VOLTS 460 FULL LOAD AMPS 7.4 AMBIENT TEMP 40 Deq C PHASE 3 NO LOAD AMPS 4.8 DESIGN TEMP RISE B HERTZ 60 LOCK ROTOR AMPS 48 INRUSH CODE LETTER j 100%LOAD 75%LOAD 50%LOAD GUARANTEED MINIMUM EFFICIENCIES: 88.5 89.8 88.9 GUARANTEED MINIMUM POWER FACTOR: 74.3 68.1 56.7 MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: 2.5 KVAR ACCESSORIES MOTOR WINDING HEATER 115 VOLTS 36 WATTS WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION WINDING TEMP SWITCHES(YES/NO) YES RTD: Not Applicable TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE #OF WIRES NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP COEFFICIENT RECOMMENDED DEGREES RECOMMENDED DEGREES ALARM CELSIUS TRIP CELSIUS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS INVERTER DUTY*(YES/NO) YES PART WINDING(YES/NO) NO WYE-DELTA(YES/NO) NO 2 SPEED, 1 WINDING(YES/NO) NO 2 SPEED,2 WINDING(YES/NO) NO AREA CLASSIFICATION: Not Applicable CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE *Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31. Clean Water Services 16222-Data Sheet Low Voltage Motors Durham AWWTF Secondary -1- Up to 500 Horsepower Treatment System Expansion Project March 2018 CONFORMED SPECIFICATIONS Pentair Pump Group 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City,KS 66110 913-371-5000 FAX 913-748-4025 CERTIFIED MOTOR PERFORMANCE DATA MOTOR MANUFACTURER: U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS DATE: 17-Jan-19 FM PURCHASE ORDER #: 11868706 FM TAG#: 0605225A01 PERFORMANCE DATA BASED ON STANDARD RULES OF: X IEEE X ASA X NEMA HP SYNCHRONOUS FULL LOAD* FRAME TYPE ENCLOSURE SPEED(RPM) SPEED(RPM) NUMBER 5 1200 1170 215T CTI TEFC *Full Load Speed Tolerance Per NEMA MG1-12.46 is+/-20%of slip(Slip=Synchronous RPM-Full Load RPM) AMPERES MAX.TEMP. RISE NEMA PHASE HERTZ VOLTS FULL LOCKED INSULATION X RTD SERVICE KVA/HP NEMA LOAD ROTOR CLASS THERM. FACTOR CODE DESIGN 3 60 460 7.4 46.4 F 80 DEG C 1.15 J B AT1.0SF TORQUE AT FULL VOLTAGE MINIMUM GUARANTEED POWER FACTOR FULL LOAD LOCKED PULLOUT EFFICIENCY TORQUE AT STARTING BREAKDOWN FULL 3/4 1/2 FULL 3/4 1/2 FULL LOAD PERCENT OF FULL LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD SPEED(LB.FT) 88.5 89.8 88.9 74.3 68.1 56.7 22.4 264 320 VSS ❑ VHS n NRR n SRC n HORIZ X❑ BEARINGS: PAINT: (Attach Technical Data Sheets) Drive End Lubrication: LOWER X❑Factory Standard ❑Oil X❑Grease 00ther Oo osite End Lubrication: UPPER Oil X❑Grease MOTOR NO.: 18701928 MOTOR WEIGHT: 175 LBS. ROTATION: EBI-DIRECTIONAL Elm fCCW Certified by: paw Seveyket Date: 17-Jan-19 Revision # 1 FM013/0194 Pentair Pump Group 3601 Fairbanks Avenue Kansas City,KS 66110 913-371-5000 FAX 913-748-4025 Accessory Data Motor Manufacturer: U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS Date: 17-Jan-19 FM Purchase Order#: 11868706 FM Tag#: 0605225A01 Required Not Required Description Space Heaters: X❑ 1=1 Watts: 36 Voltage: 115 Thermostats: X❑ ❑ Type: ❑N.O. X❑N.C. Thermistors: 0 X❑ Make&Model: Trip Range: Quantity _relay not Supplied Per Motor: _relay supplied:Type: Ofactory set Dfield adjustable wiring diagram/ Winding RTD's: 0 X❑ Make&Model: Construction/OHM Rating: Quantity _relay not Supplied Per Motor _relay supplied:Type: Dfactory set field adjustable wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Bearing RTD's: X❑ Make&Model: Construction/OHM Rating: Quantity _relay not Supplied relay supplied:Type: factory set field adjustable wiring diagram/cut sheet attached. Ref.: Vibration Sensor: X❑ Make&Model: _relay not Supplied _relay supplied:Type: Ofactory set field adjustable wiring diagram/cut sheet attached.Ref.: Tests: X❑ X Complete Initial Test,unwitnessed -Sound Test,unwitnessed_ Vibration Test, unwitnessed— _Polarization Idex,witnessed Complete Initial Test,witnessed _^Reed Critical Frequency Test, unwitnessed X Short Commercial Test(Routine), witnessed -IEEE841+Enhanced No Load Test, unwitnessed Other Features: TEFC, HORIZONTAL, PREMIUM EFFICIENT, INVERTER DUTY/PART 31, HOSTILE DUTY DESIGN 1.15 SERVICE FACTOR(1.0 ON VFD POWER), CLASS F INSULATION, 40 DEGREE C AMBIENT, INSULIFE 2000 TRTMT NEMA DESIGN B, BI-DIRECTIONAL ROTATION, F-1 ASSEMBLY, 115V SPACE HEATERS, Q3 N.C. THERMOSTATS CLASS B TEMP RISE @ 1.0 SF, 60,000 HR L-10 BEARING LIFE, BRASS DRAINS, GROUND LUG IN CONDUIT BOX AEGIS SHAFT GROUND RING, SPECIAL BALANCE, STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE, DIRECT CONNECTED TO LOAD SHAFT DEFLECTION DOES NOT EXCEED .002 MILS THROUGHOUT THE OPERATING RANGE, 90.2% NNE, 74.3% PF MOTOR NAMEPLATES ARE STAMPED'MEETS NEMA MG-1, PART 31', CUSTOMER MOTOR DATA SHEET INCLUDED EXCEPTIONS/CLARIFICATIONS/COMMENTS: REVISION#1, 1/17/2019:ADDED SHAFT DEFLECTION OF .002 MILS MAX, COMPLETED CUSTOMER MOTOR DATA SHEET CONFIRMATION THAT MOTOR NAMEPLATE IS MARKED NEMA MG-1 PART 31 COMPLIANT, ADDED AEGIS SHAFT GRD Certified by: Pow S(aufater Date: 17-Jan-19 Revision#: 1 FM015/0198 EFFECTIVE: DIMENSION PRINT PRINT: 31-JAN-14 WITH 250 FRAME OUTLET BOX 1008-1-27 SUPERSEDES: FRAME: 210T SHEET: 18-JAN-02 BASIC TYPE: CT 1 OF 1 AB C AC I fN- P W-I-- II AlV V ES Ir�l 1 T I 1_ LAMMIlli aft. ii a il- -�� AF ar • ,, `'ram -1� Atli*IlL �� p Obe-=!111."ill 1 AA SIZE EV If CONDUIT J _ 1 j H. E }G H H-BS 2E 4 HOLES - 2F -� BA- i I B y F A ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND MILLIMETERS UNITS A B C 06 E 03 G +05 J N 0 P2 V IN 10.50 8.50 19.19 5.25 4.25 8.50 0.53 .41 1.75 3.75 10.78 10.94 MM 267 216 487 133 108 216 14 10 44 95 274 278 UNITS T U -.0005 V MIN W AA AB AC AF BA BS MIN EV IN 2.03 1.3750 3.13 .38 9.94 7.34 2.53 3.50 3.50 2.41 .75 1.50 MM 52 34.925 80 10 252 186 64 89 89 61 19 UNITS SO KEY J IN .313 MM 7.95 FRAME UNITS ±.03 IN 5.50 - 213T MM 140 IN 7.00 - 215T MM 178 1.ALL ROUGH DIMENSIONS MAY VARY BY.25 IN DUE TO CASTING AND/OR FABRICATION VARIATIONS. w CD 2.LARGEST MOTOR WIDTH. O w 3.TAP SIZE AND BOLT PENETRATION ALLOWANCE. 0 4.ALL TAPPED HOLES ARE UNIFIED NATIONAL COARSE,RIGHT HAND THREAD. 0 5.CONDUIT BOX MAY BE LOCATED ON EITHER SIDE OF MOTOR.CONDUIT OPENINGS MAY BE CD LOCATED IN STEPS OF 90 DEGREES REGARDLESS OF LOCATION.STANDARD AS SHOWN WITH CONDUIT OPENING DOWN. O 6.TOLERANCES SHOWN ARE IN INCHES ONLY. Nc' M 0 ISSUED BY M M.YRISSON a INFORMATION DISCLOSED ON THIS DOCUMENT APPROVED BY Nidec Motor Corporation IS CONSIDERED PROPRIETARY AND SHALL NOT BE MOTORS J. RANGEL = St. Louis, Missouri REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT OF NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATIONVilini EFFECTIVE: NEMA FRAME SIZE PRINT: 17-JUL-18 OUTLET BOXES 80-202-04 SUPERSEDES: STEEL CONSTRUCTION SHEET: NEW 2.125" BOLT PATTERN 1 OF 1 XY XZ 0 e- ll XX 1 AF AA SIZE CONDUIT O.B. PART NUMBERS O.B. OUTLET BOX DIMENSIONS VOLUME BASE P/N COVER P/N (CU.IN.) AA** AF XW* XX* XY XZ* 646865 378701 83 1.50 2.53 1.72 5.25 5.31 4.19 w 0 0 w 0 *DOES NOT INCLUDE GASKET MATERIAL THICKNESS. 0 **STANDARD CONDUIT SIZE SHOWN,CONFIRM ACTUAL VALUES co ON THE DIMENSION PRINT AND SUBMITTAL COVER LETTER. o N cc Q 0 0 ISSUED BY z D. CISNEROS INFORMATION DISCLOSED ON THIS DOCUMENT APPROVED BY - 0 Nidec Motor Corporation IS CONSIDERED PROPRIETARY AND SHALL NOT BE MOTORS D. PEREZ = St. Louis, Missouri REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT OF NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATIONMai e■l i MO2TOORSS CUSTOMER: Pentair ORDER NO.: 18701928-100 BEARING LIFE CALCULATION FOR CONRAD BALL BEARINGS Bearing life can be calculated with various degrees of sophistication, depending on the accuracy with which the operating conditions can be defined. Basic rating life equation The most simple method of life calculation is to use the ISO or AFBMA equation for basic rating life which is: 16667 '7 C \P Basic rating life equation: L10 = P � Where: = Basic rating life in hours C= Basic dynamic load rating P= Equivalent dynamic bearing load p= Exponent of the life equation 3 for ball bearings N= Revolutions per minute SIZE: 6208 Bearing Life (hrs) = Exceeds 100,000 RADIAL LOAD: 50 AXIAL THRUST: 1 N= 1170 C= 6900 P= 50 BY: DPC DATE: 7/17/2018 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI r,� ■liar MOTORS Performance vs Torque —1200 —10 —10 C EFFICIENCY S U — — K P P R C — .1 —f E W E T — POWER FACTOR D N — — T —1190 —8 —8 —100 \ AMPS I . / E I P I F -- — / — INPUT POWER N N F / Jr- iT / \ + T / ' / / / RPM —1180 —6 —6 —75 / 1 f / R M A /_ P N \1 P M S D —_ / —1170 / 4 4 —50 / / _ — — 7 / \ DISCLAIMER 1 p I / 1 / THE GRAPH DATA IS F I / / / TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. / -1160 2 2 —25 -.. I 5.00Hp 460 Volts 60 Hz i 1 40°C i —1150 —0 —0 —0 MPI=246832 6.00 12.00 18.00 24.00 30.00 TORQUE IN LB-FT 08-17-2018 NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION MOTORS LATERAL CRITICAL SPEED ANALYSIS DATA ORDER NO: 18701928-100 FRAME SIZE 215T A ,r. B ROTOR CORE C D 1 1 .-IMEIME �' DRIVE M_=^ E END mann SHAFT BEARING BEARING ROTOR DATA (dimensions in inches) A - ROTOR CORE B - ROTOR CORE C - OPPOSITE D - DRIVE END BRG. LOCATION LENGTH DRIVE END BRG. LOCATION 5.219 5.750 3.030 5.200 E - ROTOR CORE SHAFT LENGTH ROTOR CORE ROTOR ASSEMBLY DIAMETER END TO END WEIGHT (Ibs) WEIGHT (Ibs) 5.474 18.460 32.15 48.22 ROTOR INERTIA ROTOR INERTIA SHAFT/ROTOR ASM POLAR (Ib-ft2) TRANSVERSE (Ib-ft2) BALANCE .928 0.464 ISO 1940 G 2.5 BEARING DATA DRIVE END BEARING OPPOSITE END BEARING NUMBER STIFFNESS (lb/in) NUMBER STIFFNESS (lb/in) 40BCO2J3 3.16 X 106 40BCO2J3 3.16 X 106 SHAFT DATA DRAWING NO. MATERIAL DENSITY YIELD 0644279 AISI 1040 —1045 HR .283 LBS/IN3 45,000 psi TENSILE YOUNG'S MODULUS SHEAR MODULUS 82,000 psi 30.0 x106 psi 12.0 x 106 psi NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI MOTORS TORSIONAL ANALYSIS DATA ORDER NO: 18701928-100 FRAME SIZE 215T ROTOR CORE =En — �6�^ DRIVE r4 — , END MEM SHAFT I t TORSIONAL STIFFNESS SHAFT DATA DRAWING NO. MATERIAL DENSITY YIELD 0644279 AISI 1040 —1045 HR .283 LBS/IN3 45,000 psi TENSILE YOUNG'S MODULUS SHEAR MODULUS 82,000 psi 30 x106 psi 12 x 106 psi MOMENT OF INERTIA - ROTOR ASSEMBLY: WR2 = .928 LB-FT2 SHAFT TORSIONAL STIFFNESS: 6.4629 X 105 LB-IN/RADIAN Torsional stiffness is the spring rate or constant which allows a user to determine the amount of twist or angular deflection in a shaft based on the amount of torque applied. The portion of the shaft for which the shaft stiffness has been calculated from 1/3 the length of the rotor core to the end of the drive end of the shaft (shafts with an annular keyways are measured from inboard side of the ring groove). It is the users responsibility to correct for coupling mounting effects. SHAFT EXTENSION De - EFFECTIVE DIAMETER WITH KEYWAY 1.201 INCHES (1—__717)e NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI � NAMEPLATE CATALOG NUMBER: H5V3C_p � NAMEPLATE PART v� �___ 422OOO��7 -� L _ - � MODEL c�- -u FR T- 215T -1 TYPE ' CT -� ENCL 6-- TEFC --� L_. -- __- -�| SHAFT Opp 40B vz^3�QTY1 ��-- 4OBCO2J3'QTY1 END BRG __ END BRG U -U p� | - 3 MAX / 40C U |D# [--��� Ovdon#� 1 SO Line#: 1OO� U | - -- �K�8 � |i | � � "'"'"�" ' ' L__J| |NGUL Aam --- T-' CLASS �_ F U poo' ______. F1 | DUTY L —CONT | HP RPM 1170 |, Hp �____=I RPM VOLTS -----------' _��O ]F�� ---�|���- -�� VOLTS " FL 7O -�s��c__���qs----- -� FL AMPS _--� U AMPS SF SF || 78 | r�����--� r-'_-��- 1/`___. c�n AMPS .�__- -� AMPS 8F 1—=---7=--1 DESIGN s��------:l CODE p��--� SF U 115 '| DESIGN U B || CODE ] J | -~' -� ---'' NEMANOM NDK4 c�-��-^/ NEMANOM --90�-� NOK1 Ki�yya� EFFICIENCY pF EFFICIENCY -- �-]| PF |_-�`�_J| |-_��-_|| GUARANTEED MAX GUARANTEED K4AX ---�« �2 EFF|C|ENCy |----�� K\�`R n�����| HZ c- - EFFICIENCY , --- -�| K\A\R HAZARDOUS LOCATION DATA(IF APPuCuoLe): DIVISION CLAG8 | GROUP| -- - -- TEMP � CODE CLASG || GROUP || xpo DATA(IF APPuCAaLs): | --- --- --| VOLTS 460 | ---|`~---- ----^' | - -- -- AMPO 7�4 | - TORQVE1 | 224LBFT | T0RQUE2 �----- -��x �_ __. ' | --' - ' - --- o VFD LOAD TYPE 1 | VT7PVVM VFD LOAD TYPE 2 � ---- -----' - VFD HERTZ RANGE 1 | 6- �60 - - � VFD HERTZ RANGE 2 rc- --- --- -��� | --� ' --�� ------' VFD SPEED RANGE 1 | -- --12O'12UO ---- VFD SPEED RANGE 2 '` --' --- ---'-n | _J| --' --- SERVICE FACTOR [ 1OO ------- | FL SLIP " -n NO. POLES _ �- -n MAGNETIZING AMPS �---- -�--1 VECTOR MAX RPM .` -�-- ---��� EnoodorPPR Radians/Seconds �` --- --- ' 7-1 Encoder Volts TsAO DATA(IF APPumAoLs}: HP(AIR OVER) F---- ./ Hp(AIR OVER r _����� RPM .^__ __ RPK4 OVER, M/G) OVER) xx/u) FPK4AIR FPMA]R FPMA|R Ty "--_ ADDITIONAL NAMEPLATE DATA: 1 WD=499495 Customer PN , FMB0605225A01 I Decal/Plate 1 Notes I Non Rev Ratchet i Max Temp Rise L 80C RISE/RES@1.00SF I OPP/Upper Oil Cap I GREASE I Thermal(WDG) I OVER TEMP PROT 2 j SHAFT/Lower Oil Cap I GREASE I Altitude I Regulatory Notes I Regulatory Compliance I i CC 030A I COS I 1 Marine Duty Bala nce 0.08 IN/SEC I Arctic Duty I 3/4 Load Eff. 1 90.7 Inrush Limit i : I Motor Weight(LBS) I 1 175 Direction of Rotation Sound Level SpecialI Note 1 i I Vertical Thrust(LBS) i Special Note 2 I Thrust Percentage I Special Note 3 1 1 1 1 Bearing Life I I Special Note 4 Starting Method I I Special Note 5 Number of Starts I Special Note 6 1 ! I 200/208V 60Hz Max Amps I SH Max.Temp. . i 190V 50 hz Max Amps I SH Voltage I SH VOLTS=115V I 1 380V 50 Hz Max Amps I SH Watts 1 SH WATTS=36W I_ NEMA Inertia I i Load Inertia S tI ump eaer Voltage 1 Sumpheater Wattage I Special Accessory Note 1 I Special Accessory Note 16 Special Accessory Note 2 I Special Accessory Note 17 Special Accessory Note 3 i Special Accessory Note 18 I Special Accessory Note 4 I GREASE LUBRICATED I Special Accessory Note 19 im Special Accessory Note 5 I RECOMMENDED GREASE IL I Special Accessory Note 20 I I Special Accessory Note 6 I EXXON POLYREX-EM I Special Accessory Note 21 1 Special Accessory Note 7 I , Special Accessory Note 22 I Special Accessory Note 8 I Special Accessory Note 23 I_ 1 Special Accessory Note 9 , Special Accessory Note 24 I 1 1 Special Accessory Note 10 IL j Special Accessory Note 25 Special Accessory Note 11 L 1 Special Accessory Note 26 I Special Accessory Note 12 I Special Accessory Note 27 Special Accessory Note 13 i i_ Special Accessory Note 28 Special Accessory Note 14 Special Accessory Note 29 1 i Special Accessory Note 15 I I Special Accessory Note 30 I_ 1 Heater in C/B Voltage I I Heater in C/B Watts I _I Zone 2 Group I 1 Division 2 Service Factor 1_ 1 1 Note 1 I Note 2 I I I Note 3 i I NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 1---- r, ST. LOUIS, MO ., TYPICAL NAMEPLATE DATA ACTUAL MOTOR NAMEPLATE LAYOUT MAY VARY SOME FIELDS MAY BE OMITTED Nidec trademarks followed by the®symbol are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. GREASE LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS Units are prelubricated at the factory and do not require initial lubrication. Relubricating interval depends upon speed,type of bearing and service.Refer to Table 1 for suggested regreasing inter- vals.Operating conditions may dictate more frequent lubrication.Motor must be at rest and electri- E cal controls should be locked open to prevent energizing while motor is being serviced(refer to sec- N tion on Safety).If motor is being taken out of storage,refer to storage procedures. G tL To relubricate bearings,remove the drain plug.Inspect grease drain and remove any blockage with a mechanical probe taking care not to damage bearing. $ A CAUTION Under no circumstances should a mechanical probe be used while H the motor is in operation.Add new grease at the grease inlet,refer to Table 1 for replenishment quantities. New grease must be compatible with grease in the motor(See Caution Note).Run the motor for 15 to 30 minutes with the drain plug removed to allow purging of any excess grease.Shut off unit and replace the drain plug.Return motor to service.Some motors have sealed bearings and are not regreasable. Over greasing can cause excessive bearing temperatures, premature lubricant breakdown and bearing failure.Care should be exercised against over greasing. Table '1 Recommended Grease Replenishment Quantities &Intervals (For lubrication of units in service) Raring Number Bearing Grease Lubrication Interval Common AMA Type FL Os, 62XX 63XX XX8CO2 XXSCO3 1801.3600 RPM 1201.1800 RPM 0-1290 RPM 6203-e2O7 030.0.-9:% 17_35 '3,3 0 2 2 Year, :1 Yv.irs 3 Ym 52130-6212 6.357-5 339 43-63 3r.-15 3 4 1 Y:,ar 2 Yew:, 2 Years Ball 6213 215 0310-63“ 65•75 50-0,5 0 6 Year 2 Ycars 21aura c214-5219 Q312 F31b 23.31 6C-1S !0 - fi!Ace >'<a• 2Y^_ats 0•2,-43228 6:1'-6-32D 1o} 1a3i 80-10,a 1.A .1 tans. ?Yfiir I vaar NJ13t 2r0:y1 3 a !:J109 45R'L133 0 4 NLI311 5 RU"1 ;0 014 G+M1_s r Yea' NJ215 75RL032 a 13 14J31 rmR123 10 1,411223 t4R052 I hJ272 L 1L332 1 4 N-..A J 11;-;. ri:!%79 1 duRlli 1.9 C2711{;1t211 2::A :3 4 C271s 343031 14 A 4.6 N'. 6 Year C23t0 CARD N A ' C2220 CARD N:A 1,1 C2222 CARE N A e E N h 3 A1c 0 V C2226 CAB N;A 2 5 For motors mounted vertically or in hostile environments, reduce intervals shown by 50 percent. Refer to motor nameplate for bearings provided on a specific motor. For bearings not listed in table above, the amount of grease required may be calculated by the formula: G=0.11xDxB Where: G=Quantity of grease in fluid ounces. D=Outside diameter of bearing in inches. B=Width of bearing in inches. 5-En Table 2 RECOMMENDED GREASES THE FOLLOWING GREASES ARE INTERCHANGEABLE WITH THE GREASE AS PROVIDED IN E UNITS SUPPLIED FROM FACTORY (UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE ON A LUBRICATION N NAMEPLATE PROVIDED ON MOTOR). G MANUFACTURER GREASE(NLGI No.2) MOBIL CORP. POLYREX•EM CHEVRON U.S.A.INC. SRI NO,2 A CAUTION Greases of different bases(lithium,polyurea,clay,etc.)may not be compatible when mixed.Mixing such greases can result in reduced lubricant life and premature bearing failure. When necessary, prevent such intermixing by disassembling the motor,removing all old grease from bearings and housings(including all grease fill and drain holes).inspect and replace damaged bearings.Fill bearing housings and bearing approximately 30/full of new grease.Remove any excess grease extending beyond the edges of the bearing races and retainers. Refer to Table 2 for recommended greases. 6-En Silicone Rubber Heaters Improve Heat Transfer, A Speed Warm Ups and '' ` Decrease Wattage Requirements : (--„,,„`-,a,• Rugged,yet thin, lightweight and flexible—the use of , k & Watlow®silicone rubber heaters is limited only by the � `''" imagination. With these heaters, heat can be placed where 0.055 in.(1.4 mm) it is needed. In the application process these heaters Thick Heater with improve heat transfer, speed warm ups and decrease Wire-Wound Element Twattage requirements. LeadsAvar ilalblene Fiberglass-reinforced silicone rubber gives the heater dimensional stability without sacrificing flexibility. Because o 0 very little material separates the element from the part, heat ��`; �' ° transfer is rapid and efficient.The heaters are constructed NNz✓< ...- with a wire-wound element or an etched foil element. *� The heater construction creates a very thin heater allowing 0.022 in.(0.6 mm)Thick Heater it to fit applications where space is limited. with Etched Foil Element Performance Capabilities Element Vulcanized p Between Two Layers of • Operating temperatures up to 500°F(260°C) Silicone Rubber/Fiberglass • • Watt densities up to 80 W/in2(12.5 W/cm2), dependent upon application temperature Typical Applications • Wire-wound element thickness — 0.055 in. (1.4 mm) • Freeze protection and condensation prevention for many • Etched foil element — 0.022 in. (0.56 mm) types of instrumentation and equipment • UR®, cUR®,VDE and CE recognitions are available on • Medical equipment such as blood analyzers and test many designs up to 428°F(220°C) tube heaters • Computer peripherals such as laser printers Features and Benefits • Designed to the exact shape and size needed Curing of plastic laminates • • Conforms to your component and/or equipment Photo processing equipment More than 80 designs available immediately from stock • Semiconductor processing equipment • Reduces downtime Mounting Methods Constructed with wire-wound or etched foil elements • Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Surface(PSAS) • Delivers a thin, lightweight heater • Silicone contact cement kit • Provides the desired flexibility for many dynamic • Field applied adhesive applications • Mechanical fasteners • Delivers low mass and easily repeatable distributed watt densities • Factory bonding Moisture-and chemical-resistant silicone rubber material • Provides longer heater life Vulcanizing adhesives or fasteners • Allows heaters to be easily bonded to the part WATLOW® Better Thermal Solutions...Faster COL-SRH-0311 ©2001,2011 Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company,all tights reserved. Termination Styles Extended Capability Termination Style Watlow offers many types of leads and terminations. HPN Cord and Plug Set Leads can project from any position along the perimeter of the unit.They will be centered on the short side width of rectangular heaters unless otherwise specified. Teflon®UL®1180 CSA - III Leads Shown Exiting End of Molded Leads are Shown Exiting Edge of Heater. Heater,Centered on Short Side Capped Leads are also Available Watlow's leads are 12 in. (305 mm) long, white,Teflon® insulated,flexible, plated copper UL°1180 CSA wire.They For removable heaters, a 6 ft(1.8 m) HPN cord and plug set are rated for 392°F(200°C)/300V. The lead connections provides convenience. It is rated for 194°F(90°C)/300V. HPN on or at the heater are insulated with a cap of sheath cord without a plug is also available in any length. material, vulcanized to the heater body. Teflon®Leads Extended Capability Options Formed Heaters r e___<51P 6/ I Leads Shown Exiting Middle of Heater Teflon®Type E(MIL-W-16878)and Teflon®UL° 1199 rated for 392°F(200°C)/600V are also available. 9114 Silicone Insulated Leads �/ a Many three-dimensional shapes, such as cylinders, cones and boxes, can be factory formed. Semi-rigid shapes can be self-gripping to the part. Special Leads Shown Exiting tooling may be required for some designs. Corner of Heater Holes, Cutouts and Notches For a better moisture seal, specify UL°silicone insulated lead wires.This lead type is rated for 302°F(150°C)/600V.Any /! lead length is available. Note:Silicone rubber heaters are not designed to be waterproof. Excess exposure to moisture may facilitate premature heater failure. Option Thermal Insulation To increase the heating efficiency of Watlow can provide flexible heaters with special holes, your application, silicone rubber cutouts and notches in nearly any position required for heaters can be thermally insulated your design.The resistance element can be brought to with silicone sponge rubber, bonded to within 'IA in. (3.2 mm)of all edges. Standard spacing is one side in the following thicknesses: %in. (6 mm)from all edges. /,6 '/ '/ 3A or'/ in. (1.6, 3.2, 6, 9.5 or 13 mm) _ An aluminized surface can be added to the back of the heater to reduce --� radiated heat losses.This aluminized surface, called "low loss treatment," Watlow®is a registered trademark of Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company. adds very little to the unit thickness Teflon®is a registered trademark of E.I.duPont de Nemours&Company. and maintains a very clean appearance. UR®and cUR°are registered trademarks of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. To be automatically connected to the nearest North American Technical Sales Office: 1 -800-WATLOW2 • www.watlow.com • inquiry@watlow.com International Technical Sales Offices:Australia,+61 3 9335 6449•China,+86 21 3381 0188•France,+33 1 41 32 79 70 Germany,+49(0)72 53/94 00-0• Italy,+39 024588841 •Japan,+81 3 3518 6630• Korea,+82 2 2628 5770 Malaysia,+60 3 8076 8745•Mexico,+52 442 217 6235•Singapore,+65 6773 9488•Spain,+34 91 675 12 92 Taiwan,+886 7 288 5168•United Kingdom,+44(0)115 964 0777 970798 SPACE H EAT E R CONNECTION DIAGRAM SPACE HEATER LEADS MAY BE LOCATED IN EITHER THE MAIN OUTLET BOX OR IF SO EQUIPPED, AN AUXILIARY BOX MOTOR AWL CSTST ACTART€R pm.) MOTOR ENCLRE I 1 PHASE44 1 t I r of... THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUPPLIED WITH ANTI- CONDENSATION HEATERS. HEATERS SHOULD BE ENERGIZED WHEN EQUIPMENT IS NOT OPERATING TO PROTECT UNIT BY PREVENTING INTERNAL CONDENSATION. CONNECT THE"H"OR HEATER LEADS TO 115V VOLTS 36W WATTS RATING SPACE HEATER NAMEPLATE (ON MOTOR) Revision: 7/30/2008 Mike Cullen Thermal Protector for Motor/Fluorescent ballasts and Temperature Sensing Controls The Klixon®9700 protector is a field proven miniature protector developed to protect shaded pole and permanent split capacitor motors, fluorescent ballasts, solenoids, transformers and other electrical equipment against overheating. KEY BENEFITS In addition to being small and lightweight, the unit is both temperature and cur- rent sensitive. Since the 9700 is sealed to withstand varnish dipping, it can be mounted directly in windings where it can best sense the true temperature of the electrical equipment.As a result, over-temperature protection is assured. Miniature size-compact design assures ease of installation Since the case is not electrically insulated, the protector is furnished with a Precision Calibration-temperature cali- durable Mylar insulating sleeve. Shrinkable and non-shrinkable sleeves are brated and inspected in controlled available. ambients for dependable consistent performace Technical Characteristics Snapaction-positive make and break assured with proven Klixon®strip Purpose of control: thermal motor protector(IMP) disc...contact pressure at open temper- thermal ballast protector(TBP) ature eliminates nuisance trips due to vibration thermal cut-out(TCO) Contact capacity: 250VAC 13A for TCO Sealed steel case-withstands impreg- 250VAC 2A for TBP nation and baking...maybe varnish Temperature range: 60°C to 150°C for TCO and TMP dipped...prevents changes in calibra- tion during installation 60°C to 135°C for TBP Tolerance on Open temp: +/- 5K or+/-8K Automatic action: Type 3C for TMP Type 2C for TBP and TCO Operating time: Continuous Pollution situation: Normal Extent of sensing element: Whole control PTI of the insulation: 175 Enclosure protection degree: IPOO 245 665 14 ...a- '�.�0--+� a. 7 0 w-- 48 — ' —►1 12.5 , , , , ,., , , -• 11. ,. -, - , . , L.Jitiittitte trip c tirrettt vi, ambient 9700 X X YY -ZZZ—Zi Z.Wire Lead and sleeve i temperature ! ----— - Serial number is assigned for each lead and sleeve configuration, i.e wire type,length,AWG#,stripped 1 length,sleeve type,and length ,.Y Operating temperature and actuation disc material Serial number is assi ned for each desired temperature and resistance ratiogr 1 , NominalResistance of actuation disc 1 1 operating f (ptims/o i_cnt_0_ 250 85 _ 1 temperature 30 I 100 1 4751 1 ' Tem erature code 1-- 60 56 57 58 59 - 60-1-1 1 80 91 92 93 94 95 I 1 . 90 21 22 23 24 25 i 1 100 26 27 28 29 30 , 110 36 37 38 39 40 1- 120 1 -`---- 2 3 4 130 11 12 13 14 15 140 66 a 67 68 69 70 1 150 46 I 47 48 49 5 i. -° This is a typical temperature code There is a temperature code at each 5'C in a step from 60 to 150`C . , X Open Temperature tolerance Example % I",,.'mom ii MOW*i ' 'gliNOM B) P,IC +1-5K 9700K01-215 2:+/-8K " Bimetal of 30ohms/cmf, 1 120c operating temperature. i X.Contact material combination +/-5K tolerance with Axerage first cycle tripping time Code Statio nal contact Movable contact AWG#18;UL3343 125"(-600V) 'Li vs current 25 C. ambient SteelL +Fine silver I Steel+copper+ ; Silver Cadmium oxide ; 66 7mm length leads Ag-Ni+Silver Steel+copper+ i K Cadmium oxide Silver Cadmium oxide thick 0 15mm dia 6 9mm,; H Brass+Fine silver Steel+copper+ ; length 34mm,Mylar sleeve Silver Cadmium oxide Ni+Fine silver Steel+Fine silver i SP 2 Brass+Fine silver Steel+Copper+ i Ag-Ni , Type"S"is set up for Cadmium-free contact „,„-----1-'-'- 9700-Device Identification ---1 ..„,-..--- L ,—..-„...,- . . ' ....,, Certifications Agency File number Standard Note UL E 15962 UL2111 Motor protector ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-9 Thermal cut-out ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-2 Thermal motor protector ENEC 2014531.10 EN60730-2-3 Thermal ballast protector CQC CQCO200 2001344 I" iiio, .0.0...t ',,. samon 1 ,10 TECHNICAL / SALES SUPPORT • •• • • • • • • • •• Holland Internet wwvv,sensata coin • • • 0 Phone +31 546 879560 Fax +31 546 879204 Italy Errlail: into.,cpe:g)JIst,SonsaLi coin Phone +39 039 6568310 Fax +39 039 6568316 Technolog i . Important Notice:The products and services of Sensata Technologies and its subsidiaries described herein are sold subject to Sa es e ta s standard terms and conditions of sale.Customers are advised to obtain the most current and complete information aboutnsSensata products and services before placing orders.Sensata assumes no liability for applications assistance, customer's applications or product designs,software performance,or infringement of patents.Thpublicationof informationthereof ri rearriino any other comnanv's nroriur.ts or services does not constitute Se nor oval anoval warrant endorsement v or THERMOSTATS 1. MOTOR IS EQUIPPED WITH QTY-3(1 PER PHASE)NORMALLY CLOSED THERMOSTATS. THERMOSTATS ARE SET TO OPEN AT HIGH TEMPERATURE. 2. CONTACT RATINGS FOR THERMOSTATS: 120-600 VAC, 720 VA N. C.THERMOSTATS P1 P2 NOTE:THERMOSTATS LEADS MAY BE LOCATED IN EITHER THE MAIN OUTLET BOX OR IF SO EQUIPPED,AN AUXILIARY BOX. ACCESSORY LISTING QTY-3 N.C.THERMOSTATS REVISION DESCRIPTION FOR: MISC SCALE UNITS TITLE STL0211 -UPDATED FORMAT. NONE IN CUSTOMER NIDEC MOTOR TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS CORPORATION (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) CONNECTION DIAGRAM INCHES mm ISSUED BY APPROVED BY REVISION DATE MATERIAL. 24-FEB-i l R. KING C. CADE --- CODE DWG NO. REV SHEET DWG NIDEC CONFIDENTIAL MUST BE COMPLIANT TO RoHS DIRECTIVE EU 2002/95/IEC ANGLES x�=±,� 0834066 G 1 OF 1 A NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 24-Feb-11 AND REGULATION EC 1907/2006(REACH)AS AMENDED NUMBER SIZE NMCA(JAN-2011) SOLIDEDGE /rrIC g(C),\ Protectin VFD-Driven Motors: I Ar MMIM -.imam ■ awe. Bearing Protection BEARING PROTECTION RINGS Best Practices VFD-Driven Motors Can Fail From Destructive Bearing Currents-Costing Downtime and Lost Production . , Motors operated by variable frequency drives (VFD) are vulnerable to ti premature bearing failure from VFD induced shaft voltages and bearing '. .p . currents - sometimes within only weeks or months - and the result is ; .4 v costly down time and production interruptions. ' 4 VFDs induce destructive shaft voltages and high frequency currents .4 ; y , which will cause electrical discharge machining (EDM) pitting, fusion , craters,and fluting damage to the motor's bearings and deteriorate the 4 bearing lubrication by allowing electrical arcing to burn the grease. EDM Pitting and Fluting Cost Avoidance-Follow Best Practices to Ensureimi- „ult Uptime and Reliability Motor repair best practices will provide bearing protection from these .`-"----- '� destructive bearing currents by adding AEGIS® Shaft Grounding Ring ,-" A� Technology and when needed insulating a bearing to prevent high . .• v F , frequency circulating currents. . v •Motors up to 100 HP-Add AEGIS®Shaft Grounding Ring to discharge li shaft voltages to ground. muok`', •Motors over 100 HP-Add AEGIS®Rings by one bearing and insulate AEGIS®Shaft Voltage Testing the opposite bearing. r. ' t Detailed recommendations are contained in the =- 00" AEGIS®Shaft Grounding Ring Motor Repair + - ��� z Handbook-an essential reference available upon I request at www.est-aegis.com/bearing Motor Bearings are the Most Vulnerable Parts- .• '�� !' Cost of a Failed Motor Adds Up Quickly t4 , 6% 0.5% Solution:AEGIS®Bearing Protection Rings ` !' ■Downtime cost • . r t p ■Motor Repair Cost 93% ,. Rigging and Transportation -' Tht ' ■Overhead The return on investment in repairing motors and following the ` ,, , , ;'' AEGIS® Shaft Grounding Ring Motor Repair Handbook's best practices � v� recommendations will pay dividends day after day and ensure the most r 4 reliable repair to the motor. IlIA" AEGIS®uKIT Mounting -. � , . fO�'\ /=r I C®rr ` / `��IN Options l lk � i \ j _ BEARING PROTECT/ON RINGS Y Patented Technology uKIT - SGR with Universal Mounting Brackets Motors up to and including 100 HP(75 kW) ,0* Sized for NEMA and IEC Frame motors Low Voltage �— ,, . • Solid and Split Ring — Cso15 Install with screws or conductive epoxy AEGIS,'SGR /•-, a• , e 'M 4 different bracket sizes �cis s, P R •/ ' ''' Conductive Epoxy Mounting(-OAK-0A4W) 5�R snnc "Shaftdiameters:0311"to6.02. I �.. "=1 • '' • Solid and Split Ring Conductive Epoxy Included •Install one AEGIS®SGR Bearing Protection Ring on either s • the drive end or the non-drive end of the motor. Standard Mounting Brackets(-1) •AEGIS®SGR may be installed either internally or externally. ! Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02" •Use AEGIS®Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating (PN#CS015)on Mounting clips,6-32 x 1/4"cap screws and motor shaft where fibers touch. washers Product recommendation:AEGIS®SGR • ^f Motors Greater than 100 HP(75 kW) .�lr ` ` sleeve 'Qe° C5015 .' AEGIS Ring e^�'- Insulated Bearing `Y Bolt Through Mounting(-3FH) st.tw } Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02" ;' : ®eicu"en� • _ ,. • 6-32 x 1/2'flat head screws • - ' 2 mounting holes to shaft size3.395" r a . a 4 mounting holes for larger sizes Install AEGIS'Ring on opposite end of insulation fi. w •Non-Drive end: Bearing housing must be isolated with Press Fit Mounting insulated sleeve or coating or use insulated ceramic or Shaft diameters:0.311"to 6.02" - •__ - hybrid bearing to disrupt circulating currents. M*` Clean dry 0.004"press fit •Drive end: Install one AEGIS®Bearing Protection Ring. Press into motor end bracket or bearing cap •AEGIS®Ring can be installed internally on the back of the bearing cap or externally on the motor end bracket. •Use AEGIS®Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating(PN#CS015)on Large SGR,iPRO,WTG motor shaft where fibers touch. • Large Rings over 6.02" Product recommendation: tom= . 4- iPRO for Medium Voltage Motors •Low Voltage Motors up •Medium Voltage Motors: WTG for Wind Turbine Generators to 500HP:AEGIS®SGR AEGIS®iPRO '�� •Low Voltage Motors over 500HP:AEGIS'IPRO �'111111, : _ Accessories . SVP-AEGIS®Shaft Voltage Probe '`.' 'd • For more recommendations,download the me ,. gi" p. CS015-AEGIS Colloidal Silver Shaft Coating 1 4' EP2400-AEGIS®Conductive Epoxy AEGIS®Handbook from our website. o � ?. r--� ' • www.est-aegis.com/bearing Itlit `,, ©2015 Form 105-7 Electro Static Technology I 1 -866-738- 1857 I www.est-aegis.com MOTORS Standard Paint Specification For EM Gray NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION Industrial Motors & Systems Division Monterrey, Mexico MOTORS ‘141137 1. Air dry topcoat enamels for use on cast iron (primed), steel (primed), aluminum, and plastic (primed or unprimed) surfaces. 2. Spray application, total dry film thickness of the topcoat shall be a minimum of 2_0 Mils and a Max. of 4.0 Mils. 3. Reduction: All materials shall be supplied suitable for application at the specific facility in conjunction with the application equipment employed, without reduction. 4. Basic Physical Requirements: A. Salt Spray(fog)testing A.S.T.M. B-117-90 Minimum 250 hours D. Adhesion by tape test A.S.T.M. D3359-90. Coating removal shall pass classification 4 or 5 E. Film hardness by pencil test A.S.T.M. D3363-74 shall pass B to HB. F. Elongation of attached organic coating with cylindrical mandrel. A.S.T.M. D522-88. Pass 1/4 inch-no cracking or flaking G. Resistance of organic coatings to the effects of rapid deformation (impact). Direct Impact: Pass 28 inch pounds, A.S.T.M. D2794-90 Reverse Impact: Pass 28 inch pounds K. Chemical Resistance: A.S.T.M. D1308-87 Spot Test, Open per paragraph 7.3 - 1 Hour Duration: Sulfuric Acid 10% Nitric Acid 10% Hydrochloric Acid 10% Acetic Acid 10% Sodium Hydroxide 10% Sodium Chloride 10% All (3)USEM standard Gear Oils 100% M. The topcoat enamels will dry to package in cardboard boxes without chafing at the following schedules: 1. Force Dry: 1-2 minute flash, 3-5 minute @ 150-200°F and 3-5 minute cool down. 2. Air Dry: A minimum of 5 minutes at a relative humidity of 50% @ 70-80°F. N. Label Test: Apply a USEM performance specification label (nameplate) to a test panel cured for seven days and immerse in distilled water for 48 hours. Upon removal allow a 5 minute recovery period and remove label. No paint shall be removed with the label. O. Shelf Stability: The unreduced enamel after three months storage in a closed, filled container at room temperature (20°C) shall show no permanent separation and readily mix to homogeneous state. The unreduced viscosity shall not have risen more than 30 Saybolt seconds. MOTORS 5. Vendor Formulation Approval: A. To approve a vendor's formulation, the listed tests shall be certified by the vendor in writing (to the plant and copied to engineering for approval) that the paint has met the above requirements, listing results in appropriate terms (Pass/Fail, Hrs., days, etc.). Engineering may at its discretion perform these tests using in-house capabilities or an outside lab. B. After Engineering and plant approval, the vendor's formulation will be added to this specification as an approved vendor formulation for that duty. C. Changes in formulation other than color will require recertification and approval. D. USEM part numbers will define the of duty, color and specification. The vendor will supply only USEM approved formulation meeting these requirements, matched to the color required per this specification. E. The USEM plants to meet EPA standards want to adhere to a limit of 3.0 lbs/gal. VOCs. Any deviation above this must be acceptable to the plant before order entry. 6. Approved Vendors: Vendor Formulation Other OSEL EM Gray Osel Oro Modified alkyd Color: According to Sample Enamel Code: 4588 provided by Nidec NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION 8050 W. Florissant Avenue 1St Louis, MO 63136 www.nidec-motor.com I www.usmotors.com 499495 Motor Wiring Diagram T1 T3 WYE T2 Connection LEAD CONNECTION I I I Line Each lead may consist of one or more cables having the same lead number. 499495 To reverse direction of rotation interchange connections L1 and L2. Each lead may be comprised of one or more cables. Each cable will be marked with the appropriate lead number. EFFECTIVE:2/27/96 SUPERCEDES:X736618,96441,179879,284138 Connection Plate: 499495 Connection Decal: 912113